Maserati - Levante - Owners Manual - 2021 - 2021

Levante Owner's Manual Dear Customer, thank you for choosing a Maserati. This vehicle represents the result of Maserati's great experience in the design and production of sports, touring and racing vehicles. The purpose of this manual is to provide you with an understanding of the equipment, systems and controls of the vehicle and to explain how they work. Consulting this manual you will acquaint yourself with the equipment and optional properties of your Maserati in order to take best advantage of all its potential. Before driving your vehicle for the first time, we suggest reading the printed Quick Guide carefully in order to quickly acquaint with commands and functions of your vehicle. You can consult this Owner's Manual and the Maserati Touch Control Plus guide directly from the dashboard touch screen display of your vehicle. The updated version of the on-board documentation can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. In a dedicated section of this manual you will also find instructions for basic maintenance procedures, in order to ensure steady levels of performance, quality and safe driving. In addition, keep in mind that proper maintenance is an essential factor to help preserve the value of the vehicle over time and protect the environment. For “Scheduled Maintenance” or any other operations, we recommend to contact the Maserati Service Network: you can trust our trained technical staff, who is constantly updated and provided with the required equipment in order to ensure that all service operations are performed properly and reliably. The Quick guide and other documents contained in on-board documentation Kit are integral part of the vehicle and should always be kept on board. You can purchase a printed copy of the documents visible on dashboard touch screen display at your dealer of the Service Network. Maserati is committed to protect the environment and natural resources; this is why we chose to develop Owner’s documentation in digital format instead of printing paper, thus reducing consumption of materials deriving from wood. 2 Introduction 1 Before Starting 2 Understanding the Vehicle 3 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 Driving 5 In an Emergency 6 Maintenance and Care 7 Features and Specifications 8 Index 9 3 4 1 - Introduction Consulting the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Service and Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Spare Parts Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Warnings when Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Vehicle Identification Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 5 Introduction 1 Consulting the manual This Manual illustrates maintenance and use information related to gasoline motorization models (3.8 V8 and 3.0 V6), indicated as “Gasoline”, and diesel motorization model (3.0 V6), indicated as “Diesel”. If not otherwise specified, the information is valid for all models. For an easy identification of the topics, this Manual is divided into sections and chapters: each chapter can have more paragraphs. Within the text, important warnings and notes are also easily identifiable through icons. WARNING! Failure to comply with the instructions could cause HAZARDOUS SITUATIONS involving personal and vehicle safety. ENVIRONMENTAL! This note indicates the correct behaviour when using the vehicle to protect the environment. 6 CAUTION! Aimed at preventing any damage to the vehicle and thus hazards involving the safety of persons. NOTE: Additional information regarding the subject and/or the operation described. • In the images the vehicle is represented in the base version. On other versions, some part or equipment may differ from those shown in the images. • “Left” and “right” in this manual, always refer to the driving direction. • All indications and images in this Manual refer to a vehicle with left-hand drive. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are ordered differently than shown in the illustrations. • If not otherwise specified, the instrument cluster shown in the images belongs to the 3.0 V6 gasoline motorization model – however the indications given are also valid for all the other motorization models. • If not otherwise specified, the instrument cluster shown in the images is the version with the speedometer in km/h – however the indications given are also valid for the version in mph. Introduction Abbreviations EBD Some descriptions and terms with particular meanings are found in this manual in abbreviated form. A/C Air-Conditioning system. ABA SABIC ECU Electronic Brake-force Distribution. Electronic Control Unit. EPB Electric Parking Brake. SRS EPS Electric Power Steering. Advanced Brake Assist. ESC Electronic Stability Control. ABS Anti-Lock Braking System. FCW Forward Collision Warning. ABSA Active Blind Spot Assist. GPF Gasoline Particulate Filter. ACC Adaptive Cruise Control. HAS Highway Assist. ADAS HBA HDC Hydraulic Brake Assistance. Hill Descent Control. HSA Hill Start Assist. ALR Advanced Driver Assistance Systems. Advanced Frontlighting System. Automatic Locking Retractor. I.C.E. AQS Air Quality Sensor. LKA Increased Control and Efficiency. Lane Keeping Assist. ATC MIL Malfunction Indicator Light. AWD Automatic Temperature Control. All-Wheel Drive. MTC+ Maserati Touch Control Plus. BAS Brake Assist System. ORC BSA Blind Spot Assist. BTO Brake Throttle Override. CAN Controller Area Network. RAB Occupant Restraint Controller. Pedestrian Emergency Braking. Ready Alert Braking. CC Cruise Control. RCP Rear Cross Path. CRS Child Restraint System. RHD Right-Hand Drive. DPF Diesel Particulate Filter. RKE Remote Keyless Entry. DRL Daytime Running Lights. ROM Roll-Over Mitigation. SAB Side Air Bag. AFS PEB SBR Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains. Seat Belt Reminder. TCS Supplemental Restraint System. Traction Control System. TFT Thin Film Transistor. TPMS TSA Tire Pressure Monitoring System. Traffic Sign Assist. TSM Trailer Sway Mitigation. VIN Vehicle Identification Number. 1 7 Introduction 1 Updating Service and Warranty The vehicle's high quality level is guaranteed by constant improvements. Therefore, there may prove to be differences between this manual and your vehicle. Maserati reserves the right to carry out design and functional changes and to achieve additions or improvements without incurring any obligation to update previously manufactured vehicles. The Owner's Manual illustrates and describes all versions of the current vehicle model. Therefore, some of the equipment and accessories in this publication may not appear on your vehicle; please only consider the information related to your vehicle. All specifications and illustrations contained in this manual refer to the Manual publishing date. The information provided in this manual is limited to instructions and indications that are strictly required for vehicle use and proper maintenance. By following these instructions carefully the vehicle will certainly meet the owner's satisfaction and the best results. We also advise you to have all the maintenance services and inspections carried at the Service Network. Please be advised that Maserati recommends to address to the Official Service Network , which is available in the official Maserati website (www.maserati.com). All features and accessories installed on the vehicle have been designed by Maserati engineers and have successfully passed rigorous tests, submitted in all conditions of use. Installing aftermarket accessories not approved by Maserati may interfere with the vehicle electronics and compromise driving safety. For details and information about the warranty, please refer to the “Warranty Card”. NOTE: Can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. 8 The Maserati Service Network is at your complete disposal for any information and suggestions. Introduction Spare Parts Service Symbols With genuine parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance features of your new car unchanged in time. For service and scheduled maintenance Maserati suggests you to ask for genuine parts since they are the result of constant research and development, reliability test and new technologies, as well as they are specifically designed for this vehicle. There are specific colored plates on or near some of the components on your Maserati designed to attract user’s attention. Important warnings concerning all specific devices that the user must consider are reported on the internal lid cover central label (see “Vehicle Identification Data” in this section). All symbols reported on the plate and inside the vehicle, as well as the component for which the symbols stand, are summarized in the following list. These symbols are divided into categories according to their meaning. Genuine Accessories The Maserati Genuine Accessories are the perfect combination of design and functionality. Each detail and characteristic of the items are tailor-made with the highest quality represented by the Maserati Trident. Severe Technical and Quality Tests are performed to approve each product. To fully exploit the vehicle's performance and versatility, discover the wide range of approved accessories that can be added to the car. The Maserati Service Network is at your complete disposal for any information about this "Genuine Accessories" product range. Danger Symbols Battery Corrosive liquid. Battery Explosion. Blower May start automatically even with engine off. Coolant expansion tank Do not open cap with engine warm. Coil - headlights High voltage. 1 Belts and pulleys Moving parts, keep body and clothing clear. Air-conditioning lines High pressure gas, do not open. Symbols of Prohibitions and Compulsory Measures Battery Keep away from flames. Battery Keep out of children’s reach. Heat guards - belts pulleys - fans Do not touch. Battery Wear eye protection. Battery - jack Refer to the owner manual. 9 Introduction 1 Warning Symbols Engine - Engine Oil Refilling Plug Engine oil. We recommend you use oil with the characteristics indicated in chapter "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications". Brake fluid tank Brake fluid type DOT 4. Do not exceed max. level. We recommend you use fluid with the characteristics indicated in chapter "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications". Radiator coolant expansion tank Use antifreeze liquid for radiators with the characteristics indicated in chapter "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications". 10 Windshield washer tank Windshield washer. We recommend you use liquid with the characteristics indicated in chapter "Refillings" in section "Features and Specifications". Warnings when Driving Your driving skills will improve with experience, but be especially careful at the beginning. Always comply with local traffic regulations wherever you drive. This vehicle is also suitable for offroad use, using the dedicated controls and functions to obtain the optimum balance to safely face the situations that this kind of route may pose. We recommend you to start gradually in order to acquire the necessary expertise and the perfect control of the vehicle. Follow the indications contained in chapter "Off-road Drive" in section “Driving” for information concerning the off-road use of the vehicle. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Operating this vehicle at excessive speed or in an altered state or while intoxicated may result in loss of control, going off the road, or overturning. In all these situations a collision with other vehicles or objects is more likely to happen with the risk to cause an accident that may lead to serious injury. Introduction In case of an accident, failure to use seat belts causes the driver and passengers a greater risk of injury or death. This Owner's Manual contains warnings against operating procedures that could result in a collision or injury or damage to the environment. It also contains cautions against procedures that could damage the vehicle. If you do not entirely read this manual, you may miss important information. If you do not entirely read this manual, you may miss important information. WARNING! • It is the driver’s responsibility to operate the vehicle in a safe way: if you are distracted while driving you can lose control and cause serious accidents. • Maserati strongly recommends to use particular care when operating the features and tools that may take the attention off the road. • Mobile phones, PCs, portable audio devices or other features operated improperly while the vehicle is moving can be very dangerous and can cause serious accidents. • It is very dangerous to send text messages while driving, do so only when the vehicle is not moving. • In some Countries the use of mobile phone when driving is forbidden: it is the driver’s sole responsibility to respect local regulations. • ROLL-OVER WARNING In normal conditions, this vehicle is characterised by a greater ground clearance than the vehicles designed for road use only. This characteristic allows to deal with off-road routes as well, by maintaining all the driveability features and the performance of a sports car, but it makes it more prone to roll-over in case of loss of control. It is important, for the safety of the occupants and the integrity of the vehicle, to face driving situations on road and off-road avoiding severe turns or leaning over and abrupt manoeuvres carried out at high speed that might cause the loss of control of the vehicle and the possible roll-over. The use of seat belts is essential in any driving situation. In case of roll-over, the driver and the passengers that do not wear the seat belts are more likely to be injured than those who wear them correctly. 1 CAUTION! If battery charge is too low, proper function of some electric/electronic components may not be guaranteed. It is necessary to recharge the battery in order to allow all vehicle’s components and systems to function correctly. 11 Introduction 1 Vehicle Identification Data Vehicle Identification Number The VIN Number is also visible from the outside through the windshield on the front left corner of the dashboard. The vehicle's identification number (VIN) is punched on the foot platform, in front of the right passenger rear seat. NOTE: When ordering spare parts or making inquiries, always quote the vehicle identification number. To read the number, lift the mat and slide the guard. Warning and Identification Labels Overview Label with Cautions and Warning Notes On this label attached centrally on the internal side of the hood cover, you can identify all cautions, warning notes and symbols that are also reported on some parts/components of the vehicle. For further information refer to “Symbols” in this section. 12 Passenger Air Bag Labels The labels are applied on the external side of passenger's sun visor and below it, on the dome. Danger Restart Engine with Hood Open Label The label is applied on the upper right side of the hood. Introduction 1 Vehicle Identification Label The label is fitted on the rear driver door's ledge and it shows the following details. • Manufacturer's name. • Homologation number. • Serial Number (V.I.N.). • Maximum admissible weight. • Maximum admissible weight on first (front) axle. • Maximum admissible weight on second (rear) axle. • Engine type. • Vehicle version code. • Assembly number. Tire Information Label (Australia market) This paper label is applied on the driver’s side rear door pillar. Trailer Towing Information Label (Australia market) The label is applied inside the driver’s door on the rear lower corner. Paint Identification Label The label is applied on the lower left side of the hood. Fuel Warning Label - Gasoline Engines The label is applied inside the fuel filler door. 13 Introduction 1 Gasoline Fuel Warning Label - Diesel Engine The labels are applied inside the fuel filler door. Diesel NOTE: On the cars of some markets, inside the fuel filler door, there may be another label indicating to use only Low Sulphur Premium Diesel. 14 2 - Before Starting Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sentry Key® Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Start System (for versions/markets where provided) . . . . . . . . . . . Doors Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passive Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Sunshades on Rear Door Windows (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open and Close the Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open and Close the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Occupants Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Parking Camera (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surround View Camera System (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 18 19 22 24 25 27 29 32 35 37 41 46 47 54 64 74 75 80 81 84 15 Before Starting Keys 2 The vehicle is equipped with a Remote Keyless Entry transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node, to enter, start and protect the vehicle. The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has three operating setups indicated on the outer ring. Pressing and releasing the middle button, you can switch from one setup to the next without starting the engine, the switched on indication will turn amber. The engine will start by pushing the centre button START/STOP with the brake pedal pressed and the device set in any of the three operating setups. In case the ignition switch does not change by pushing a button, the RKE transmitter (key fob) may have a low or discharged battery. If this occurs it is necessary to replace the battery in order to operate the ignition switch (see “Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs” in this section). It is still possible to operate the ignition device using the key fob RKE transmitter with discharged battery by pressing the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob on the START/STOP button. Key Fob Keyless Ignition Device This device allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is inside the vehicle. 16 The vehicle is provided with two programmed key fobs. The key fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key. The emergency key allows to open the vehicle by inserting into the lock of the Before Starting opening handle on the driver's door, in case the battery of the vehicle or the key fob are discharged. NOTE: You can insert either side of the emergency key into the lock cylinder. Shift Ignition Device to OFF Alert You can keep the emergency key with you when using valet parking. To remove the emergency key: • hold the mechanical latch on the back of the key fob sideways; • simultaneously remove the emergency key by sliding laterally towards the end of the key fob. Opening the driver's door to exit the vehicle when the ignition device is set in ACC or RUN (engine not running), a beep will remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the acoustic signal a dedicated message is displayed on the instrument cluster. If the ignition device is left in the ACC or RUN position, when vehicle is locked the system will turn off the instrument cluster and automatically set ignition device to OFF. With the MTC+ System, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (optional), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature, it is possible to set the timing of this feature. NOTE: Refer to “MTC+ Settings” in Section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. • • • • • • WARNING! When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Do not allow children to be in a vehicle unattended. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not allow children to touch the parking brake switch. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition switch in the ACC or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key fob from vehicle, cycle the 2 17 Before Starting ignition switch to OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. 2 Sentry Key® Immobilizer System The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorised vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, an ignition switch and a RF (Radio Frequency) receiver to prevent unauthorised vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs expressly programmed can be used to start and operate the vehicle. After placing the ignition switch in the RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light (see picture) will light up for a three seconds bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics: this condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (engine running for longer than 10 seconds), an electronic fault is detected. Should this occur, ask as soon as possible the Service Network for assistance. CAUTION! • The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some remote starting systems that can be installed in aftermarket. • Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All key fobs provided with the new vehicle have been updated with the vehicle electronics and are therefore able to guarantee correct functioning and protection. Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar 18 Before Starting devices can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. Replacement Key fobs NOTE: Only key fobs that are updated with the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. WARNING! • Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • Always remember to cycle the ignition switch to OFF. Duplication of key fobs may be performed by the Service Network only. This procedure consists of programming a key fob that has never been programmed to the vehicle’s electronics. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all key fobs provided with the vehicle with you to the Maserati Service Centre. When selling the vehicle, it is necessary to provide the new owner with all key fobs. Vehicle Security Alarm The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and liftgate for unauthorised entry and the START/STOP button for unauthorised operations. The system includes a dual function anti-intrusion sensor and vehicle anti-lift sensor. The anti-intrusion sensor monitors the vehicle interior for motion. The vehicle anti-lift sensor monitors the vehicle for any lifting or tilting actions (tow away, tire removal, ferry transport, etc). A siren (for versions/markets, where provided) with battery backup which senses interruptions of power and communications is also included. While the vehicle security alarm is enabled, interior door locks switches, liftgate and fuel filler door release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: intermittent buzzer, position lights and/or turn signals and the vehicle security light on the dashboard will flash. This light will fast flash for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security alarm is being armed, 2 19 Before Starting and will then flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed. with the driver and/or passenger door open. 2 • Press the lock button on the key fob RKE transmitter. Rearming the System If something triggers the security alarm, and no quick action is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn off the beeper after 29 seconds, and turn off all of the visual signals after 31 more seconds; the vehicle security alarm will then rearm itself. Arming the System Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm. 1. Make sure the vehicle ignition switch is OFF. 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle: • Press the lock button on the interior power door lock switch located on the driver door trim panel 20 • Press the button on the exterior “Passive Entry” door handle having a valid key fob RKE transmitter in the same exterior zone (see “Passive Entry System” in this section for further information). 3. If any door is open, close it. In any of these situations, if one or more windows are open, they will remain open. To close the windows press again the lock button and hold it until their closure. If vehicle is equipped with power liftgate/Hands free, when arming the alarm system in any of the described ways, the liftgate will remain open if Before Starting it was left open. In this condition, it will be necessary to first close the liftgate as described under "Open and Close the Liftgate" in this section, and repeat the arming operation, to be able to arm the alarm system. Vehicles equipped with power liftgate/Hand free option a button - located on the outer edge of the left boot compartment lining and indicated in the figure - that can be used to completely close and lock the liftgate and arm the alarm system if all the doors are closed. See chapter “Open and Close the Liftgate” in this section for further information. Each time the vehicle security alarm is armed, the anti-intrusion and anti-lift sensors actively monitor the vehicle. When arming the security alarm, it is possible to disable these sensors by pressing the button on the key fob three times within 5 seconds from the moment the system has been armed (meanwhile the security alarm light flashes rapidly). To disarm the System Use any of the following steps to disarm the vehicle security alarm. • Press the button on key fob RKE transmitter. • Grasp the “Passive Entry” unlock door handle (see “Passive Entry System” in this section for further information). • Press the START/STOP button so as to release the OFF position. NOTE: • When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switch will not allow to unlock the doors. • The use of the emergency key into the driver door lock and the use of the button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the security alarm of the vehicle. • The vehicle security alarm remains engaged while accessing the power liftgate/Hands free. Pressing the button between the licence plate lights will not disarm the vehicle security alarm. If anyone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens a door, the alarm will trigger. The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will activate. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the buzzer will activate. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. 2 21 Before Starting Illuminated Entry/Exit 2 Lights will turn on and off when you enter/exit the vehicle and operate the buttons on the key fob RKE transmitter and/or on the “Passive Entry” system as follows: activate. Courtesy & dimmable internal lighting, night front seats lighting, and approach lighting will stay on for 27 seconds. • If the lock command of the car is enabled by pressing the specific button on the key fob RKE transmitter or by the “Passive Entry” system, when the key fob RKE transmitter is out of range, all the lights will turn off within 3 seconds, if they were previously on. • If the unlock command is enabled by pressing the specific button on the key fob RKE transmitter or by the “Passive Entry” system, the “illuminated entry” mode will 22 Before Starting 2 • After activating the liftgate opening command in the possible modes (see “Open and Close the Liftgate” in this section), the inner boot and liftgate lights will turn on and will stay on for 10 minutes before turning off. The lights will immediately turn off if you lock the liftgate before 10 minutes. Vehicle Lighting with Open/Closed Doors • If the light button is pressed on the key fob RKE transmitter, the courtesy & dimmable lights and the approach lights will turn on; doors will stay locked. • If one or more doors are open, the central light, front/rear domelights (main and spot light), the instrument cluster, the MTC+ display, the night front seats lighting and the ignition switch backlight will turn on and will light up for 27 seconds. • If the doors are closed, all lights will turn off (within 3 seconds) with the exception of the console display and the ignition switch backlighting, which will turn off after 27 seconds. 23 Before Starting Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob 2 Use of Light Switch for Vehicle Lighting Vehicle lighting can be operated from the key fob RKE transmitter, the “Passive Entry” system and from the light switch on the left side of the dashboard. Refer to “Lights” in section “Understanding the Vehicle” where it is indicated which external lights turn on according to light switch positions. 24 Ambient Lights and Backlight Adjustment The ambient light and the backlight of the controls and instruments does not depend on the position of the light switch but on the detection of the ambient brightness made by the RLS solar sensor. In “DAY” mode the backlighting of the instruments will be at 100% intensity while the backlighting of the switches will be at minimum. In “NIGHT” mode backlighting will be set through the buttons on steering wheel right-hand side. The ambient lighting are adjustable in the same condition which is possible to adjust the backlighting. Enter “Vehicle Setting” menu and choose “Backlighting” or “Ambient Lighting” of the “Interior Lighting” sub-menu. The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and the fuel filler door, open the liftgate and turn the approach/courtesy lights on from a distance up to approximately 10 m (33 ft). The key fob RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. See “Illuminated Entry/Exit” in this section for further information. NOTE: Driving at speeds of 8 km/h (5 mph) and above disables the system from responding to all key fobs RKE transmitter buttons. Before Starting Unlock the Doors, Fuel Filler Door and Liftgate in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”. Press and release the unlock button on the key fob RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors, the fuel filler door and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash for the unlock signal recognition. The illuminated entry/exit system will also turn on. See “Passive Entry System” in this section for further information. Turn Headlights On with Key fob This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter. The duration can be set as desired. To change the current setting, see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”. Unlock Driver Door/All Doors with Key fob 1st Press This feature allows you to programme the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors, the fuel filler door and the power liftgate/Hands free, if equipped, by the first press of the unlock button on the key fob RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”. Lock/Unlock Doors Flash Lights This feature will cause the flash of the turn signal lights when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, see “MTC+ Settings” Unlatch the Liftgate Press the button on the key fob RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the manual liftgate. If the vehicle is equipped with power liftgate/Hands free, besides unlocking the liftgate, the control will fully open it. See chapters “Passive Entry System” and “Open and Close the Liftgate” in this section for further information. Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs In order to purchase additional key fob RKE transmitters you need to bring with you at the Service Network: • all key fobs RKE transmitters in your possession; • a personal ID; • the identification and registration documents proving ownership of the vehicle. Setting new key fobs RKE transmitters or re-setting the original ones may only be performed at the Service Network. 2 NOTE: The codes of any key fob RKE transmitter that are not available when the new setting procedure is carried out will be deleted from the memory to prevent any lost or stolen key fob RKE transmitter being used to disarm the electronic alarm system. Key fob Battery Replacement NOTE: A low charge level of the key fob battery will be indicated on the instrument cluster display. The recommended replaced battery type is a: CR2032. 25 Before Starting 2 To replace the battery proceed as follows: • Remove the emergency key as indicated in “Keys” chapter of the current section. • Loosen the lateral screw that connects the two side covers with a torx T6 screwdriver. • Separate both parts of the key fob case. • Remove the battery from its seat and replace with a new recommended type of battery. • Separate the two lateral covers from the key fob case. • Remove the card with PCB (Printed Circuit Board). ENVIRONMENTAL! Batteries contain dangerous materials that could harm the environment. Please dispose of them according to local regulations or at the Service Network. 26 Before Starting NOTE: Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean with alcohol. • Match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. • Replace the printed circuit board by using the indicated pin for the sealing of the two covers. • Assemble the key fob case and reassemble the two lateral covers: a click will ensure the succeeded sealing. • Combine the disassembled parts with clamping screw and reassemble the emergency key. Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency devices can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. Remote Start System (for versions/markets where provided) This system enables the key fob RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 91 m (300 ft). Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may reduce this range. How to use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start: • System not disabled from previous remote start event. • Vehicle theft alarm not active. • Doors closed. • Hood closed. • Liftgate closed. • Hazard lights switched off. • Brake pedal not pressed by any passenger remained in the vehicle. • Battery at an acceptable charge level. • The shift lever is in P (Park) position. • The vehicle transmission is in automatic mode. • The remote start has not been activated yet two consecutive times. If EPB (Electric Parking Brake) is not inserted, at key-off in some conditions the remote start system may not allow engine to start. We suggest to set “Auto Apply On” function through the switch on the right-side of the steering wheel (refer to “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instrument and Controls”). 2 WARNING! • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odourless and colourless • Keep key fobs RKE transmitter away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. Engine Remote Start Abort Message on Instrument Cluster The following messages will display on the instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely: • “Remote Start Cancelled Door Open”. • “Remote Start Cancelled Liftgate Open”. 27 Before Starting 2 To exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle • “Remote Start Cancelled Fuel Low”. • “Remote Start Cancelled Time Expired”. • “Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset”. The message on the instrument cluster stays active as long as the ignition switch is in RUN position. Press and release the button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle. To enter Remote Start Mode NOTE: On the key fob RKE transmitter of vehicles with this function, the external lights button is replaced by the remote start button . Press and release the button on the key fob RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, position lights will flash and the horn will ring twice (if this function is set using the MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the “Remote Start” mode for a 15-minute cycle. NOTE: • In case of an engine fault or low fuel level, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. • The park lights will turn on and remain lighted up during “Remote Start” mode. • For security reasons, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the “Remote Start” mode. • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key fob RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable the one time press of the button for two seconds after receiving a valid “Remote Start” request. To exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release the button on the key fob RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle security alarm. Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release the START/STOP button. NOTE: The message “Remote Start Active Push Start Button” will display in the instrument cluster until you push the START/STOP button. Auto-On Comfort with Remote Start The driver's heated and ventilated seat and the heated steering wheel (if foreseen) can be programmed to 28 Before Starting come on during a remote start. Refer to “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” function in chapter “MTC+ Settings”, section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”, for further information. Doors Locking WARNING! • For personal security and safety in Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. • • • • the event of an accident or robbery, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when parking and leaving the vehicle unattended. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob RKE transmitter and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Do not allow children to be in a vehicle unattended. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children must not touch the parking brake trigger, brake pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave ignition switch in the ACC or RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or start the engine and the vehicle. Doors Manual Lock To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. 2 To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob RKE transmitter is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. 29 Before Starting Power Doors Locking/ Unlocking 2 A power door lock switch and a power door unlock switch are positioned on the front door trim panel. Use this switches to lock or unlock the doors. If the vehicle has been locked from inside with the above-figured switches, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked. 30 If power liftgate/Hands free (option) has been left open, it will stay open when you press lock button , and the locking feature will only occur after the closing of the power liftgate. The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the “Passive Entry” system. For further information, see “Passive Entry System” in this section. If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the key fob RKE transmitter in the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks of the doors and fuel filler door to operate. If a door is open with the key fob RKE transmitter inside the cabin and the ignition is in the ACC or RUN position, a beep will draw the driver’s attention. Automatic Door Lock The auto door lock feature default condition is disabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 24 km/h (15 mph). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by the user through MTC+ setting features (see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). Automatic Door Unlock on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if: • The automatic door unlock on exit feature is enabled. • The transmission is in gear and the vehicle speed is 0 km/h. • The transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park). • The driver door is open. • The doors were not previously unlocked. • The vehicle speed is 0 km/h. Set Automatic Door Unlock on Exit To change the current setting, see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”. NOTE: Use the automatic door unlock on exit feature in accordance with local regulations. Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children sitting in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child-protection door lock system. Before Starting Engage or Disengage the Child-Protection Door Lock • Open the rear door. • Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the lock or unlock position. • Repeat the first two steps on the opposite rear door. WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child-protection locks are engaged (locked). NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the child-protection door lock system is engaged, manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll down the window, and open the door using the outside door handle. Soft Door Close System (if equipped) This system makes doors easier to shut without having to slam if you do not get it closed the first time. It increases the vehicle's safety and comfort, in particular for children in the back seat, it is not necessary to slam the door and it is also possible avoiding the risk of travelling with the door ajar and having to stop and close it. The system uses a sensor to detect the door ajar and an electric actuator to close it. The sensor detects your attempt to close the door and once the latch catches the handle the electric actuator pulls the door firmly bringing the door back in the fully closed position. During the soft closing phase operated by the system, it is possible to intervene manually by opening or closing the door. If you are pushing the door hard enough to close just like a regular one, the system still works, but only to check whether the door is properly closed. WARNING! The system works properly if the ajar door has a gap, between exterior door panel surface and exterior bodyshell surface in the latch area , of max 6 mm (0.23 in). In the presence of higher gap, the system is not able to close the door with the risk of travelling with the door not completely closed or even open. 2 31 Before Starting Passive Entry System 2 The “Passive Entry” system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the key fob RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons. NOTE: • “Passive Entry” may be programmed to on/off; see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. • If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining on the “Passive Entry” door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time. • Access to the vehicle using “Passive Entry” system may not work properly in case of interference caused by external sources such as metal objects, mobile phones, overhead power lines, antennas, etc. In these cases, use the buttons of the key fob RKE transmitter to open and close the vehicle or the emergency key, inserting it into the driver side door lock. • The “Passive Entry” system does not lock and unlock the doors directly 32 and immediately but with a slight delay (about 2 seconds). Unlock Door from the Driver Side With a valid key fob RKE transmitter within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the driver's door handle, grip the driver’s door external handle to unlock the door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. NOTE: If “1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks” is programmed on all doors will unlock when you grip the front driver’s door handle. To select between “Driver Door ” and “All Doors”, see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”. Unlock Door from the Passenger Side With a valid key fob RKE transmitter within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the passenger door handle, grip the front passenger external door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. Before Starting NOTE: All doors will unlock when you grip the front passenger door handle regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Driver Door” or “All Doors”). Preventing Inadvertent Locking of the Key fob RKE Transmitter inside the Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a key fob RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the “Passive Entry” system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been closed, the system checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid key fobs RKE transmitter. If one of the vehicle's key fobs RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid key fobs RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the “Passive Entry” system automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn fourteen times (on the fifteenth attempt ALL doors will lock and the key fob RKE transmitter will be locked in the vehicle). This will happen even on vehicles equipped with power liftgate/Hands free, pressing the lower button on the outer edge of the left boot compartment lining to close and lock the liftgate. NOTE: The vehicle unlocks the doors under any of the following conditions: • the doors are manually locked using the door lock knob positioned on the door panel; • there is a valid key fob RKE transmitter inside the vehicle; • there is not a valid key fob RKE transmitter outside the vehicle. 2 NOTE: The vehicle will not unlock the doors under any of the following conditions: • the doors are locked using the key fob RKE transmitter; • the doors are locked using the button on the “Passive Entry” door handles; • there is a valid key fob RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 1 m (3.3 ft) of either “Passive Entry” door handle; • fifteen attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch (Continued) 33 Before Starting 2 (Continued) and/or the lower button (on the outer edge of the left boot compartment of vehicles equipped with power liftgate/Hands free) and then close the doors. m (3.3 ft) of the liftgate, press the button located between the licence plate lights and lift it manually. For vehicles equipped with power liftgate/Hands free (optional): with the key fob within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the liftgate, press the button located between the licence plate lights, the liftgate will automatically open until fully home; if the same button is not pressed again to stop it (for more information, see chapter “Open and Close the Liftgate” in this section). If the vehicle had already been unlocked through key fob or "Passive Entry", the presence of the key fob is not required; simply use the button located between the licence plate lights to open the liftgate manually or automatically. Manual Door Lock from Outside Optional equipment Release the Liftgate and Enter the Boot For vehicles equipped with manual liftgate: with the key fob within 1 34 With one of the vehicle’s key fobs RKE transmitters within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the driver or passenger front door handles, press the external door handle button to lock all four doors. NOTE: • After pressing the external door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using this door handle. By pulling the external door handle, you can check if the car remains locked, without “Passive Entry” system reacting and unlocking the doors. • The “Passive Entry” system will not operate if the key fob RKE transmitter battery is dead. • If power liftgate/Hand free (option) has been left open, it will stay open when you press the button on door external handle, and the locking feature will only occur after the closing of the power liftgate. Before Starting Power Windows The window controls on the driver's door panel govern all the door windows. 2 Optional equipment The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s inner door panel. Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the corresponding window. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position. 35 Before Starting 2 NOTE: • The power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time lapse can be set. See “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. • Frequent activations of the power windows could result in a temporary lock of their starters. In this case, wait a moment before a new activation. WARNING! Improper use of the power windows and the sunroof (if equipped) can however be dangerous, even with the anti-pinch prevention system. Before and during activation of the power window, always check that the passengers are not exposed to the risk of injury both by the moving window and by personal objects that could be dragged or hit by it. Do not leave unattended children in a vehicle with a key fob RKE transmitter inside. When getting out the vehicle, always remove the key fob RKE transmitter to prevent the windows being 36 accidentally activated, posing a risk to passengers remaining onboard. Auto-Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an auto-down feature. Press the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go completely down automatically. To open the window part way, press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. Auto-Up Feature with AntiPinch Protection Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go all the way up automatically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly. To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. NOTE: • If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually. • Frequent activations of the anti-pinch function could disable the autodown and auto-up function of the windows. In order to re-activate this function proceed with a reset cycle as described in the next paragraph. WARNING! There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the area before closing the window. Reset Auto-Up/Down Should the auto-up/down feature stop working, the window probably needs to be reset. To reset auto-up/down, pull the window switch up to close the window completely and push the window Before Starting Power Sunshades on Rear Door Windows (optional) switch down to open the window completely. Open and Close the Windows and Sunroof with RKE Transmitter and Ignition Off When the ignition switch is in OFF position, windows and sunroof (if equipped) can be opened or closed by pressing the buttons on the RKE transmitter. Opening: • press the button and release it; • press a second time the button and keep it pressed until complete opening of the window and sunroof, if they were closed. Closing: • press the button and release it; • press a second time the button and keep it pressed until complete closure of the window and sunroof, if they were open. Rear Window and Sunshade Lockout Button The window lockout button on the driver's door trim panel allows to disable the window and sunshade control on the rear doors by pressing the window lockout button (setting it in the down position). To enable the controls previously described, press the window lockout button again (setting it in the up position). Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure or a helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (optional) in open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting. NOTE: • On vehicles provided with power sunshades on the rear windows, the window switches also operate the sunshades. • The rear windows lock button operates as well the rear power sunshades. • The window and sunshades controls will operate only if the ignition switch is in ACC or RUN position. 2 Operation of the rear windows and related sunshades is done by pressing or pulling the window switch and depends on the position of the windows prior to the command operation. As described for the opening and closing functions of the power windows (see chapter “Power Windows” in this section), the windows switch has two functioning modes: press and release the switch to the first detent to partially move the window; press and release the switch to the second detent to move the window all the way up or down. 37 Before Starting sunshade and the door panel, during lowering. CAUTION! Before activating the sunshade, make sure that no objects can interfere with its travel. 2 The following images and the subsequent text show the possible starting positions (“A”, “B”, “C” and “UP”, “DOWN”) and function of the window and the sunshade, to be independently activated by pressing or lifting the control switch to the first 1 or second 2 detent. Operations WARNING! Rear seat passengers must be careful when operating the sunshades, since there is the risk of being pinched between the top of the sunshade and the head lining, during raising, and between the top edge of the 38 A. Sunshade fully unrolled (“UP” position) and Window closed (“UP” position) Before Starting 1.2 2.1 2.2 • Pulling the control up to 1 or 2 detent: no action (“NOP”). 1.1 Pressing the control to 1 detent: the sunshade rolls down completely and the window stays closed. Pressing the control again to 1 detent: the window opens partially until the control is released and the sunshade stays down (pressing the control to 2 detent: the window opens completely). Pressing the control to 2 detent: the sunshade rolls down completely while the window stays closed. Pressing the control again to 2 detent: the window opens completely. B. Sunshade fully rolled down (“DOWN” position) and Window closed (“UP” position) 2 • Pulling the control up to 1 or 2 detent: the sunshade unrolls completely and the window stays closed. • Pressing the control to 1 or 2 detent: the window opens partially or completely and the sunshade remains rolled. 39 Before Starting C. Sunshade fully rolled down (“DOWN” position) and Window completely open (“DOWN” position) 2 • Pulling the control to 1 or 2 detent: the window closes partially or completely and the sunshade remains rolled. • Pressing the control to 1 or 2 detent: no action (“NOP”). 40 Teach-in Cycle After battery disconnection, the following teach-in cycle is required to store the limit positions the sunshades can reach in operation. Use the controls on the rear doors to move the sunshades. • With glass closed, lift rear sunshade control on driver side for a few seconds. It is not necessary that the sunshade reaches its upper limit. • Reverse the sunshade movement by pressing the control downwards. Once the lower limit is reached, press and hold the control for at least 10 seconds. This action allows setting the control unit in initialisation status. • Release the movement command. • Within maximum 15 seconds: - Press once the control downwards (first or second detent indifferently). In this way the control unit stores the lower limit position. During this operation a slight click of the sunshade motor that switches to mechanical lock condition can be heard. - Lift the control and hold it up until the sunshade completes its upstroke and reaches the car body pillar, fully home. Once the upper limit stop is reached, the sunshade will move downwards for approx. 2-3 millimetres (0.08-0.12 inches) and the control unit will store this height as upper limit. Now the teach-in of the driver side rear sunshade is complete. • Repeat the same operations for the passenger side rear sunshade to complete the teach-in procedure. Before Starting Open and Close the Liftgate licence plate lights, when the vehicle has been unlocked using the key fob or the “Passive Entry” system. The manual liftgate can be unlocked from inside the vehicle by pressing the button on the front dome console. This command will fully open or fully close the power liftgate/Hands free (optional). Pressing this button in sequence, if the power liftgate stops in intermediate position, it resumes and reverse the stroke direction. 2 NOTE: The shift lever must be in P (Park) before the button can operate. The manual liftgate can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the button on the key fob with RKE transmitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release button located on the lower side of the liftgate ledge, between the section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). To manually close the liftgate, use the handles indicated in the picture. When the button on the key fob is pressed twice within five seconds, the direction indicators flash twice to indicate the opening or closing of the liftgate, if the light flashing function at closing is activated on MTC+ (for more information, see the chapter "MTC+ Settings" in With the ignition switch in RUN position, the red symbol will be displayed on the instrument cluster. If the vehicle is in motion, in addition to the symbol will also appear a message indicating that the liftgate is open. Once the liftgate is closed the symbol or the symbol and message will disappear from the display. 41 Before Starting 2 With the ignition device in the OFF position, only the liftgate open symbol will display until closure. See “Passive Entry System” in this section for more information on liftgate operation with the “Passive Entry” feature. Power Liftgate/Hands Free (optional) Automatic opening and closing movement of the liftgate is driven by electric actuators and a motorised latch ensuring lid locking upon closing. Liftgate can be opened using button on the key fob RKE transmitter and the button on front dome console used also for non-power version. The button on key fob and button on front dome console not only allow user to completely open the power liftgate/Hands free, but also to 42 stop it at any intermediate position by pressing the button again whenever you wish to stop and resume the opening process. In addition to these commands, it is possible open and close the power liftgate/Hands free, or stop its movement, by simply moving your foot under the rear bumper, if the vehicle is so equipped with the kick sensor option. In this latter case, the liftgate will be opened and closed only if the “Passive Entry” system acknowledges the presence of the key fob RKE transmitter within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the liftgate. Power liftgate/Hands free uses the button in between the licence plate lights, indicated in figure, to activate the opening once the car has been unlocked by the key fob or by the “Passive Entry” function. By pressing this button when the power liftgate/Hands free is closed, you can open it completely, or by pressing the button again stop the opening process, or by pressing the button again invert the movement and close it completely. When the power liftgate/Hands free is open, to move it there are two buttons positioned on the outer edge of the left boot compartment lining as indicated in figure. When the liftgate is completely open if you press and release the upper button , the power liftgate/Hands free will be completely closed unless it is stopped; • if instead the power liftgate/Hands free is in an intermediate position Before Starting and you press and release the upper button during the closing or opening stroke, it will be stopped; • if instead the power liftgate/Hands free is stopped in an intermediate position and you press and release the upper button , it will reverse its previous movement and it will be completely opened or closed unless it is stopped again. In any case, when you press the upper button , the doors will not be locked and the alarm system will not be armed. When the liftgate is completely open if you press and release the lower button , the power liftgate/Hands free will be completely closed unless it is stopped; • if instead the power liftgate/Hands free is in an intermediate position and you press and release the lower button during the closing or opening stroke, it will be stopped; • if instead the power liftgate/Hands free is stopped in an intermediate position and you press and release the lower button , it will reverse its previous movement and it will be completely opened or closed unless it is stopped again. In any case, when you press the lower button , the doors will not be locked and the alarm system will not be armed immediately, but only when the liftgate will have reached the totally closed position as effect of every movement commands received from every other available inputs. NOTE: • The order of the functions shown does not represent the sequence in which they can be performed. • The buttons of the power liftgate/Hands free do not work if a gear is engaged or if the vehicle speed is higher than 0 km/h (0 mph). • The power liftgate/Hands free does not work with temperatures lower than −30°C (−22°F) or higher than 65°C (150 °F). • If the opening buttons or the handles are operated while the power liftgate/Hands free is closing, the stroke of liftgate stops. Pressing another time the same command it reverses movement and fully open. • If the opening buttons or the handles are operated while the power liftgate/Hands free is opening, the motor of the liftgate is disabled to allow manual operation. • If the power liftgate/Hands free finds several obstacles during the same operating cycle, it will stop automatically and must be opened or closed manually. • If the power liftgate/Hands free is closing and a gear is engaged, the liftgate will continue closing. In this condition, it is possible that, during the closing stroke, it may find an obstacle and stop. 2 WARNING! If, for any reason, the liftgate must remain open while driving, close all the windows and activate the fan of the air conditioning control at the maximum speed. Do not activate recirculation. Set the Position of Maximum Power Liftgate Opening The maximum opening position of the liftgate can be modified using the previously described buttons on the outer left edge of the boot compartment. 1. Activate the liftgate and stop it in the new maximum opening position to be set, by pressing the upper button. 43 Before Starting 2. 2 Press the upper or lower buttons and keep it pressed for 3 seconds. 3. Release the button (pressed in the previous point). Upon the following opening controls, the liftgate will stop in the stored position. If you want to reset the maximum possible opening position of the liftgate, proceed as described below starting from the previously set opening position. 1. Manually push the liftgate to the maximum possible opening position. 2. Repeat the previously performed steps 2 and 3. Power Liftgate/Hands Free Automatic Safe Movement Power liftgate/Hands free safe opening and closing is ensured by a protection system able to stop its movement when an obstacle is detected along the path: when opening or closing, it stops automatically and then slightly moves back. Along the upper outer edges, the vehicle can be equipped with antipinch protection sensors. These sensors stop the automatic closing stroke 44 and partly open the liftgate when a pressure is carried out, also slight, within their range shown in the figure. reset cycle by carrying out a complete opening/closing sequence, after manually closing the liftgate. WARNING! • Activate power liftgate/Hand free only when vehicle is at a standstill. • Always pay utmost attention when After the closing command, when power liftgate/Hands free starts closing, all the indicators will blink to warn anyone within range. When power liftgate/Hands free edge reaches the car body, the motor locking the latch is activated automatically. If necessary, the power liftgate/Hands free can also be opened or closed manually. This operation could be required when the liftgate remains open for a long period of time. NOTE: Frequent activations of the anti-pinch protection function may disable the automatic movement of the liftgate. To reactivate this function, perform a opening and closing the liftgate. If for any reason the protection system might fail to respond, it could cause injury to anyone within the operating area. • After the closing command, always make sure that power liftgate/Hand free is completely closed. CAUTION! • Under extreme weather conditions, liftgate seal could freeze and compromise power liftgate/Hand free automatic opening and closing. • Before opening power liftgate/Hand free, make sure that no objects or snow are set on liftgate or might jam or prevent its opening. Hands Free Power Liftgate Release and Closing This mode is controlled by the “Passive Entry” system (see paragraph “Passive Before Starting Entry System” in this section), which automatically releases and closes the power liftgate/Hands free when you place your foot in the area under the rear bumper. The system will only operate if the system acknowledges the presence of the key fob RKE transmitter within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the power liftgate/Hands free. The range of the sensors that detect your foot movement extends along and underneath the central portion of the rear bumper. To activate the power liftgate/Hands free, stand behind the vehicle, near the liftgate, and move your foot under the bumper as if to kick something. Do not place your foot too close to the bumper or touch the underbody. WARNING! • Pay careful attention to the exhaust tailpipes as they can reach high temperatures and, in case of contact, they can cause severe burns. • When it is not necessary to open the power liftgate with the “Hands Free” mode, make sure the key fob is outside the range of use (1 m/3.3 ft). Otherwise, the power liftgate/Hand Free can be opened accidentally by an unintentional movement of the foot. In order for the sensors to detect your foot movement, move your foot towards the vehicle rather than sideways and immediately pull it back: from this moment, the power liftgate/Hands free will activate within two seconds. If closed, with the foot movement the power liftgate/Hands free will: • unlock and completely open; • after another kick, will stop; • after another kick, will reverse its movement and completely close unless stopped again. If open, with the foot movement the power liftgate/Hands free will: • completely close but not lock; • another kick before the completed closing can stop the movement; • if the movement was stopped another kick operation will invert a complete opening. NOTE: • If your foot movement fails to activate the power liftgate/Hands free movement, wiggling your foot under the bumper will not help. Repeat the whole kick movement. • In particular situations, external factors affecting the sensor area may trigger the Hands free power liftgate release feature. For example, when washing the vehicle, a water jet aimed at the sensor area may trigger the Hands free power liftgate release feature. Keep the key fob RKE transmitter away from the sensing range of the sensors (3 m/10 ft) or disable the Hands free feature from the MTC+ menu (see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). A key fob RKE transmitter located in the front seat passenger area is considered out of range of the Hands free liftgate release sensor. • If somebody or something knocks against the power liftgate/Hands free while it is moving, the safety system might stop lid opening or closing movement. 2 45 Before Starting Liftgate Emergency Release 2 If the power release control operated by the key fob RKE transmitter or by pressing the button on the dome console fails, the vehicle battery could be in a low condition or disconnected. If the doors are still locked, use the emergency mechanical key inserted in the driver’s door lock to enter the vehicle and open the hood. In this condition, it is possible to temporarily power the system by using the battery remote poles located inside the engine compartment (see “Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure” in section “In an Emergency”). Then it is possible to normally open the liftgate by using the key fob RKE transmitter or the button on the dome console. Have the vehicle subsequently serviced by a Service Network centre in order to solve the failure. Open and Close the Hood Opening Two latches must be released to open the lid. • From inside the vehicle, pull the hood release lever located under the left lower side of the dashboard. • Move to the outside and stand in front of the vehicle front grille. • Slightly lift the hood and push the safety catch as indicated by the arrow. The safety catch is located in the centre of the hood. • Lift the hood completely: this operation is facilitated by two gas struts keeping the fully open position. With the ignition switch in RUN position, the red symbol will display on the instrument cluster with the message indicating that the hood is open. Closing Lower the hood and then gently drop it. This should secure the inclusion of both latches. 46 Before Starting CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. WARNING! • Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the lid is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. • Gear shifting is always active and may be performed even when one or more doors, the hood or the liftgate are open. Therefore, in these conditions, take great care to avoid moving the gearshift lever and so accidentally engage gears. Occupants Restraint Systems The listed occupants restraint systems are some of the most important safety features in your vehicle: • Three-point seat belts (also called lap shoulder belts) for the driver and all passengers. • Advanced front air bags for driver and passenger. • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a window. • Supplemental seat-mounted side air bags. • An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel. • Front seat belts incorporate dual pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing the energy created during an impact. • All passengers seat belts include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR), which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat. To carry children up to 12 years old or under 1.5 m (5 ft) in height, you must use adequate child restrain systems that can be fixed with the three point seat belts or the Isofix anchorages. NOTE: The advanced front air bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision. 2 Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. WARNING! In an accident, all occupants can suffer much greater injuries if not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other occupants or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Statistics report that seat belts save lives and reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident. Some of the 47 Before Starting 2 worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Three-Point Seat Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with combination lapshoulder belts. The belt retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions, conforming perfectly to the body of the occupants. However, in an accident, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out. The driver is responsible for respecting, and ensuring that all the other occupants of the car also observe the local regulations concerning the use of seat belts. Always fasten the seat belts before starting the vehicle. 48 WARNING! • It is forbidden and dangerous to • • • • • travel in a cargo area. In an accident, people travelling in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow any person to travel in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure all passengers are in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Wearing a seat belt improperly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can best absorb the impact of an accident. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another severely. Never use a lap/shoulder belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. • Remember that, in the event of an accident, the rear seat passengers not wearing the seat belts are not only subject to personal injuries but also represent a serious danger for the front seat occupants. Three-Point Seat Belts Use Instructions • Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. • The seat belt latch plate is on rear door pillar, above the seat on the external side. • Hold the latch plate and pull the belt across you, make the belt go around your body and when the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Before Starting WARNING! belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident. • A belt that is buckled up into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion of the belt could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle up your belt into the corresponding buckle. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt comfortably. • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can also cause internal injuries. Ribs are not as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the impact of a collision. • The lower part must adhere to the pelvis rather than the abdomen of the occupant. To fasten the lap belt pull slightly up the diagonal portion of the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt with your hand while it is rewinding, to prevent it from twisting. WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in an accident. The belt forces won't impact on the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it comfortable. • A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can't straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to a Service Centre immediately. • Do not use devices (clips, fastenings etc.) that prevent the seat belts from laying close to the occupants bodies. • Do not carry children on a passenger’s lap using only one seat belt for protecting both. • Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt. • To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, guide the WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could break in an accident and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt/retractor assemblies must be replaced by the Service Network after an accident if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn belt, etc.). 2 Three-Point Seat Belt Height Adjustment WARNING! The seat belts height must only be adjusted when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and front passenger seating positions. Adjust the guide so that the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt 49 Before Starting 2 should be close to, but not contacting, the neck. Push downward the upper part of the indicated slider above the shoulder belt guide to release the anchorage, then move the belt slider up or down to the fixed position that fits you best. WARNING! After the adjustment, always check that the slider to which the oscillating ring is fixed, is locked into one of the positions provided. With the handgrip released, push again downward to allow the anchoring device to click into place, in the event that it has not been released in one of the positions provided. When you release the anchorage try to move the belt slider up and down to make sure that it is locked in position. 50 Three-Point Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted three-point belt. • Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. • At about 15 to 30 cm (0.5 to 1 ft) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt by 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. • Slide the latch plate upward over the folded belt. The folded belt must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. • Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded belt. Passengers Seat Belts All passengers seat belts are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) and can be used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, see “Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR” under “Child Restraint Systems” in this section. If the passenger seat position should not be used to accomodate a child restraint system, only pull the belt out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. In this case, allow the belt to retract completely and then carefully pull out only the amount of belt necessary to comfortably wrap around the seat occupant. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click". WARNING! • Remember that, in the event of a violent impact, the passengers on the rear seats who are not wearing the seat belts are not only subject to personal injury but also represent a danger for passengers sitting in the front seats. • Always fasten the seat belts. • Travelling without the seat belts fastened significantly increases the risk of serious injury in the event of a collision, even with the air bags. • In the event of a collision, the seat belts help reduce the possibility of the vehicle’s occupants being thrown against the structures of the passenger compartment or out of the vehicle. Before Starting • The air bags are designed to work together with the seat belts, not to substitute them. The front air bags only deploy in the event of certain head-on collisions of sufficient intensity. They may not be activated if the vehicle rolls over, or in the event of rear bumps or minor frontal collisions, or non-frontal collisions. To buckle the seat belt proceed as follows: • Take place in the central seat and pull out the belt A from the upper retractor in a normal manner, without twisting it; • Insert the first latch plate located at the end of the shoulder portion of the belt A inside the left buckle B; Seat Belt for Rear Central Seat Unlike all other seat belts, this one has two buckles and two metal latch plates; in this way it is possible to release it from the seat. • Press the red button located on the front of the buckle using the free latch plate (step 1) and unlatch the plate from the left-side buckle (step 2). WARNING! The restraining action of the central belt is only possible with the tape part with the left and right buckle extracted from the seat cushion. 2 To unlatch the seat belt, release the right plate of the lap portion by clicking on the red button. Using Seat Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) • Pull out completely the tape part with the right buckle C; • Allow the belt to retract completely into the retractor seat behind the seatback. • Insert the latch plate located at the end of the lap portion of the belt A inside the right buckle C. Use the seat belt automatic locking mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature. Children up to 12 years old or under 1.5 m (5 ft) in height, should be properly buckled up in a child restraint system. Automatic Locking Mode Setting • Buckle the lap and shoulder belt. • Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. • Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking 51 Before Starting sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. 2 Automatic Locking Mode Unsetting Unbuckle the three-point seat belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle emergency locking mode. WARNING! • The belt and retractor assembly must be checked by the Service Network and must be replaced if the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Seat Belt Pretensioners The car is equipped with front seat belt pretensioners, that reduce slack in the belts in the event of a severe frontal impact. This guarantees the perfect adherence of the seat belts to the occupants bodies before the restraining action begins. This car is also equipped with a second pretensioner in the kick plate area. Its activation is signalled by the 52 shortening of the metal cable and from its protective sheath curled. Pretensioners work for all size occupant restraint systems, including the child restraint systems. NOTE: To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt tight to the chest and pelvis. Pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). A pretensioner may be used only once because it is a pyrotechnic device. Pretensioners do not require any maintenance or lubrication: any changes to their original conditions will invalidate their efficiency. If, due to unusual natural events (floods, sea storms, etc.), the device has been affected by water and mud, it must be replaced. WARNING! It is strictly forbidden to remove or tamper with the pretensioner components. Any intervention must be carried out only by qualified and authorised personnel. Always contact the Service Network. CAUTION! Operations which lead to impacts, vibrations or localized heating (over 100°C/212°F for a maximum of 6 hours) in the area around the pretensioners may damage or deploy them erroneously. These devices are not affected by vibrations caused by uneven road surfaces or low obstacles. Contact the Service Network for any intervention that may be required. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. The feature activates with engine running. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the seat belt reminder light will turn on in the instrument cluster. Before Starting The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 8 km/h (5 mph) for more than 19 seconds, by blinking the seat belt reminder light and by sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration. After the sequence completes, the seat belt reminder light remain illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. If the opened front door on the driver or passenger side is closed and the occupant presence sensor detects a status change from occupant not present to occupant present the system will repeat the warning sequence. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is unbuckled while travelling at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual notification on the instrument cluster. The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the front passenger seat is not occupied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat. It is recommended to restrain pets in the rear seat, in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and properly stow cargo. Seat Belts and Pregnant Women Seat belts should also be worn by pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is greatly reduced for them and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. The best way to protect the foetus is to protect the mother. Pregnant women must position the lower part of the belt very low down so that it passes over the pelvis and under the abdomen (see figure). 2 When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that baby will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. WARNING! Pregnant women must scrupulously observe the above indications, as well as local regulation concerning the use of seat belts. 53 Before Starting Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags 2 This vehicle has advanced front air bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's advanced front air bag is mounted in the centre of the steering wheel in the area shown in the picture. On this area is embossed the word “SRS AIRBAG” for easier recognition. The passenger's advanced front air bag is mounted in the dashboard, above the glove compartment in the area shown in the picture. On this area is embossed the word “AIRBAG” for easier recognition. NOTE: These air bags are certified to regulations for advanced air bags. The advanced front air bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle sensor that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle sensor may adjust the inflation rate of the advanced front air bags. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the heads of front and rear outer occupants. The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled “AIR bag”. This vehicle is also equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) for driver and passenger pelvis-chest-shoulder protection during a side impact. The Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags are mounted on front seats and are located in the outboard side of the front seats. NOTE: After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to the Service Network immediately. 54 Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components: • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC); • Air bag warning light on the instrument cluster; • Steering wheel and column; • Instrument cluster; • Driver advanced front air bag; • Passenger advanced front air bag; • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB); • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC); • Front and side impact sensors; • Front seat belt pretensioners and seat belt buckle switch; • Pyrotechnical charge to cut power from the battery; it is located on the positive battery terminal. Advanced Front Air Bags Properties The advanced front air bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors. Before Starting The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. CAUTION! • The electronic control unit provides for the activation of the pretensioners, front air bags or side air bags (front and rear) based on different criteria, according to the type of impact. Failure of one or more systems to activate is not indicative of a system malfunction. • The front and/or lateral air bags may inflate if the vehicle suffers a violent impact involving the underbody area, for example in case of violent impacts against steps, sidewalks, speed bumps, or when the vehicle falls into potholes, or similar. WARNING! • EXTREME HAZARD! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it! Deployment of the air bag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the baby regardless of the severity of the collision. Therefore, always release the passenger air bag when a rearward facing child restraint is installed on the passenger front seat. The front passenger seat must also be positioned back as far as possible in order to avoid the child restraint from coming into contact with the dashboard. Immediately reactivate the passenger air bag as soon as the child restraint system has been removed. • Never put objects (e.g. mobile phones, toys, folders, tablets, etc..) on the passenger side of the dashboard since they could interfere with correct inflation of the passenger air bag and also cause serious injury to the occupants. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Always drive with your hands on the steering wheel rim, so that the air bag can inflate freely if required. During the drive your back must be as upright as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly fastened. • Do not apply stickers or other objects on the steering wheel, on the dashboard in the passenger’s side air bag area, on roof side trims or on the seats. • Do not travel with objects in your lap, in front of your chest or especially with a pipe, pencil or other objects in your mouth. In the event of a collision, the intervention of the air bag could result in serious injury. 2 Passenger seat’s front air bag and child restraint systems Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag activated. Deployment of the air bag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the infant regardless of the severity of the collision. NOTE: ALWAYS refer to the instructions written on the label located on the passenger side sunshade and behind it. 55 Before Starting 2 56 Before Starting 2 57 Before Starting Supplemental Air bags 2 Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) protect the pelvis, chest and shoulder area of the occupants in the event of a side impact of medium/high severity. The SAB is marked with “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. in the event of a side impact, thanks to the wide cushion inflation surface. Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The SABICS deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side. WARNING! • Side air bags also need room to When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat's trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) SABIC air bags are designed to protect the head of front and rear occupants 58 inflate. Do not rest your head, arms or elbows on the door, windows or the area in which the window bag is located to avoid possible injury during air bag inflation. Sit upright in the centre of the seating area. • Do not cover the front seatbacks with clothes or covers. Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could cause serious injury. • Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. Air Bag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines if deployment of the front air bags and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision or rollover event is required. Based on the impact sensor's signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the advanced front air bags, SABIC and SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on the severity and type of impact. On top of what previously described, the characteristics of the collision registered by the sensors and sent to the control unit of the ORC can also cause a sudden cut of the power from the battery, “blowing” the pyrotechnical charge located on the positive battery terminal. CAUTION! After a collision that has caused the blowing up of the pyrotechnical charge, this must be replaced at a Service Network. Advanced front air bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain Before Starting frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision. Advanced front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The advanced front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including those that may produce substantial vehicle damage, for example, some pole collisions, truck under rides, and corner impacts. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, advanced front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage merely are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all accidents, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not active, the air bag system is not activated and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery has low power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. When starting the vehicle, ORC turns on the air bag warning light on the instrument cluster for approximately 4 to 8 seconds for a test. After the test, the air bag warning light will turn off. If the ORC, during the diagnosis phase detects a malfunction that could affect the air bag system, it turns on the air bag warning light and the “Service Airbag System” message either momentarily or continuously. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. A beep will sound if the light illuminates again after initial startup. 2 The air bag warning light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. WARNING! • The air bags may also be deployed when the car is not moving, if the ignition switch is in RUN position and the engine is off, if the car is hit by another moving vehicle. Therefore, even if the car is stationary, when an active passenger air bag is fitted, DO NOT install on the passenger seat child restraint systems to be fitted rearward facing on the front seat. Deployment of the air bag following an impact could cause fatal injuries to the child. Therefore, always deactivate the passenger air bag (see 59 Before Starting 2 “Passenger’s Air bag Deactivation” in this section) when a rearward facing child restraint is installed on the passenger front seat. The front passenger seat must also be positioned back as far as possible in order to avoid the child restraint from coming into contact with the dashboard. Immediately reactivate the passenger air bag as soon as the child restraint system has been removed. Also remember that, if the ignition switch is in OFF, ACC position or off, none of the safety devices (air bags or pretensioners) will be deployed in the event of collision. Non-deployment of these devices does not indicate a system malfunction. • Ignoring the air bag warning light and message in your instrument cluster could mean you won't have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the engine, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorised Maserati Service Centre service the air bag system immediately. Front Air Bag Inflator Units When the ORC detects a collision requiring the advanced front air bags, 60 it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the advanced front air bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the dashboard separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The advanced front air bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units The ORC unit determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision. Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the head/s of the occupant/s seating in the outside seats from the edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The air bag inflates with enough force to possibly injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The SABICs may also help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover events (because equipped with rollover sensing). Before Starting Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events. Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the communication network and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether the enhanced accident response system will have to perform the following functions: • cut off fuel to the engine; • turn hazard lights and interior lights on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned off; • unlock the doors automatically; • disconnect the battery with a pyrotechnic charge. Air Bag Deployment Result The advanced front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle after an air bag has deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you. ENVIRONMENTAL! Air bag inflation releases a small amount of powder. This powder is not harmful for the environment. 2 WARNING! • Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by a Maserati Service Centre. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well. • Have the air bag checked, serviced and replaced only by the Service Network. Air Bag System Maintenance WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it; thus you could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle 61 Before Starting • 2 • • • 62 body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system without the necessary know-how. Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to the Service Network for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to the Service Network. Only Maserati manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact the Service Network. If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. To identify the air bag fuse see “Fuse Replacement” in section “Maintenance and Care”. See the Service Network if the fuse does not fix the problem. Passenger’s Air bag Deactivation (if foreseen) If you have to carry a child on the front passenger seat, always deactivate the air bag on the passenger’s side before installing a rearward-facing child seat. To deactivate the air bag, open the menu “Vehicle Settings” and skip to “Passenger Airbag” (see “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). The passenger air bag is normally activated (ON). With the switch pressed in the arrow direction select option “OFF” and confirm by pressing the switch ( ). Confirm the selection by pressing the switch ( ): a confirmation box will prompt user to select “Yes” or “No”. Select “No” to go back to previous selection screen. Select “Yes” to confirm deactivation: the symbol will display for 2 seconds with the corresponding message. The air bag light will illuminate on the instrument cluster display and on the overhead console. Before Starting WARNING! • We recommend you to always fit any child seats on the rear seat, as this is the safest position in the event of a collision. • When the passenger side air bag is deactivated the passenger seated on the front seat will not have the additional protection of the air bag in the event of a collision. • Only deactivate the air bag when you are carrying a person considered at risk, and always reactivate it at the end of transportation. 2 Transport of persons with disability The display will then return to the “Vehicle Settings” menu. In order to activate the passenger air bag follow the same procedure by selecting “ON” option on menu. CAUTION! Should the warning light (passenger’s air bag off) malfunction, its failure will be shown on the display. Deactivation of the front passenger air bag does not deactivate the other air bags and the seat belt. If it is necessary to modify the advanced air bag system of your vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Service Network . WARNING! • The advanced air bag system of your vehicle is not designed to protect adults with disabilities that require deactivation of the passenger or driver air bag. 63 Before Starting • If you or another occupant is an 2 adult with a medical condition that requires air bag deactivation, please contact the Service Network. • Persons with disabilities are advised not to travel in the front seat in order to avoid the risk of serious injuries or death, even in minor crashes. Child Restraint Systems Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time, including babies and children. This prescription is compulsory in all EC countries according to EC Directive 2003/20/EC. Children up to 12 years old or under 1.5 m (5 ft) in height, must be properly buckled up in a child restraint system. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. NOTE: All states have legislation governing how and where children should be carried in a vehicle. Please check the regulations existing in your state. WARNING! • EXTREME HAZARD! Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it! Deployment of the air bag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the baby regardless of the severity of the collision. • If the passenger's air bag is deactivated always check the warning light on the instrument 64 cluster to make sure that it has actually been deactivated. • Never carry children on your lap, not even newborns. No one can restrain a child in the event of an accident. • Every child has to use one child restraint system; never carry two children using only one child seat. • In case of accident, replace the child seat with a new one. The choice of the most suitable child restraint system depends on the weight of the child. There are different types of child restraint systems. Always refer to the manual provided with child seat to ensure it is the proper type according the travelling child. In Europe the child restraint systems prescriptions are defined by European Standard ECE-R44. Child restraint systems are classified into five weight groups: • Group 0: up to 10 kg (up to 22 lb) weight; • Group 0 +: up to 13 kg (up to 29 lb) weight; • Group 1: 9 - 18 kg (20 - 40 lb) weight; • Group 2: 15 - 25 kg (33 - 55 lb) weight; • Group 3: 22 - 36 kg (49 - 79 lb) weight. Before Starting NOTE: Regardless of the type of child restraint, always check that the seat belt is well fastened by pulling on it. All restraint devices must bear the approval data, with the control mark on a label firmly secured to the child seat which must never be removed. Over 1.5 m (5 ft) in height, from the point of view of restraint systems, children are considered as adults and wear the seat belts normally. 2 Group 0 and 0+ Child Restraint Systems Babies up to 13 kg (29 lb) must be carried with rearward-facing seats, which, supporting the head, do not induce stress on the neck in the event of sharp decelerations. These child restraint systems are fixed to the car by the three-point seat belt or by the Isofix anchorages. Check “Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR” or “Isofix Universal Child Restraint System” in this chapter for further information. NOTE: For Group 0/0+ Semi Universal Isofix child restraint system are available, always check the manual to ensure the car seat is approved for your specific vehicle. WARNING! Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag activated. An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position. Group 1 Child Restraint Systems Children with weight between 9 kg to 18 kg (20 lb to 40 lb) may use forward facing seats. These child restraint systems are fixed to the car by the three-point seat belt or by the Isofix anchorages. Check “Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR” or “Isofix Universal Child Restraint System” in this chapter for further information. Group 2 Child Restraint Systems Children from 15 kg to 25 kg (33 lb to 55 lb) may use the car seat belts directly. These child restraint systems are fixed to the car by the by the three-point seat belt or by the Isofix anchorages. Refer to “Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR” or “Isofix Universal Child Restraint System” in this chapter for further information. This type of child seat is featured to position the child correctly towards the belts so that the diagonal section crosses the child’s chest and not its neck, and the lower part is snug on 65 Before Starting the pelvis and not on the abdomen. Always check that the seat belts do not restrain the child's throat. Over 1.50 m (5 ft) in height children can wear seat belts like adults. Group 3 Child Restraint Systems WARNING! Improper installation leads to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing a child restraint system. 2 For children with weight between 22 kg to 36 kg (49 lb to 79 lb) devices are available to position the seat belt correctly. • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. • The lap portion must adhere to the pelvis and as snug as possible. • Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. • Always check that the seat belts do not restrain the child's throat. • Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. 66 Some Tips on getting the most out of your Child Restraint • Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. Maserati recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint system in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it. • The child restraint systems choice must be appropriate for your child's weight. • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system. If you install the child restraint system improperly, it may not work when you need it. • Fit the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer's directions. WARNING! When your child restraint system is not used, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. Before Starting Suitability of Passenger Seats for Universal Child Restraint System Use According to the European Directive 2003/20/EC the suitability of each passenger seat position for the fixing of universal child restraint systems is shown in the following table: Group Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Central rear seat 0 Up to 10 kg / 22 lb U (*) U X 0+ Up to 13 kg / 29 lb U (*) U X 1 9–18 kg / 20–40 lb U (*) U X 2 15–25 kg / 33–55 lb U (*) U X 3 22–36 kg / 49–79 lb U (*) U X 2 U = Child seat category “Universal”. A child seat designed for fastening on the seat with the seat belt. (*) = The seat should be adjusted. X = Central rear seat isn't suitable to fix any type of Universal Child restraint system. 67 Before Starting 2 68 Summary of Children Safety Transporting Regulations: Children up to 12 years old or under 1.50 m (5 ft) may only travel if secured, using adequate child restraint systems. We recommend to always fit any child restraint system on the rear seats outer, as this is the safest position in the event of a collision. Do not fit any CRS on rear centre seating position. If the vehicle is equipped with active passenger air bags, do not place rearward-facing infant seats on front seat. When deactivating the passenger-side air bag, always check the illumination of the warning light in the TFT display of the instrument cluster and on the overhead console, indicating the air bag has been deactivated (see “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Air bags” in this section). Strictly follow the instructions which the manufacturer is obliged to provide with the child restraint system. Keep the instructions in the vehicle together with the documents and this owner’s manual. Do not use a child restraint system which does not comprehend any instructions for use. Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR The passenger seat belts are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to secure child protection through a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint seat avoiding to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if the entire belt is pulled out of the retractor in order to enable the belt retracting subsequently. For additional information on ALR, see “Using Seat Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR)” in “Occupants Restraint Systems” in this section. To install a Child Restraint System with ALR, pull enough of the belt out of the retractor leading it through the belt path of the protection device. Slide the latch into the buckle until it clicks. Remove then the entire safety belt from the retractor in order to rewound. While rewinding a click will indicate the safety belt is now in Automatic Locking mode. Exert then a traction on the exceeded lap section of the belt in order to tighten it around the child restraint seat. All seat belts will loosen over time, it is therefore necessary to check them periodically and set them properly. Isofix Universal Child Restraint Your vehicle's side rear seats are all equipped with Isofix anchorages. The Isofix Universal system allows the child restraint systems to be fixed without using the vehicle's seat belts, instead fixing the child restraint system to the vehicle structure, using lower anchorages A and upper tether strap B. NOTE: Remember that when using a Isofix Universal child seat, you can only use approved child seats with the marking ECE R44 " Isofix Universal ” (03 release Before Starting or post) (see the example in the figure). run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces. 2 Isofix Universal child restraint systems are now available. You should never install Isofix Universal child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If your child restraints are not Isofix Universal, install the restraints using the vehicle's seat belts. Installing an Isofix Universal Child Restraint System Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions provided with the child restraint system. The lower Isofix anchorages are “U” metal rings located on the rear seat where the cushion meets the seatback and are located just below the symbol shown in the picture, but are not visible. You will easily feel them if you Such anchorages can be reached pushing down or lifting the foldable end of the boot compartment cover. NOTE: • To correctly install a child restraint system on the rear seats, position the seat back in the less tilted position (see chapter "Rear seats" in section “Understanding the Vehicle”). • On the vehicles of Australian market the top tether strap anchorage behind the central rear seat should be used to secure a child restraint system with the vehicle's seat belts. Top tether strap anchorages are placed behind the backrest of the rear seats. To fix an Isofix Universal Child seat for weight group 1 proceed as follows. • Secure the child seat to the “U” lower metal rings positioned on the rear seat. Fix the end of the upper belt, also called Top Tether (provided with the child seat), to the attachment located behind the backrest. 69 Before Starting 2 • Lift the headrest. • Route the top tether to provide the most direct path between the anchorage behind the backrest and the child restraint system passing it between the slide rods of the headrest. • Tighten upper strap until you reach the tension level recommended by the restraint system manufacturer. • Fully lower the headrest. NOTE: • The other weight groups are covered by specific Isofix child seats, which can be used only if specifically tested for this car (see list of cars provided with the child seat). • For any further details on installation and/or use, refer to the instructions provided with the child seat. 70 WARNING! • Fit the child seat when the car is stationary. The child seat is correctly fixed to the anchorages when hearing a click. Follow the instructions for assembly, disassembly and positioning that the manufacturer must supply with the child restraint system. • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. NOTE: • Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. • When using an Isofix child restraint system, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. WARNING! • Improper installation of a child restraint system to the Isofix anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint system. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Before Starting Suitability of Passenger Seats for Isofix Child Restraint System Use The table below shows the various installation possibilities for Isofix child restraint systems on seats fitted with Isofix anchorages in accordance with European standard ECE 16. Group 0 Up to 10 kg / 22 lb 0+ Up to 13 kg / 29 lb 1 9–18 kg / 20–40 lb Size category of the child seat (*) Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Central rear seat E X IL X E X IL X D X IL X C X IL (**) X D X IL X C X IL (**) X B X IUF, IL X B1 X IUF, IL X A X IUF, IL X 2 (*) = The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat. (**) = It is necessary to make adjustments on the corresponding front seat. IL = The seat is suited for installation of an Isofix child seat with the “Semi Universal” approval. The Category “Semi Universal” means that the child seat with the Isofix system is approved for your vehicle. Observe the information in the list of vehicles which comes with the child seat. IUF = The seat is suitable for the installation of an Isofix child seat with the approval “Universal” and attachment with the Top Tether belt. X = The seat is not fitted with Isofix systems. Maserati Recommended Child Restraint Systems for this Vehicle “Maserati Genuine Accessories” makes available a complete range of child restraint systems that can be fixed using the vehicle seat belts or through the Isofix anchorages. (Continued) 71 Before Starting NOTE: Please check the availability of the Child Seats for your Country. 2 Group: 0+ (Up to 13 kg / 29 lb) Maserati Peg Pérego Primo viaggio SL Maserati Peg Pérego Isofix K Base Approval Number with Isofix Basement: E24 040089 Isofix/SemiUniversal child seat. This seat can only be installed in rear-facing position using the related Isofix basement (to be purchased separately) and the Isofix anchorages on rear outboard seat. Maserati recommends this seat for this weight group. 72 Maserati Peg Pérego Primo viaggio SL Approval Number: E24 040088 Universal child seat. This seat can only be installed in rear-facing position using the vehicle seat belts (it can also be used together with the “Maserati Peg Pérego Pushchair”). Before Starting 2 Group: 1 (Up to 13 kg / 29 lb) Maserati Peg Pérego Viaggio 1 Duo-Fix Maserati Peg Pérego Isofix K Base Approval Number with Isofix Basement: E24 040058 Isofix child seat. To be installed in forward-facing position using the related basement Isofix K (to be purchased separately) and the Isofix anchorages on rear outboard seat. Group: 2, 3 (15 – 36 kg / 33 – 79 lb) Maserati Peg Pérego Viaggio 1 Duo-Fix Approval Number: E24 040057 Universal child seat. To be installed in forwardfacing position using the vehicle seat belts. Maserati Peg Pérego Viaggio 2-3 Surefix Universal Approval Number: E24 040070 Semi-Universal Approval Number: E24 040071 This seat can only be installed in forward-facing position using the vehicle seat belts and, optionally, the Isofix anchorages on rear outboard seat. 73 Before Starting 2 WARNING! Maserati recommends to install the child seat according to the manufacturer's directions that must be supplied with it. Important Safety Notice for Transporting Children • Install the child seat on the rear seat as this is the safest position in case of collisions. • Use the seat in the rear-facing position as long as possible, if possible until the child is 3-4 years old. • When deactivating the front passenger air bag (for versions/ markets, where provided), make sure that the light stays On on the TFT display and on the overhead console to indicate the correct deactivation. • Keep the instructions in the vehicle together with the documents and this owner’s manual. Do not use a child restraint system which does not provide any instructions for use. • Every child has to use one child restraint system; never carry two children using only one child seat. • If using the vehicle seat belt, always check that the belt does not restrain the child's throat. 74 • Firmly pull the seat belt to check that it is correctly buckled. • Never allow a child to seat improperly or to unbuckle the seat belt while driving. • Never allow a child to wear the shoulder portion of the belt under the arms or behind the back. • Never carry children on your lap, not even newborns. No one can restrain a child in the event of an accident. • In case of accident, replace the child seat with a new one. Transporting Pets Air bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by vehicle seat belts. Before Starting Park Assist (optional) The Park Assist (also called “ParkSense”) system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking manoeuvre. Besides the use of the sensors available on the bumpers and of the rear parking camera, the vehicle may be equipped with surround view cameras (optional) to assist the driver during manoeuvres on dead-ends/roads and on intersections. For more details on this option, see chapter "Surround View Camera System" in this section. Refer to “Park Assist System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and recommendations. Park Assist system will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN position. Park Assist system can be active only when the shift lever is in R (Reverse) or D (Drive). If Park Assist is enabled at one of these shift lever positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 12 km/h (7.5 mph) or above. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 km/h (6.2 mph). Park Assist Sensors The four Park Assist sensors, located in the rear bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensor's field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles up to approximately 200 cm (78 in) from the rear bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. 2 GTS and TROFEO Versions The six Park Assist sensors, located in the front bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensor's field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles up to a distance of approximately 120 cm (50 in) from the front bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. 75 Before Starting 2 GTS and TROFEO Versions Park Assist Warning Messages Display The Park Assist Warning screen will only be displayed if “Sound + Display” is selected from the MTC+ System. Refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. The Park Assist Warning screen is located on the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear bumper and/or front bumper and the detected obstacle. The warning display will turn on indicating the system status (ready or off) when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or in D (Drive) and an obstacle has been detected. The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two parts with 76 four arcs while the two detection areas behind the car into five arcs. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by displaying arcs with fixed or flashing light and a characteristic sound according to the obstacle distance. The colour indicates the distance and the arc indicates the position of the detected obstacle. The green colour of the outer arc indicates the maximum distance, the amber colour of the middle arcs indicates the medium distance, while the red colour of the nearest arc indicates the minimum distance. As the vehicle moves closer to the object the instrument cluster will display the arc moving towards the vehicle and the sound tone will change from single to slow, to fast and to continuous. The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster displays one flashing red arc only, combined with a continuous sound. Before Starting The following charts show the warning alert visualization when the system is detecting an obstacle. Front Sensors - Warning Alerts Front distance More than 120 cm (50 in) 120-101 cm (50-40 in) 100-61 cm (40-24 in) 60-31 cm (23.6-12.2 in) Less than 30 cm (12 in) Audible Alert None None Slow Fast Continuous Arc in left and right areas None 4th 3rd 2nd 1st (inner most) Type light None Solid Solid Flash Flash Arc colour -‒ Green Amber Amber Red Active Active Mute Mute Mute Radio sound 2 Rear Sensors - Warning Alerts Rear distance More than 200 cm (78 in) 200-151 cm (78-59.4 in) 150-101 cm (60-40 in) 100-61 cm (40-24 in) 60-31 cm (23.6-12.2 in) Less than 30 cm (12 in) Audible Alert None Single Slow Slow Fast Continuous Arc in left and right areas None 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st (inner most) Type light None Solid Solid Solid Flash Flash Arc colour ‒ Green Amber Amber Amber Red Active Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Radio sound 77 Before Starting 2 NOTE: Park Assist will turn off the front park assist audible alert (chime) after approximately 4 seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied. Enabling and Disabling Park Assist By accessing the submenu “Safety & Driving Assistant” from MTC+ System, the “Park Assist” can be disabled (option “Off”). The available options regarding the warning alerts are: “Sound” or “Sound + Display”. Refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. The front sensors can be enabled or disabled at any time by pressing the button on the front dome console. 78 After pressing the button the instrument cluster will display the state of front parking sensors for approximately five seconds. The button LED will be on when the front sensors are disabled. The button LED will be off when the front sensors are enabled. If the button is pressed and the system requires service, the LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on. When the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse) or to D (Drive) at a speed of 11 km/h (7 mph) or below and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster will display the “PARK ASSIST Off” message for 5 seconds until the shift lever remains in R (Reverse) or when the shift lever is moved in D (Drive). Service the Park Assist System In case of malfunction of the Park Assist system, the instrument cluster will actuate a single sound, once per ignition cycle. The instrument cluster will display a message when any of the rear or front sensor(s) are blocked by snow, mud, or ice and the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) or D (Drive). The instrument cluster will display a message when any of the rear or front sensors are damaged and require service. When the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse) or D (Drive) and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will display the corresponding message for the time lapse the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or D (Drive) at speeds less than 11 km/h (7 mph). Under this condition Park Assist will not operate. See “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. If the instrument cluster displays a message prompting you to clean the sensors, make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper and/or front bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition switch. If the message continues to appear contact the Service Network. Before Starting Park Assist System Usage Precautions If a failure message is displayed on the instrument cluster, contact the Service Network. Cleaning the Park Assist Sensors When cleaning the sensors, take special care not to scratch or damage them; therefore, do not use dry, rough or hard cloths. The sensors must be washed with clean water, possibly adding car shampoo. Should you need to repaint the bumper or in case of paint touch-ups in the sensor area, please contact exclusively the Service Network. Incorrect paint application could affect the parking sensors operation. NOTE: • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Park Assist. • Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., must not be placed within 30 cm (12 in) from the rear bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the service Park Assist message to be displayed in the instrument cluster. over his/her shoulder when using Park Assist. WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. 2 Park Assist Volume CAUTION! • Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognise every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might only be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. When backing up, it is recommended that the driver looks The volume of the acoustic signal emitted by the front and rear parking sensors is set to the medium level. Three different level of volume can be selected the submenu “Safety & Driving Assistant” from the MTC+ System. Low level is useful in certain conditions when the parking sensor acoustic signal keeps coming on although there is no actual collision hazard. This may typically occur when driving in a queue or when the vehicle is overtaken by motorcycles or other vehicles on one or both sides in a queue of traffic. 79 Before Starting 2 When you set the volume, only the parking sensor acoustic signal will be affected. The radio or any other devices connected to the vehicle sound system will not be affected. Refer to chapter “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. Operation with a Trailer The operation of the rear sensors is automatically deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket, while the front sensors stay active and can provide acoustic and visual warnings. The rear sensors are automatically reactivated when the trailer's cable plug is removed. 80 Rear Parking Camera (optional) Your vehicle can be equipped with a rear parking camera that allows you to see an image on the MTC+ screen of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into R (Reverse). When “Parkview Camera Off Delay” mode is enabled, the rear view image shall be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of R (Reverse). To assist the driver during manoeuvres on dead-ends/roads and on intersections, the vehicle may be equipped with an optional surround view camera system. In this case, the rear parking camera is integrated into the surround view camera system. In both configurations (rear parking camera only or surround view camera system), you can always monitor the rear view. For more details on this option, see chapter "Surround View Camera System" in this section. The image will be displayed along with a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The rear parking camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear licence plate. When the shift lever is shifted out of R (Reverse), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When displayed, dynamic grid lines (if the function is set to “MTC+ Settings”) will illustrate the width of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. The dynamic grid lines will show separate zones in different colour that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone and colour: Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 28 - 30 cm (11 - 12 in) Before Starting Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Yellow 30 cm - 2 m (12 - 78 in) Green 2 - 4 m (78 - 157 in) or greater WARNING! Drivers must be careful when reversing even when using the rear view camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before reversing. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to be careful while reversing. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! • To avoid vehicle damage, the rear camera should only be used as a parking aid, as the rear camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the rear camera to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver looks frequently over his/her shoulder when using the rear camera. Surround View Camera System (optional) System components The system uses four cameras to monitor the area around the vehicle, placed on the front grid, under the side rear-view mirrors and on the liftgate, between the number plate lights. 2 NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any other substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. 81 Before Starting Once the “Surround Camera” screen is displayed, it is possible to choose which images to display according to 4 possible settings. Rear view and top view 2 present under the image: the edges of the pressed button will highlight. The button will highlight and the type of selected view will appear on each image. Rear cross path view Front cross path view When the shift lever is shifted to R (Reverse) position, the top view and rear view of the surrounding scenario will be automatically displayed on MTC+ display. Instead, when the shift lever is shifted to P (Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) position, it is possible to activate/ deactivate the system by pressing “Surround Camera” soft-key in “Controls” screen of MTC+ display. 82 Front view and top view In any shift lever condition, when “Surround View” screen is displayed, a pop-up message will appear in the upper part for 5 seconds to advise the driver to check the surrounding scenario before any manoeuvre. With transmission in P (Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive), the upper right corner of the screen will show the “X” key: touch it to go back to the previous screen of MTC+ display, before entering in “Controls”. The deactivation of the rear visualization via “X” soft-key is not possible when the transmission is in R (Reverse) position. Choose the most suitable setting for the situation and the manoeuvre you are performing or going to perform, by touching the relevant button In the top view, the vehicle is represented as it is during the manoeuvre (see example in the figure), therefore any open doors will be visible in the image. To display also the dynamic lines of the trajectory you are setting, it is necessary to set this function by accessing the “Settings” menu on MTC+, at “Safety & Driving Assistant” item, by using the dynamic gridlines activation menu. Once this menu is displayed, it is also possible to set the function that delays the exit from this screen in special situations when the transmission lever is in D (Drive), N Before Starting (Neutral) and P (Park) position by using the surround view camera delay menu. For further information, see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”. WARNING! Failure to follow the precautions below might result in serious injury or even death. • Drivers must be careful during manoeuvres also when using the camera system with surround view. • Always check carefully the areas around your vehicle, before proceeding forward or backward. • Be sure to always check for any pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots. • The driver must use the utmost caution while using the system to avoid damage to property or personal injury. • The camera system with surround view is designed for use during the day or under good lighting conditions. Do not use and rely on the system under poor lighting conditions. • Distance lines and trajectory lines must be used only as a reference and only when vehicle is on a flat ground. The distance shown on MTC+ display must be interpreted as a reference and might be different from the distance actually present between the vehicle and any displayed objects. • Any obstacles present above the cameras cannot be detected. that the driver looks frequently over his/her shoulder when using this system. NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any other substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. 2 CAUTION! • To avoid vehicle damage, the camera system with surround view should only be used as a parking aid, as the cameras are unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the camera system with surround view, to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended 83 Before Starting Safety Tips Transporting Passengers 2 WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury. • It is extremely dangerous to travel in a cargo area, inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people travelling in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured. • Do not allow people to travel in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Exhaust Gas WARNING! • Exhaust gases can injure. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colourless and odourless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: 84 • Do not run the engine in a closed Vehicle Safety Checks The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the passenger compartment is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever detecting a change in the sound of the exhaust system or eventual exhaust fumes inside the vehicle have the Service Network inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. Seat Belts • Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. • Do not disassemble or modify the system. • If the belt has been sharply pulled, for example as the result of an accident, the safety belt, together with the anchoring devices, the anchoring device mounting screws and the pretensioner must be completely replaced. Even if the belt does not present any exterior signs of wear or damage, it may have lost its restraining properties. Air Bag Warning Light The light should illuminate and remain lit for a few seconds bulb checking when the ignition switch is pushed in RUN position (see “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Air Bags” chapter in this section). • If the light does not illuminate while starting, contact the Service Network. • If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by the Service Network. garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blowers switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. Before Starting Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the fan system on high speed (see “Air Conditioning Controls” chapter in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield and front side windows. Contact Service Network for service if your defroster is inoperable. Floor Mat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with any information about the available Maserati floor mats included in the “Genuine Accessories” range. • Mounting posts must be properly WARNING! Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the proper fasteners. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. 2 Tires • Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. • Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. • Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. • Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. • Check the wheel nuts for tightness. • Check the tires (see “Tire Inflation Pressure” chapter in section “Features and Specifications”) for proper cold inflation pressure. Lights and Indicator Lights • Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you operate the controls (see “Lights” chapter in section “Understanding the Vehicle”). • Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument cluster (see “Instrument Cluster” 85 Before Starting 2 86 chapter in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). Door Latches • Check for positive closing, latching, and locking of doors and liftgate (see “Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob” chapter in this section). Fluid Leaks • Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for recent fluid leaks (oil, fuel, etc.). • If gasoline fumes are detected or fluid leaks are suspected, contact the Service Network. 3 - Understanding the Vehicle Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Driver Memory Seat (for versions/markets, where provided) . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Adjustable Pedals (for versions/markets, where provided) . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Rear View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Interior Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Front to Back Roof Rails (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Power Sunroof with Sunshade (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 HomeLink® (for versions/markets, where provided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Air Conditioning Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 87 Understanding the Vehicle Interior Components Dashboard Components 3 88 Understanding the Vehicle Central Console Components 1 Adjustable side air outlets. 2 Engine START/STOP button. 3 Light switch. 7 Cover for cup holder and cigarette lighter/power socket compartment. Rotary selectors and buttons for the multimedia navigation. Hazard lights switch. 4 Anti-theft system indicator. 8 Drive height selector. 5 Steering wheel controls. 9 6 Instrument cluster. 7* Right shift paddle +. 8* Left shift paddle –. 9 10 Multifunction lever (windshield wipers, headlight washer and headlight selection, turn signals). Adjustable central air outlets. Unlock button for central console compartment with cup holder and power outlet. Central console covers with armrest function. Adjustable air outlets. 11 Analogue clock. 12 MTC+ display. 13 Climate controls. 14 Dashboard glove box handle. Dashboard storage compartment with two USB ports for charging of connected source. 16 Steering wheel adjustment control. (*) If foreseen 5 6 Central Console Front Part 10 11 12 13 3 Cover for power outlet and USB slots compartment. Four-zone climate controls for rear passengers (optional). Front Dome Console Components 15 Central Console Rear Part 1 2 Automatic transmission shift lever. Drive mode switches. 3 Electric Parking Brake lever. 4 Cover for compartment with AUX, USB and SD memory card port. 1 Reading lights control button. 89 Understanding the Vehicle 2 Central light control button. 3 Reading lights. 4 Central light. 5 9 Passenger air bag deactivation warning light (for versions/ markets, where provided). Button to switch off passenger compartment lights. Button to release the manual liftgate or to open fully/partially the power liftgate (optional). Button to enable/disable front sensors of the Park Assist system (optional). Sunroof controls (optional). 10 HomeLink controls (optional). 6 3 7 8 Front Doors Components Driver door 90 13 14 Door lock button with “Passive Entry” function. Door outboard opening lock. Rear Doors Components Passenger door 1 Internal door handle. 2 4 Driver’s seat, steering wheel, adjustable pedals and rear mirrors memory switch (if equipped). External rear view mirrors switches. Power window switches. 5 Power door unlocks/locks. 6 7 Rear windows and sunshade lockout button. Loudspeakers. 8 Storage compartment. 9 Internal door lock/unlock knob. 10 Door panel grip. 11 Reflex reflector. 12 External door handle. 3 1 Internal rear door handle. 2 Grip. 3 Loudspeaker. 4 Door storage pockets. 5 Power window and sunshade (optional) button Power doors lock/unlock buttons. 6 7 8 “Child protection” door lock system. Inside door lock/unlock knob. 9 Reflex reflector. 10 External door handle. Understanding the Vehicle 11 12 Heated switch for right rear seat (optional). The heated switch for the left rear seat is on the left rear door. Door lock button with “Passive Entry” function (optional). Front Seats Seats and seat belts are parts of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. For further information, see chapter “Occupant Restraint System” in Section “Before Starting”. Depending on the different markets and versions, the front seats may have different controls for adjustment and optional features. The configurations shown below may differ from the ones in your vehicle. The front passenger seat is equipped with a sensor that informs the SBR system about the presence of an occupant on the seat. Use the rear switch 3 to adjust the lumbar support. 3 WARNING! Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Front Power Seats The power seats switches are located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. Use the front switch 1 to move the seat up or down, forward or rearward or to recline the seat cushion. Use the switch 2 to recline the seatback. Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch 1 forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch 1 when the desired position is reached. 91 Understanding the Vehicle Seat Up/Down Adjustment The height of the seat can be adjusted up- or downward. Grip switch 1 from the back side and push it down or up. Release the switch 1 when the desired position is reached. 3 CAUTION! If the seat's movement does not work, make sure that the corresponding fuse is not tripped (see chapter “Fuse Replacement” in section “Maintenance and Care”). Head Restraints Adjustment To manually lift or lower the head restraints press the indicated lateral button. NOTE: The Sport Seat does not include the head restraint adjustment. WARNING! Remember that the headrests must be positioned so that their upper edge is aligned with the top of the occupant’s head. In fact, only in this position can they provide the support required in the event of a bumper-to-tail collision. Seat Tilt Control (Up/Down) The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push the front of the switch 1 , to move the front cushion seat in the direction of the switch. Release the switch 1 when the desired position is reached. Seat Back Tilt Control The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch 2 forward or rearward, the upper seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch 2 when the desired position is reached. Power Lumbar Push the switch 3 forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. 92 Push the switch 3 upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support. WARNING! • Never adjust the seat while driving. You could lose control of the vehicle. Moving the seat could distract you or make you press a pedal unintentionally. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. • Do not travel with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! Do not place any object under a power seat or obstruct its movement as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat movement may become limited if there is an obstruction in the way. Front Power/Manual Seats On these seats, the power switch 1 and the manual reclining lever 2 are located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. Understanding the Vehicle Use the power switch 1 to move the seat up or down, forward or rearward or to recline the seat cushion. CAUTION! If the seat's movement does not work, make sure that the corresponding fuse is not tripped (see chapter “Fuse Replacement” in section “Maintenance and Care”). Use the manual lever 2 to recline the seatback. 3 Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch 1 forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch 1 when the desired position is reached. On some versions, the passenger seat can be adjusted front- and rearward manually. In order to adjust the seat forward or rearward, push the lever 3 located below the seat cushion and manually move the seat forward or rearward. Release the lever once you have reached the desired position. Seat Up/Down Adjustment The height of the seat can be adjusted up- or downward. Grip switch 1 from the back side and push it down or up. Release the switch 1 when the desired position is reached. Head Restraints Adjustment To manually lift or lower the head restraints press the indicated lateral button. WARNING! Remember that the headrests must be positioned so that their upper edge is aligned with the top of the occupant’s head. In fact, only in this position can they provide the support required in the event of a bumper-to-tail collision. 93 Understanding the Vehicle Power Lumbar (optional) Power Lumbar (optional)Push the switch 4 forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch 4 upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support. 3 Seat Tilt Control (Up/Down) The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push the front of the switch 1 , to move the front cushion seat in the direction of the switch. Release the switch 1 when the desired position is reached. Seat Back Manual Control The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever 2 , then push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever 2 to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. 94 In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! Do not travel with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Front Heated Seats (optional) WARNING! • Never adjust the seat while driving. You could lose control of the vehicle. Moving the seat could distract you or make you press a pedal unintentionally. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. • Do not travel with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. The front seats can be equipped with heaters in both seat cushions and seatbacks. The front seats heating is operated by the MTC+ System. The seats comfort commands are in the “Climate” screen of the MTC+. They are present in the "Climate" screen even when the A/C is off. See “Air Conditioning Controls” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further details. When the MTC+ System is in any mode other than “Climate” (Radio”, “Media”, “Controls”, etc.) the icons of the active front seats comfort functions will be indicated on the upper part of the display. Understanding the Vehicle WARNING! • Persons with low skin sensitivity because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions must be careful when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. • Within 15 seconds, touch the driver or passenger seat soft-key a second time to select LO-level heating. • Touch the “Climate” soft-key on the lower part of the MTC+ display. • Starting from the state “OFF”, indicated below the respective icon, within 15 seconds touch the driver or passenger seat soft-key once to select HI-level heating. 3 Front Ventilated Seats (optional) Front Seats Heat Function NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. level during the first 4 minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LOlevel after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will indicate the change from HI to LO. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of approximately 45 minutes. • Within 15 seconds, touch the same soft-key a third time to shut off the seat heating. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within 2 to 5 minutes. When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat To enhance occupants comfort by high external temperatures, both the driver and passenger seats, on request, can be ventilated. Small fans are located in the seat cushion and seatback, they draw air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler when the temperature is high. The ventilated seats are operated with the MTC+ System. The seats comfort commands are in the “Climate” screen of the MTC+. They are present in the “Climate” screen even when the A/C is off. See 95 Understanding the Vehicle 3 “Air Conditioning Controls” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further details. When the MTC+ System is in any mode other than “Climate” (Radio”, “Media”, “Controls”, etc.) the icons of the active front seats comfort functions will be indicated on the upper part of the display. • Within 15 seconds, touch the driver or passenger seat soft-key a second time to select LO-level ventilation. Front Ventilated Seats Function NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate. • Touch the “Climate” soft-key on the lower part of the MTC+ display. • Starting from the state “OFF” , indicated below the respective icon, within 15 seconds touch the driver or passenger seat soft-key once to select HI-level ventilation. • Within 15 seconds, touch the same soft-key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation. Driver Memory Seat (for versions/markets, where provided) This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat, external side mirrors, adjustable pedals (optional), and power tilt and telescopic steering column and a set of programmed radio stations. Your key fob RKE transmitter can also be set to recall the same positions by pressing the button. NOTE: • Only one key fob RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions. • “Passive Entry” door handles cannot be linked to the memory function. Use either the memory recall switch or the key fob RKE transmitter (if linked to the memory feature) to recall memory positions 1 or 2. The memory seat switch is located on the driver's door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: • The “S” (SET) button, which is used to activate the memory save function. 96 Understanding the Vehicle • The “1” and “2” buttons which are used to recall either of two programmed memory profiles. • Check on the instrument cluster for the positive response of the actions “Memory 1 (or 2) profile set”. After these steps, the profile set will be memorized in the selected position. NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in P (Park), but the vehicle must be in P (Park) to recall a memory profile Pairing Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Seats Memory Memory Profiles Setting NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory To create a new memory profile, perform the following: • Cycle the ignition device to the ACC or RUN position. • Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (optional), power tilt and telescopic steering column, and radio station presets). • Press and release the “S” button on the memory switch. • Within 5 seconds, press and release the memory button “1” or “2”. Your key fob with RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two programmed memory profiles by pressing the button on the RKE transmitter. NOTE: This feature can be enabled or disabled using the MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. To programme your key fobs RKE transmitter, perform the following actions: • Cycle the ignition device to the ACC or RUN position. • Move the seat and/or the other adjustable devices in the position that you wish to memorize, or recall a previously memorized profile, pressing the corresponding memory button “1” or “2”. • Cycle the ignition device to the OFF position. • Press and release the “S” button. • Within 5 seconds, press and release the memory button “1” or “2”. • Press and release the button on key fob RKE transmitter. • Within 3 seconds, press and release the button on the key fob RKE transmitter. To check if the system has memorized the correct profile, you can move the seat and press the button: the seat will move to the memorized position. 3 NOTE: Your key fobs RKE transmitter can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the “S” button followed by the button on the key fob RKE transmitter. Memory Position Recall NOTE: The vehicle must be in P (Park) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in P (Park), a message will display in the instrument cluster. 97 Understanding the Vehicle 3 To recall the memory settings for driver, press memory button number “1” or “2” on the driver's door trim panel or the button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position “1” or “2” with ignition device in the RUN position. A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the buttons (“S”, “1”, or “2”) during a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, external side mirrors, adjustable pedals (optional), and power tilt and telescopic steering column stop moving. A delay of at least one second will occur before selecting a new recall. Easy Entry/Exit Driver Seat (optional) This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you place the ignition device to the OFF position. • When you cycle the ignition device to the OFF position the driver seat: - will move about 60 mm (2.36 in) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to ca. 140 98 mm (5.51 in) forward of the rear stop; - will move to a position of ca. 80 mm (3.15 in) rearward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 140 mm (5.51 in) and 80 mm (3.15 in) forward of the rear stop. • The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition device into the ACC or RUN position. • The Easy Entry/Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 80 mm (3.15 in) forward of the rear stop. In this position, there would be no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry. Each stored memory setting will have an associated easy entry/exit position. NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature can be enabled or disabled using the MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. Rear Seats Rear seats can fit three passengers. Seats and seat belts are parts of the occupant restraint system of the vehicle. WARNING! Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. NOTE: See chapter “Occupants Restraint Systems” in section “Before Starting” for seat belt positioning. Rear Seat Folding Seatback The 60/40 split-folding seatback of the rear seat provides for a recliner feature with three available fixed positions that can be set using the lever on seat external side. The LH lever tilts the long part (60), while the RH lever tilts the shorter one (40). The less tilted position (90°) is the one most suitable when a child seat must be installed; the other positions tilt the seatback toward the liftgate up to 23°. To tilt the seatback, lift the lever from its rest position 0 to position 1 while pushing the seatback to the back until reaching the required position. When releasing the lever, the fixed positions Understanding the Vehicle will be acknowledged by lever control cable clicking in place to lock. Ensure that seatback is fastened to the position by trying to move it back and forth. Lever control cable locks also when fully folding the seatback down on the seat. To move the seatback in another position, lift lever in position 1 and hold it up until bringing seatback to the new fixed position, which is acknowledged by the cable locking in place when releasing the lever. seatback could cause severe injuries in case of accident. • When fastening a child seat on external rear seats, ensure that the corresponding seatback is duly locked in the less tilted position. • To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. NOTE: Rear seat backrest can be fully folded to increase luggage space. See “Cargo Area” in this section for further details. Rear Head Restraints The seat head restraints are adjustable in height. NOTE: When there are no occupants in the seat, lowered the head restraint in order to provide the driver for maximum visibility. See label on the fixed side windows, shown in the picture. 3 • To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the foot of the head restraint on the left side, and push downward on the head restraint. WARNING! • Ensure the seatback is always locked in one of the fixed positions before fastening the rear seat belts. An unlocked seatback cannot ensure the necessary stability for passengers and/or for child seats. An unlocked 99 Understanding the Vehicle CAUTION! The armrest is not designed to support the weight of an adult or a child: please use it only to store beverages or small objects. 3 Rear Armrest The rear armrest is mobile and can be folded up into the seatback. • To lower it, pull the stripe as indicated. NOTE: Seatback panel behind armrest features an opening allowing you to carry long objects or ski bags with no need to fold the seatback. See “Cargo Area” in this section for further details. Rear Side Heated Seats (optional) The side rear seats can be equipped with heaters both in seat cushion and seatback. Rear seats heating can be adjusted by operating control devices on the trim panel of each rear door. WARNING! • Persons with low skin sensitivity • To close it, pull it upwards then push it back into its seat. On the front part of the armrest there are two cup holders (see “Interior Features” in this section). 100 because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions must be careful when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. The switch on the trim panel with the resistance icon activates the heating on the corresponding seat. • Push the switch once to select the highest heating level. The two upper LEDs on the switch will illuminate. • Push the same switch a second time to select the lowest level. Only one LED will illuminate. • Push the same switch a third time to shut the heating elements off. The LED will turn off. Understanding the Vehicle NOTE: • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. • The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. By selecting the HI-level setting, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. By setting the HI-level, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after a maximum of approximately 45 minutes. Steering Wheel Adjustment This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward or to lengthen or shorten it in order to adjust the steering wheel to an optimised position. Steering wheel adjustment can be manual or electric. Manual Adjustment The tilt/telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. To unlock the steering column, push the control handle downward . To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position , pull the control handle upward until fully engaged. 3 Power Adjustment The power tilt/telescoping steering column/wheel switch is located on the lower left side of the steering column. To adjust the tilt of the steering column/wheel, move the switch up or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column/wheel, pull the switch toward you or push the switch away from you as desired. 101 Understanding the Vehicle NOTE: You can use your key fob with RKE transmitter or the memory buttons on the driver's door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column/wheel to programmed positions. See “Driver Memory Seat” in this section. 3 WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column/wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering column/wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering column/wheel is adjusted before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Heated Steering Wheel (optional) The steering wheel contains a heating element inside the rim that helps warm driver’s hands by cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once turned on, this function will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off. 102 The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm. The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using the MTC+ System. The heating steering wheel command is in the “Climate” screen of MTC+. It is present in the “Climate” screen even when the A/C is off. See “Air Conditioning Controls” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further details. When the MTC+ System is in any mode other than “ Climate” (“Radio”, “Media”, “Controls”, etc.) the icon of the heated steering wheel will be indicated on the upper part of the display. • Within 15 seconds, touch the heated steering wheel soft-key to turn on the function. NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate. • Touch the “Climate” soft-key located on the lower part of the MTC+ display. • When the heating function is in the off state, soft-key is not highlighted. • Within 15 seconds, touch the heated steering wheel soft-key a second time to turn it off. Understanding the Vehicle WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. Adjustable Pedals (for versions/markets, where provided) The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow greater range of pedals positions enabling driver comfort with regard to the steering wheel tilt and the seat position. This feature allows the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver’s feet. The switch is located on the front side of the driver's seat cushion shield. WARNING! Do not adjust the pedals position while the vehicle is moving. You could lose control and have an accident. Always adjust the pedals position while the vehicle is parked. The following messages will be displayed if the driver is attempting to adjust the pedals when the system is locked out: • “Adjustable Pedals Unavailable While Reversing”; • or “Adjustable Pedals Unavailable While Cruise Engaged”. 3 NOTE: For vehicles equipped with driver memory seat, use your key fob (RKE) transmitter or the memory buttons on the driver's door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to programmed positions. See “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for further information. Press the switch downward to move the pedals forward (toward the front of the vehicle). Lift the switch upward to move the pedals rearward (toward the driver). CAUTION! Do not place any object under the adjustable pedals or obstruct their movements as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal movement 103 Understanding the Vehicle may become limited if there is an obstruction in the adjustable pedal's. 3 Rear View Mirrors External Mirrors External mirrors can be adjusted electrically and are equipped with anti-mist resistors operated by the air conditioning system (see “Air Conditioning Controls” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). The mirrors can be closed electrically and will yield in both directions in case of a collision. The external mirrors are electrochromic (for versions/markets where provided), which means, they automatically operate an anti-dazzle function by gradually shading as the light hitting the mirrors increases. The external rearview electrochromic mirrors work in conjunction with the internal rearview electrochromic mirror. NOTE: • The mirrors can be adjusted electrically only with the ignition device in ACC and RUN position. • When the vehicle is started, the warning light shown in the picture will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear-view mirrors to let the 104 driver know that the BSA system (optional) is operational. For more details see chapter “Blind Spot Assist - BSA” in section “Driving”. The external of the rear-view mirror support is equipped with LEDs, lighting up when the turn signals and vehicle entry/exit lights are activated. When the surround view camera system is installed, at the external bottom side of the rear-view mirror is the side view camera (refer to “Surround View Camera System” in section “Before Starting”). Mirrors Positioning The power mirror controls are located on the driver's door trim panel. The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. Understanding the Vehicle the adjacent lane and get a partial overlap with the visible image on the inside rear-view mirror. Power mirror preselected positions can be reset by operating the optional Memory Driver Seat device. Check “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for further information. WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the external side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Use the inside mirror to judge the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the external side convex mirror. To adjust a rear-view mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust. The spin button will illuminate indicating the rear-view mirror is activated and can be adjusted. Press the mirror control switch corresponding to the arrow indicating the direction of the desired movement. For optimal vision orientate the outside(s) mirror(s) in order to frame Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse This feature provides automatic external rear-view mirrors positioning, allowing the driver to view the ground area behind the front doors. The external mirrors will move slightly downward from the current position when the shift lever is shifted into reverse. The external mirrors will then return to the original position when the lever is shifted out of the reverse position. Each memory set of the driver's seat (see "Driver Memory Seat" chapter in this section) corresponds to a mirror tilt position in reverse. NOTE: The mirrors tilt in reverse can be turned on and off using the MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”. Folding Mirrors By selecting this feature on MTC+ the rear-view mirrors automatically fold when the vehicle is locked by the key fob and when the power liftgate (if equipped) is closed and locked by pressing the button on the outer ledge of the left boot compartment lining. When the vehicle and the liftgate will be unlocked and the ignition device is set in RUN position, the rear-view mirrors will automatically open in the position they had before the lock. The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches. 3 105 Understanding the Vehicle • If the mirrors are automatically folded after the last lock action, then they will automatically unfold when the ignition device is set on ACC or RUN position. • If the mirrors were manually folded by the switch on the driver's door panel, before a lock action, they will need to be manually unfolded to reactivate the automatic function. 3 CAUTION! Never retract or open the mirrors manually: it could damage the power mechanism. Internal Rear-View Mirror Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in; press the switch a second time to reset the mirrors to the standard position. There is a way to make external mirrors automatically fold/unfold. • If the function is available, it needs to be activated by MTC+ (refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). 106 The position of internal rearview mirror can be manually adjusted, and is endowed with an accidentprevention release system operating in the event of a collision. Internal rear-view mirror is electrochromic (for versions/markets where provided): this glare function is automatically deactivated in reverse to ensure maximum visibility of obstacles. CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. “Mirror Dimmer” Feature The auto-dimming feature can be disabled or re-enabled by pressing the on/off button on the mirror base. Typical case is at night when the auto-dimming can be excessive (low reflectance). Disabling this feature will increase the reflectance of the internal mirror, increasing visibility. Understanding the Vehicle Lights Light Switch The light switch located on the left side of the dashboard is used for the position/DRL lights, headlights, side marker, licence plate lights, front and rear fog lights operation. NOTE: • In certain European countries, the position lights will only operate with the ignition switch in OFF position, or with front fog lights and headlights on. Regardless of ignition switch position, the position/DRL lights will remain on as long as the lights switch is in position. • If the headlights or position/DRL lights are on after the ignition switch is placed in OFF position, a buzzer will alert the driver while opening the driver's door to exit the car. 3 Rotate the light switch to the or to the position: the instrument cluster will display the related telltale. 107 Understanding the Vehicle The following table shows the on/off condition of external lights, according to the ignition device position, to the engine status, to the twilight sensor mode and to the light switch position. 3 Ignition Device Position Engine Status Twilight Sensor Mode OFF – – Position lights (1), side marker and license plate lights on (4). All lights off. Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on. ACC Off – Position lights (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2). All lights off. Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2). RUN Off – Position lights (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2). All lights off. Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on (2). RUN On DAY DRL (1) on. DRL (1) on. Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on. RUN On NIGHT Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on (3). Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on. Low beams, position (1), side marker and license plate lights on. Light Switch Position AUTO (1) The lighting system uses the same LED for DRL and front position lights with two different levels of intensity: high for DRL and low for position lights. (2) The lights are powered up for 30 minutes to preserve the charge of the battery. (3) In some countries a message on TFT display alerts the user to use position when parking because the position lights will turn on with engine started also in low ambient light conditions or at night. (4) To preserve the charge of the battery, do not leave these lights on for a long time. 108 Understanding the Vehicle Automatic Headlights This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light intensity detected by the twilight sensor positioned on the inner surface of the windshield, over the rear view mirror. To turn the system on, rotate the lights switch clockwise to “AUTO” position. When the automatic system is activated, the headlight time delay feature is activated as well. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition device into OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the lights switch out of “AUTO” position. NOTE: The engine must be running and the twilight sensor in “NIGHT” mode before the headlights turn on in automatic mode. WARNING! The responsibility for turning on the lights, depending on the daylight and regulations in force in the country of use, always lies with the driver. The automatic system for switching on and off the external lights is to be considered as an aid for the driver. If necessary, switch the lights including front and rear fog lights on and off manually. Headlights On with Wipers When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on in “adverse weather beam” mode approximately 10 seconds after activation of the wipers, if the lights switch is placed in the “AUTO” position. The headlights will additionally turn off by deactivation of the wipers if previously activated with this function. NOTE: The headlights with wipers feature may be turned on and off using the MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”. Headlights Time Delay This safety feature provides headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area. To activate automatically the delay feature with the light switch in “AUTO” position, place the ignition switch in the OFF or ACC position while the headlights are still on. The delay interval begins when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC position. To activate manually the delay feature the headlights must be on before place the ignition switch in the OFF or ACC position and the light switch in “AUTO” position. If you place the ignition in RUN , the system will cancel the delay. 3 NOTE: • To activate this feature the light switch must be turned in “AUTO” position within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF or ACC position. • Once the delay feature is active, any additional shifting of the light switch will cancel the feature. • The headlight delay time is programmable using the MTC+ System, see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instrument and Controls”. • If the low beam bulbs/LEDs are active due to “Headlights with Wipers”, than the headlamps delay feature will not be activated when the ignition switch is set in OFF position. 109 Understanding the Vehicle SmartBeam™ System (for versions/markets, where provided) 3 110 The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward lighting for a more comfortable and secure driving experience without glaring other vehicles in several traffic situations. The SmartBeam™ system uses a forward facing digital camera, located on the windshield behind the internal rear-view mirror, and an electronical headlights controller in order to dynamically adapt the front light distribution according to the traffic scenario. The digital camera works like a human eye, it is able to see which is the traffic context while the headlight electronic controller works like a human brain, using information from the camera to command an headlight reaction that gives to the driver the “best” light distribution (best is always in reference to the specific traffic environment). The camera gives information to the electronical headlight controller about environmental brightness, traffic participants vehicle and obstacles lights, distances and velocities. Using a proper combination of all these data the smart beam system is able to dynamically modify the light shape produced by the dipped beam and by the full beam as well, to make the driver visibility as much comfortable as possible in every condition without glaring other traffic participants. System Limitations There are some cases in which the SmartBeam™ system could not properly work temporarily causing glaring for other vehicles especially with “Auto High Beam Assist” feature activated on MTC+ “Controls” page (see “MTC+ “Controls” Screen” in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). These cases could be related to: • Vehicles headlight and/or rear light (one or both of them) not visible in the field of view of the camera. • Heavy rainy weather. • Heavy foggy weather. • Snowing weather. • Windshield dirt or impurities in camera lens zone. • Camera lens obstruction or logging. In all these cases, it will be driver’s responsibility to avoid this glaring by acting manually on the system, switching off the high beam by means of steering wheel multifunction lever. Daytime Running Lights (DRL) The lighting system uses the same high or low intensity headlamps LED, respectively, for the DRL lights and front position lights. DRL lights will turn on when the twilight sensor is in “DAY” mode, the engine is running and the light switch is in or “AUTO” position. If a turn signal is activated, the DRL LED on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is deactivated, the DRL LED will light up again. NOTE: Depending on your Country’s regulations, DRL lights may be turned on and off. Bi-Xenon Headlight (for headlights without AFS) The gas-discharge (xenon) headlights operate with an electric arc saturated with Xenon gas under pressure, instead of the incandescent filament. The light produced is assuredly higher compared to traditional light bulbs, in terms of quality (brighter light) as well as of the span and positioning of the illuminated area. Understanding the Vehicle WARNING! If xenon headlamp replacement is necessary, contact the Service Network only: DANGER - RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. Headlight with AFS (for versions/markets, where provided) These headlamps combines the “xeno” technology to the AFS (Advanced Frontlighting System) adaptive features, using a forward-facing camera located on the windshield behind the internal rear-view mirror. The system is able to process signals of the forward-facing camera and other onboard systems and subsequently start up five strategic steps in the following situations: • “motorway beam”; • “country beam”; • “town beam”; • “adverse weather beam”; • “tourist beam” (for example in countries with circulation on the opposite side). In this case this function must be activated via the menu of MTC+ (refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). The advantages offered by the AFS system are perceived especially in case of bad weather, fog and/or insufficient road indications providing broader illumination of the side zones, which are normally left in the dark, and for motorway driving (see comparison rendered below). This surely increases driving safety as it offers less eye strain and increased orientation for the driver and better detection of other persons on the road sides (pedestrians, bicycle riders and motorcycle drivers). Furthermore, the headlamps are suitable to prevent glare, providing optimal lighting when driving the car in a country with circulation on the opposite side. The tables show the light values (lux) and the light flux (lumen) of the low and high beam of AFS headlights. Lighting (A) Low beam 75 lux High beam 130 lux (B) Motorway 120 lux (Driver Side) 140 lux (Passenger Side) Light flux (A) Low beam 1200 lm High beam 1600 lm Light flux (B) Motorway 1200 lm The picture shows the low beam distribution on the road with the indication of the brightness increase in the “motorway beam” condition (B) compared to normal condition (A). 3 Combining a bending mode and a vertical adjustment, the system assures better visibility of the road surface when driving in a curve, steering, or in the event of road deviations, optimizing vertical and horizontal light distribution according to the current drive path. The increased lateral illumination is gained through a fixed bending light or a cornering light (depending on the market) elaborating information about the steering angle, the vehicle speed and the turn indicator. 111 Understanding the Vehicle The improved vertical illumination, in case of fast acceleration and/or fast deceleration, will assure the deeper illuminated distance from the vehicle, through a dynamical adaptation of headlight vertical attitude. 3 NOTE: • Each time the adaptive headlight system is turned on, the headlights will perform a self-adjustment cycle. • All AFS features are available only if the vehicle is moving forward. • “Adaptive Front Light” function can be turned on or off using the MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instrument and Controls” for further information. “Full-LED” Headlight with AFS (optional) Other advantages are: • a clearer light beam, with a cool white tone that allows a better perception of the contrasts thus making the night vision more efficient and less tiring; • a longer duration equivalent at least to that of the vehicle; • a reduced current consumption. These features positively affect some vehicle management economy aspects by eliminating/reducing the light bulb replacements and the fuel consumption. The picture shows the increased brightness of the low beam of standard halogen headlights (A) compared to those Full-LED (B) in the “motorway beam” mode. These headlights combines the “FullLED” technology to the AFS (Advanced Frontlighting System) adaptive features, using a forward-facing camera located on the windshield behind the internal rear-view mirror. “Full-LED” Technology This technology allows having headlights with a simpler construction and a more compact size compared to those equipped with traditional or Xenon light bulbs. 112 AFS Features The system is able to process signals of onboard systems and subsequently start up five strategic steps in the following situations: • “motorway beam”; • “country beam”; • “town beam”; • “adverse weather beam”; • “tourist beam” (for example in countries with circulation on the opposite side). In this case this function must be activated via the menu of MTC+ (refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). The advantages offered by the AFS system are perceived especially in case of bad weather, fog and/or insufficient road indications providing broader illumination of the side zones, which are normally left in the dark, and for motorway driving. This surely increases driving safety as it offers less eye stress and increased orientation for the driver and better detection of other persons on the road sides (pedestrians, bicycle riders and motorcycle drivers). Furthermore, the headlamps are suitable to prevent glare, providing optimal lighting when driving the car in a country with circulation on the opposite side. The table shows the light values (lux) and the light flux (lumen) of AFS headlights. Understanding the Vehicle NOTE: The values reported in the tables may change depending on the destination market of the car. Lighting (at 25 m/27 yd) Low beam 55 lux Low beam (low speed) 43 lux Low beam (high speed) 58 lux Low beam (wet road) 42 lux High beam 150 lux Light flux Low beam 765 lm Low beam (low speed) 600 lm Low beam (high speed) 800 lm Low beam (wet road) 790 lm High beam 1440 lm The system assures better visibility of the road surface when driving in a curve, steering, or in the event of road deviations, optimizing vertical light distribution according to the current drive path. The increased lateral illumination is gained through a fixed bending light or a cornering light (depending on the market) elaborating information about the steering angle, the vehicle speed and the turn indicator. The improved vertical illumination, in case of fast acceleration and/or fast deceleration, will assure the deeper illuminated distance from the vehicle, through a dynamical adaptation of headlight vertical attitude. NOTE: • Each time the adaptive headlight system is turned on, the headlights adjustment will perform a selfadjustment cycle. • All AFS features are available only if the vehicle is moving forward. • “Adaptive Front Light” function can be turned on or off using the MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instrument and Controls” for further information. AFS System Failure In the event of AFS system unvailable, the related warning light and message will light up on the TFT display. Take your vehicle to the nearest Center of the Service Network as soon as possible to check the system. 3 Automatic High Beam (for versions/markets, where provided) The Automatic High Beam headlight control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of the forward-facing digital camera located behind the rear-view mirror, which is the same one used for example by the Lane Keeping Assist - LKA system on vehicles with ADAS systems. This camera detects the environmental luminosity, the headlamps of oncoming vehicles and the tail lamps of proceding vehicles in the front area. In these cases system automatically switches from high beams to low 113 Understanding the Vehicle 3 beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. Futhermore, the digital camera is able to detect the urban areas and the inhabited centers and to turn off the high beams when driving near of one of them. The properly working for this feature (if all the other conditions are met) is ensured between 35 km/h (21.7 mph) and 250 km/h (155 mph). Activation Mode To activate Automatic High Beam feature: • Shift the multifunction lever onward . • Put the light switch in “AUTO” position. • Touch the "Controls" soft-key in the (Apps) page of lower part of the MTC+ display. • Within 15 seconds, touch the "Auto High Beam Assist" soft-key to turn on the feature. 114 Without ADAS With ADAS • Within 15 seconds, touch the "Auto High Beam Assist" soft-key a second time to turn it off. After these steps, the green indicator on the upper right side of the TFT display comes on. NOTE: • The function is enabled only if the brightness sensor detects the right lighting conditions and them switch to low beam on. • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly. Automatic High Beam Failure In the event of an automatic high beam system failure, the related amber warning light will light up on the TFT display. Take your vehicle to the nearest Center of the Service Network as soon as possible avoiding to use this system. Understanding the Vehicle The no glaring system is a multishadow system, since it’s able to create up to four light tunnels simultaneously, each tunnel zone is as large as the obstacle that should not be glared. The figure represents an example of the car that is travelling in the following scenarios: High Beam with “Glare Free” Feature (for “Full-LED” headlight with AFS) The "Glare Free" feature associated with "Full-LED" headlamps assists the driver during traveling on an off-city road with not sufficient environmental illumination allowing the high beam use also with other traffic participants without glaring disturbance. The no glaring effect is obtained through matrixes of LED that are dynamically switched on and off in order to create a shadow zone in correspondence of each other traffic participants lights (motor vehicles and bicycles, as well), according to the information about other vehicles’ lights coming from the forwardfacing digital camera located on the windshield, behind the internal rear-view mirror. 1 2 3 two vehicles ahead in the same direction; another vehicle that is overtaking; another vehicle proceeding in the opposite direction. The system is able to detect and react to an oncoming vehicle starting from a distance of about 400 m (400 yd), in a couple of seconds. Instead, in case of the preceding vehicles, the system is able to detect and react in few seconds starting from a distance of about 100 m (100 yd). Activation Mode The digital camera is the same used for the automatic high beam, and like automatic high beam also for "Glare Free" feature it needs to be activated by MTC+ “Controls” screen, touching the “Auto High Beam Assist” soft-key, as shown in the previous paragraph "Automatic High Beams". The “Glare Free” feature will be engaged after the following actions: • Engine run. • Feature enabled by MTC+. • Low beam on. • Interior light switch in position “Auto”. • Multifunction lever in “High beam” activated position. The “Glare Free” feature will work if: • The vehicle speed is equal or greater than 35 km/h (21.7 mph) in the engagement phase of the feature. • Environmental brightness is not sufficient for a safe and comfortable drive. • Traffic scenario out of urban context. Once the system will be active, there will be two indicators on the instrument cluster, showed in the same time: one blue and one green. 3 115 Understanding the Vehicle 3 The green indicator indicates that the “Auto High Beam Assist” feature is activated on MTC+; the blue indicator indicates that all or only some high beam LEDs are physically on in that moment. When instead there is the needing to switch off the whole high beam module to obtain the no glaring effect, on the instrument cluster there will be just one indicator on: the green one. When the scenario allows the partial or full use of high beam with no glaring disturbance, the blue indicator will appear again. NOTE: • Some unpredictable conditions, such as dirt, dust, film or any other obstruction on camera lens zone events could affect “Glare 116 Free” feature making it working improperly. • Heavy rainy and foggy weather could affect system performance, leaving the full beam switched on for longer time than the nominal working condition. This could cause a glaring disturbance for other vehicles, to avoid this the driver has to switch off the high beam manually. • In phase of disengagement of the feature, the minimum operating speed is 25 km/h (15.5 mph). • “Glare Free” feature proper operation is guaranteed if vehicle speed is less than, or at least equal to 250 km/h (155 mph). Automatic High Beams/Glare Free High Beams Failure In the event of a failure on high beam system (Automatic or Glare Free equipped, as well), the related amber warning light will light up on the TFT display. Take your vehicle to the nearest Center of the Service Network as soon as possible avoiding to use this system. Fog Lights NOTE: The front fog lights can only be switched on if the position lights are switched on. It is possible to turn on the rear fog lights only if the low beam lights or the front fog lights are on. The front and rear fog lights switch is built into the light switch. The front and rear fog lights turn on and off in the following order: • press the lights switch once to turn on the front fog lights; • press the light switch a second time to turn on the rear fog lights (front fog lights will stay on); • from this condition, press the light switch again to turn off the rear fog lights (front fog lights will stay on); Understanding the Vehicle • press the light switch again to turn off the front fog lights. 3 The green indicator in the instrument cluster display illuminates when the front fog lights are turned on. NOTE: After a key-off/key-on cycle, the front fog lights will activate automatically when turning on the position lights . The rear fog lights will only turn on by operating as previously described. The left or right arrow on the speedometer and tachometer instrument cluster respectively, flashes to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. Multifunction Lever The amber indicator inside the tachometer of the instrument cluster illuminates when the rear fog lights are turned on. The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection, overtaking lights, wipers and washers acting on the windshield and on the liftgate (for this content see the chapter “Wipers and Washers” of this section). The multifunction lever is fitted on the left side of the steering column. Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever all the way up or down until the stop triggers. 117 Understanding the Vehicle High Beams and Flashing To switch on the high beams with the light switch in headlamp or “AUTO” position, shift the multifunction lever onward. The blue telltale will illuminate on the tachometer. You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released. 3 To activate lane change function, tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent. The turn signals (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. This function is useful when overtaking or changing lanes. NOTE: • If either light remains on and does not flash, or flashes at a fast rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator on the instrument cluster fails while moving the lever, then the indicator bulb is probably defective. • The message that a turn signal is on will appear in the instrument cluster and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1.6 km (1 mile) with either turn signal on. 118 Flashing occurs also with lights off if the ignition switch is RUN position. By pulling the lever backward (toward the steering wheel) you switch off the high beams and switch on the low beams. CAUTION! The high beams can only be switched on manually by pushing the multifunction lever forward. WARNING! If the high beams have been switched on, they will turn on automatically every time the low beams are switched on either manually or automatically. We recommend therefore that you switch them off Understanding the Vehicle when they are no longer necessary and every time the twilight sensor deactivates the external lights. • “Backlighting” (example shown in figure). • “Ambient Lighting”. Interior Lights The interior and external approach lights turn on and off when entering/exiting the vehicle (see “Illuminated Entry/Exit” in section “Before Starting” for further information). To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been shifted to OFF. This occurs if the interior lights were turned on manually or by opening a door. The glove box light, on the dashboard, shares the same characteristics excepting the boot and liftgate lights. When the ignition switch is out of OFF, the light switch can be in any position, and the system is in “NIGHT” mode (detected by the RLS solar sensor) the backlight brightness of controls and instruments can be adjusted by means of the buttons on steering wheel righthand side, enter “Vehicle settings” menu and select “Interior Lighting” sub-menu. Press and release the switch ( ) to visualize the available parameters: Press and release the switch ( ) to select the option. A selection notice pops up for 2 seconds and then the display reverts to the last modified parameter. 3 Use arrow or to scroll the list of parameters that can be adjusted and confirm selection by pressing and releasing switch ( ): available options will be shown on the display. A check mark will remain next to the previously-selected item until a new selection is made. The dimmable lights are the following: • instrument cluster dials and display; • dome light (front/rear); • LED in correspondence of the internal door handle; • doors and steering wheel backlight controls LED; • front footrest light; • front seats night lighting. 119 Understanding the Vehicle The vehicle is equipped with a system that automatically adjusts headlight levelling according to ground clearance and vehicle load conditions. Dome Lights 3 Automatic Headlights Levelling A correct headlights levelling is crucial for the safety of the vehicle’s occupants and of people in the street. Moreover it is included in the road regulation law. In order to obtain the best visibility conditions while driving with headlights on, the headlight beam must be properly levelled, under any vehicle load condition. 120 The dome lights integrated into the front dome console, include a central and two reading lights. The central light automatically turns on when one of the doors is opened and turns off when the door is closed (timed switching off). The light may be switched on manually by pressing the central button. The reading lights are controlled by the respective side buttons. If they are turned on by pressing the button, both central and reading lights will stay on for about 10 minutes after turning the engine off, and will then turn off gradually. When the exterior lights are switched on, the two night LEDs fitted on the side of the power buttons on the overhead console will light up to facilitate the use of the transmission lever and the central console. If one or more doors are opened, the front and rear dome lights will turn on for 27 seconds. If the door is closed before this time, the lights will dim and subsequently switch off after about 3 seconds. NOTE: The dome lights will also turn on by pressing the or button for centralized doors unlock and lock on the key fob RKE transmitter. See “Illuminated Entry/Exit” section “Before Starting” for further information. In the event of a collision causing automatic interruption of fuel supply, the dome lights switch on automatically and remain lit for approx. 15 minutes. Understanding the Vehicle NOTE: The controls of the sunroof, the HomeLink and the button to switch off Park Assist system can be found on the front dome console. when liftgate is opened and turn off when it is closed. A light is available on the roof, under the sun visors; it turns on when user moves the courtesy mirror cover, which is built in the back of sun visor. 3 Button to Switch off Passenger Compartment Lights In addition to specific switches to turn on and off the dome lights as previously described, on the front console there is a button that allows to turn off all these lights. Apart the lights on the front dome console, there is a light with relevant on/off switch located next to the passenger handholds for the external rear seats. These lights will operate only when the ignition device is in the ACC or RUN position. If liftgate is left open for a long time, lights will turn off after 30 minutes to save battery charge. Hazard Warning Lights Cargo Lights To illuminate the cargo area there are two lights on liftgate and two more inside the boot. These lights turn on Press the indicated button on the centre of the central console to turn on the hazard warning lights. The operation is independent of the ignition device position. 121 Understanding the Vehicle Wipers and Washers Press the button again to turn them off. When these lights are on, the direction indicators, the related arrow indicator on the instrument cluster and the button itself will flash. 3 NOTE: When the hazard warning lights are activated, the direction indicators control is disabled. The LED turn signal indicators flash simultaneously with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the hazard warning lights will also activate these LEDs. The external mirrors can be equipped also with approach and courtesy LEDs (optional), lighting up when the vehicle entry/exit lights are activated. The multifunction lever operates the wipers and washers acting on the windshield and on the window of the liftgate when the ignition switch is placed in RUN or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. The windshield washer and headlight washer (if foreseen) share the same fluid reservoir, and a low fluid level is indicated by the same warning light and by the message on the instrument cluster. Integrated External Rear-View Mirror Lights External mirrors are supplied with LED turn signals integrated on the support. 122 To refill the fluid, see “Maintenance Procedures” in section “Maintenance and Care”. Understanding the Vehicle CAUTION! • Turn the washer acting on the windshield and on the window of the liftgate wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. The windshield wipers may be damaged if the wiper control is left in any position other than “OFF”. • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield and/or to the window of the liftgate, the wiper motor may be damaged when the vehicle is restarted. • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, the wiper motor may be damaged. Windshield Wipers • Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the four settings to activate the automatic intermittent setting (see “Rain Sensing Wipers” paragraph in this chapter). • For low speed wiper operation (stable position "LO"): rotate the end of the multifunction control lever forward to the first trigger after the intermittent setting. • Rotate to the second trigger after the intermittent setting for high-speed (stable position HI) wiper operation. • Rotate the end of the lever backward to the “MIST” position to activate a single wipe cycle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever. • To turn the wipers off rotate the lever to “OFF”. Rain Sensing Windshield Wipers (for versions/markets, where provided) This feature detects moisture on the windshield through an internal rearview mirror integrated sensor, which automatically activates the relative wipers. Rotate forward the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to adjust the detection system. First wiper delay position is the least sensitive, and fourth wiper delay position is the most sensitive. Third position should be used for normal rain conditions. The rain sense wipers will automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of detected moisture sensed by a particular area of the windshield. Place the wiper switch in the “OFF” position when you do not want to use the automatic intermittent system. The rain sensing feature can be turned on and off using the MTC+ System, see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. 3 CAUTION! • The rain sensing feature may not function properly due to ice or dried salt water on the windshield. 123 Understanding the Vehicle • Use on the windshield of RainX® or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance. 3 The rain sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the following conditions: • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit : the rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is in RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 0°C. To resume, set the automatic feature on the multifunction lever, start the engine and drive or wait until the outside temperature rises above freezing. • Wipe Inhibit with Transmission in Neutral Position : the rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the transmission shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position and the vehicle speed is less than 8 km/h (5 mph). To resume, set the multifunction lever to the automatic function or move the shift lever out of N (Neutral). Headlights On with Windshield Wipers When activating this function, the headlights will light up approximately 10 seconds after the wipers acting 124 on the windshield are turned on if the light switch is placed in “AUTO” position. In addition, the headlights switch off when the wipers are turned off (position “OFF”) if they were previously turned by using this function. Powering on Headlights with wipers can be activated and deactivated with the MTC+ System, see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. Wipers Blades Maintenance When the wiper arms acting on the windshield are in the rest position it is not possible to check or replace the blades (Service position) as they are folded under the hood. To service the blades (see paragraph “Wiper Maintenance and Blades Replacement” in chapter “Maintenance Procedures” of section “Maintenance and Care”) it is necessary to shift the multifunction lever to “OFF” and the ignition switch to OFF position. Shift the control lever within 15 seconds to the “MIST” position (forward rotation of the end of the multifunction control lever) and release. The blades are brought in a position enabling to open the wiper arms and change the blades. It is possible to use the “MIST” position for a maximum of 3 times within two minutes, corresponding to different three blades positions on the windshield. When completed, bring the ignition switch in RUN : the arms will reposition. If necessary move the multifunction lever to other required operating positions. To change the wiper blade on rear window of liftgate, simply lift the wiper arm to detach it from window (see paragraph “Wiper Maintenance and Blades Replacement” in chapter “Maintenance Procedures” of section “Maintenance and Care”). Understanding the Vehicle The headlight washers will spray a timed high-pressure spray of washer fluid onto each headlight lens every 11 windshield wipers cycles. WARNING! Operate or service the windshield wiper blades without deactivating the wipers (“OFF” position), leaving the ignition switch in RUN can be dangerous for the operator since the rain sensor may suddenly activate the wipers. Always use “Service” position for any intervention on the windshield wiper blades. Windshield Washers and Headlight Washers To use the washer on the windshield, push the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) and hold it as long as washer spray is desired. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the automatic intermittent range, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the previously-selected intermittent interval. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off (“OFF” position) the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off. Head Windshield Washer Nozzles (optional) To avoid fluid freezing inside at low external temperatures, the fluid supply nozzles can be heated by internal resistors. WARNING! • Do not start the windshield washer during the cold months until the windshield has warmed up. If it has not warmed up, the liquid could freeze on the glass and block your view. • Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. Headlight Washers (if foreseen) The multifunction lever also operates the headlight washers when the ignition switch is in RUN position and the headlights are turned on. 3 Rear Window Wiper/Washer Use the switch on multifunction lever as follows to turn on the rear window wiper and/or washer: • From the “OFF” position, turn control forward to the first detent to activate wiper intermittently; • Turn control forward to the second detent to activate wiper continuous action; • A further rotation forward (unstable position) will trigger the rear window washer until control is released. After control release, the rear window wiper will resume continuous operation; • From the “OFF” position, turn control backward (unstable position) to trigger rear window washer until control is released: the rear window wiper will perform several cycles. 125 Understanding the Vehicle Once released, control will go back to “OFF” position. 3 As a precaution, rear window washer pump stops if control is held in active position for over 20 seconds. When control is released, pump will resume normal operation. If rear window wiper is still on, the wiper arm will automatically go back to rest position when the ignition device is turned OFF . Interior Features Electric Power Outlets The vehicle is equipped with three or four 12 Volt (13 Amp) electric power outlets, one or two (if you use as power outlet the socket of the cigarette lighter) available for each front seat, one for rear seat passengers and one fitted in the boot. In vehicles equipped with “Smoking Kit” the electric power outlet inside the cup holder is replaced with a cigarette lighter. All power outlets are supplied only when the engine is started or the ignition device set to ACC or RUN. Power outlets are protected by a fuse. Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets to ensure proper operation. Otherwise, check the matching fuse integrity, see “Fuse Replacement” in section “Maintenance and Care” for further information. CAUTION! • Do not plug in accessories that exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert 126 any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Damages caused by improper use of the power outlet are not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Replacing the fuses that protect power outlets with others of higher amperage, there is the risk of fire. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lids when the plug is not used and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Power Outlet inside the Cup Holder Compartment To access the power outlet inside the cup holder beside the shift lever, press the cover as indicated to open it completely. Remove the cigarette lighter and use its socket as power outlet. Understanding the Vehicle WARNING! High power consumption items plugged into this outlet for long periods may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting. console you need to open the halflids as indicated in the following paragraph. 3 Power Outlet inside the Boot The power outlet is positioned on the right side of the boot compartment. Rear Power Outlets A 12 V power outlet in the compartment at the rear end of the central console, is available upon request for rear seat passengers. To access the power outlet, push the lid as indicated: it will open completely. Cup Holders The vehicle is equipped with several cup holders. Power Outlets inside the Central Console To access the power outlet located inside the glove box of the central 127 Understanding the Vehicle CAUTION! • Use light and shatterproof containers. • Do not forcefully push unsuitable 3 containers into the cup holders to prevent damage to the containers. • Do not store hot drinks. Cup Holders for Front Passengers The front cup holders are located beside the transmission lever and within the central console. To access the cup holder, push the cover as shown in the picture and it will open completely. By pressing the indicated button on the central console, the half-lids will rise completely enabling access to the inner compartment where the two cup holders are located. The storage and passenger compartment share the same air conditioning even though you may exclude the air conditioning of the cup holder compartment by moving the indicated button. 128 To close one or both of the half-lids, push them down to the locking position. Cup Holders for Rear Passengers Two cup holders are available in the front side of the rear seats central armrest. AUX, USB and SD Memory Card Inputs The inputs are located inside the compartment at the front end of the Understanding the Vehicle central console. To access the inputs, push the lid as indicated: it will open completely. The AUX auxiliary port features: • typical input impedance between AUX-IN and AUX_REF: 13 Kohm; • max. applicable voltage: 0.75 Vrms at 1 kHz; • input compatible only with 3.5 mm jack connectors (not included). Any player with these characteristics and analogue audio output (headset output type) can be served by the MTC+ System. The system can recognise the connection to a player outlet autonomously, by enabling access to the audio functions connected to this source. This USB input can be used for data exchange (refer to the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide for further details). Two other USB inputs for charging of connected source (CHARGE ONLY label) are present inside the glove box compartment of the dashboard. In the compartment of the central console there is also a SD memory card input. Once inserted into the slot, to extract it, press lightly on the card. For rear seat passengers, there are two USB inputs inside the compartment located on the rear end of the central console, above the air vents. To access the USB inputs open the outside cover. 3 This USB ports allow charging (CHARGE ONLY label) the connected source. Following conditions can create USB inputs damage or malfunction: • Usage of non-original lighting cables. • Usage of defective rechargeable devices (smartphone, tablet, mass storage devices or other generic USB devices). • ONLY insert media (eg., USB or SD card), into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. • Usage of damaged or defective cables. iPod® Connection An iPod® can be connected to the system via USB and AUX ports by means of a special cable (optional). 129 Understanding the Vehicle The MTC+ will then control the following functions: play, pause, fast forward, rewind, next track, previous track, random or repeat mode, selection and navigation of playlist/genre/singer/album/Podcast. 3 CAUTION! Do not leave your USB device, iPod® or an external audio source in the vehicle for extended periods of time: extreme temperatures and humidity can occur in the vehicle. Sun Visors Sun visors can be folded to the front and to the side of the vehicle. To move the visor laterally, lower and release it from its catch as indicated. In this condition, the visor can be extended by sliding the visor end backward. 130 By lowering the visor you can access the courtesy mirror and, by sliding the mirror protective cover, the light on the dome will automatically light up (with the ignition switch in RUN). NOTE: The light on the dome turns on only when the visor is in non-extended position and pushed towards the endstop of the sliding rod support. Before raising the visor, close the mirror cover: the light will turn off. A business card holder is fitted inside each sun visor. Smoking Kit (optional) The kit includes a lighter and a removable ashtray with cover. The Smoking kit for front seats passengers is located inside the box beside the transmission lever and can be accessed by pressing the cover as indicated. Understanding the Vehicle WARNING! • The cigarette lighter reaches high temperatures. Handle it carefully and do not allow children to use it so as to avoid risk of fire and injury! • The cigarette lighter may not be used as a power outlet. 3 Handholds and Cloth Hooks The rear seat passengers can use the removable ashtray by inserting it into the rear doors pocket, while the lighter can be inserted into the power outlet at the end of the central console. Press the central button to activate the cigarette lighter. After about 20 seconds the button returns automatically to the initial position and stops the heating: from this time the cigarette lighter is ready for use. CAUTION! After use, always make sure that the cigarette lighter is switched off. Handholds are fitted above the passenger doors. Once grabbed, they will lower until the block position. When released, a return spring will bring them back to the original position. On the side walls of the boot compartment there is a shopping hook that can withhold a maximum load of 10 kg (22 lb). Mesh Pockets Behind the rear handholds there is a light with relevant on/off switch (refer to chapter “Lights” in this section). Cloth hooks are present on rear handholds and on pillars between doors. Front seats are fitted with mesh pockets, on the rear of the seatbacks, and accessible by rear passengers. 131 Understanding the Vehicle Cargo Area WARNING! To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts. 3 CAUTION! Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the mesh pockets. iPad Holder (Genuine Accessories) Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle identification label positioned on the rear driver door's ledge. The Maserati Service Network can provide you with all information about the “Maserati iPad Holder” to be fixed to the slide rods of the front head restraints, available in the “Genuine Accessories” range. The information indicated on the label concerns passengers and luggage loading operations. Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the 132 Understanding the Vehicle Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), both front and rear. The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR indicated on the label. WARNING! • Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way the vehicle steers, handles and the way the brakes operate. • Never drive with the liftgate open. Exhaust gases can enter the passenger compartment. • Do not arrange any luggage on cargo area cover. In said position luggage could not only impair driver's view but also, in case of collision or unexpected stop, it could cause injury to all occupants. The boot is the most suitable place to load bulky and heavy objects onboard the vehicle. The maximum allowable load on the floor of the boot is 200 kg (440 lb). To load your vehicle properly, store heavier items below and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before start driving as they could move during the trip. To separate boot from passenger compartment, the vehicle is equipped with a rigid horizontal panel, fitted behind the rear seat backrest. When vehicle is at a standstill, cargo area cover can withstand a maximum static load of 120 kg (260 lb). Apart from cargo area cover, the vehicle can be also equipped with a vertical rolling Cargo Net, to be used to separate the cargo area from the passenger area. The Maserati Service Network can provide you with any information about the items dedicated to the usage of the boot (luggage compartment mat, net, foldable box,..), available in the "Genuine Accessories" range. Luggage Fasteners and Retainers Vehicle can be equipped with fixed and mobile anchorages on boot floor allowing to fasten and retain any luggage in a convenient and safe manner. Using a special and approved net with hooks available in the "Genuine Accessories" range, also large and heavy objects can be fastened to boot floor. Eyelets to secure the luggage net are provided on the four corners of boot floor. For retaining luggage or the Emergency Kit / First-Aid Kit (if equipped) placed in compartments on the trunk side walls there are special elastic bands. 3 Longitudinal rails on boot floor provide safe anchorage for luggage of different size, thanks to the special hooks with locking button. To position the hook, slide it along the rails until reaching the required position, holding down the central button. Release the button and slightly move the hook to secure its position in the notches of the guide. 133 Understanding the Vehicle and objects that may not fit with the normal dimensions of the boot. NOTE: Both seat backs can be folded down independently. 3 CAUTION! To avoid luggage inadvertent movement, in case of sudden braking or collision, always check correct fastening of the retainers onto floor rails before anchoring any luggage. By using the Railing Fastening Bar, available in the "Genuine Accessories" range, fastened by means of sliding blocks along the floor rails, you can fasten heavy luggage in the innermost area of the boot. 134 NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with information about the available “Genuine Accessories” for the boot compartment. Loading with Rear Seatbacks Folded Down The 60/40 split-folding seatback of the rear seat provides cargo-carrying versatility. The seatback folded down provides a continuous nearly-flat extension of the load floor able to accommodate bulky luggage, large-sized equipment WARNING! To prevent the other luggage in the boot from getting into the passenger compartment and create a potential danger for the passengers, keep boot cover installed when folding down one of the two seatbacks. When the seatbacks are unfolded to the upright position, make sure they are latched in one of the fixed positions (see “Rear Seats” in this section). WARNING! • Make sure that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or rear passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the Understanding the Vehicle folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and use proper restraint systems. The Maserati approved Ski and Snowboard Bag available in the “Genuine Accessories” range, can be fastened also by folding down the seatback. Accessories Compartment Ski and Snowboard Bag Compartment To stow and safely fasten a ski and snowboard bag, with no need to fold down the seatback, use the opening available at the back of the longer seatback (60), at the level of the armrest between the rear seats. To reach this compartment and properly arrange the bag, proceed as follows. • From inside the passenger compartment, lower the armrest between the rear seats. • From the boot compartment, open the flap at the back of the long seatback. • Insert the bag end without anchor hook into seatback opening. • Fasten the hook to one of the eyelets available on boot floor. • From the passenger compartment, route bag strap under armrest and fasten it. In order to hold any accessories to be kept on the vehicle, the car is equipped with a storage box with carrying handles, at the rear end of the boot compartment. To reach this box, lift or remove the boot floor panel. 3 NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with information about the available “Genuine Accessories” for the boot compartment. If you follow these instructions, the bag will be securely fastened to vehicle structure and will thus remain in place also in case of collision or unexpected braking. 135 Understanding the Vehicle Boot Compartment Cover 3 Boot compartment cover is made of two parts, the most outward one lifts when liftgate is opened. The cover can be removed to obtain a larger cargo area, as follows: • slide the top end of side linkages out of the shafts on rear pillars; WARNING! After refitting the boot cover, make sure that the lower ends of the inner part have properly engaged in their guides. If cover is not properly positioned and fastened, in case of unexpected stop or collision it could move and seriously injure the passengers in the rear seats. • remove boot cover from the vehicle. The two parts of boot cover can be folded one onto the other for a more compact unit. • lift the cover rear end and slide it towards the liftgate: this will result in sliding the four lower ends of the cover inner part out of their guides on boot panel; WARNING! Driving with no boot cover could be dangerous. Any unfastened luggage or objects could move into the passenger compartment in case of sudden stop or collision and seriously injure the occupants. You can try to prevent this by using the Cargo Net in the boot compartment. When refitting the boot cover, perform the same operations in reverse order. 136 Cargo Area Extension The following procedure is aimed at obtaining the maximum possible extension of the cargo area, and it can be only a partial extension if you carry out only a few of the listed operations. • Remove the boot cover as indicated under “Boot compartment cover” in this chapter. • Completely lower the headrests of rear seats. Understanding the Vehicle • Completely fold down the rear seats backrests by lifting the lever to position 1 and hold it up. • Release the lever when seatback is against the seat: the control cable will click into place and lock. • In this position, push down on the seatback of the long part (60): the control cable will click into place and lock. the seatback rear panel surface using rigid panels. Installing the Cargo Net for Cargo Area The Cargo Net can be installed to two positions depending on the current extension of the cargo area. When only the boot cover is removed (see previous paragraph), while backrests are still vertical, the Cargo Net must be installed immediately behind them (position A ). 3 WARNING! • Before install the Cargo Net in the Now that seatbacks are folded down, boot floor and the back panels of seatbacks will form a larger flat floor. CAUTION! Seatback rear panel is not suitable to support heavy loads and metal objects with protruding elements that might scratch its surface. If necessary, protect While, in case also backrests were folded down, the Cargo Net must be installed in a more forward position behind the front seats (position B ). more forward position make sure that the backrests are locked in the lowest position. • The Cargo Net must be properly installed following the instructions in this paragraph. • The Cargo Net will not properly hold objects in case of sudden vehicle braking or collision depending on cargo weight. Heavy loads not sufficiently fastened could exceed net capacity and hit the vehicle occupants, with the ensuing risk of injury. • Before leaving for a trip, fasten all objects that might move to trunk floor, using the devices provided by Maserati for this purpose. 137 Understanding the Vehicle • When using the Cargo Net, do not load any heavy object on top of the other objects which are laid on the trunk floor (see example in the figures). To install it, open the bag zip, unfold the two parts until hearing the jointing elements clicking in place. To close it, press the button indicated in the figure, at the two jointing elements. • Insert the net top ends in the slot on roof brackets (position ) • Pull net down to ensure it is properly engaged (position ). 3 To install the Cargo Net in position A , proceed as follows. • Turn downwards the upper part of the protection cover on roof brackets. The Cargo Net is housed in the accessories compartment under the boot floor. The Cargo Net is supplied folded, inside a bag that is part of the net itself. 138 • Fully unfold Cargo Net down and engage the ends of side tethers, with hook, in the fixed or mobile retainers available on boot floor. • Pull down the free ends of the tethers to tension the Cargo Net: once released, the tether will remain in taut position . To disengage and release tether from retainer position , lift the tether free end as indicated in the figure. Understanding the Vehicle 3 • Freeing the net lower part from the Cargo Net structure. • Attach the lower side ends of the Cargo Net to the tethers just tensioned, using the Velcro appendices indicated in the figure. Should it be necessary to position the Cargo Net in position B - more forward, i.e., behind the front seats use the top retainers next to external rear passenger handholds. • Fasten the lower tethers of Cargo Net to external retainers, also used to fasten the top safety belt for children seat, available on rear seat backrests (see chapter “Child Restraint Systems” in section “Before Starting”). • Attach the Velcro appendices indicated in the figure, as described for the rear retainers. • Lower handhold and engage the net top ends in the slot on roof, as already described for the rear retainers. When Cargo Net is no longer necessary, release the net lower part 139 Understanding the Vehicle 3 from the fastening tethers, rewind it on itself and fasten it to the Cargo Net structure. Remove the Cargo Net from its fastening points, fold it and close the bag zip. Store bag under boot floor, then restore vehicle original conditions by repositioning all moved or removed parts. Front to Back Roof Rails (optional) The front to back roof rails that can be installed to this vehicle have been designed to carry luggage or equipment suitable for transport outside of the vehicle. Securely fasten load to rails using the suitable retainers that can hold the original anchorage points throughout the trip. When installing to rails any bicycle, surfboard or other types of carriers requiring cross bars, please comply with the equipment manufacturer's instructions to ensure proper installation. The Maserati Service Network can provide you with any information about the Maserati approved Carrying Items, available in the "Genuine Accessories" range. WARNING! • During the trip, it is recommended Weight of luggage/equipment carried on the rails must not exceed 80 kg (176 lb) and must be evenly distributed. This weight must be added to the load carried inside of the vehicle as well as the passengers' weight, and total must not exceed the maximum allowed weight (see “Features and Specifications” in section “Features and Specifications”). When arranging load on rails, make sure that it will not interfere with liftgate and sunroof opening (if equipped). 140 to periodically check the proper fastening of luggage or equipment carried on the roof rails. This is to avoid that any parts that may have accidentally unfastened could damage vehicle bodywork and fall out, thereby becoming a danger for all vehicles behind yours. • When driving with a bulky load on roof rails, take additional precautions and drive at lower speed, keeping a wider safety distance from vehicles ahead. Understanding the Vehicle Indeed, a bulky and/or heavy load carried on the roof will affect driving behaviour and steering response since it shifts the vehicle centre of gravity to a higher position compared to normal conditions. • All objects/equipment carried on the roof and protruding beyond the windshield, e.g. surfboard, must be fastened to both sides of the vehicle. Any wind blow might suddenly increase load lift possibly resulting in breakage and loss of part of the carried equipment. Power Sunroof with Sunshade (optional) The sunroof and the sunshade are power-controlled and can only be operated with the ignition switch in RUN position. The sunroof is made of two glass panels: the front one can be moved whereas the rear one is fixed. The right switch controls the sunroof movement, whereas the left one controls the sunshade. Lifting of the sunroof front panel for venting is controlled by the button, behind the two switches. By opening the sunroof a front flap rises automatically in order to deviate the air flow. 3 WARNING! • Improper use of the sunroof can be dangerous, even if it features a finger-trap prevention system. Before and during the sunroof operation, always make sure that passengers are not exposed to the risk of injuries caused by the moving sunroof or by personal objects dragged or hit by the moving sunroof. • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key fob RKE transmitter in the passenger compartment. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from the vehicle if the sunroof is open. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too. 141 Understanding the Vehicle • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never insert fingers, other body parts, or any object through the roof opening. CAUTION! • In the event of rain, always close the 3 sunroof to prevent water infiltrations from staining the fabric/leather upholstery. • Do not open the sunroof if there is ice on it: risk of damage. • Do not open the sunroof in case of presence of any object (bicycle, surfboard or other type of carriers fixed to cross bars) that might interfere with sunroof. Slide Opening Sunroof Press backwards and release the right switch: the front panel will open completely. From the completely open position, press onwards and release the right switch: the front panel will close completely. The automatic movement can be interrupted in any position by pressing backward and onward the right switch again. 142 Venting Sunroof Press and release the rear button; the sunroof front panel will open to the vent position. Where this function is available, this type of opening can be activated regardless of the sunroof position. During this opening operation, any movement of the button will stop the sunroof. By pressing the rear button when the sunroof is completely closed, the latter will open to the venting position. Sunshade Press backwards and release the left switch: the sunshade will move to the vehicle rear side until completely open. From this position, press onwards and release the left switch to move the sunshade to the vehicle front side until completely closed. During the opening and closing operations, work on backward and onward the left switch to interrupt the sunshade movement in any position. Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the roof opening during the automatic closure or a constant obstruction of the sunroof front panel. If an obstruction is detected by the safety system during the closing movement, the sunroof front panel will automatically retract. If this occurs, remove the obstruction then press onwards and release the right switch to reactivate the sunroof automatic closure. NOTE: • If three consecutive attempts to close the sunroof result in pinch protect reversals, the fourth attempt will be manual, with pinch protect feature disabled. • Pinch protection is disabled while pressing the switch/es. Initialization Procedure In case of a fault in the automatic opening/closing movements or in case of battery removal, it is necessary to initialize the automatic operation of the sunroof. Proceed as follows: • bring the sunroof in the completely closed position; • push the ignition switch to OFF position and keep this condition for 10 seconds; • push the ignition switch to RUN position; • press the right switch onwards and keep it pressed for at least 10 seconds after which you should hear the sunroof electric motor mechanic stop; Understanding the Vehicle • within 5 seconds, press the right switch onwards again and keep it pressed: the sunroof performs an automatic complete opening and closing cycle. Should this not happen, repeat the procedure from the beginning; • press the right switch onwards and keep it pressed until the sunroof is completely closed: the initialization procedure is then completed. Closing and Opening the Power Sunroof with RKE Transmitter and Ignition Off When the ignition switch is in OFF position, if the sunroof is open, it can be closed together with the windows by pressing the button on the RKE transmitter (refer to “Power Windows” in section “Before Starting”). • Press and release the button. • Press a second time the button and keep it pressed until the sunroof is completely closed. To open completely the sunroof from the outside, press in the same way the button on the RKE transmitter. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure or a helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimised. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimise the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimise the buffeting. Ignition Off Operation HomeLink® (for versions/markets, where provided) HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters operating the automatic devices that open garage doors and gates, enable/disable the lighting or security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicle's 12 Volt battery. The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® warning light is located in front of the buttons. 3 The power sunroof controls will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is in OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The ignition system timing can be set using the MTC+ System (see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the vehicle security alarm is active (see (Continued) 143 Understanding the Vehicle (Continued) “Vehicle security alarm” in section “Before Starting”). WARNING! • Your motorized door or gate 3 will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. Before You Start Programming HomeLink® Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming. 144 For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radiofrequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system. Before starting programming it is necessary to erase the standard codes memorized on the HomeLink® device during the production phase. To erase such codes: • place the ignition device in the RUN position without starting the engine; • press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) until the warning light starts flashing (after approximately 20 seconds); • release the buttons. NOTE: • Erasing the standard codes should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not perform this operation to program additional buttons. • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. System with Devices Provided with Rolling Codes Programming the Hand-held Transmitters Manufactured after 1995 These devices can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” setting button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door/gate opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. • Place the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine. • Place the hand-held transmitter 5 - 30 cm (1 to 3 inches) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program. • Simultaneously press the Homelink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button. Understanding the Vehicle • Release immediately the Homelink® button you want to program. • Continue holding the hand-held transmitter button until the warning light starts flashing quickly; then release the button. The quick flashing light indicates that the channel with the new frequency has been acquired and programmed correctly by the HomeLink® system. NOTE: The distance necessary between the portable hand-held transmitter and the HomeLink® in the vehicle depends on the system you wish to program. Probably it will be necessary to try several times. Upon every attempt, keep the setting position for at least 15 seconds before trying again. Synchronising the Rolling Codes At the end of the previously-described programming, if the HomeLink® has been programmed for a rolling code system, it will be necessary to synchronise it to ensure its correct operation. • Locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” setting button of the opening motor. Firmly press it and then release it. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. NOTE: You have 30 seconds to initiate the next step after the setting button has been pressed. • Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds and then release it. • Repeat this operation a second time. If the garage door opening device activates, the programming/ synchronization phase is complete. NOTE: If the garage door opening device does not activate, press the button a third time for two seconds and then release it to complete the programming/synchronization phase. • To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat the same step for the same remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button To reprogramme a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: • Place the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine. • Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. • Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming the hand-held transmitters” from second step and follow all remaining steps. System with Devices Without Rolling Code Programming the Hand-held Transmitters Manufactured before 1995 • Turn the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine. • Place the hand-held transmitter 5 to 30 cm (1 to 3 inches) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program. • Simultaneously press and hold both buttons until the warning light starts flashing quickly; then release both buttons. The quick flashing light indicates that the channel with the new frequency has been acquired and programmed correctly by the HomeLink® system. 3 NOTE: The distance necessary between the portable hand-held transmitter and the HomeLink® in the vehicle depends on the system you wish to program. Probably it will be necessary to try (Continued) 145 Understanding the Vehicle (Continued) several times. Upon every attempt, keep the setting position for at least 15 seconds before trying again. 3 • Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button. If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. Do not erase the channels. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: • Place the ignition device to the RUN position without starting the engine. • Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. • Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming the hand-held transmitters” from second step and follow all remaining steps. Using HomeLink® To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, 146 etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. Security It is advisable to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) until the warning light starts flashing (after approximately 20 seconds). The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the vehicle security alarm is active (see “Vehicle security alarm” in section “Before Starting”). Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble while programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions: • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter. • Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for a rolling code. • Did you unplug the device for programming and forgot to plug it back in? If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. Understanding the Vehicle Air Conditioning Distribution 3 A/C Dual-zone 147 Understanding the Vehicle 3 A/C Four-zone 148 Understanding the Vehicle Adjustable and fixed air vents allow passengers to achieve the optimal comfort conditions. Fixed Air Vents • The fixed vents under the dashboard are aimed at ventilating the lower part of the front passenger compartment. • The fixed vents, positioned on the upper part of the dashboard, beneath the windshield and on the windshield side pillars are meant to guarantee the demisting and defrosting of the windshield and the side windows. 3 A/C Dual-zone • The ventilation of the lower part of the rear passengers compartment is made by means of fixed vents positioned as follows: - under the front seats, for the dualzone A/C system; - on each side of the rear end of the central console, for the vehicles equipped with the four-zone A/C system. A/C Four-zone Adjustable Air Vents The adjustable vents are located at the center of the dashboard, on both sides of the MTC+ display and on the upper surface, and at the side ends of the dashboard. They have the purpose of ventilating the upper part of the passenger compartment. There are also adjustable vents placed at the rear end of the central console. The rotor 149 Understanding the Vehicle 1 , located near each vent, allows to control the quantity of the air flow from fully closed to fully open, and vice versa. Excluding the adjustable vents on the upper surface of the dashboard, the grill of these vents can be oriented by operating on the central handle 2 . 3 NOTE: In order not to obstruct the air conditioning inlet, the defrosting or the demisting function of the glass surfaces, avoid covering vents with clothing or other items. 150 4 - Dashboard Instruments and Controls Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 MTC+ “Controls” Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 MTC+ Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Dashboard Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel (if foreseen) . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 151 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Instrument Cluster 4 The instrument cluster is divided into three main areas displaying information, signs and text and/or icon messages. A - Analogue speedometer. It indicates the vehicle speed. B - Analogue tachometer. C - TFT display. In this area the odometer display shows the total distance covered by the vehicle. Speedometer and tachometer display the main warning lights (see "Warning and Indicator Lights on Analogue Instruments" in this chapter). The other warning and indicator lights are displayed on the TFT display together with mode and drive function indicators (see "TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions" in this chapter). V8 - Gasoline (in example GTS version) V6 - Gasoline NOTE The image shows the instrument cluster before starting the engine. Diesel 152 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Warning and Indicator Lights on Speedometer The following telltales are displayed on the speedometer, and related messages are visible for 5 seconds on the central sector of the display, unless otherwise indicated (see “TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions” paragraph in this chapter). Gasoline Diesel Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. Under normal conditions, this indicator light should switch on when the ignition switch is in RUN position and switch off as soon as the engine is started. This is a sign of the indicator light working properly. If the indicator remains lighted up or switches on while driving, there is a failure in the fuel supply/ignition and emission control systems. The failure could cause high exhaust emissions, loss of performance, poor vehicle handling and high consumption levels. Under these conditions you can proceed slowly without forcing the engine or driving at high speeds. The indicator light will switch off if the problem is solved. The error will be registered by the system in any case. CAUTION! • When the ignition switch is in the RUN position and the indicator light does not switch on or it switches on while driving, contact the Service Network as soon as possible. • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss may occur. Immediate service is required. 4 Left Turn Signal Indicator Light The indicator lights up when the left direction indicators or the hazard lights are turned on. The indicator light will flash at the same frequency of the turn indicators and is controlled by the multifunction lever behind the steering whell. If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle drives for more than 1.6 km (1 mile) with either turn signal on, a continuous sound will alert the driver to turn the signal off. If the indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective exterior light bulb. 153 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 154 Tire Pressure Monitoring Light This warning light is connected to the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Under normal conditions, the warning light should illuminate when the ignition switch is in RUN and should go off as soon as the engine is started. If the warning light remains lit or illuminates while driving, the pressure of one or more tires is too low and a message will be displayed. The TPMS malfunction warning light is connected to the low tire pressure monitoring light. When the system detects a malfunction, the monitoring light and the related message will flash for approximately one minute and then remain lit. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction lasts. When the malfunction warning light lights up, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure correctly. Please refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in section “Driving” for further information. Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) Malfunction Warning Light This light, and its related message, indicate possible malfunctions of the Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is in RUN position and may stay on for 4 seconds. If the ABS light remains lit or turns on while driving, the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and requires service. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the warning light is switched off. If the ABS light turns on while driving, or if it does not switch on when the ignition switch is in RUN position, please visit as soon as possible a Service Centre in order to restore the Anti-Lock brakes functions. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC activation/malfunction indicator light on the instrument cluster will display when the ignition switch is in RUN position. It should switch off by starting the engine. If the light stays on with the engine running, there is a malfunction in the ESC system. If the light still stays on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven for several kilometers at more than 48 km/h (30 mph) visit the Service Network as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and restored. NOTE: Each time the ignition switch is in RUN: • The ESC OFF indicator light and the ESC activation/malfunction indicator light illuminates temporarily. • The ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously. The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive by solving the problem that caused the ESC activation. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light This indicator notifies that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is disabled (OFF); the linked message will be displayed. Dashboard Instruments and Controls Warning and Indicator Light on Tachometer Following telltales are displayed on the tachometer and related messages are visible for 5 seconds on central sector of the display, unless otherwise indicated (see “TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions” in this chapter). Gasoline Start&Stop Active Indicator This telltale indicates that the engine has been switched off automatically by the Start&Stop system. When the engine starts again, the telltale will switch off. If the telltale during an automatic engine shutdown (AutoStop) phase starts flashing, it will be necessary to restart the engine normally with the ignition device while holding down the brake pedal. See chapter “Automatic Start&Stop System” in section “Driving” for further information. Rear Fog Light Indicator This indicator lights up when the rear fog lights are switched on. High Beam Indicator This indicator lights up when the high beams are switched on or when blinking. Diesel Brake Indicator Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake engagement. If the brake light illuminates the parking brake may be engaged, the brake fluid level may be low or a problem with the anti-lock brake system (ABS) reservoir may have occurred. In all the above situations, a related message will be displayed. If the light still illuminates when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, there could be a brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the brake booster detected by the ABS/ESC system. If this occurs, the light will remain lit until the problem has been solved. If the problem concerns the brake booster, the ABS master cylinder will run when engaging the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop of the vehicle. Inefficiency of one of the dual brake system cycles is indicated by the brake warning light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a certain level. The light will remain lit until the problem has been solved. If a brake failure occurs, visit the Service Network as soon as possible in order to check up the brake system. In the event of an Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) failure, both 4 155 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 the brake indicator light and the ABS light illuminate. Immediate repair of the ABS system is required. Functioning of the brake warning light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from OFF to RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately 2 seconds. The light should switch off unless the parking brake is engaged or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light system repaired by the Service Network . The light will also switch on when the parking brake is engaged with the ignition switch in RUN position. This light only indicates the brake is engaged but not the clamping force of the parking brake to the wheels. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on can be very dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed, resulting in increased braking distances and the risk of an accident. Have the braking system checked as soon as possible at the Service Network. 156 Air Bag Indicator Light This light will illuminate for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is in RUN. If the light does not illuminate while starting the engine, stays lit, or switches on while driving, have the system checked at the Service Network as soon as possible. In the latter case, the message will remain displayed: to hide it, press the button on the steering wheel right side. See “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Air bags” in section “Before Starting” for further information. WARNING! If the warning light remains ON or if it does not illuminate or illuminates while driving, contact your Service Network as soon as possible. Right Turn Signal Indicator This indicator lights up when the right direction indicators or the hazard lights are switched on. The indicator will flash at the same frequency of the turn indicators and is controlled by the turn signal lever. If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle drives for more than 1.6 km (1 mile) with either turn signal on, a continuous sound will advise the driver to turn the signal off. If the indicator flashes at a fast rate, check for a defective outside indicator light bulb. Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is in RUN, the seat belt reminder light will light up for a few seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, you will hear an acoustic signal if one or both front seat belts are unbuckled. After the bulb check or while driving, if a seat belt is unbuckled, together Dashboard Instruments and Controls with the acoustic signal the seat belt reminder light will light up. WARNING! Maserati urges you to use the seat belts correctly fastened and adjusted at all times. Correct use of the seat belts can help reduce the risk of serious injury in the event of an accident. Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges: they could tear. Do not pin anything to the seat belts. This could reduce their initial strength and cause them to tear in the event of a crash. 5 6 7 1 Main area. 2 Selectable information (data, time, outside temperature, compass, etc.). When setting the “Auto High Beam Assist” feature (if equipped), in the right portion of this area is displayed the respective indicator. Main menu number and titles with scroll arrows (the number and the main menu title is always visible while scrolling the menu, and for the next five seconds). Submenu Titles. Refer to “Occupants Restraint Systems” in section “Before Starting” for further information. TFT Display: Menus and Settings When operating, the TFT Display is divided into sectors including menus and submenus, running data, warning/indicator lights and messages. The different sectors of the display layout are rendered in the following picture. 3 4 Position within the submenus and scroll arrows (example: 1 of 5). There can be maximum 9 displayable submenu positions. When the number of submenu points exceeds 9, the points are replaced by a numerical value within the scroll arrows. Menu Instruction (hideable). 10 Shift lever positions (P, R, N, D, M, 1, 2, 3...). Gear shift indicator light and paddles (if equipped). Hard/soft suspension indicator light. Complete Odometer. 11 Fuel Gauge. 12 Engine Temperature Gauge. 8 9 4 13* Reconfigurable quadrant for red telltales. 14* Reconfigurable quadrant for amber telltales. 15 Front fog indicator light. 16 17 Low beam headlights/position lights. OFF ROAD, I.C.E., NORMAL, SPORT, and CORSA (TROFEO version only) modes indicator light. 157 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 18* Combined telltale of ACC, LKA and HAS status. They are displayed in the cluster when one (or more) of these systems is enabled and a different menu from “Drive Assist” is displayed in the main area. 19* CC, ACC and HDC status function. 20 Ride height indicator. 21 4 Electric Parking Brake failure warning light. 22 Speed Warning indicator (dynamic text). 23* Traffic Sign Assist icons: conditioned and unconditioned speed limit and/or overtaking ban. See "Traffic Sign Assist TSA" in section "Driving" for further details. (*) See “TFT Display: Warning/ Indicator Lights of Set Modes/ Functions” in this chapter. • Blue colour: normal conditions. • Yellow colour: low-critical warning. • Red colour: high-critical warning. TFT Display: Main and Submenu Operate the controls on the right side of the steering wheel to scroll, modify and program the Main and Sub-menu. The display background may change according to the type of message displayed. Press and release the multifunction switch in the and arrow 158 directions to scroll upwards and downwards the main menu titles. The screen area in sector 1 (Main Area) will be updated and the selected title will be shown in sector 3 (Main Menu Title). Press and release the multifunction switch ( ) to enter the information screens or a submenu. Keep the switch ( ) depressed for 2 seconds to restore the selected/visualized functions. The selected sub-menu title selected will be displayed in sector 4 (Submenu Title). When the driver selects a main menu page and the Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) feature on "Controls" page of MTC+ is set off (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in this section), main menu title, its number and the scroll arrows will disappear after two seconds. Dashboard Instruments and Controls When driver selects a main menu, if the TSA feature is set on and a sign and/or a speed limit icon is displayed in the sector 23, only the main menu number and the scroll arrows remain displayed in the sector 3 left side. Within a submenu, press and release the switch in the and arrow directions to scroll the menu. Press the button to return to the main menu from an item of interest or from an information screen. TFT Display: Main Menu & Submenu Content Overview 1. MAIN MENU • View speed in km/h or mph 2. VEHICLE INFO • Tire Pressure • Transmission Temperature • Oil Temperature • Oil Pressure (Gasoline only) • Battery Voltage • AdBlue Level (Diesel only) • Maintenance 3. DRIVE MODE • Drive Mode - Ride Height - Torque Distribution - Powertrain status - ESC status - Suspension stiffness status 4. DRIVER ASSIST • Shows the status of any active driver assist systems: CC, ACC, LKA and HAS. Graphics in the main area of TFT display only refer to ACC, LKA and HAS systems • LKA (LaneSense) status 5. FUEL ECONOMY • Average, Range, Current gauge 6. TRIP • Trip A: Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed time, Distance • Trip B: Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed time, Distance 7. START&STOP • Messages relating to the Start&Stop function 8. AUDIO • Information concerning audio status according to current media source, track and station. • Information on phone incoming call. 9. STORED MESSAGES 10. VEHICLE SETTINGS • Speed Warning: enables, disables or sets the speed limit represented in the dynamic icon on the TFT display • Auto apply Off/On of the Electric Parking Brake • Passenger Air bag enable/disable • Interior Lighting - Backlighting - Ambient Lighting • SCREEN SETUP - Upper Left - Upper Right - Main Menu: Line 1 - Main Menu: Line 2 - Main Menu: Line 3 - MPH km/h Display On/Off - Main Menu Navigation - Outline Colouring - Key-On Display - Key-Off Display - Defaults 4 TFT Display: Messages on Main Display Area The main display area also displays "pop up" messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories: • Five-Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message appears on the main display area for five seconds and then returns to 159 Dashboard Instruments and Controls the previous screen. Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the condition that activated them remains active) and can be reviewed from the "Stored Messages" main menu item. Example of this message type is the one shown in the picture. • Unstored Messages with Ignition Switch in RUN This message type is displayed until the ignition switch is in RUN position. An example of this message type is the one shown in picture. 4 • Navigation Messages When the navigation menu is enabled on the MTC+, information pop-ups will be displayed while changing direction or approaching a turning point until the navigation system requires its displaying, or until a command is given via the buttons on the steering wheel. On highway, the first pop up will be displayed at 3.2 km (2 miles) from the turn, on roadway, at 1.6 km (1 mile). While approaching the turn, further pop ups will be displayed starting at 400 m (437 yd) from the turning point and the countdown to 0 meters. • Unstored Messages This message type is displayed until the condition that activated the message is cleared (see example in picture). • Five-Second Unstored Messages When appropriate conditions occur, this type of message appears on the main display area for five seconds then returns to the previous screen. 160 While getting closer to a turn, the sections referred to the distance already travelled will switch off while the ones referred to the distance yet to be travelled will remain on. Dashboard Instruments and Controls NOTE: • Popup boxes might take up the space normally used to display main menu items and relevant submenus. • The distance indicated under the road name is expressed in the unit of measure set by the user. 1. MAIN MENU Press and release the multifunction switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. Pressing and releasing the switch ( ) will toggle the unit of measure between km/h or mph. Further to speed, the main area can indicate three lines that can be set to the same options and in the top right or top left area. When these three lines are present and turn-by-turn navigation is on, main menu area will automatically show navigation information. For further details, please refer to "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide. 2. VEHICLE INFO Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. Press and release the switch ( ) to access the submenus. Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions to scroll through the following information displays pressing and releasing the switch ( ) to display the selected information. • Tire Pressure Indicates the pressure of each single tire (see example below). Please refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in section “Driving” for further information. Displays the current transmission temperature level. • Oil Temperature Displays the current engine oil temperature level. The gauge fill and telltale (if applicable) are highlighted in red to emphasise that the parameter is at a critical level. 4 (Continued) • Transmission Temperature 161 Dashboard Instruments and Controls NOTE: This strategy is also applicable in the Transmission Temperature and Oil Pressure information screen. 4 • Oil Pressure (Gasoline only) Displays the current motor oil pressure level. • Battery Voltage Displays the current battery voltage. • AdBlue® Level (Diesel only) Displays both the level of reducing agent AdBlue® contained in the tank located in the luggage compartment and, if there is the need to refuel, the remaining range. For details on refilling or top-up, see chapter “Adding reducing agent AdBlue® (Diesel only)” in section “Driving”. Diesel • Maintenance (service) 162 Displays mileage and days remaining to the execution of scheduled maintenance service. Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 3. DRIVE MODE Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. The screen graphically shows the Drive Mode: OFF ROAD, I.C.E., NORMAL, SPORT, CORSA (TROFEO version only) and (Suspension) set by the user through the relevant controls. The display main area will show vehicle image with parameters and color-coded components affected by the selected drive mode. The image will show the following parameters: • current ground clearance indicated in front of vehicle and on a specific indicator on top right corner; • torque distribution percentage indicated under the arrow in front of the wheels; • selected drive mode (in the example shown: I.C.E.). For any color-coded components, color depends on settings of: • ESC: identified by wheel color. • PowerTrain: identified by engine + transmission unit color. • Suspension : identified by the color of the four shock absorbers. For every drive mode, function (ESC, PowerTrain and Suspension) and color of the components shown are matched as follows: Dashboard Instruments and Controls NOTE: To set these systems, see chapters “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC”, “Highway Assist - HAS” and “Lane Keeping Assist - LKA” in section “Driving”. Press and release the button to return to the main menu. NOTE: To set drive parameters according to own needs and path, refer to chapter “Drive Mode” and “Off-road Drive” in section “Driving”. Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 4. DRIVER ASSIST Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. • Active Driver Assist System The screen graphically shows current status of driver assist systems: the figure shows an example with ACC engaged and HAS set. • LKA (LaneSense) Status Vehicle is delivered with LKA in off state set on MTC+ system, page “Controls”. You can enable LKA in the “Visual” only or “Visual & Haptic” mode by turning on the function via MTC+ system soft-key and by changing your selection in the dedicated submenu. The setting chosen will latch over key cycles. 5. FUEL ECONOMY Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. The screen will display the following: • Current Fuel Economy in L/100km, MPG (UK) or MPG (US) Shows the current fuel economy. During AutoStop stage performed by the Start&Stop system (see “Normal Starting of the Engine” in section “Driving”), a dash will be displayed instead of the value. • Range in km or miles Shows the range since the last fuel average reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “Reset” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. 4 163 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 • Fuel Economy Average in L/100km, MPG (UK) or MPG (US) Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Press the multifunction switch ( ) for 1 second and release it to reset the fuel economy average. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “Reset” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 6. TRIP Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. 164 For each of the “Trip A” and “Trip B” sub-menus the screen will display the following: • “Distance” traveled in km or miles. Shows the total covered distance since the last reset. • “Average” consumption in L/100km, MPG (UK) or MPG (US). Shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. • “Average” speed in km/h or MPH. Shows the average speed since the last reset. • “Elapsed Time”. Shows the total time of travel since the last reset in “hours:minutes: seconds.” Elapsed Time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position. Press the multifunction switch ( ) for 1 second and release to reset “Trip A” or “Trip B”. “Trip B” is reset after each key on/key off cycle. Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 7. START & STOP Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. With the ignition device in RUN position, the screen will display the status of the function (see example in picture). To change the status of the function, please see chapter “Automatic Start&Stop System” of section “Driving”. 8. AUDIO Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. Dashboard Instruments and Controls The display will show the audio status (source and current audio track) as set on the MTC+. It is possible to display 5 lines of 15 alphanumeric characters. Displays Audio Statuses are: • AM: Station Number, provided with one line of info (frequency); • FM: Frequency, provided with 2 info lines; • DAB (digital radio), where available: number and station name, artist, song; • BTSA Bluetooth: folder, album, artist, song; • USB (Audio): USB, album, artist, current track or, if available, previous track, current track and next track; • USB: folder, previous track, current track and next track; • SD Card (Audio): album, artist, previous track, current track and next track; • SD Card: folder, previous track, current track and next track; • AUX: name of source, “Device Connected” text; • No Signal: “No Signal Available” text; • Mute: symbol “Mute”, the lines remain those displayed before the command “Mute”. The different reception modes are identified by symbols, shown on the display above the info lines. The chart indicates their meaning. AM FM AUX SD DAB (where available) USB • Many signals • Signal not available BTSA App Audio mute • Phone Call Details The display will show the information on incoming call if this feature is checkmarked on MTC+ (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section). On display, said details shall temporarily replace the ones on media source in use. Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 4 9. STORED MESSAGES Press and release the central switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. The system will either display the number of the stored messages (if any available) or “No Stored Messages” as shown in picture. 165 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Press and release the button to return to the main menu. 4 166 Press and release the switch in the or arrow directions to scroll the stored messages. When the number of messages exceeds 9, the submenu points will be replaced by a numerical value indicating the message number. Press and release the switch ( ) to view the selected message (see example in the picture). 10. VEHICLE SETTINGS With ignition switch in RUN position and vehicle stopped, press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. Press and release the switch ( ) to access the submenus. Scroll with the switch in the or arrow directions to view the selectable items: • Speed Warning • Electric Parking Brake • Passenger Air bag (if foreseen) • Interior Lighting • Screen Setup NOTE: • In order to modify the status of electric parking brake, please see chapter “Parking Brake” in section “Driving”. • In order to modify the status of passenger air bag, please see paragraph “Passenger's Air bag Deactivation (if foreseen)” in “Supplemental Restraint Systems – Air bag” in section “Before Starting”. • Adjust interior lighting brightness or/and ambient lighting as described in paragraph “Interior Lights” under “Lights” in section “Understanding the Vehicle”. TFT Display: Example to modify the “Speed Warning” status NOTE: • Minimum set speed: 30 km/h (18 mph). • Maximum set speed: 280 km/h (174 mph). When the vehicle is in motion (above 8 km/h – 5 mph) this function is available and displayed in the list of “Vehicle Settings” menu. Scroll with the switch in the or arrow directions to view the selectable items. Press and release the switch ( ) to select “Speed Warning”. Dashboard Instruments and Controls A pop-up message indicating that the limit has been exceeded will appear on display. Press and release the switch ( ) once again to view the related options: “Off” is the default status. Scroll with the switch in the or arrow directions to view the selectable options. Speed values are in loop, keeping the switch pressed in the or arrow directions will increase scroll speed. Press and release the switch ( ) to select the option. A check mark will remain next to the previously-selected item until a new selection is made. A setting saved notification appears as a popup for 2 seconds and a white telltale indicating the set speed limit will appear on display. Then the display will show the last modified item. When the set speed is exceeded, the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal and the telltale indicating the speed limit becomes amber. 4 The pop-up message and the telltale will be displayed for 5 seconds then system will return to the previous screen. SCREEN SETUP After having entered the “Vehicle Settings” menu, press and release the switch in the or arrow directions until this menu item is displayed. Press and release the switch ( ) to access the available items for this submenu. If the vehicle exceeds 8 km/h (5 mph), this feature is unavailable and the main screen shows possible options in grey (not activable). 167 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 168 Operate this function with the vehicle stopped and transmission in P (Park) position. In order to enter a function, press the switch ( ). The following directory shows the items available in the "Screen Setup" submenu: Upper Left • None • Compass (only with navigation system) • Outside Temperature (default: Upper Right) • Date • Time • Time/Date (default: Upper Left) • Range to Empty • Average L/100km or km/L (or MPG) • Current L/100km or km/L (or MPG) • Trip A Distance • Trip B Distance Upper Right (example in picture) • None • Compass (only with navigation system) • Outside Temperature (default: Upper Right) • Date • Time • Time/Date (default: Upper Left) • Range to Empty • Average L/100km or km/L (or MPG) • Current L/100km or km/L (or MPG) • Trip A Distance • Trip B Distance Main Menu: Line 1 (only displays in Main Menu) • None (default status) • Compass (only with navigation system) • Outside Temp. • Date • Time • Time/Date • Range to Empty • Average L/100km or km/L (or MPG) • Current L/100km or km/L (or MPG) • Trip A Distance • Trip B Distance • Audio Main Menu: Line 2 (only displays in Main Menu) • Same configurable options as Line 1 Main Menu: Line 3 (only displays in Main Menu) • Same configurable options as Line 1 MPH km/h Display (instruction line) • On Off Main Menu Navigation • On Off Outline Colouring • On Off Key-On Display • On Off Key-Off Display • On: Trip summary Off: screen with Maserati logo and trident Defaults • Restore Cancel Scroll with the switch in the or arrow directions to view the selectable items (in the example “Time” is selected). A check mark will remain next to the previously-selected item until a new selection is made. Dashboard Instruments and Controls function is set to "Off", the navigation information will not be displayed. If the “Outline Colouring” is set to “On”, the TFT side edge of engine temperature and fuel gauge indicators will change color depending on the selected Drive Mode: • OFF ROAD: brown; • I.C.E.: light blue; • SPORT: green (example shown in picture); • CORSA (TROFEO version only): golden. If it is set to "Off", the color/Drive Mode combination is not active and the edges will remain "NORMAL" Drive Mode color. Press and release the switch ( ) to select an item. The notification of setting saved appears as a popup for 2 seconds, then the display will show the last-modified item. Press and release the button to return to the “Screen Setup” submenu. “Screen Setup” submenu parameters set by the user as the ones to be displayed are also indicated in the top part of the MTC+ (see example in the figures). As for the instruction line “MPH km/h Display”, you can either select to display it in sector 6 or not (“Off” option). In the latter case, the function of changing units remains in any case active. If the “Main Menu Navigation” is set to “On”, navigation information will be displayed in the main area of the display only if a destination has been set on the navigator of the MTC+. If 4 “Key-On Display” and “Key-Off Display” items allow user to set display during vehicle key-on and off. “Key-On Display” is normally set to “On”. When entering the vehicle, 169 Dashboard Instruments and Controls after the welcome screen, the display will show the information concerning engine starting sequence. While if it is set to “Off” (example shown in figure), the display will show the information displayed before last vehicle key-off. 4 When engine is started and ignition device is pressed to stop it, it is possible to set “Key-Off Display”, “On” or “Off” to obtain the following display settings: • “On”: “Trip summary” screen (Trip B is reset after each key-on/key-off cycle); • “Off”: screen with Maserati logo and trident. The “Defaults” item of “Screen Setup” submenu allows restoring Maserati factory settings. 170 Dashboard Instruments and Controls TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions Display sections indicated in the figure show warning/indicator lights concerning all selected driving functions and all set functions/systems. The relevant messages will be indicated within the main area for five seconds, unless otherwise specified. Fault messages will be stored under “Stored messages”. 4 Gasoline 171 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 Diesel 172 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Charging System Warning Light This warning light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the warning light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system warning light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Require IMMEDIATE service at the Service Network. If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Start Procedures” in section “In an Emergency”. Transmission Temperature Warning Light This warning light and the related message indicate that the transmission fluid temperature is rising. If this warning light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. . Then, shift the transmission into P (Park) and run the engine at idle or faster until the temperature drops and the light switches off. If the problem persists, contact the Service Network. CAUTION! Continuous driving with the transmission temperature warning light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or failure. WARNING! If the transmission temperature warning light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. Engine Temperature Warning Light This warning light notifies when the engine is overheated. If the temperature reaches critical levels and the gauge displayed in sector 12 turns red, this warning light under the engine temperature gauge indicator will illuminate in red color combined with the related message on display. When the temperature is reaching the set threshold an acoustic signal will be heard. If the warning light switches on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into N (Neutral) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature does not return to normal, immediately turn the engine off and contact the Service Network. Check “Engine Overheating” in section “In an Emergency” for more information. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Under normal conditions, the warning light illuminates when the ignition device is turned to RUN and goes off as soon as the engine is started. If the warning light stays or turns on while driving, the engine oil pressure is too low. The warning light is combined with a displayed message and an acoustic signal that will last 4 minutes. In this case, turn the engine off immediately and carry out the necessary checks. Do not operate the vehicle until the problem has been corrected. This light does not indicate the oil level. The engine oil level must be checked with the dipstick located under the hood (see “Maintenance Procedures” in section “Maintenance and Care”). If the problem persists, contact the Service Network. 4 173 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Engine Oil Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that the engine oil is overheated. The warning light is combined with the related displayed message. In this case, drive carefully until the temperature drops back to normal level and the warning light indicator turns off. If the problem persists, contact the Service Network. 4 Low Engine Oil Level Warning Light (Gasoline only) This warning light and the related displayed message, indicate a low engine oil level. The engine oil level must be checked with the dipstick fitted under the hood (see “Maintenance Procedures” in section “Maintenance and Care”). Electric Power Steering Failure Warning Light This warning light, and the related message, illuminate when the electric power steering is not operating and needs service. If the warning light is on steering assistance may be not available. 174 WARNING! After battery disconnection event, the warning light may be on. In this case, start the engine and perform a steering wheel stroke to bottom in both senses. If the problem persists, contact the Service Network. Catalyst Over Temperature Warning Light This warning light, and the related message, light up if the engine runs irregularly with consequent high temperature in the exhaust system. WARNING! • If the warning light is accompanied by the message “Catalyst Temp Getting Hot Reduce Speed”: the temperature of the catalytic converters is too high. The driver must slow down immediately until the warning light turns off. • If the warning light is accompanied by the message “Catalyst Temp Getting Hot Reduce Speed”: the temperature of the catalytic converters is too high. The driver must slow down immediately until the warning light turns off. • Maserati declines all responsibility for whatever damage deriving from non-compliance with the above mentioned warnings. Door Ajar Indicator This indicator illuminates when one or more doors are ajar. The indicator will show which door is ajar. When one or more doors are open, a related message will be displayed if the vehicle is running at a speed of 8 km/h (5 mph) or faster. Liftgate and Hood Ajar Indicators These light indicators will illuminate to indicate that the and/or the hood are ajar. When the liftgate or the hood is open, a related message will be displayed besides the light if the vehicle is running at a speed of 8 km/h (5 mph) or faster. Low Fuel Indicator When the fuel level reaches approximately 16.0 litres (3.5 UK gal) this light under the fuel gauge indicator will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added together with the related message. In this condition the color indicating the Dashboard Instruments and Controls quantity of fuel in the tank, inside the indicator on display, will go from white to amber. Refer to “Refuelling” in section “Driving” for fuel filling. Windshield and Headlights Washer Low Fluid Indicator This indicator will illuminate for 5 seconds to indicate a low level of the windshield and headlights washer fluid. A related message will be displayed. See “Maintenance Procedures” in section “Maintenance and Care” for fluid filling. Headlight Aiming System Failure Warning Light This warning light, and the related message, indicate a failure of the horizontal levelling or electromechanical swivelling of the headlight system. Please contact the Service Network to check the system. Advanced Frontlighting System (AFS) Failure Warning Light This warning light and the related message light up to report a failure of the AFS system. Contact the Service Network as soon as possible. Automatic High Beam Failure Warning Light This warning light and the related message light up to report a failure of the automatic high beam headlights. Contact the Service Network as soon as possible. Suspensions Failure Warning Light This warning light and the related message turn on while driving if there is a failure of the suspension system. Please contact the Service Network to check the system. Ice Hazard Indicator When the external temperature falls below 3°C (38°F), the temperature value blinks for a few seconds, the indicator light turns on, a message is displayed and an acoustic signal is triggered to warn the driver of the risk of icy roadbed. Under such conditions, we recommend using the I.C.E. drive mode (see “Automatic Transmission” in section “Driving”) drive carefully and slow down as the grip of the tires may be significantly reduced. The indicator light flashes for 5 seconds and switches off when the temperature reaches 6°C (43°F) or higher. Brake Pads Wear Warning Light This warning light and the related message indicate that the brake pads have reached their wear limit. Please contact the Service Network to have them replaced. 4 Electric Parking Brake Failure Warning Light This warning light and related message illuminate when there is an EPB system failure. The failure could also completely or partially block the vehicle because the parking brake could remain on even after it has been automatically or manually disengaged though its controls. If it is still possible to use the vehicle (parking brake not engaged) drive to the nearest Service Network and remember to perform each operation/command during which the electric parking brake does not work. 175 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Start&Stop Disable Indicator This indicator illuminates when Start&Stop is turned off through the controls located on the right side of the steering wheel or through the relevant soft-key of the MTC+. See chapter “Automatic Start&Stop System” of section “Driving” for further information. 4 Start&Stop Failure Warning Light This warning light illuminates when there is a failure in the Start&Stop system. Switch the engine on or off using the normal procedure with the ignition device START/STOP and have the vehicle checked at a Service Network. Scheduled Maintenance (Service) Indicator This indicator illuminates and a message flashes on the display after an acoustic signal to indicate that the next scheduled maintenance is due or has already overdue. Unless reset, the indicator and message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the button on the steering wheel. To reset the service 176 indicator system, please visit a Service Centre. Passenger's Air bag Deactivated Indicator (if equipped) This warning light switches on when the passenger's air bag is deactivated. See “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbags” in section “Before Starting” for further details. Wait to Start Indicator (Diesel only) This indicator will turn on when the ignition device is first turned to the RUN position. Wait until the Wait to Start indicator turns off to start the engine. Refer to “Normal Starting of the Engine” in section “Driving” for further details. Water in Fuel (Diesel only) It indicates there is water detected in the fuel filter. If this light remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain the water from the fuel filter to prevent engine damage. Contact the Service Network for inspection and draining of the fuel filter. CAUTION! The presence of water inside the fuel system can damage the injection system and cause engine’s malfunction. If the warning light turns on, you shall contact the Service Network as soon as possible to have the fuel filter cleaned. If, after a refueling, the warning light turns on, some water could have entered the fuel tank: in this case, turn off the engine immediately and contact the Service Network. Low AdBlue® Indicator (Diesel only) This indicator will turn on to indicate the AdBlue® is low (for more details see paragraph “Messages Concerning the AdBlue® Injection System (Diesel only)” in this chapter. ADAS Status Indicators When you are not viewing the “Drive Assist” page, the indicators at top left-hand side of the display indicate status of individual ADAS system or the combination of them (see examples). For further details, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC”, “Lane Keeping Dashboard Instruments and Controls Assist - LKA” and “Highway Assist HAS” in section “Driving”. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off This warning light informs the driver that Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is disabled. This might occur when front sensor and/or the ACC/FCW system sensors are malfunctioning and need cleaning or servicing and when ACC/FCW system is not available due to a system error (for further details, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control ACC” in section “Driving”). This warning light will light even when the activation of another driver assistance feature or drive mode (such as “ - ESC OFF”) disables the FCW. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Fault This warning light informs that FCW is in fault state. If this occurred together with other specific messages, could mean that a system fault requiring servicing at the Service Network. It is nevertheless possible to drive the vehicle without using this function (for further details, refer to “Forward Collision Warning - FCW” in section “Driving”). General Fault for Driving with a Trailer (NOT for TROFEO version) The warning light and the relevant message are displayed to indicate a fault or failure of the connection between vehicle and trailer. In these cases please contact the Service Network as soon as possible, and avoid using the vehicle with a trailer. AWD Failure Warning Light This warning light turns on to indicate a fault of the AWD system otherwise a fault or overheating due to excessive wheel spin. Contact the Service Network as soon as possible, and avoid using the vehicle in heavy duty conditions. Set Passive Speed Limit This warning light indicates the passive speed limit set via the controls on the RH side of the steering wheel (for further details, refer to “TFT Display: Menus and Settings” in this chapter). Passive Speed Limit Exceeded This warning light informs the driver that the speed limit that was set has been exceeded. Stiff Suspension Setting Indicator This indicator light indicate that the stiff suspensions program (“S”) is on. For further details, refer to “Drive Mode” in section “Driving”. Set Drive Mode Indicator Drive mode set by the driver through the controls on central console is displayed above the transmission lever indicator (example in picture: NORMAL). For further details, refer to “Drive Mode” in section “Driving”. 4 Ride Height Indicator for Vehicle Setup Ride height set through the control on central console is always displayed in the specific area on the RH side of the TFT display. From the “Normal” level (shown in picture) ride height can be lowered at “Aero 1” or “Aero 2” levels when using vehicle on the road. When using the vehicle off road, ride height can be set to a higher position thanks to “Off Road 1” or “Off Road 2” levels. For further details, refer to “Drive Mode” and "Off-road Drive” in section “Driving”. The lowest position “Entry/Exit” shown in picture 177 Dashboard Instruments and Controls is used for entering and exiting the vehicle. Cruise Control (CC) Ready or Canceled This white light indicator will illuminate when the CC is ready to be set (with 3 dashes below) and, once it sets, when it is temporarily canceled (set speed in white below). For further information, check “Electronic Speed Limiter and Cruise Control” in section “Driving”. 4 Cruise Control (CC) Set This green light indicator will illuminate with the set speed when the CC is set and in driver override. For further information, check “Electronic Speed Limiter and Cruise Control” in section “Driving”. Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) Fault This warning light on indicates that the LKA system is in fault. If the warning light and the relevant message do not go off after a few manoeuvres and eventually an ignition cycle, contact the Service Network. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready or Canceled This white warning light indicates that the ACC is ready to be set (with 3 dashes below) 178 and, once it sets, when it is temporarily canceled (set speed in white below). For further details, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC” in section “Driving”. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set This green warning light with below the set speed turns on when the ACC is set (for further details, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC” in section “Driving”) and vehicle will keep set speed. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault This warning light turns on when ACC is not operating or needs servicing, For further details, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC (optional)” in section “Driving”. Blind Spot Assist (BSA) Failure Warning Light This warning light and related message light on to report a failure of the BSA system. As consequence, on vehicles equipped with ABSA also this latter will be not working or malfunctioning. Contact the Service Network as soon as possible avoiding to use this system. Hill Descent Control (HDC) Ready This white light turns on to indicate that HDC is ready to be set and, once it sets, to turn it off temporarily. For further details, refer to “Brake and Stability Control System” in section “Driving”. Hill Descent Control (HDC) Set This green light with below the set speed turns on when the HDC is set. For further details, refer to “Brake and Stability Control System” in section “Driving”. Park/Headlight On Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. For further details, see “Lights” in section “Understanding the Vehicle”. Front Fog lights On Indicator This indicator turns on when the fog lights are on. Automatic High Beam On Indicator This indicator turn on when the “ Auto High Beam Assist” feature is set on MTC+ (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section). Dashboard Instruments and Controls Gear Shift Indicator Light This indicator lights up to indicate gear shift change in order to optimise fuel consumption. See “Drive Mode” in section “Driving” for further information. Performance “Launch Control” Indicator (TROFEO version only) This indicator lights up when the car is launched in the “Launch Control” performance start procedure. See chapter “Drive Mode” in section “Driving” for “Launch Control” procedure. Service AWD System Message The message on the TFT display will illuminate when all-wheel drive feature requires service. For further information refer to “All-Wheel Drive” in section “Driving”. Carefully follow the indications shown on the display until regeneration is completed (see examples). DPF System Messages (Diesel only) Under conditions of exclusive short duration and low speed driving cycles, the engine and exhaust aftertreatment system may never reach the conditions required to remove the trapped Particulate Matter (PM). If this occurs a message will be displayed permanently on the TFT display when driving. This message is repeated each time the vehicle is started and, if user changes the TFT page, it reappears after 120 seconds and will remain displayed for the entire driving cycle. By driving your vehicle at highway speeds for as little as 30 minutes, you can remedy the condition in the particulate filter system by allowing the trapped PM to be removed to restore the system to normal operating condition. 4 Diesel Diesel 179 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 180 Diesel Diesel If the exhaust after-treatment system requires service intervention, a message and the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be displayed to alert the driver. In this condition the engine will be derated to prevent permanent damage to the after-treatment system. If this condition occurs, it is necessary to have your vehicle serviced by your local Service Network. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on inhibits the regeneration process with possible DPF clogged. • Maserati is not responsible for defects occurring due to not performed DPF regeneration process. Messages Concerning the AdBlue® Injection System (Diesel only) Suitable messages displayed on the TFT display indicate when the system needs servicing, or AdBlue® needs to be added to the tank in the boot compartment. When the system requires servicing, in addition to the message the Malfunction Indicator Light is also displayed. In these cases, as indicated on the message reported in figure, contact the Service Network. Diesel Diesel ® When AdBlue needs to be added to the tank, its messages are displayed when driving and are repeated each time the vehicle is started, accompanied by a single acoustic signal. The mileage reported on some of these messages indicates the remaining range of AdBlue® which is continuously updated and made Dashboard Instruments and Controls visible at each next start up. This mileage is the result of an estimated consumption that depends on the type of use of the vehicle. Therefore it is appropriate to refuel as soon as possible. When the estimated range of AdBlue® is less than 2400 km (1500 mi) on the instrument cluster display an early warning about AdBlue® level low appears: it is suggested to refuel AdBlue® as soon as possible. When the estimated range is less than 1500 km (932 mi), the warning light comes on. When the mileage displayed reaches 600 km (360 mi), the messages will be displayed continuously unless other warnings come up (i.e. safety related messages). been turned off, will not restart: refuel AdBlue® regularly (see chapter “Adding reducing agent AdBlue® (Diesel only)” in section “Driving”). It is important that you follow the displayed instructions closely otherwise the engine may not restart after it stops. A few example messages are reported in the figure. Messages are stored in “Stored Messages”. Diesel CAUTION! When the indicated range is less than 1 km (0.6 mi), if the engine is switched off the car can no longer be started: in this case we suggest you not to switch off the engine and to refuel preventively AdBlue®. Diesel Message Concerning the Residual Life of Engine Oil (Diesel only) According to the degradation that the engine oil has reached, according to the conditions of use of the vehicle, the instrument cluster can display the request to carry out the oil change in advance of the expected Service. A first warning will indicate to change the oil as soon as possible and a second will indicate to do it immediately. After this last warning, if the oil is not replaced, in addition to the warning indicated in the picture, the Malfunction Indicator Light will also come on. 4 NOTE: In case of exhaustion of AdBlue® the vehicle, once the engine has 181 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Infotainment System 4 CAUTION! • When the warnings on the residual life of engine oil appear on the instrument cluster, it is advisable to go as soon as possible to the Service Network that will carry out the necessary checks. • Prolonged driving with the MIL on inhibits the regeneration process with possible DPF clogged. 182 The vehicle is equipped with the infotainment Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+) System, an advanced user interface which combines innovative and exclusive technical features integrating entertainment, user settings, air conditioning, navigation, communication and information features within a single system. The MTC+ System features an audio system which is acoustically optimised for this specific vehicle. WARNING! The navigation system assists the driver while driving, providing advice and suggestions, by voice guidance and graphic information, for the best route to reach the set destination. The suggestions provided by the navigation system do not relieve the driver from full responsibility for the manoeuvres made through traffic while driving, or from compliance with road regulations and other provisions regarding road traffic. The person driving the vehicle is always and in any case responsible for safe driving on the road. The vehicle is provided with a specific add to the owner’s manual, describing the MTC+ System features and listing all warnings and precautions, which are essential for a safe use of the system. Maserati advises you to read this add carefully and thoroughly. The MTC+ display is positioned in the central part of the dashboard and the manual controls and devices for connecting external sources are positioned on the central console. Dashboard Instruments and Controls 7 Tune/scroll control. Manual Controls and Devices SD, AUX and USB Ports When an SD card is inserted into its housing, the MTC+ is able to read it and select multimedia files (music and images) from the device. By using the AUX and USB ports it is possible to connect external devices to the MTC+ (see chapter “Interior features” in section “Understanding the Vehicle”). After connecting the device, by using the MTC+ display soft-keys, knobs on the central console and controls at the steering wheel, user can navigate through the content of the connected device and set its playing mode. 1 MTC+ touch display. 2 Ports for SD card, AUX and USB (for further details, refer to “Interior features” in section “Understanding the Vehicle”). “Browse” button . 3 4 5 “Back” button “Enter” button. 6 Volume control. . Multimedia Navigation Controls on Central Console The manual controls located on the central console are a further interface for the driver and nearby passenger, that adds to the MTC+ display softkeys. Using the manual controls, the MTC+ display will work as a graphic display of the inputs from the controls. Volume Control By working this knob in “Radio” or “Media” mode, user can adjust the volume of the radio or audio files, from minimum to maximum and vice versa. Turn knob clockwise to increase the volume, counter-clockwise to decrease it. The volume status will be indicated in the top part of the MTC+ display. 4 Tune/Scroll Control By working this knob in “Radio” or “Media” mode, user can go through the radio stations or scroll the tracks inside connected external devices and confirm the selection by pressing enter button. In any other mode of the MTC+, use this knob to scroll the list of available options or to manage the cursor movement in the lower bar of the main menus. Then press enter button to confirm the function or setting highlighted on MTC+ display. 183 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Browse button After selecting a function, using the tune/scroll knob or soft-keys on MTC+ display, press this button to see the detail of the items/options of the selected function. This button is also used as short cut to display the phone book, when the “Phone” menu is selected, or the favourites when the “Nav (Navigation)” menu is selected. 4 Back button Press this button to go back to previous menu or previous screen. Press this button to shift the navigation one level backwards on MTC+ screen. If it is pressed and held for at least 2 seconds, it brings the cursor back in the lower bar of the main menus. Enter Button To confirm the function or setting highlighted on MTC+ display. When in “Radio” mode and the ignition switch in RUN position, you can save your preset stations. Main Menu Bar on MTC+ Display The soft keys located on the lower part of the MTC+ display represent the main menu modes/functions, which are briefly indicated below. 184 MTC+ with Navigation System MTC+ without Navigation System Main menu bar is set up by Maserati: it can be customised according to personal requirements, as explained in “Customising the Main Menu Bar” in this chapter. NOTE: The images may represent a main menu bar other than the one on your MTC+. For further information refer to the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" dedicated booklet included in the owner documentation. 1 “S&S Off” (Start&Stop Off) softkey Touch this soft-key to disable the Start&Stop function. The highlighted soft-key indicates the disabled status of this function and vice versa. 2 “Radio” soft-key Touch this soft-key to enter the Radio mode. The different tuner modes: FM, AM, DAB and “Aha” App (for countries where they are supported) can be selected by touching the related soft-keys in the Radio mode. 3 “Media” soft-key Touch this soft-key to access media sources such as: USB Device, AUX, Bluetooth and SD card as long as the requested media is present. 4 (Apps) soft-key Touch this soft-key to access connected phone connection options and user functions settings. 5 “Climate” soft-key Dashboard Instruments and Controls Touch this soft-key to access the air conditioning settings. In this screen the following controls are also available: Heated Seats, Heated Steering Wheel and Ventilated Seats. See “Air Conditioning Controls” in this section for further details. 6 “Nav” soft-key (if equipped) Touch this soft-key to access the Navigation feature. Refer to the MTC+ instruction manual for further details. 7 “Phone” soft-key Touch this soft-key to access the MTC+ Phone feature that can be set or monitored via MTC+. 8 “Screen Off” soft-key (default position only for MTC+ without navigator). Touch one of these soft-keys to access the list of functions that the user can set. Touch screen Display Warnings CAUTION! • Do NOT attach any object to the touch screen, doing so can result in damage to the touch screen. • Do not press the screen with any hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.) which could scratch the touch screen surface. • Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen. Use a clean and dry micro fiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the touch screen. • If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol, or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer’s precautions and directions. Switch OFF Touch screen Backlight If the screen backlight becomes annoying when driving, it is possible to switch it off. Switch off the screen backlight by touching “Screen OFF” soft-key in the “Controls” screen of MTC+ display. Without ADAS 4 With ADAS Customising the Main Menu Bar The soft-keys for the main functions of the MTC+ system, indicated at the bottom of the MTC+ display, can be easily customised to suit user's requirements, as follows: • touch button to open applications/settings screen; 185 Dashboard Instruments and Controls • hold depressed and drag the icon corresponding to the selected function until it overlaps the one to be replaced on the bottom bar. 4 Once it is set in the menu bar, the new connection will be immediately operational. device (Android or iOS), applications on the phone that are compatible with "Android Auto", "Apple CarPlay" or "Baidu CarLife" (for markets where it is available) can be projected on the MTC+; these applications may require confirmation via pop-up or an explicit Bluetooth® connection before starting the projector function. When the projector function is on, the other devices connected via Bluetooth® will be disconnected. "Android Auto" app needs to be downloaded on the mobile devices with Android operating system. "Baidu CarLife" (for markets where it is available) app needs to be downloaded on the mobile devices with Android or iOS operating system. Use the MTC+ Display as Projection Device If your smartphone is properly connected to the vehicle via the USB port, on MTC+ screen in place of "Phone" soft-key and in the source list of "Media" screen you can find the "Apple CarPlay" (example shown in picture), the "Android Auto" or the "Baidu CarLife" (for markets where it is available) app soft-key. With "Baidu CarLife" active the main "Phone" app will always available in the (Apps) screen. Depending on the operating system of the connected 186 "Apple CarPlay" allows the best use of your iPhone® in the car and perfect integration with the MTC+ display and with the controls of the car, including Siri voice control. You can make phone calls, access music, send and receive messages, get real-time directions on traffic conditions, all while staying focused on the road. The “Android Auto” app lets you share information while driving and make it easier to access Google. The interface is equipped with Google Maps with voice guided navigation, traffic information in real time, on-demand access to millions of songs in Google Play Music. It also offers the possibility to make phone calls or send and receive messages without taking your hands off the steering wheel. You can also request Google to make any type of research. Android Auto will give an easier access to applications and content from the MTC+ system display. "Baidu CarLife" (for markets where it is available) is an application that can be executed on mobile devices with Android or iOS operating system. It uses its own voice command engine, similar to Siri or Google Voice, and supports navigation services (Baidu Maps) and streaming music. All phonerelated features will relay on the main "Phone" app of the MTC+ system. NOTE: For further details on connecting and using the mobile projector function, Dashboard Instruments and Controls refer to the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide. With the smartphone connected via USB port, when a session is established and the mobile device (represented in Table A) or the MTC+ System (represented in Table B) is performing an action, the following tables show which source is displayed on the MTC+ screen (indicated with "Screen" in tables) and which audio source (indicated with "Audio" in tables) of projection device or of MTC+ is displayed or used by the system in the projector function. 4 187 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Table A: device is performing an action MTC+ System : Active Mode Action Radio 4 Media No App active Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Start Media Player Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: + Start Navigation Screen: Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: + Audio priority Start VR Phone Voice Rec. Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Start Phone Call 188 Navigation Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Dashboard Instruments and Controls Table B: MTC+ is performing an action Device Action No App active Media : Active Mode Navigation Phone Call Voice Rec. Start Radio Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Main Audio: + mix prompt nav Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Start Media Player Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Main Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Start Navigation Screen: Audio: Screen: Main Audio: + Audio priority Start Rear Parking Camera Screen: Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: Start Phone Call Start VR Screen: Audio: 4 Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: + Audio priority Screen: Audio: Cannot start VR during Call Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: Screen: Audio: 189 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Audio Controls The vehicle is equipped with audio controls that allow both driver and front passenger to operate the audio system. These controls can be used to adjust audio volume, change radio station or mode (FM, AM, USB, etc). Steering Wheel Audio Controls 4 These audio controls are rocker-type switches with a button in the center and are located on the rear side of the steering wheel, right behind the front switches. Press any button to display information on the radio station or track being listened to inside a pop-up for 2 seconds on instrument cluster. The right-hand control manages the volume. By pressing the top of the rocker switch you can increase the volume 190 and by pressing the bottom of the rocker switch you can lower it. Press the center button to mute the volume. The left-hand control functions depend on the current source. To change source, press the center button. When in “Radio” mode, pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the previous listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the previous listenable station. When an external source is connected to MTC+, a light press on the top of the switch will play the next track on the device connected. Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play. If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third one, etc. Audio Controls on Central Console In “Radio” mode, turn the volume upper knob to set the audio volume, or turn the tune/scroll bottom knob to tune station. For further details, refer to “Infotainment System” in this section. When in App/Settings mode, the tune/scroll bottom knob and the browse and enter buttons allow you to scroll through the menus and change the user’s settings (see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). Dashboard Instruments and Controls Audio System dashboard, one on each front door panel and one on each side wall of the boot, above the cover level. • Four 25 mm (1 in) diameter Tweeters: one at the base of the windshield side pillars and one on each rear door. • One bass box in the boot, under the front part of the floor. • 12-channel amplifier positioned in the wall of the boot left side. The vehicle is equipped with an audio system that offers superior sound quality, higher sound pressure levels and reduced energy consumption. The system maximises the amplifier and speaker technology delivering substantially higher components and system efficiency. Basic System The basic sound system features 8 speakers and can develop a sound output of 280 W. The basic system includes: • Four 165 mm (6.5 in) diameter Woofers, one on each door. • Four 25 mm (1 in) diameter Tweeters, one at the base of the windshield side pillars and one on each rear door. 4 Basic System Premium System The vehicle can be equipped with a “Premium” sound system which features 14 speakers and can develop a sound output of 900 W. This system includes: • Four 160 mm (6.3 in) diameter Woofers, one on each door. • Five 80 mm (3.1 in) diameter Midrange: one on the top of the Premium System 191 Dashboard Instruments and Controls High Premium System 4 192 The vehicle can be equipped with a “High Premium” audio system including 17 speakers and 1280 W of sound power, available upon request. The “High Premium” system includes: • Four 165 mm (6.5 in) Woofers: one on each door. • Five 100 mm (4 in) Midranges: one on center dashboard, one on each front door and one on each side wall of the boot, above the cover level. • Seven 25 mm (1 in) Tweeters: one on center dashboard, one at the base of the windshield side pillars, one on each rear door and one on each side wall of the boot, above the cover level. • One bass box in the boot, under the front part of the floor. • 16-channel amplifier positioned in the wall of the boot left side. High Premium System The “High Premium” sound system is supplied with a 12-channel highefficiency amplifier and is operated by a high-voltage tracking power supply and drives a 7.5-channel playback architecture. This audio system offers the ability to choose Logic 7® surround-sound for any audio source. The high-efficiency speaker design ensures higher Sound Pressure Level (SPL) and exceptional dynamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for maximum efficiency and compatible with the amplifier output stage ensuring best updated surround sound processing. Logic 7® multichannel surround sound technology delivers an immersive, accurate sound stage throughout the passenger compartment. This surround effect is available from any audio source - AM/FM/Satellite Radio or AUX and USB input; and is activated through the MTC+ System controls (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section). By selecting “Surround Sound”, you can activate the Logic 7® multichannel surroundsound technology in your vehicle. All information on the current operational mode can be found in the specific booklet visible on the MTC+ screen. When in “Surround Sound” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available in surround mode but it should be set to the center position for optimal surround performance. Dashboard Instruments and Controls MTC+ “Controls” Screen Touch the “Controls” soft-key on the lower part of the MTC+ display to turn on/off some on-board devices and turn on/off and adjust some driver assist systems (ADAS). Once you enter the “Controls” screen, using the touch soft-keys or turn the tune/scroll knob to scroll and change settings of the features and press the enter upper button to confirm the selection. Some of these devices or systems are optional or for a specific model/version and may not be available on your vehicle. The “Controls” screen is specific to the vehicles that are not equipped with driver assistance systems (Without ADAS) and for those that have them (With ADAS). With ADAS Some features can be set only on or off touching the corresponding softkey which will be highlighted with the blue outline. Other features can have one or more instruction/setting pages that are accessed by touching the corresponding soft-key (example: "Privacy Lock"). The ADAS features have two soft-keys: the first changes the current setting on or off, the second on the side shows the current setting. Touching this last soft-key you enter the setting page in which all feature options are visible and adjustable. NOTE: • For further details refer also to the “Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)” guide. • All settings must be edited with ignition device set to RUN position. • Some of the Customer programmable features are optional or for a specific model/version and may not be available on your vehicle. • Only one touch screen area/soft-key may be selected at a time. • Menu navigation indications refer to the use of soft-keys on MTC+ display: the same operations can be performed using the manual controls on central console. Features Common to All Configurations 4 • Privacy Lock The two modes of this feature allows you to enter a 4-digit PIN code to lock and unlock the glove box in the passenger side of the dashboard and, choosing “Valet Mode”, to lock your settings for listening and guidance. See "Dashboard Compartments" in this section for further details • Start & Stop Off This feature allows you to disable the Start & Stop when frequent stops and restarts of the engine may become annoying. Without ADAS 193 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 See "Automatic Start&Stop System" in section "Driving" for further details. • Auto High Beam Assist By selecting this feature, when the forward digital camera detect a vehicle that precedes in the direction of travel or in the opposite direction, adjust the high beam in an automatic way not to dazzle. See "Lights" in section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further details. • Screen OFF This feature allows you to switch off the MTC+ screen backlight if it becomes annoying when driving. See "Infotainment System" in this section for further details. • Settings Touch this soft-key you enter the “Settings” page that displays all user - customizable features: see “MTC+ Settings” in this section. Features Specific for Vehicle without ADAS • Blind Spot Assist Activating this feature the BSA and RCP systems assist the driver when changing lanes, overtaking and when parking, by detecting the arrival of other vehicles from a side or rear 194 blind spot. When this happens, a light signal appears in the external rear-view mirror. When the Blind Spot Assist (BSA) is selected, feature can be set to “Off”, “Lights” or “Lights + Chime” (default mode). When this feature is activated in “Lights” mode, the system will only show a warning light in the outside mirrors. When “Lights + Chime” mode is activated, the system will show a warning light in the outside mirrors as well as give an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the system is deactivated. For description of this system, see chapter “Blind Spot Assist - BSA” in section “Driving”. Touching this soft-key the set page of LKA system will be displayed (see picture). Driver warnings can be only “Visual” or “Visual & Haptic” (default mode). System response can be set to “Early”, “Medium” (default mode) and “Late”. System reaction force can be set to “Low”, “Medium” (default mode) and “High”. See “Lane Keeping Assist - LKA” in section “Driving” for more details. Features Specific for Vehicles with ADAS • Lane Keeping Assist Activating this feature the LKA system will attempt to keep the vehicle in lane and can apply direct input to electric power steering system to change direction of vehicle. The current system setting is shown in blue on the right side of the LKA soft-key. • Active Blind Spot Assist Activating this feature the system will try to prevent collision between host vehicle and potential blind spot collision hazard. System applies direct input to electric power steering system to change direction of vehicle to avoid collision. Dashboard Instruments and Controls The current system setting is shown in blue on the right side of the ABSA soft-key. Touching this soft-key the set page of ABSA system will be displayed (see picture). Driver warnings can be only “Visual”, “Visual & Acoustic” (default mode) or “Visual & Haptic”. System response can be set to “Early”, “Medium” (default mode) and “Late”. System reaction force can be set to “Low”, “Medium” (default mode) and “High”. See “Active Blind Spot Assist - ABSA” in section “Driving” for more details. • Forward Collision Warning (with active braking) The FCW feature primary use the front radar and the forward looking camera for sensing vehicle and pedestrian (if the car is equipped with Pedestrian Emergency Braking - PEB function) ahead, provide warnings to the driver and may perform brakings and brake jerks (if set). The current system setting is shown in blue on the right side of the FCW soft-key. Touching this soft-key the set page of FCW system will be displayed (see picture). FCW is always active: it is possible to set the sensitivity and the aid of the active braking. FCW sensitivity can be set to “Near”, to “Medium” or to “Far”. The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting. Setting it to “Far” means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle or pedestrian (if the car is equipped with Pedestrian Emergency Braking PEB function) in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the best reaction time, though could lead to some more unwanted warnings. “Medium” gives instead a little less time for reacting compared to “Far”, but at the same time should lead to less not desired warning. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the “Near” setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle or pedestrian (if the car is equipped with Pedestrian Emergency Braking - PEB function) in front of you. FCW with active braking can be set to “On” or “Off”. 4 • Surround View Camera Activating this feature the system uses four cameras to monitor the area around the vehicle when transmission lever is shifted to P (Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) position. When activation occurs by touching the “Surround Camera” soft-key in the “Controls” screen or moving the shift lever in R (Reverse) position, the initial view will be the default view (associated with current gear state). Image will be displayed with active 195 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 guidelines while in that gear as long as vehicle speed remains lower than 12 km/h (8 mph). When vehicle is shifted into a different gear, the image will remain displayed for 10 seconds, or vehicle is shifted in P (Park), or until vehicle speed exceeds 12 km/h (8 mph), at which point it will immediately cancel and return to the last-viewed screen. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. See “Surround View Camera System” in section “Understanding the Vehicle” for further details. • Traffic Sign Assist Activating this feature the forwardfacing digital camera, with the aid of maps on the navigation system, is able to detect signs (no overtaking, etc.) and speed limits. Those are displayed by the TSA system on the instrument cluster display together with a possible alert when the vehicle exceeds the speed limit. See “Traffic Sign Assist - TSA” in section “Driving” for further details. MTC+ Settings Customer Programmable Features The MTC+ System uses a combination of keys able to access and change the customer programmable features present in the “Settings” and “Controls” page (see also “MTC+ “Controls” Screen” in this section). Access programmable features touching “Settings” soft-key in the “Controls” screen page, or using manual controls on central console (refer to “Infotainment System” in this section). Turn the tune/scroll knob to scroll through menus and change settings on MTC+ display, press the enter upper button to confirm the selection. Without ADAS 196 Dashboard Instruments and Controls With ADAS NOTE: • All settings must be edited with ignition device set to RUN position. • Some of the Customer programmable features are optional or for a specific model/version and may not be available on your vehicle. • Only one touch screen area/soft-key may be selected at a time. • Menu navigation indications refer to the use of soft-keys on MTC+ display: the same operations can be performed using the manual controls on central console. To display the programmable features menu on MTC+, you can also touch soft-key to view all available applications and then select “Settings”. In this mode the MTC+ System allows you to access the following programmable features (some of them are optional or for a specific model/version and may not be available on your vehicle): Display, Units, Voice Commands, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistant, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Options, Suspension, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, Radio Setup, Restore Settings and Clear Personal Data. To make a selection, and enter the desired function, touch the corresponding soft-key on the menu (the picture shown is “Engine Off Options”). To scroll through the functions, move the cursor up or down, or touch the arrow or . Once the desired mode is entered, press and release the touch screen area of the setting that you wish to modify. The new setting will be highlighted with one or more boxes to indicate status or possible variants of the function status. A check mark in a box indicates the current status of the function. Touch the check mark to cancel, or the empty box to insert the check mark, and change the status of the function. 4 197 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Display 4 198 Once the procedure is completed (for example, Display mode) touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the upper right “X” soft-key, to close the settings screen. Touching the or soft keys and the cursor on the right side of the screen will allow you to scroll up or down through the available settings. After pressing the “Display” soft-key the following mode settings will be available. • Display Mode When in this display you can select one of the auto display settings. To change mode status, checkmark "Night", “Day” or “Auto”. • Display Brightness with Headlights On (Night) When in this display, you can select the brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness from level 0 to 10 with the “+” and “–” setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. • Display Brightness with Headlights Off (Day) When in this display, you can select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness as previously explained for "Night" setting. • Set Language When in this display, you can select one language for all display descriptions, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). The available languages are specific to the target markets. • Touchscreen Beep When in this display, you can turn on or shut off the sound activated by pressure of a touchscreen soft-key. • Controls Screen Time-Out When this mode is selected, the “Controls” screen will remain displayed for 5 seconds. If this mode is not selected, the screen will remain displayed until closed manually. • Nav Next Turn Pop-ups in Cluster By selecting this feature, the next turn direction will appear on the instrument cluster along a programmed route until the desired destination is reached (see picture). Dashboard Instruments and Controls • AutoShow Smartphone Display Upon Connection This feature allows to use the MTC+ display as a projection device connected via USB port in order to browse the Apple CarPlay and Android Auto apps. By setting this feature, automatic switch from native screen to projection device will happen every time you connect your smartphone. For further details refer to the “Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)” guide. Units After pressing the “Units” and then “Custom” soft-key on the touchscreen you may select between “Metric” and “U.S.” units of measure. Each unit of measure can be independently displayed in the TFT Display and in the navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measure are listed below: • Distance unit: select from: “km” or “mi”. • Speed unit: select from: “km/h” or “MPH”. • Consumption unit: select from: “L/100km”, “km/L”, “MPG (UK)” and “MPG (US)”. • Capacity unit: select from: “L”, “gal (UK)” or “gal (US)”. • Pressure unit: select from: “kPa”, “bar” or “psi”. • Temperature unit: select from: “°C” or “°F”. • Power unit: select from: “kW”, “hp (UK)” or “hp (US)”. • Torque unit: select from: “Nm” or “lb-ft”. When this feature is selected, it is possible to select options during a voice control session. Options for available controls are: “Always”, “w/Help” or “Never”. Clock Time is always visible on the dashboard analog clock (see “Analog Clock” in this section) and in digital format on the instrument cluster and on the MTC+ display. 4 Voice Commands After pressing “Voice” soft-key the following modes will be available. • Voice Response Length When in this display, you can change the voice response length settings. To change the voice response length, touch the “Brief” or “Detailed” softkey. • Show Command List 199 Dashboard Instruments and Controls With this feature it is possible to view and set the following modes. • Sync Time with GPS Time is normally automatically synchronised with the radio signal. It is also possible to set automatic synchronisation mode using GPS signal instead. 4 • Set Time Hours With “Sync Time with GPS” feature unchecked and this mode selected, you can set the hours manually from 1 to 24. To select, touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to adjust the hours. • Set Time Minutes With “Sync Time with GPS” feature unchecked and this mode selected, you can set the minutes manually from 0 to 59. To select, touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys as done for the hours. • Time Format 200 When in this mode, you can select the time format display. To change the current setting, touch and release the “12 Hrs” or “24 Hrs” soft-key. • Show Time In Status Bar This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar (main menu bar). • Set Date in Cluster When in this mode, you can set the date manually in the main menu bar of the MTC+ and on the instrument cluster display. Touch the “+” or “” soft-keys to adjust day, month and year. Safety & Driving Assistant Touch this soft-key to set the following modes. • ParkSense (Park Assist) The park assist system will scan for objects behind and in front of the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than 12 km/h (7.5 mph). The system can be enabled with “Sound” only, “Sound+Display”, or turned “Off”. See “Park Assist (optional)” in section “Before Starting” for further information. • Front Sensors Active in Drive If this feature is active, when driver takes shift lever from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to D (Drive), front parking sensors are activated. If this feature is not active, when driver takes shift lever from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to D (Drive), front parking sensors are NOT activated. • Front ParkSense Volume When this feature is selected, the chime volume of front park assist sensors can be set to “Low”, “Medium” or “High” level. “Medium” is the default setting. The system will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles. • Rear ParkSense Volume When this feature is selected, the chime volume of rear park assist sensors can be set to “Low”, “Medium” or “High” level. “Medium” is the default setting. Dashboard Instruments and Controls The system will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles. • Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse By selecting this feature the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in R (Reverse) position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of R (Reverse). The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Auto Folding Side Mirrors By selecting this feature the rear-view mirrors automatically fold when the vehicle is locked by the key fob and when the power liftgate (if equipped) is closed and locked by pressing the button on the outer ledge of the left boot compartment lining. When the vehicle and the liftgate will be unlocked, the rearview mirrors will automatically open in the position they had before the lock. If the mirrors were manually folded by the switch on the driver's door panel, before a lock action, they will need to be manually unfold to reactivate the automatic behave. • ParkView Backup Camera Delay By selecting this feature, when the shift lever is moved out of R (Reverse), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 12 km/h (8 mph), or the transmission is shifted into P (Park) or the ignition device is switched to the OFF position. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers By selecting this feature, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if the rain sensor senses moisture on the windshield. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Hill Start Assist This feature allows you to disable the HSA system. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. See “Brake and Stability Control System” in section “Driving” for further details. Lights Press the “Lights” soft-key to set the following modes. • Headlight Off Delay By selecting this feature, the driver can choose to have the headlight off or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the engine is shut off. To change the current headlight off delay status, touch and release the “0”, “30”, “60” or “90” soft-key to select the desired time range. 4 • Headlights while Opening By selecting this feature, the driver can choose to have the headlight off or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter. • Headlights with Wipers By selecting this feature, while the headlight lever is in “AUTO” position, the headlight will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are activated. The headlight will also turn off when the wipers deactivate if they were activated in the current mode. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • High Beams Auto Dim 201 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 By selecting this feature, the high beam headlight will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. See “Lights” in section “Understanding the Vehicle” for further information. • Headlight Dip (right/left-hand drive) By selecting this feature, the headlights will change their light distribution when a left-hand-drive vehicle enter a Country with righthand-drive system and vice versa. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Adaptive Front Light By selecting this feature, the headlights rotate following the steering wheel direction change and change their flux distribution at high speeds, when the vehicle enters an town area and when it's raining. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. See “Lights” in section “Understanding the Vehicle” for further details. Doors & Locks Press the “Doors & Locks” soft-key to set the following modes. • Auto Door Locks When this feature is selected, all doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is in motion. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. 202 • Auto Unlock on Exit By selecting this feature, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the driver's door is open. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Flash Lights with Lock By selecting this feature, the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob RKE transmitter or when using the Passive Entry feature. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Sound Horn with Lock (where available) When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the doors are locked with the key fob RKE transmitter. You can choose from the following options: “Off” (no sound), “1st Press” (sound on the first press of the button) and “2nd Press” (sound on the second press of the button). • Sound Horn with Remote Start When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when you use the key fob RKE transmitter to start the engine. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. See “Remote Start System” in section “Before Starting” for further details. • Remote Unlock Sequence By selecting this feature you may set up only the driver's door or all doors mode will unlock on the first press of the key fob RKE transmitter button. When “Driver Door” is selected, you must press the key fob RKE transmitter button twice to unlock also the passenger's doors. When unlocking “All Doors” by first press selection mode, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob RKE transmitter button. If driver door first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob RKE transmitter). If the vehicle is programmed on “1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks”: Dashboard Instruments and Controls - all doors will unlock no matter which “Passive Entry” equipped door handle is grasped; - only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped; - with “Passive Entry”, touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening. • Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle door(s) without having to push the key fob RKE transmitter or buttons. By selecting this feature, “Passive Entry” may be set to “On” or “Off”. The default status is “On”. With “Passive Entry” deactivated, also the “Pre-Short Drop” function is disabled (for further information, refer to “Bodywork Maintenance and Care” in section “Maintenance and Care”). • Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob This selected mode enables to combine the key fob to personal driver’s position settings. These settings will be implemented when pressing the button on the key fob RKE transmitter with ignition device in RUN position. • Hands Free Power Liftgate To prevent the accidental opening of the power liftgate/Hand free (optional) with the movement of the foot, it is possible to disable the “Hand Free” function. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. This operation is recommended when you have to wash the car (for further information, refer to “Open and Close the Liftgate” in section “Before Starting”). Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start • Auto-on Driver Heated/Vented Seat & Steering This feature allows to activate the comfort of the driving seat when starting the engine. If equipped, the driver’s heated/vented seat and/or heated steering wheel will automatically activate by temperatures below 4°C (40°F). When temperatures are above 26°C (80°F) the driver vented seat will turn on. • Remote Start If the vehicle is equipped with the remote start system, you can choose from the following options: “Off”, “Remote Start” (activation of this function when you use the key fob RKE transmitter to start the engine) and “All Starts” (activation of this function when you start the engine in all modes). Engine Off Options This feature allows you to set some functions after turning off the engine. • Seat Easy Access When this feature is selected, the driver's seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off for easy exit of the vehicle. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. 4 • Power Off Delay (Power duration after engine shutdown) 203 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 By selecting this feature, the power window switches, radio, MTC+ Phone System, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after turning off the engine. Opening of one front doors will cancel this feature. The switch-off delay can be cancelled (0 seconds) you can choose from 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes. • Headlight Off Delay By selecting this feature the headlight will stay lit for up to 90 seconds after turning off the engine. The switch-off delay can be cancelled (0 seconds) or reduced to 60 or 30 seconds. • Auto Entry/Exit Suspension Select this mode to automatically lower vehicle to minimum ground clearance when driver takes transmission to P (Park) to help entry into and exit from the vehicle and unloading of cargo from the boot compartment. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. Suspension This feature allows displaying and setting the following modes of the pneumatic suspension system. • Auto Entry/Exit Suspension 204 Select this mode to automatically lower vehicle to minimum ground clearance when driver takes transmission to P (Park) to help entry into and exit from the vehicle and unloading of cargo from the boot compartment. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Warning/Suspension Warning Messages Only Select this mode to choose whether to display only warnings (option “On”). The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Tire Change Mode/Stationary Auto Leveling Select this mode to disable the pneumatic suspension to avoid automatic levelling, when vehicle must be lifted for changing a wheel or tire. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Transport To Mode Select this mode to lower the pneumatic suspension to minimum ride height and disable system operation to help vehicle loading and transport, for instance on the platform of a tow truck. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Wheel Alignment Mode Select this mode to prevent automatic pneumatic suspension alignment when servicing suspension and/or steering parts. The feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. Audio This feature enables to view and set the available audio modes depending on the type of audio system supplied on the car. The following modes refer to the “High Premium” audio system. • Balance/Fade Use this screen to adjust the balance and fade settings. Touch and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows to adjust, or tap the “C” icon to readjust to the centre. • Equalizer Use this screen is used to adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treb” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting soft-keys or scroll and Dashboard Instruments and Controls touch the slider in any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” softkeys. This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. Available settings: “On” and “Off”. Phone/Bluetooth • Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume combined to vehicle speed. To change the speed adjusted volume touch the “Off”, “1”, “2” or “3” softkey. • Clari-Fi This function improves the audio quality by enhancing digitally compressed source files such as MP3 and AAC files and certain music tracks played by radio stations. In case of high-definition source files like the ones on a CD, Clari-Fi shall apply no enhancement. Clari-Fi intervention is completely automatic. The feature can be set “On” or “Off”. • Auto Play When a portable device is connected via USB port to MTC+ system, it plays automatically the songs if this feature is set to "On". Press this soft-key to select and connect phones and audio sources. • Do Not Disturb Settings available for this feature: - Auto Reply To change the mode status, touch the “Text”, “Call” or “Both” softkey. - Auto Reply Message To change the mode status, touch the “Custom” or “Default” soft-key. - Customise Auto Reply Message This feature allows you to customise the “Auto Reply Message”. Text messages are limited to 160 characters (key pad is not available while vehicle is it motion). 4 • Surround Sound 205 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 206 • Paired Phones By selecting this feature you will be notified which phones are combined to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For each option, you can also add one or more devices and change the PIN code of the device you wish to connect. For further information, see the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide. • Paired Audio Sources By selecting this feature you will be notified which audio source are combined to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For each option, you can also add a device and change the PIN code of the device you wish to connect. For further information, see the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide. • Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster When this mode is selected a popup message will appear in case of incoming call. Information associated to call in progress are available by entering to the “Audio” menu using the buttons on the steering wheel RH side. • Phone Connection Mode This feature allows you to change the phone connection mode from “Settings” menu or from the phone settings menu. Selecting this feature accesses the page where the current connection mode is selected. The mode list is configured according to the connected projection device. To activate a new connection mode (example: "Charge Only") a pop-up invites the user to disconnect and reconnect the device cable to the USB port and confirm the action. NOTE: On the Maserati website, at www.maserati.com, or through the Maserati Service Network you may consult the list of telephones that are compatible with the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)", and their level of compatibility. Radio Setup Press the “Radio Setup” soft-key to set some listening options. • FM By Selecting the FM type of frequency you may listen to traffic announcement, alternative frequency information or tune to the regional mode. Dashboard Instruments and Controls • DAB (if supported) Digital radio extends the selection of stations, adding also numerous specialty channels. By selecting the DAB type of frequency you may listen to connection type announcements and announcement categories. By selecting DAB Announcements Categories (if supported) are displayed additional Categories such as: alarm, traffic announcement, etc... All these items can be set to “On” or “Off”. Restore Settings and will also remove from system memory Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove personal information, select this feature and a pop-up will appear asking confirmation to delete all personal data. Select “OK” to clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data have been cleared, a pop up appears confirming that personal data have been cleared and then the MTC+ will restart. 4 When this feature is selected, it will reset the “Display”, “Clock”, “Audio”, and “Radio Settings” to their default settings. Run this feature and a pop-up will appear asking user to confirm default settings resetting. Select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears confirming that settings have been reset to default and then the MTC+ will restart. Clear Personal Data When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data concerning settings and/or options that have been modified compared to factory settings 207 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Dashboard Compartment section “Understanding the Vehicle” for further details). There is a glove box compartment on the passenger side of the dashboard to store small items or documents. 4 WARNING! Do not operate the vehicle with the lid of glove box or compartment in the open position. Store objects or devices in dashboard compartment or in any other vehicle compartments, to ensure they will not move during the trip and prevent them from hitting any person on board. In the compartment there is a location to hold the Owner’s documentation. Inside the door there are compartments for storing glasses and small items. CAUTION! Do not place objects weighing over 10 kg (22 lb) in the glove box compartment. To open the glove box, pull the handle as shown in the picture. The compartment is illuminated by a courtesy light when open (the light will automatically switch off when the compartment is closed). Under the courtesy light there are two USB inputs for charging the connected source (see “Interior Features” in 208 Privacy Lock Features The glove box is equipped with an opening/closing electric actuator that can be locked and unlocked via the "Privacy Lock" menu of the MTC+, by entering a 4-digit PIN code. When you have to leave the vehicle to another driver (for example, to park it), the "Valet Mode" feature is available in the same menu. This feature, in addition to the glove box, allows you to lock your settings for listening and guidance. It is important to memorise and take note of the PIN since if it is lost, you must contact the Maserati Service Network that will reset this feature. Dashboard Instruments and Controls NOTE: • “Glove Box Mode” and “Valet Mode” can not be activated at the same time. • “Glove Box Mode” and “Valet Mode” lock features must be activated when the glove box is already closed. If you activated one of these lock features when the glove box is opened, the glove box will not close properly and will not lock Activation Procedure • Open “Controls” screen and touch “Privacy Lock” soft-key. With ADAS • Checkmarked one of the two features (the figures shows "Glove Box Mode" feature only) and touch the soft-key to activate the feature. NOTE: • If you do not enter all PIN digits, a prompt will indicate that you should do so. • In case of incoming call while entering the PIN, the MTC+ system will temporarily stop the release function. As soon as the call is over, the keypad screen will be displayed again so that you can enter the PIN. 4 • When the next page shown in figure appears, touch “OK”. Without ADAS • Using the keypad, enter the four digits of the PIN and touch “OK”. The system prompts you re-enter the PIN code to confirm it. 209 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Glove box is now locked and the MTC+ will go back to “Controls” page. In this condition, the system operation is reduced and only “Climate”, “Controls” and “Settings” features are active. 4 Deactivation Procedure To unlock the glove box which it was locked with PIN code, touch “Controls” soft-key on the status bar and then “Privacy Lock” soft-key to enter this page. • Touch the soft-key to deactivate the feature (the figure shows "Glove Box Mode" feature only). Unlock glove box by entering the lock code as previously specified. Glove Box Manual Unlock If battery is flat, it is necessary to manually work the actuator on the LH side of the glove box to unlock the 210 glove box that has been locked using the PIN code. • Proceed carefully and start with the central part, indicated by the arrows in the figure, and remove the dashboard moulding beneath and on the sides of the climate control panel. This moulding is fastened by means of 10 pins (indicated in the figure) press-fitted onto clips present in dashboard structure. • After removing the moulding, take the screwdriver from the tool kit under boot mat (see “Tool kit” in section “In an Emergency”). • Insert screwdriver tip inside the hole on LH side of glove box structure: push until home against actuator pin. • Push down screwdriver tip to release actuator pin and manually unlock the glove box. The actuator will remain in this condition until battery feed is restored. Inner Section • Reinstall the moulding ensuring that pins match with the clips of dashboard structure. • Press on the moulding, always starting from the central part until all 10 pins are engaged in their clips and “click” in place. After releasing the glove box by means of this procedure, do not lock glove Dashboard Instruments and Controls box using the PIN code and contact the Maserati Service Network to have unlock feature via PIN code checked. Analog Clock Air Conditioning Controls To adjust the analog clock located on the center of the dashboard between the air outlets, use the MTC+ System (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section). The vehicle is equipped with an automatic dual-zone air conditioning system that allows to adjust separately the temperature and the airflow distribution in the left and in the right zone of the passenger compartment, according to the requests of the driver and the front passenger. A humidity sensor, positioned on the inner surface of the windshield, over the rear view mirror, allows the A/C system to prevent/eliminate fogging of the windshield and side windows. The best efficacy in preventing fogging is obtained by selecting the “AUTO” function, described later. A dual zone solar sensor helps to achieve the best comfort in presence of solar radiation. Upon request, the vehicle can be equipped with an additional automatic dual-zone air conditioning system installed in the central console, between the front seats. The additional dual-zone module, can be operated by the rear passengers (see “Four-zone Climate Control (optional)” in this chapter), by means of the control panel at the end of central console, but also by the front The time can be displayed also on the MTC+ main menu bar and on the instrument cluster display (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section). Clock lighting works in the same way as instrument and controls backlighting (refer to “Lights” in section “Understanding the Vehicle”). 4 211 Dashboard Instruments and Controls passengers using the soft-keys on MTC+ display. display together with the active front seats and steering wheel comfort functions. Dual Zone Climate Controls 4 212 This system can be operated by using the controls of the climate control panel on the dashboard, or the soft-keys on the MTC+ display when “Climate” mode is selected. Once entered in the "Climate" screen, it is possible use the lower rotary knob on the central console to scroll through the soft-key of each function: the cursor will appear in grey outline on the first available function. Press "Enter" button to enter the selected function and to adjust it. Once you have entered a function, press "Back" button to exit the function and to return the "Climate" main screen (see "Infotainment System" in this section for further details). In the "Climate" screen of the MTC+, the front seats and steering wheel comfort setting soft-keys may be present (optional equipments). The “OFF” state of the front seats comfort setting is shown on their soft-key. Description of Controls All described functions can be set and modified using the climate control panel or the MTC+ display. Front seats and steering wheel comfort setting soft-keys are present even when the A/C is off (see "Front Seats" and/or "Steering Wheel Adjustment" in section "Understanding the Vehicle" for further details). When the MTC+ System is in any mode other than “Climate” (“Radio”, “Media”, “Controls”, etc.) the settings of driver and passenger temperature and air flow distribution will be indicated on the upper part of the Press any of controls on the climate control panel to display “Climate” screen. Dashboard Instruments and Controls To adjust driver and passenger side temperature and fan speed, climate control panel features rocker switches that can be pushed up to increase temperature/speed, or down to decrease them. When MTC+ is in any mode other than “Climate”, pressing an air distribution or blower hard control on the climate control panel a small pop-up will appear for three seconds above the “Climate” icon on the main bar. 1. Climate control on/off Once you enter the screen “Climate”, touch the soft-key indicated in picture to switch the climate control on/off. Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Touch the blue soft-key for cooler temperature. The “OFF” soft-key will appear in place of “ON” when the A/C is on. If the A/C system has been turned off, temperature values in the upper status bar will be obscured in all MTC+ modes. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the Air Conditioning System will not function during Remote Start operation if the climate control is left in “OFF”. 2. A/C Touch the "A/C" soft-key to change the current air conditioning setting; the soft-key illuminates when the A/C is on. Operating this function will cause the automatic feature to switch into manual mode and the “AUTO” LED on the button and MTC+ soft-key will turn off. 3. Driver temperature control Touch the red soft-key for warmer temperature. The driver's temperature setting will be displayed on the MTC+ between the soft-key and . The temperature can also be adjusted by touching and sliding the bar towards soft-key , to increase temperature, or towards soft-keys to decrease it. During this phase, a small pop-up on the side will show the corresponding temperature. You can increase or decrease the temperature using the rocker switch on the climate control panel. 4 NOTE: In “SYNC” mode, this control will also automatically and simultaneously adjust the passenger temperature. 4. Passenger temperature control Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Touch the soft-key for cooler temperature. Touch the soft-key for warmer temperature. The passenger's temperature setting will be displayed on the MTC+ screen between the soft-keys and . 213 Dashboard Instruments and Controls The temperature can also be adjusted by touching and sliding the bar towards soft-key , to increase temperature, or towards soft-key to decrease it. You can increase or decrease the temperature using the rocker switch on the climate control panel. 4 214 NOTE: Pressing the 4 button/soft-key while in “SYNC” mode will automatically exit “SYNC”. 5. Recirculation Press to change the current setting, the LED indicator on the button and the relevant soft-key illuminates to indicate which recirculation function is activated. For further details, see paragraph “Dual zone Climate Control Functions” in this chapter. 6. Blower control Blower control is used to adjust the amount of air forced through the climate system. Eight levels of blower speed can be selected. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual. On the climate control panel, push the rocker switch up to increase fan speed. Push the rocker switch down to decrease fan speed. Pushing down the rocker switch when set blower is at the first speed, causes the A/C system shutdown (OFF condition). On the MTC+ display, touch the small icon of the blower to decrease the speed, or the big icon to increase it. Between the two icons, bars will appear to show the number of the corresponding selected speed. The blower can also be activated/ regulated by touching the bars between the two blower icons. When the MTC+ is displayed in any mode other than “Climate”, the blower speed is indicated by the bright segments in the climate icon. 7-8. AUTO This function automatically controls the interior temperature by adjusting the air flow rate and the air distribution respectively on the driver and on the passenger zone. Press “AUTO” to switch the ATC between manual and automatic mode. The LED on the button and the “AUTO” soft-key illuminates when the “AUTO” function is activated. See “Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)” in this chapter for more information. 9. MAX defrosting/demisting Press the button or the MTC+ soft-key to switch the airflow setting to the windshield and the front side windows to get quick defrosting/ defogging. The LED on the button and the MTC+ soft-key illuminates when this feature is activated. Operating this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode: so the “AUTO” LED on the button and the MTC+ soft-key will turn off. With engine off, the blower will run at minimum speed (level 1) and can be increased manually: with engine on, the blower speed will gradually increase to the higher speed (level 8). MAX defrosting/demisting shall also involve REAR defrosting/demisting function. If this function is turned off the climate system will return to the previous setting, switching on the A/C (“A/C” LED on the button and the MTC+ soft-key illuminated). 10. REAR defrosting/demisting Press the button or the MTC+ soft-key to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors. The LED on the button and the MTC+ soft-key will illuminate when the rear window defroster and the heated external mirrors are on. The rear window defroster and the heated external mirrors automatically turn off after 10 minutes. For any subsequent request after the first one (in the current ignition cycle), Dashboard Instruments and Controls the system activates the function for 5 minutes. The timing described above is automatically reset and the defrost/demisting function is deactivated at each key-off. CAUTION! Failure to observe the following cautions may cause damage to the rear windows defroster: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects inside the vehicle at a safe distance from the window. 11. MAX A/C By pressing the “MAX A/C” button or the MTC+ soft-key, the system automatically switches to get the maximum cold air flow in both zones. 12-13 Air flow distribution modes The airflow distribution mode, respectively on the driver and on the passenger zone, can be adjusted so air comes from the dashboard vents, vents under the dashboard in direction of the floor, vents under the front seats and demist/defrost vents. The MTC+ display contains the relevant soft-keys used to set these modes for each zone. The climate control panel features a single button for each zone: press it several times to select and set the required airflow distribution mode. Available settings are as follows: • “Floor” mode Air for each zone comes from the front vents, located under the dashboard and under the front seats. A small portion of the airflow is directed through the defrost/demist vents to prevent windows fogging. • “Dashboard” mode Air flows for each zone from four adjustable vents of the dashboard, two vents on the upper part of the dashboard and two positioned at the rear end of the central console. Each of these vents can be singly adjusted. The air grids or vanes of the vents can be moved to adjust air flow direction. A setting wheel, placed near each vent, allows to regulate or close the airflow. • “Bi-Level” mode Air for each zone comes from the dashboard and central console adjustable vents and the fixed floor vents. A small portion of the airflow is directed through the defrost/demist vents to prevent windows fogging. NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed to let cooler air come in the dashboard and rear part of the central console vents and warmer air from the floor vents. 4 • “Defrost” mode Air for each zone comes from the dashboard defrost/demist vents to prevent windows fogging. • “Mix” mode Air for each zone comes from the defrost/demist vent, the vent under the dashboard and from floor vent. This mode is recommended for cold climates, to improve comfort and prevent windows fogging. • “Hi-Level” mode Air for each zone comes from the dashboard defrost/demist vents, from the dashboard and central console adjustable vents and the fixed floor vents. • “Tri-Level” mode 215 Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4 Air for each zone comes from all the adjustable/fixed and defrost/demist vents. 14. “SYNC” mode Touch the “SYNC” soft-key on the MTC+ to switch the Sync feature on/off. The “SYNC” soft-key illuminates when this feature is selected. This function is used to synchronise the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in “SYNC” will automatically exit this feature. 15. “REAR” mode This soft-key is present only if the vehicle is equipped with the additional dual-zone air conditioning system for rear passengers. Touching "REAR" soft-key you enter the screen where the settings available for rear seat passengers are displayed. For the description of these controls, see paragraph "Four-Zone Climate Controls (optional)" of this chapter. Dual Zone Climate Control Functions Air Conditioning (A/C) The “A/C” soft-key allows to manually activate or deactivate the air 216 conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the vents into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, touch the “A/C” soft-key to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. When the “A/C” and “AUTO” functions are switched off it is not possible to have air at a lower temperature than the outside. Recirculation and Air Quality Sensor (AQS) When outside air contains smoke, odours, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the recirculation control button or the relevant soft-key to activate the two different functionalities. The recirculation function, that allows to open/close the A/C air inlet by operating the button on the climate control panel or the MTC+ soft-key, is integrated with the Air Quality Sensor. This sensor, positioned upstream of the A/C filter, in front of the air intake of the A/C system, detects the presence of polluting substances and submits an electric signal to the A/C control unit, that closes the intake of the external air by activating the air recirculation. The button or the MTC+ soft-key can therefore enable three operating modes, switchable in sequence. Starting from the outside air condition with LED on the button off and MTC+ soft-key not highlighted, in which the external air is aspirated by the A/C system and treated to be introduced into the passenger compartment, subsequent actuations of the button or the MTC+ soft-key change the state as follows. • First press: the A/C system activates the automatic recirculation control by using the signal transmitted from the AQS. The symbol ‘’A’’ on the button and the MTC+ soft-key lights up. • Second press: the A/C system activates the recirculation, the LED on the button or the MTC+ soft-key lights up. The A/C system will stay this way up to a new actuation, or until the increased humidity could lead to windshield fogging: in this case the recirculation automatically switches to external air. • Third press: the A/C system switches back to external air (default operating mode). Dashboard Instruments and Controls The next press of the button or the MTC+ soft-key restars the operating cycle just described. NOTE: To avoid the risk of fogging, the AQS is disabled when the external temperature falls below 2°C (35°F) or rises above 26°C (79°F). NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead to window fogging. Select the MIX mode and increase the blower speed to prevent fogging. MAX A/C Activating this function, the system switches to exit “AUTO”, enter “A/C” and recirculation. The minimum temperature (LO) in both zones, the maximum blower speed and the “Dashboard” air distribution mode are also selected. The blower speed can be adjusted and the air distribution can be modified without exiting “MAX A/C”. To exit “MAX A/C” touch the relevant MTC+ soft-key or exit A/C or recirculation. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Automatic operation • Press the “AUTO” soft-key of driver and/or passenger zone on the climate control panel or the relevant soft-key button on the MTC+ screen. The text “AUTO” will appear inside the space usually occupied by the bars between the blower icons. • Set the desired temperature adjusting the driver and/or passenger temperature control buttons or softkeys. The system automatically work to maintain the best comfort level inside the passengers compartment. • When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings anymore, simply allow the system to function automatically. 4 Selecting , “AUTO”, or “OFF”, will also exit “MAX A/C”. 217 Dashboard Instruments and Controls The user can also choose the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation, recirculation control and “SYNC” mode can also be manually selected. Press the button to switch the rear climate control on/off. The LED on the button turns on when the rear A/C is on. Four-Zone Climate Controls (optional) 4 • To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower speed will remain low until the engine warms up. • AUTO mode can be deactivated by operating any airflow or blower controls and by pressing “AUTO”, “A/C”, “MAX AC”, ” " or “OFF” button or the same MTC+ soft-key. Manual operation The system allows manual selection of blower speed, air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control. The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by using the blower control. In this case the blower will operate at a fixed speed until a different speed is selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle exiting the “AUTO” mode. 218 Air conditioning controls that allow rear passengers to adjust the temperature in the left and right rear part of the passenger compartment are located at the rear end of the central console underneath the adjustable air outlets. Description of Controls The following functions can be operated/adjusted by using the rear climate control panel. 1. Rear climate control on/off 2. A/C Press to change the current air conditioning (A/C) setting, the “A/C” symbol on the button illuminates when the A/C is on. This will cause the automatic operation to switch into manual mode and the “AUTO” indicator will turn off. 3. Left side temperature control Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings or the button for warmer temperature. The set temperature value will be displayed in the area above the buttons. 4. Right side temperature control Dashboard Instruments and Controls Provides the rear seats passengers with independent temperature control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings or the button for warmer temperature. The set temperature value will be displayed in the area above the buttons. 5. Blower control Blower control is used to regulate the airflow of the rear climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause the automatic mode to switch to manual. Press the “+“ button to increase blower speed. Press the “-“ button for lower speed. Airflow distribution modes The airflow distribution can be adjusted to let air come in from the adjustable and fixed central console vents and floor vents. The set mode is recognisable through the lighting of the soft-key or the LED on the button of the climate control panel. 6. “Bi-Level” mode Air comes from the adjustable vents on the rear central console and from the fixed ones on the lateral sides of the central console directed to the floor. NOTE: The Bi-Level mode is designed to provide comfort by sending cooler air out of the central console vents and warmer air from the floor vents. 7. “Floor” mode Air comes from the fixed floor vents under the front seats and on the lateral sides of the central console. 8. “Torso” mode Air comes from the adjustable vents on the central console. Each of these vents can be singly adjusted. The air grids of the vents can be moved up/down and right/left to adjust the airflow direction. A setting wheel, placed near each vent, allows to regulate the airflow or to close the vent. 9. AUTO This function automatically controls the interior temperature by adjusting the air flow rate and the air distribution. • Press the “AUTO” button: the automatic rear climate control switches from manual to automatic mode and vice-versa. The “AUTO” symbol on the button illuminates when this function is activated. • Adjust then the temperature you wish to maintain by regulating the left and/or right side temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is set, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. • When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings anymore: simply allow the system to function automatically. To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower speed will remain low until the engine warms up. 4 Four-Zone Climate Control by the Driver By operating the MTC+ display controls the driver can adjust the settings of the rear climate zones by touching “REAR” sof-key. 219 Dashboard Instruments and Controls Once you have entered the rear climate screen, by touching the following soft-keys, the driver is able to: 2 3 4 4 5 6 1 The A/C compressor will turn on. 7 8 9 220 The system switch the ATC between manual and automatic mode by controlling the interior temperature (controls 3, 4) by adjusting the air flow rate and the air distribution (controls 5) of the rear passengers. Adjust the temperature in the left rear zone in the indicated mode for the front zones. Adjust the temperature in the right rear zone in the indicated mode for the front zones. Set the airflow distribution in “Torso”, “Bi-Level” or “Floor” mode. Synchronise the two rear passenger temperature setting. If the driver adjust the temperature while SYNC mode is on, this will affect the rear passenger temperature. If the front or rear passengers adjust the temperature setting the system automatically break the function and turn it off. Set the blower speed through seven speed levels. Re-activate the rear climate setting. Turn off the rear climate option. 10 11 Block the settings of the rear climate. Return to the front climate control screen. Operating Tips • Continuous use of the air recirculation in winter, in rainy weather or humid climate is not recommended because it may cause window fogging. • Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by fast defrosting/demisting. The “Mix” mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed. NOTE: • Recirculation mode without A/C should not be used for long periods of time, as fogging may occur. • If inside the passenger compartment there are conditions of high temperature and humidity, when the A/C compressor is switched on (A/C soft-key illuminated on MTC+ display or LED on climate control panel A/C button ON) there may be some cold steam at ventilation port outlet: this situation is normal and does Dashboard Instruments and Controls not indicate air conditioning system malfunction. • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. • Make sure the external air intake grille, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves or other objects. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. • The temperature can be displayed in Metric or U.S. units by selecting the “Units” customer programmable feature. See “MTC+ Settings” in this section. • Any time you store your vehicle or keep it stationary (i.e., during vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air by high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication and minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. A/C Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust, pollen and some odours. Strong odours cannot be totally removed from by A/C filter at the entrance of the air climate system. See “Maintenance Procedures” in section “Maintenance and Care” for filter replacement instructions. Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel (if foreseen) The commands on the right side of the steering wheel activate/deactivate the phone mode ( ) and the Voice Recognition ( ) controls functions. 4 These functions are only available when one or more Bluetooth® compatible mobile phones are paired with the MTC+ System connection: to pair a phone and to learn all available functions refer to the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+)" guide. NOTE: On the Maserati website, at www.maserati.com, or through the Maserati Service Network you may consult the list of telephones that are (Continued) 221 Dashboard Instruments and Controls (Continued) compatible with the MTC+, and their level of compatibility. 4 222 The voice command communication system is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume can be adjusted from the upper knob on the central console (see “Infotainment System” in this section or from the steering wheel radio controls (see “Audio Controls” in this section). The system will automatically mute the radio when using the phone mode. When activating the phone mode using voice commands with speakerphone, you should talk quietly in a normal conversional tone by keeping the driving position and turning to the microphone of the voice command system located inside the internal rearview mirror. The ability of the system voice control to recognise the user's voice commands can be invalidated when speaking too quickly or too loudly. WARNING! Any voice-controlled system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable regulations. Full attention should be kept on driving. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death. Phone Mode By using the phone button on the steering wheel it is possible to: activate the phone mode, start a call, show recent incoming and outgoing calls, show contacts list, etc. All these functions can also be reached by using the touch screen commands on the MTC+ display in “Phone” mode. When pressing the phone button an audible sound will invite you to impart a command. Information on incoming call is indicated in a pop-up on instrument cluster display main area if this feature is checkmarked on MTC+ (see “MTC+ Settings” in this section). Said information will stay displayed until Dashboard Instruments and Controls a control is executed (e.g.: answer, reject, etc.) for the incoming call. The screen will only display the phone number or name of caller (if available) as long as this complies with system specifications in terms of font and number of characters. Call details can be displayed at any time through “Audio” submenu item, then “Phone: call details” using the buttons on steering wheel RH side. On display, said details shall temporarily replace the ones on media source in use. Voice Commands The short pressure of the VR button on the steering wheel allows you to give voice commands dedicated to all the native functions of the MTC+ (radio, media, navigator, climate, etc.). Excluded are all functions that interact with the Apps: “Apple CarPlay” and “Android Auto” or those of the voice assistants: Siri, Google Voice, etc..., supported on the mobile paired via Bluetooth® to the MTC+. The voice assistant of Baidu is not available with mobile paired via Bluetooth® to the MTC+ because Baidu CarLife is a projection mode application. A long pressure of the VR button, in addition to the native ones of the MTC+, allows to give voice commands dedicated to the above mentioned Apps and voice assistants. NOTE: The pressure difference of the VR button (short or long) is effective only when the mobile is paired via Bluetooth® to the MTC+. Once voice recognition is activated via the VR button on the steering wheel, a “teleprompter” screen is displayed on the MTC+ with a list of commands specific to each active function key on the main menu bar The key words to activate the dialog are white, the variable ones gray between the symbols "< >" and the alternative ones after the slash "/". Touching “Voice Settings” soft-key opens the Setting page where the user can set if and how to visualize the teleprompter and close it by touching the red "X". Touching one of the function softkeys, the session is cancelled and displays the selected function screen. When pressing the VR button an acoustic signal will invite to give a voice command. 4 NOTE: For further details refer to the "Maserati Touch Control Plus (MTC+) guide". Siri Smart Personal Assistant When a compatible iPhone® or iPad® that supports Siri voice recognition is paired to the vehicle via Bluetooth®, a long press of the VR button activates the Siri Smart Personal Assistant. Siri requires mobile internet access and its functionality might change depending on the geographical area. Through simple voice commands, without taking your eyes off the road, it may be possible to send messages, 223 Dashboard Instruments and Controls make phone calls, create notes and reminders, etc. 4 224 5 - Driving Normal Starting of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Automatic Start&Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Off-Road Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Brake and Stability Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Using the Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Use of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Electronic Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Forward Collision Warning - FCW (for versions/ markets where provided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Lane Keeping Assist - LKA (optional, with ACC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Blind Spot Assist - BSA (optional, without ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Active Blind Spot Assist - ABSA (optional, with ACC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Highway Assist – HAS (for versions/markets where provided, with ACC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Traffic Sign Assist – TSA (for versions/markets where provided) . . . . . . . 314 Tires - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Driving Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Adding Reducing Agent AdBlue® (Diesel only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 225 Driving Normal Starting of the Engine WARNING! It is dangerous to run the engine in an enclosed area. The engine consumes oxygen and discharges carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and other toxic gases in the atmosphere. 5 When doors are opened, the instrument cluster displays the Maserati Logo in the center and the complete odometer plus the open doors indicator in the lower part of the cluster. Before starting the engine, close the doors, adjust your seat, the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt and instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. 226 The shift lever must be in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear (see “Automatic Transmission” in this section). cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). CAUTION! • Before starting the engine, switch off the electrical devices with a high power consumption (air-conditioning and heating system, heated rear window, headlights, etc.). • Do not start the engine if the fuel level in the tank is low. The keyless ignition allows the driver to operate the ignition switch by pushing the center button, as long as the key fob RKE transmitter is within the passenger compartment (check “Keys” in section “Before Starting” for further information). By pressing the brake pedal and pushing the START/STOP button the engine starts. Instrument cluster displays the initial sequence with warning light and analog instruments test routine and switch-on of the engine temperature indicators and fuel level. This happens if option “On” was set in screen settings for display switch-on (see chapter “Instrument The current display subsequently sets up with the latest screenshot. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to starting it, press the button again. Driving NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. If the driver only pushes the START/STOP button but does not press the brake pedal, the ignition switch cycles to the ACC position (see “Keys” in section “Before Starting”) and the instrument cluster displays the latest screenshot. At the second press of the START/STOP button, the ignition device switches to RUN position (see “Keys” in section “Before Starting”) and the instrument cluster displays the latest screenshot. At the third press of the START/STOP button the ignition switch returns to OFF position and the display powers down. At the fourth press of the START/STOP button the screen will display the message that invites you to press the brake pedal and push the START/STOP button to start the engine. NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in P (Park), the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position. After starting the engine, the idle speed is controlled automatically and will decrease as the engine warms up. Notes for the Diesel Engine Starting (Diesel only) With cold engine and external temperature below 0°C (32°F), ignition may be delayed a few seconds in order to allow the glow plugs to pre-heat. In this case the amber light will illuminate on the TFT display and will stay on for a few seconds after the engine has started. Cold Weather Precautions (Diesel only) If the outside temperature is very low, the diesel fuel thickens due to the formation of paraffin clots and could clog the diesel filter. In order to avoid these problems, different types of diesel fuel are distributed according to the season: summer type, winter type and arctic type (very cold, mountainous areas). If refueling with diesel fuel whose specifications are not suitable for the too cold outside temperature, it is advisable to mix TUTELA DIESEL ART additive in the proportions shown on the container with the fuel. Pour the additive into the tank before the fuel using the funnel provided. Engine Start Failure CAUTION! • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Moreover, unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. See “Auxiliary Jump Start Procedure” in section “In an Emergency” for further information. 5 Flooded Engine Clearing If the engine fails to start after you have followed the described procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, move the shift lever in P (Park) position. Press and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator all the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the START/STOP 227 Driving button once. The starter will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal starting of the engine” procedure. Driving with a Cold Engine Start-off slowly, avoiding sudden acceleration and rev the engine up at low medium speeds. High-performance driving should be avoided until the engine temperature reaches 65-70°C (149-158°F). 5 228 Engine Turn Off • With the shift lever in P (Park), D (Drive) or R (Reverse) positions (see “Automatic Transmission” in this section) and vehicle standstill, press and release the START/STOP button to switch off the engine. A burst on the accelerator pedal before turning off the engine has no purpose and increases fuel consumption. • If the shift lever is in N (Neutral) and the START/STOP button is pressed once, the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle Not in Park” message and the engine will remain running. WARNING! Never leave a vehicle out of the P (Park) position, as it could move. NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in P (Park), the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to OFF position. Engine Turn Off when in Automatic Start&Stop When the engine has been turned off by the Start&Stop system, press and release the START/STOP button. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position and the vehicle is off. “Panic Stop” Strategy In panic conditions, if driver stops engine in any non-standard manner while driving at a speed over 8 km/h (5 mph), the “Panic Stop” strategy can manage the situation by checking gearchange condition upon engine cutting, driver’s action on brakes, road condition (flat or slope) so as to set gearchange to the most suitable condition. Automatic Start&Stop System The Maserati Start&Stop system allows the engine to automatically switch off when the vehicle stops and to restart when the driver intends to drive. This feature helps reduce fuel consumption. During the “Stop (AutoStop)” phase the ignition is still on and all security features are available. In order for the Start&Stop to activate, the vehicle must be stationary and the brake pedal adequately pressed. NOTE: If the brake pedal is not sufficiently pressed the Start&Stop may not function even if the vehicle is stopped. When the Start&Stop switches off the engine, the related light illuminates on the instrument cluster. As soon as the brake pedal is released, the engine turns on. While the vehicle is stopped, the transmission can be placed in P (Park) pressing the “P” button on the shift lever. In this case it is possible to release the brake pedal and the vehicle will remain in “AutoStop” with engine off. Driving Pressing the brake pedal and shifting transmission into D (Drive) or R (Reverse) will deactivate the “AutoStop” condition and restart the engine. on the main bar or through the "Start&Stop Off" soft-key in the "Controls" page (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). Start&Stop Not Active For keeping driving safety, interior comfort and a correct functioning of engine and vehicle, the Start&Stop function does not activate under the following conditions: • When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled (see example). Start&Stop Deactivated Start&Stop function is deactivated under the following conditions: • When SPORT or CORSA drive mode is activated. • When (ESC OFF) drive mode is activated. • When ride height is set to "Off Road 1" or "Off Road 2". • If it has been disabled through the main menu item "Start & Stop" via the controls on the right side of the steering wheel (see chapter "Instrument cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls") or via the MTC+ by pressing the "S&S Off" soft-key • When the driver door is open. • When the fuel level is too low. • When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep road. • When the vehicle is stopped with steered wheels (over 135° of steering wheel angle for each part). • When the vehicle is manoeuvring: shift lever in R (Reverse). • When the temperature conditions inside the vehicle do not correspond to the air conditioning setting. • When the front and rear “defroster” function is activated. • When the engine coolant and the engine oil temperature is not on proper functioning level. • When the external temperature is too cold. • When the battery charge is below safety value. • When the previous stop had just happened (few seconds) and the minimum speed has not yet been achieved. • Shortly after R (Reverse) has been set or when driving under a certain speed level. • When the hood is open. • The sensors managing the Start&Stop have been damaged. • Start&Stop system faults are present. • When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and/or Highway Assist (HAS) system are engaged. • During DPF regeneration process (Diesel only). 5 229 Driving Automatic Restarting of the Engine 5 230 The engine may automatically restart, before the brake pedal has been released, when one of the following conditions occurs: • The SPORT drive mode or (ESC OFF) drive mode is being activated. • If the Start&Stop function has been disabled through the main menu voice "Start & Stop" (see chapter "Instrument cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls") or via MTC+ by pressing the "S&S Off" soft-key on the main bar or through the "Start&Stop Off" soft-key in the "Controls" page (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in the section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"). • If shift lever is moved to R (Reverse). • If the steering wheel is moved to steer the wheels. • When the temperature conditions inside the vehicle do not correspond to the air conditioning setting. • When changing the temperature setting on the air conditioning. • When the defroster function is being activated. • When the battery charge is below safety value. • When the accelerator pedal is being pressed (together with the brake pedal). • If a long time has passed since the last automatic stop of the engine. Move the shift lever to D (Drive) to drive away. Occupants Safety Function in the “Stop (AutoStop)” phase, the driver is responsible for the vehicle and the occupants and shall take care of what happens inside and outside the vehicle. • Even when the vehicle is stopped within the “Stop (AutoStop)” phase, the vehicle driver is responsible for the vehicle, the vehicle’s occupants and the vehicle’s surrounding area. Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running; doing so poses a risk of danger. It is a good practice to always ensure to set the parking brake and place the transmission gear selector lever into the P (Park) position, thereby ensuring the vehicle will not move, when performing any vehicle checks, maintenance and/or service procedures on the vehicle. To enhance occupants safety, the Start&Stop system monitors if the driver is present and does not allow automatic restarting of the engine if one of the following manoeuvres is being performed while in “AutoStop” condition: • The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt and releases the brake pedal. • The driver opens the door and releases the brake pedal. • The driver unbuckles the seat belt and opens the door. • The driver opens the hood. All the above-mentioned conditions deactive the Start&Stop function (the “AutoStart” is deactivated and the engine remains off) and the transmission shift automatically in P (Park). The telltale will flash to indicate the Start&Stop function disabling. To restart the engine it is necessary to press the brake pedal and push the START/STOP button. WARNING! • Even when the vehicle is stopped Start&Stop Function Disabling Under certain driving conditions, when frequent stops and restarts of the engine may become annoying, it is possible to turn off the Start&Stop function in different ways. Driving Start&Stop enabled is the default status. When the Start&Stop function is turn off in the all following ways, in addition to the related message the amber indicator indicated in the picture will turn on. NOTE: The highlighted soft-key indicates the disabled status of Start&Stop system and vice versa. • Touch the "Start&Stop Off" soft-key to disable the function. • Touch the "S&S Off" soft-key on the main menu bar. Without ADAS • Use the controls located on the right side of the steering wheel (see instructions in chapter “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”) and select “Start&Stop” main menu item which displays the status of the function. • Hold the switch ( ) to change the status of the function. It is possible to disable the Start&Stop via the MTC+ in the following ways. 5 Or: • Touch the "Controls" soft-key on the (Apps) page of MTC+ display. Touch a second time the same soft-key to re-enable the function. If the driving conditions allow it, the user can re-enable the Start&Stop function at any time using one of previous ways. (Continued) 231 Driving NOTE: After user intervention, the Start&Stop system will automatically update the status of the function in all contexts where it can be modified. Start&Stop System Failure 5 232 When the warning light and the related message illuminate on the TFT display (see chapter “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”) there is a malfunction in the Start&Stop system and the engine cannot be switched off and restarted automatically. To switch off or restart the engine it is necessary to push the START/STOP . Have the vehicle checked at the Service Network . Automatic Transmission The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled 8-speed automatic transmission, which automatically changes gear according to the vehicle's instantaneous usage parameters (vehicle speed, road gradient and accelerator pedal position). It is possible to change gear manually thanks to the “M +/-“ (Manual) position for the shift lever. The electronic shift lever replaces the conventional mechanical lever and has no mechanical connection to the transmission. The transmission is operated by electrical actuators on the hydraulic system and all commands to the control system are transmitted by the CAN network. The lever itself represents a mere user interface. Gear positions are simulated by solenoids inside the lever body, which are computer-controlled and enable or disable certain positions of the lever. The solenoids inside the shift lever prevent the movement of the lever towards invalid positions. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating, therefore the gearshift behaviour could become perfect as expected after few hundreds of km. CAUTION! In order to properly use the automatic transmission, it is essential that you read through the whole chapter, so that you can understand right from the start what the correct and granted operations are. Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into P (Park) only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop: this is the default position of the lever. After engaged P (Park) it is possible set the ignition switch to OFF. • Shift into or out of R (Reverse) only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. • Do not shift between P (Park), R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) when the engine is above idle speed • To effect any change from vehicle stop to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 1st or 2nd gear, it is necessary to keep the brake pedal fully depressed. Driving • When leaving the vehicle, always WARNING! • It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the electronic parking brake, shift the transmission into P (Park), and turn the engine off. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. remove the key fob and lock your vehicle. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a feature which requires the transmission to be placed in P (Park) before the engine can be turned off. This prevents the driver from inadvertently leaving the vehicle without having placed the transmission in P (Park). This system also locks the transmission in P (Park) whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position. Transmission status is visible on the lever and on the lower part of the Instrument cluster display. 5 Automatic Transmission Lever Automatic transmission is operated by a shift lever with unlock button, located on the central console, which can have the following operating positions: • P (Park): button control; • R (Reverse); • N (Neutral); • D (Drive) automatic forward speed; • M -/+ (Manual): “+” shifting to higher gear or “–“ shifting to lower gear in manual mode (see “Drive Mode” in this section). Shift Lever Movements Shift lever has two main positions with a single step selection (backward/ forward): two unstable position (2) and (3) and two stable position (1) and (4). 233 Driving • When P (Park) mode is selected, the letter “P” becomes brighter and “ ” appears brighter near “N”. Backlit on the shift lever depends on the status of the ignition device. 5 • Automatic lane (“R”, “N”, “D”) as main central position. • Manual lane (“M +/-“) on left position: move forward for “–“ and backward for “+”. • “P” is a button on the top of the lever. Shift Lever Backlit • White backlit for “P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “M +/-“: brighter when selected and dimmer when not selected. 234 To Engage a Mode (briefly) To select one of the operating modes, move the lever as previously indicated and press the brake pedal at the same time. To engage “P” mode, driver must press the “P” button. In order to engage “R”, “N” or “D” mode, driver have to move the shift lever by pressing the unlock button. If the unlock button is not pressed, the instrument cluster shows the popup message shows in picture. The lever functions like a joystick, so releasing it after giving the command, it automatically returns to the two stable positions (vertical in line with “R”, “N” and “D” or in line with “–” and “+” when in “M +/-“ mode). • Normally, to engage R (Reverse) mode, press the brake pedal and the unlock button together. • To pass from P (Park) mode directly to D (Drive) mode, in addition to pressing the brake pedal, it is also necessary to press the unlock button. • Normally, to pass from R (Reverse) mode directly to D (Drive) mode and vice versa, in addition to pressing the brake pedal, it is necessary to press the unlock button. • The P (Park) mode can be automatically enabled by pressing the “P” button: if the shift lever was in “M +/-“ position, will go to central stable position automatically. Driving • If using the shift lever in M +/(Manual) mode, you can activate it by moving the lever from D (Drive) to the left and then forward towards the “–“ symbol or back towards the “+” symbol and the gear is shifted. • To exit P (Park) mode, or to pass from N (Neutral) to D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position when the car is stopped or is moving at a low speed, the brake pedal must also be pressed. CAUTION! • DO NOT accelerate while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to another mode. • After selecting a transmission mode, wait a few seconds before accelerating. This precaution is particularly important with a cold engine. Transmission Status on the Instrument Cluster Display By pressing the unlock button on the lever, the gear change positions field is displayed: if you release the button without moving the lever, the field disappears after 2 seconds. By operating instead the lever, the new range will be indicated in the field and in the lower part of the display. 5 If the vehicle is in D (Drive) status, in M +/- (Manual) or temporarily in manual drive mode, the gear position is indicated beside the lever status (“D” or “M”), on the lower part of the display. Service Shift Lever In the event of a shift lever malfunction, a message on the instrument cluster will invite to stop the car safety and turn off the engine. In this way the system moves the transmission in P (Park) position. 235 Driving WARNING! • Never use the P (Park) mode as a Automatic Transmission Range 5 236 P (Park) Use this position to park the vehicle. The transmission can be shifted from “P” position only with the brake pedal and the unlock button pressed: then move the shift lever. To move the shift lever from “P” position to any other position, the engine must be switched on. The engine can be regularly started in P (Park) range. Never attempt to use P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion. When parking on a level surface, you may press the “P” button first, and then apply the electronic parking brake by pulling the trigger upwards. The Instrument cluster will display the related light indicator and the message for 5 seconds. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before pressing the “P” button. For enhanced security, turn the front wheels toward the kerb on a downhill and away from the kerb on an uphill grade. substitute for the electric parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to prevent vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Make sure the transmission is in P (Park) before leaving the vehicle. CAUTION! DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the “P” position: • when shifting into P (Park), push the “P” button on the shift lever. • with the brake pedal released, verify that “P” position is illuminated on the shift lever and in the instrument cluster display. R (Reverse) This range is used to move the vehicle backward. Switching to R (Reverse) starting from N (Neutral) is only possible if the vehicle is moving backwards. We Driving recommend to shift into R (Reverse) only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Vehicle stationary: switching between R (Reverse) and D (Drive), passing from N (Neutral), requires brake pedal pressed and action on the lever. • Vehicle moving: the driver can switch from R (Reverse) to N (Neutral) acting on the shift lever without pressing the unlock button and the brake pedal. N (Neutral) • Vehicle stationary and engine started: switching from N (Neutral) to P (Park) requires “P” button pressed only. Switching from N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) and/or D (Drive) requires brake pedal and unlock button pressed and the action on the shift lever. • Vehicle moving: switching from N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) and/or D (Drive) requires pressing the unlock button and the action on the shift lever. Switching to R (Reverse) starting from N (Neutral) is only possible if the vehicle is moving backwards, while switching to D (Drive) starting from N (Neutral) is only possible if the vehicle is moving forwards. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into P (Park) mode if you must leave the vehicle. NOTE: To move the car into tunnel washers, or to generally move with engine off, if foreseen use the “Car Wash” mode (see “Bodywork Maintenance and Cure” chapter in section “Maintenance and Care”). WARNING! Do not switch to N (Neutral) and/or never turn off the ignition to coast downhill. These are unsafe practices that limit driver’s response to changing traffic or road conditions. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in N (Neutral) can result in transmission damage. See “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in section “In an Emergency” for further information. D (Drive) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically shifts up and down through all gears. The D (Drive) mode provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions of the vehicle. • Vehicle stationary: to switch from D (Drive) to R (Reverse) requires brake pedal and unlock button pressed and the action on the shift lever: to reach N (Neutral) starting from D (Drive) is possible by only acting on the shift lever. • To enable special operations while the car is moving at a low speed, such as getting out of marsh or snow, it is possible to run quickly from D (Drive) to R (Reverse), and vice versa, by pressing the unlock button and acting on the shift lever passing from N (Neutral). • Vehicle moving: switching to N (Neutral) from D (Drive) it is not necessary to press brake pedal. • From D (Drive) selected mode it is always possible to switch to M +/- (Manual) mode, by move the shift lever to the left (see following paragraph); to return to “D” position, move the shift lever to the right. It is possible to shift from D (Drive) mode to M +/- (Manual) mode regardless of car speed. 5 237 Driving 5 • When in D (Drive) mode, using the paddles behind the steering wheel (if equipped), will cause the system to enter a temporary function and enable the manual shift mode. This range is indicated with the symbols “+/-” above and below “D” letter on the gear range field of the display. The system will then switch back to automatic mode according to time elapsed in “temporary” mode and driving conditions. At extremely cold temperatures (-30°C / -23°F or below), transmission may be affected by the low temperature of the engine and transmission. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a normal level. M +/- (Manual) This mode is obtained by moving the shift lever to the left in “M +/-“ position. In this mode, the transmission interacts with the driver in order to allow manual shift and ensure increased control of the vehicle. The current mode allows the transmission system to optimise the engine brake action, remove undesired shifting into higher and lower gears and improve the overall performance of the vehicle. 238 This mode allows you to move the shift lever step by step forward “– “ or backward “+” without pressing the unlock button. The current transmission gear is displayed on the instrument cluster beside “M”. Manual mode can be activated at any time, with no need to release the brake pedal. In M +/- (Manual) mode, the transmission will shift up or down (+/–) if manually selected by the driver by using the shift lever, or shift paddles on the steering wheel (if foreseen). The transmission remains in the engaged gear until the driver shifts into another higher or lower gear, except in the following cases. • Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation. The transmission will also upshift automatically once maximum engine speed is reached. • If in SPORT mode, the transmission will remain in the selected gear even when maximum engine speed is reached. The transmission will upshift only if enabled by the driver. Manual upshift or downshift will be maintained as long as SPORT mode is selected, even by full stroke pedal press. • If in “M +/-“ or in SPORT mode, the transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to halt (to prevent engine lugging) and the current gear will display on the instrument cluster. Shifting the shift lever backward “+” or moving the right shift paddle “+” towards the steering wheel when stationary, will cause the vehicle to start in second gear. If the vehicle speed is too low, the system will ignore further upshifts. Avoid using speed control when the M +/- (Manual) mode is engaged. When the car stops in M +/- (Manual) mode, the transmission automatically moves the shift lever and inserts P (Park). If you enter the I.C.E. drive mode when the gearshift is in “M +/-” position, the Driving system activates the automatic return of the shift lever in D (Drive) mode. The indicator beside the displayed gear will light up just before reaching the required speed to change downshift or upshift (example in the figures). NOTE for Diesel Version If the transmission is in SPORT mode, the system will change gear automatically when the set rpm limit (limiter) is reached. Shift Paddles (if equipped) The driver can change gears with the shift paddles behind the steering wheel when in D (Drive) and M +/(Manual) mode. Using the shift paddles, the corresponding icon will display on the instrument cluster beside the “M” indication and current shifted gear. Pull the right shift paddle “+” towards the steering wheel and release it to enter the higher gear; do the same operation with the left shift paddle “– “ to enter the lower gear. • When in D (Drive) mode, by pressing “–“ paddle the transmission shifts to “D1 - D2” temporary mode (or the “Launch Control” on the TROFEO version). • Pull simultaneously both paddles to deactivate the D (Drive) temporary mode (or the “Launch Control” on the TROFEO version). Gear Shift Indicator Light In order to improve fuel economy, we recommend that you shift gears when the system prompts you to do so. This will help reduce fuel consumption without significantly affecting vehicle performance. 5 When the new gear is engaged, the indicator turns off. If the shift runs late or is not performed at all, the indicator remains lit for a few seconds then turns off. As soon as new conditions requiring further gear change occur, 239 Driving the indicator light will illuminate again. red warning light illuminates on the instrument cluster NOTE: The gearshift indicator will only work when the transmission is set in M +/(Manual) mode. Transmission Malfunction and Overheating Conditions 5 Transmission Emergency Control Transmission function is electronically monitored to detect abnormal conditions. If a condition that could result in transmission damage is detected, “Transmission Limp Home Mode” will be activated. In this situation, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission system may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver about the more serious transmission conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary. Transmission Oil Over Temperature If the transmission oil temperature exceeds the operating limit, the 240 In this case, slow down until temperature returns to normal level (the light will turn off). If this is not sufficient, we recommend to stop the vehicle, shift the lever to position P (Park) or N (Neutral) and keep the engine idle until the temperature warning light turns off and the message disappears from the display. Resume driving without demanding high engine performance. If the warning light and the related message turns on again, it is advisable to stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and wait for the engine/transmission assembly to fully cool down. If the instrument cluster message indicates that the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform the following procedure preferably at a Service Center. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps. • Stop the vehicle. • Shift the transmission into P (Park), if possible. • Turn the engine off. • Wait approximately 30 seconds. • Restart the engine. • Shift the transmission into D (Drive) and then into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit the Service Network at your earliest possible convenience, which has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position See chapter “Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position” in section “In an Emergency”. Driving All-Wheel Drive The active on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system provides available optimum traction for a wide variety of road and off-road surface and driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary. To maximise fuel economy, the AWD system automatically disangages torque distribution on front axle when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction, the AWD system automatically distributes the torque between front and rear axle in order to grant the best driving experience. Torque distribution is displayed on the TFT in the “Drive Mode” main menu. Refer to paragraph “TFT Display: Menus and Settings” in chapter “Instrument Cluster” of section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. WARNING! There may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condition occurs. NOTE: If the AWD system service warning message appears after engine start up, or during driving, it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly or is in recovery mode due to overheating caused by the excessive wheel spin. In this condition the vehicle can continue driving but only rear wheel drive is working. If the warning message is often activated, it is recommended to have the vehicle serviced at the Service Network . 5 241 Driving Drive Mode Controls Preview Drive modes and ride heights to use the vehicle on and off road can be set using the buttons and vehicle height selector on central console. CAUTION! “NORMAL” is the default drive mode, optimised for the best balance between performances, fuel consumptions and emissions in the standard conditions use of the car. 5 242 TROFEO Version only Buttons on the central console have the following functions: • (ESC OFF): to exclude/reactivate the ESC system. • OFF ROAD: to activate/deactivate the specific driving mode for off road conditions (uphill/downhill, cobblestone, mud, grass and sand). In this mode, the vehicle has a specific ESC/ASR calibration and shock absorbers skyhook damping curve. Activating this drive mode, will also change the EPS setting. When in "OFF ROAD" drive mode, hard suspension can not be set through the button on the central console. • I.C.E: to activate/deactivate the drive mode to ensure increased control on slippery surfaces as well as higher energy efficiency. • SPORT (NOT for TROFEO version): to activate/deactivate a sportier drive mode. In this mode, the vehicle has a faster throttle response and ESC sport calibration (not recommended on wet/slippery surfaces). Activating this drive mode, will also change the EPS setting. • SPORT and CORSA (TROFEO version only): to activate/deactivate the sportier and the race drive mode. When in "SPORT" drive mode, the vehicle has a faster throttle response and ESC sport calibration (not recommended on wet/slippery surfaces). Activating this drive mode, will also change the EPS setting. When in "CORSA" drive mode, in addition to what indicated for the sposts mode, the transmission use a specific gear shift pattern and the traction is shifted more on the rear wheels with increased oversteering behavior. Traction control with dedicated calibration to maximize traction vs stability and "Launch Control" start mode. • (Suspension): to switch between the two suspension setting modes: soft (LED light off) and hard ("S" on the cluster and LED light on). By selecting one of these drive modes, the yellow or white LED on the button illuminates and, for some of these, the vehicle configuration obtained is Driving graphically displayed on instrument cluster. The same screen is also obtained when selecting the “Drive mode” menu using the buttons on steering wheel. When changing drive mode between OFF ROAD, I.C.E., NORMAL and SPORT, engine temperature and fuel level indicators inner edge will change color if“Outline Coloring” of submenu “Screen Setup” is set to “On” (see example in the figure). Refer to chapter “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. pressing the button, the dedicated LED will illuminate. It is necessary to press the (ESC OFF) button for at least 3 seconds. At each key-on the car starts always in NORMAL drive mode (all the LEDs are OFF) and driver can select different drive mode according to following table. Button Electronic Stability Control ESC partially deactivated. OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT Setting the Drive Mode Drive modes can be set using the buttons on central console. Keys (buttons) only have two statuses: OFF and ON. The OFF status (button released) is the standard function mode. The ON status is activated by ON – Button pressed (LED ON) OFF ROAD drive mode ON. Increased Control and Efficiency mode ON (*). Sportier drive mode (SPORT) ON. Button ON – Button pressed (LED ON) • Button pressed the first time (upper LED ON): sportier drive mode (SPORT) ON. SPORT • Button pressed the second time (upper and CORSA lower LED ON): race (TROFEO drive mode (CORSA) ON, version ESC partially deactivated only) (ON) and hard/stiff suspension setting (“S”). • When button is pressed third time, it returns to OFF-button release. Hard/stiff suspension setting (“S”). 5 (*) I.C.E. (Increased Control and Efficiency) operates on engine supply in order to reduce fuel consumption, exhausts, noisiness (efficiency) by dampening vehicle reactions (control). The current mode is also useful for low-grip surfaces. The tables below summarise the adjustment of transmission and engine parameters according to set drive mode/s. (ESC OFF) is the only mode that does not depend on 243 Driving the activation or deactivation of the other modes. The tables show the two configurations with: • (ESC OFF) button NOT pressed; • (ESC OFF) button pressed. 5 244 Driving WARNING! On Trofeo version, when CORSA drive mode is activated, the (ESC OFF) indicator light on the instrument cluster is on because the intervention of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is lower than the other modes, but still present to allow a more sporty drive. You can always press (ESC OFF) button to fully deactivate ESC system. Due to high power output of the engine can be potentially dangerous to drive the car on wet or slippery roads with ESC off and CORSA drive mode set. (ESC OFF) Button NOT pressed (NOT for TROFEO Version) Button pressed: LED ON Button not pressed: LED OFF OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT Setup NORMAL + Auto + Soft suspensions OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD + Auto + Off Road suspensions I.C.E. + Auto + Soft suspensions SPORT + Auto + Soft suspensions NORMAL + Auto + Hard suspensions Stability control Active Active with specific tuning Active Active-Sport (*) Active-Sport (*) Electric Power Steering (EPS) Normal Off Road Normal Sport Sport Suspensions setup Normal Off Road Normal Normal Hard Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost Exhaust sound Low (Rev. Threshold) Normal Close to 5000 rpm Always High Always High Gear shifting point Normal Off Road Comfort Performance Performance 5 245 Driving Button pressed: LED ON Button not pressed: LED OFF 5 OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong Upshift rev. limiter Yes Yes Yes Yes (No, when in M+/-) Yes (No, when in M+/-) Automatic downshift Normal Anti - Stall Normal Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-) Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-) Shifting timing Normal Quick - Normal Comfort Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-) Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-) (*) In low- and medium-grip conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand, etc.) it is advisable not to activate SPORT mode, even with the ESC system active (button (ESC OFF) not pressed). (ESC OFF) Button pressed (NOT for TROFEO version) Button pressed: LED ON Button not pressed: LED OFF OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT Setup NORMAL + Auto + Soft suspensions Stability control 246 OFF OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD + Auto + Off Road suspensions I.C.E. + Auto + Soft suspensions SPORT + Auto + Soft suspensions NORMAL + Auto + Hard suspensions OFF OFF OFF OFF Driving Button pressed: LED ON Button not pressed: LED OFF OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT Electric Power Steering (EPS) Normal Off Road Normal Sport Sport Suspensions setup Normal Off Road Normal Normal Hard Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost Exhaust sound Low (Rev. Threshold) Normal Close to 5000 rpm Always High Always High Gear shifting point Normal Off Road Comfort Performance Performance Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong Upshift rev. limiter Yes Yes Yes Yes (No, when in M+/-) Yes (No, when in M+/-) Automatic downshift Normal Normal (Anti Stall, when in M+/-) Normal Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-) Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-) Shifting timing Normal Normal Comfort Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-) Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-) 5 247 Driving (ESC OFF) Button NOT pressed (TROFEO Version only) Button pressed: LED ON Button not pressed: LED OFF OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA Setup NORMAL + Auto + Soft suspensions 5 248 OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD + Auto + Off Road suspensions I.C.E. + Auto + Soft suspensions SPORT + Auto + Soft suspensions OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA CORSA + Manual + Hard suspensions OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA NORMAL + Auto + Hard suspensions Stability control Active Active with specific tuning Active Active-Sport (*) Active-Corsa (*) Active-Sport (*) Electric Power Steering (EPS) Normal Off Road Normal Sport Corsa Sport Suspensions setup Normal Off Road Normal Normal Hard Hard Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance Performance Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost Overboost Exhaust sound Low (Rev. Threshold) Normal Close to 5000 rpm Always High Always High Always High Gear shifting point Normal Off Road Comfort Performance Performance Performance Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Not Yes - Strong Upshift rev. limiter Yes Yes Yes Yes (No, when in M+/-) Not Yes (No, when in M+/-) Driving Button pressed: LED ON Button not pressed: LED OFF OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA Automatic downshift Normal Anti - Stall Normal Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-) Anti - Stall Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-) Shifting timing Normal Quick - Normal Comfort Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-) Quick - Corsa Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-) (*) In low- and medium-grip conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand, etc.) it is advisable not to activate SPORT or CORSA mode, even with the ESC system active (button (ESC OFF) not pressed). (ESC OFF) Button pressed (TROFEO version only) Button pressed: LED ON Button pressed: LED OFF OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA Setup NORMAL + Auto + Soft suspensions Stability control OFF OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA 5 OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD + Auto + Off Road suspensions I.C.E. + Auto + Soft suspensions SPORT + Auto + Soft suspensions CORSA + Manual + Hard suspensions NORMAL + Auto + Hard suspensions OFF OFF OFF OFF Active-Sport 249 Driving Button pressed: LED ON Button pressed: LED OFF 5 250 OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA OFF ROAD I.C.E. SPORT CORSA Electric Power Steering (EPS) Normal Off Road Normal Sport Corsa Sport Suspensions setup Normal Off Road Normal Normal Hard Hard Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance Performance Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost Overboost Exhaust sound Low (Rev. Threshold) Normal Close to 5000 rpm Always High Always High Always High Gear shifting point Normal Off Road Comfort Performance Performance Performance Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Not Yes - Strong Upshift rev. limiter Yes Yes Yes Yes (No, when in M+/-) Not Yes (No, when in M+/-) Automatic downshift Normal Normal (Anti Stall, when in M+/-) Normal Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-) Anti - Stall Performance (Anti - Stall, when in M+/-) Shifting timing Normal Normal Comfort Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-) Quick - Corsa Sport (Quick Sport, when in M+/-) Driving NOTE: A different drive mode can be set even with engine running and vehicle in motion. To activate a drive mode, press briefly the corresponding button. The LED on the button will light up and set drive mode screen will be displayed (example in the figure: NORMAL) for 5 seconds. To deactivate the drive mode, press the same button again: the LED will turn off and the display will show the message indicating that (ESC OFF) drive mode is off and ESC system is active. Activate/Deactivate (ESC OFF) Drive Mode To activate (ESC OFF) drive mode press the corresponding button for at least 3 seconds: the yellow LED on the button will turn on. Activate/Deactivate OFF ROAD, I.C.E., SPORT and (Suspension) Drive Mode To activate one of these drive mode, press the corresponding button once: the white LED on the button will turn on (example in picture: SPORT mode). To disable the drive mode activated, press the same button again: the LED will turn off. Activate/Deactivate SPORT and CORSA Drive Mode (TROFEO Version only) To activate SPORT drive mode, press the corresponding button once: the upper white LED on the button will turn on. CORSA drive mode can be active by pressing again the same button for more than a second (about 1.2 seconds): also the lower LED on the button will turn on. To return in SPORT drive mode, press the SPORT/CORSA button again. When in “CORSA” drive mode, “OFF ROAD” and (Suspension) hard (S) drive mode can not be set and you can run the “Launch Control” start procedure. 5 251 Driving To disable the SPORT mode without activating the CORSA mode, press the same button once again: the two LED will turn off. 5 252 Monitoring Settings on Display By gaining access to “Drive mode” menu through the buttons on steering wheel right-hand side, it is possible to monitor the settings for driving on and off road. The list and figure show vehicle parameters referred to each drive mode. Driving mode and its parameters are identified by a different color (example in the figure: I.C.E.). A Ride height. B Powertrain. C ESC. D Torque distribution. E Suspension stiffness. Press “ ” (Suspension) button, the icon with "S" beside will light up on the upper right side of the TFT display. Driving The table below specifies the default, ride height and relevant commands that can be set, for each drive mode. Drive Mode Default Condition ESC Off Road Off Road Off Road 1 ESC I.C.E. Normal Normal ESC Normal Normal Normal Possible Ride Height / Command • Off Road 1 / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. • Off Road 2 / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. • Normal / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. • Aero 1 / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. • Aero 2 / Only speed dependent. • Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. 5 • Normal / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. • Aero 1 / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. • Aero 2 / Only speed dependent. • Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. 253 Driving Drive Mode Default Condition ESC Sport Normal Normal ESC Corsa Corsa Aero 2 Possible Ride Height / Command • Normal / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. • Aero 1 / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. • Aero 2 / Only speed dependent. • Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. • Other ride heights can not be set when in “CORSA” mode. • Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. 5 ESC Sport Sport Aero 1 254 • Normal / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. • Aero 1 / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. • Aero 2 / Only speed dependent. • Entry/Exit / Via dedicated drive height selector according to current speed. Driving Automatic Selection of “NORMAL” Drive Mode upon Ignition (Predominant Mode) If “Off Road” drive mode was set before switching off the vehicle, “NORMAL” drive mode will be set automatically upon re-ignition. Over 5 km/h (3 mph), vehicle height if was set to “Off Road 1” or “Off Road 2” will lower to “Normal” ride height if no other inputs from the user. I.C.E. Mode excluding ESC To release the vehicle in low grip conditions (e.g.: heaps of snow, mud, sand, etc), it is possible to shift the transmission feature in the specific driving mode as required for these situations, by pressing the I.C.E. button and to exclude completely the yaw and spinning control system, by pressing the button for at last three seconds (ESC OFF). Setting Ride Height The pneumatic suspension system ensures vehicle continuous automatic levelling and allows setting ground clearance by simply moving the ride height selector The selector can be moved forward ( ) and backward ( ) by one position at a time in order to set six different heights. Every position is identified by the switch-on of the corresponding LED at the left side of the selector and in the dedicated area at top right of the display. The table below shows the possible selector positions and the relevant symbols. Off Road 2 Off Road 1 Normal Aero 1 Aero 2 During transition from one position to another, the instrument panel display will show a pop-up indicator (above the coolant temperature indicator) which reproduces the ride height symbols. On this indicator, the LED for the new position, set by means of the selector on central console, will flash while the LEDs of intermediate positions will turn on when set position is reached. The new position will be displayed on the dedicated area at top right of the display and the indicator will turn off after approximately 2 seconds. 5 Entry/Exit 255 Driving suspension movements to ensure a proper appearance. 5 256 The system requires that the engine be running for all changes. When lowering the vehicle, all of the doors, including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering, the change will not be completed until the open door/s is/are closed. The pneumatic suspension system of this vehicle uses a lifting and lowering pattern preventing the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first and then the rear. After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the pneumatic suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The system is correcting the position of the vehicle with little Display Messages After shifting selector to change position, a pop-up message will indicate for 5 seconds when set position has been reached (after pneumatic suspension system intervention that might last up to 30 seconds). This type of message will be displayed only if the option to view all pneumatic suspension system messages was set (For further details, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). Set ride height and drive mode can be monitored on instrument panel display via “Drive mode” menu, using buttons on the right-hand side of the steering wheel (see chapter “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). The change from one position to another can occur only if the following requirements are met. • Lifting: engine running, speed lower than preset limit, etc. • Lowering: engine running, speed lower than preset limit, doors closed, etc. Ride height change can be temporarily suspended or disabled under the following conditions, as indicated in the pop-up messages on instrument panel display. • High speed: decrease speed to set new height. • Pneumatic suspension system overheat: wait for the system to cool down before changing height. • Door(s) and/or liftgate open: close door(s) and liftgate to lower the vehicle. • Pneumatic suspension system temporarily disabled or in fault: wait a few minutes and repeat the operation or contact the Service Network . • Low battery: start the engine to recharge battery and change ride height. Driving • Entry/Exit position not available: check the cause preventing this control. Using the Ride Height Positions and Speed Thresholds The different ride heights that can be set with the selector allow user to drive the vehicle on and off road, using the available drive modes and functions. NOTE: The indications below explain as a general rule which selector position has to be used in certain situations and which are the speed thresholds at which it is possible to set the available ride height and when system automatically switches to a different height. In any case, the driver must always assess and set the ride height and drive mode most suitable to the conditions of the current driving path on a case by case basis. • Normal: normal ground clearance. This is the standard height position of the pneumatic suspension and is meant for normal road conditions. In this ride height position driver can set the “NORMAL” and “I.C.E.” drive modes. After the engine is switched off, the drive mode is set to “NORMAL”. If “OFF ROAD” drive mode was set, “NORMAL” mode will be set, but the user-set ride height will remain until the speed threshold is reached. • Off Road 1: raises the vehicle by approx. 25 mm (1 in). This is the height suitable for most off road driving conditions until the other off road option is needed. This ride height can set only in “OFF ROAD” drive mode. Select this height while the vehicle speed is below 80 km/h (50 mph). When in the “Off Road 1” height, if the vehicle speed remains between 80 km/h (50 mph) and 90 km/h (56 mph) for over 30 seconds or if vehicle speed exceeds 90 km/h (56 mph), the vehicle will be automatically lowered to “NORMAL” height. For further details, refer to "Off-road Drive" in this section. • Off Road 2: raises the vehicle by approx. 40 mm (1.5 in). This height is intended for off-road use only where maximum ground clearance is required. This ride height can be set only in “OFF ROAD” drive mode. Select this height while the vehicle speed is below 30 km/h (18 mph). When in the “Off Road 2” height, if the vehicle speed remains between 30 km/h (18 mph) and 40 km/h (25 mph) for over 30 seconds or if vehicle speed exceeds 40 km/h (25 mph), the vehicle will be automatically lowered to “Off Road 1” height. For further details, refer to "Off-road drive" in this section. • Aero 1: lowers the vehicle by approx. 20 mm (0.8 in). This height provides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. This ride height is available in “NORMAL”, “SPORT”, “ (Suspension)” or “I.C.E.” drive mode. System automatically lowers the vehicle when speed remains between 120 km/h (74.5 mph) and 130 km/h (80 mph) for over 15 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 130 km/h (80 mph). The system will return to “NORMAL” height when the vehicle speed remains between 100 km/h (62 mph) and 90 km/h (56 mph) for over 15 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 90 km/h (56 mph). The vehicle will enter “Aero 1” height, regardless of vehicle speed if the “SPORT” mode is set. • Aero 2: lowers the vehicle by approx. 35 mm (1.4 in). It is the height ensuring excellent aerodynamics for top performance further lowering the vehicle. This ride height is available in “NORMAL”, “SPORT ”, “ (Suspension)” or 5 257 Driving 5 258 “I.C.E.” drive mode. This is the default ride height when “CORSA” drive mode (TROFEO version only) is set. System automatically lowers the vehicle when speed exceeds 170 km/h (105 mph) or when it remains between 170 km/h (105 mph) and 185 km/h (115 mph) for over 15 seconds. The system will return to Aero 1 height when the vehicle speed remains between 155 km/h (96 mph) and 140 km/h (87 mph) for over 15 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 140 km/h (87 mph). • Easy/Entry: lowers the vehicle by approx. 45 mm (1.8 in). This mode lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo from the boot compartment. This ride height can be set only in “NORMAL”, “SPORT ”, “ (Suspension)” or “I.C.E.”. After selecting this height, once the vehicle speed goes below 24 km/h (15 mph), the vehicle height will begin to lower. To exit “Entry/Exit” mode, move selector to another position or drive the vehicle over 24 km/h (15 mph). Automatic lowering of the vehicle into “Entry/Exit” mode can be enabled through the MTC+ (refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). If this feature is enabled, the vehicle will only lower if the gearshift lever is in P (Park), the engine is running, doors and liftgate are closed and the pneumatic suspension system should be either in “NORMAL” or “Aero”. The Vehicle will not automatically lower if the pneumatic suspension system is in “Off Road 2” or “Off Road 1” mode. The lowering will be suppressed when the ignition is switched off and a door is opened to prevent setting the alarm off. Lowering Vehicle Height for Inactivity Lowering of vehicle ground clearance after a long period of inactivity should be considered normal since it is due to a drop of pressure in the pneumatic suspension system. Approximately, after one week of inactivity, vehicle ground clearance will lower by 10 mm (0.4 in). To set off the drop of pressure due to inactivity, it is necessary to start the engine and allow some time until system reaches operating pressure and lifts the vehicle to set ride height. A message on instrument cluster display will warn driver when set ride height is reached. Driving vehicle before the set riding height is reached is not safe and could damage suspension components. WARNING! After a long period of inactivity, drive the vehicle only when reaches set ride height to prevent any problems of the pneumatic suspension system from limiting occupants' safety. "Launch Control" Mode (TROFEO version only) "Launch Control" mode is a performance start procedure. By activating this procedure you get the best possible acceleration from standstill of the car. This mode allows you to ground the torque necessary to prevent the wheels from slipping during acceleration performance. Driving To make a performance start in "Launch Control" mode, the following conditions must be met: • Water and transmission temperature in proper range. • No engine, AWD and on board systems faults. • The vehicle must be traveled at least 700 km (440 mi). • "CORSA" drive mode on. • Shift lever in "D" or"M +/-" position. • The vehicle must be stationary on a level road surface. • The driver door closed and the safety belt fastened. • With engine on, parking brake disengaged, brake pedal pressed and steering wheel straight, pull "–" left paddle. The instrument cluster shows the "Launch Control" engaged page. • With brake pedal pressed full with left foot, press full the accelerator pedal (with right foot) as indicated in the message on the instrument cluster. Launch Control Sequence • To confirm the procedure, pull again the "–" paddle down. To abort the procedure, pull "+" right paddle. • To confirm the "Launch Control" sequence, press full the brake pedal as indicated in the message on the instrument cluster. • Release brake pedal. The launch of the vehicle starts with ESC that manages the maximum performance and engine torque calibrated to maximize performance. Maximum performance is achieved if driver let the engine rpm stall above 2300 rpm before releasing brake pedal. NOTE: • All the above mentioned conditions must be verified in order to activate "Launch Control" performance start procedure. • During “Launch Control” ACC, FCW and HAS (if equipped) are temporarily disabled. • Each step displayed on the instrument cluster has a time out approximately of 5 seconds. • "Launch Control" maneuver requires to use both foot, left foot to brake and right foot to accelerate at the same time. 5 259 Driving Off-Road Drive During the acceleration phase the “Launch Control” symbol appears at the top right of the TFT display. 5 260 This vehicle is equipped with a specific Off Road driving mode which allows to drive through various terrain conditions (rock, mud, sand), also in uphill and downhill, eventually in condition of lateral inclination. To set the "OFF ROAD" drive mode, please see paragraphs “Setting the Drive Mode” and “Setting Ride Height” of chapter “Drive Mode” in this section. In order to enhance this specific performance, the "OFF ROAD" drive mode modifies the setting of: • Ride height; • Engine, transmission calibration; • Suspensions. When “OFF ROAD” is selected, ride height is set to “Off Road 1” (vehicle is higher by approx. 25 mm / 1 in). It is possible to select ride height “Off Road 2” (vehicle is raseid by approx. 40 mm / 1.5 in) using the ride height selector. “OFF ROAD” drive mode is limited up to a max speed of 90 km/h (56 mph). In case the vehicle speed should exceed this limit, the drive mode will be deselected automatically and the drive mode will return to “NORMAL”. “Off Road 2” ride height is limited instead up to a max speed of 40 km/h (25 mph). In case the vehicle speed should exceed this limit, ride height will be put automatically to “Off Road 1” while driving mode will remain “OFF ROAD”. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. A higher clearance and the longer travel of the suspension might allow the vehicle to overcome some obstacles. A higher ground clearance means a higher center of gravity. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvres. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. Although the pneumatic suspension system contributes to limiting these risks by setting precautionary speed thresholds, the driver must always pay utmost attention and drive carefully. WARNING! “Off Road 2” ride height must always be selected in case of water fording. Please remember water fording limits: max depth of the water must be lower than 50 cm (19 in) and crossing speed lower than 8 km/h (5 mph). In “OFF ROAD” drive mode, also engine, transmission settings are Driving changed in order to provide the most suitable level of torque and selected gear to improve traction on low-adherence condition and uphill climbing. WARNING! In case of downhill, the use of the Hill Descent Control (HDC) is recommended, especially for relevant slope and in case of low-adherence conditions. Also suspensions (Skyhook Continuous Damping Control) are set to a specific calibration in “OFF ROAD” drive mode, in order to obtain the right damping force provided by the shock absorbers, combined with the increased ride heights “Off Road 1” and “Off Road 2”. Driving Through Water Set maximum ride height “Off Road 2” before driving through water. Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water. NOTE: Your vehicle is capable of water fording to a maximum of 50 cm (19 in) of water. To maintain optimal performance of your vehicle’s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to switch the system into recirculation mode during water fording. CAUTION! When driving through water, do not exceed 8 km/h (5 mph). Always check water depth before entering, as a precaution. Check all fluids afterwards: driving through water may cause damage to engine and driveline that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed lower than 8 km/h (5 mph) while in water to minimize wave effects that might cause serious damage to all components, especially engine. WARNING! Avoid driving through flowing or standing water. Doing so can be highly dangerous and can be very difficult to determine the depth of the water you are driving through. If driving through water cannot be avoided, and after driving through it, apply the brakes lightly to ensure the brakes are operating correctly. Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 25 cm (9 in). The flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water and create waves that could cause serious damage to mechanical and electric components. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting. 5 Standing Water Do not drive in standing water deeper than 50 cm (19 in), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects. 261 Driving Maintenance After driving through water, have your vehicle fluids and lubricants inspected at the Service Network to assure the fluids have not been contaminated. Driving in Snow and Wet Grass 5 In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional control at slower speeds, set “I.C.E.” drive mode with transmission in M +/- (Manual) and shift the transmission to a low gear. See “Drive Mode” in this section for further details. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control. Follow these instructions even when driving through a path section covered with wet grass. Driving in Mud and Sand In general, when driving in mud and sand, if your wheels spin, always reduce the throttle in order to slow the tires and regain traction. • When driving in mud, avoid using low gear that could cause wheel spin. Follow the tyre and vehicle 262 manufacturer’s advice on tire pressure. • When driving in sand, adopt lowest gear possible. Tire pressure set at the lower limits may help to increase the vehicle capability. If you are driving through sand dunes, avoid climbing over them while try to go round them. Hill Climbing Before climbing a hill, determine the conditions at the crest and/or on the other side and shift the transmission to a lower gear. The vehicle is equipped with Hill Start Assist (HSA) that helps the driver to manage the brake intervention in acceleration when driving uphill (for further details, refer to “Brake and Stability Control System” in this section). If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes. If stalled, restart the engine, and shift into R (Reverse). Back slowly down the hill, allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires. WARNING! If you lose forward motion, or cannot make it to the top of a hill or grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in R (Reverse) gear. Never back down a hill in N (Neutral) using only the brake. Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill; always drive straight up or down. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb. Traction Downhill When descending mountains or hills, use Hill Descent Control (HDC) to avoid repeated heavy braking (for further details, refer to “Brake and Stability Control System” in this section). When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking power. Avoid Driving repeated heavy braking and downshift the transmission whenever possible in order to cool down the brakes. Warnings and Tips for Off-road Driving When driving off-road, using the “OFF ROAD” drive mode which is specific for this use, it is necessary to pay utmost attention when tackling potentially dangerous paths. Before moving off, always make sure that the vehicle reached the ride height set through the selector. When driving, always: • limit driving speed as much as possible to tackle bends, bumpy sections and slopes; • increase visual control in front and on the sides of the vehicle to quickly spot any obstacles on your path (potholes, branches, etc.); • if possible, avoid going up steep ramps without being aware of the level of difficulty of the path beyond the ramp peak; • consider that weather conditions may suddenly change and increase the level of difficulty of the paths to be driven through. Always consider these tips further to your experience gained in off-road driving. After Driving Off-road Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most onroad driving. After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it. • Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage. • Inspect the radiator for mud and debris that might decrease sinking effect and clean as required. • Check for accumulations of plants or brush in underbody. These things could be a fire hazard if they get in contact with the exhaust system. • After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have all parts that got in contact with mud, sand and water inspected and cleaned as soon as possible. WARNING! Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking operation. You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision. Do not drive if braking system is not perfectly efficient: get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary by the Service Network. • If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels and suspension linkages for impacted material. Impacted material can cause wheel imbalance and affect suspension response. Removing it will correct the situation. 5 263 Driving Parking Brake 5 264 The vehicle is equipped with an electric automatic parking brake, also called EPB (Electric Parking Brake). The EPB braking action on model with "Base" and "Dual Cast" braking system (equipped with rear floating caliper) is ensured by a power actuator directly working on the brake pad inside each caliper of the rear brake system. The "Performance Dual Cast" braking system is equipped with a dedicated caliper which acts on each rear brake disc. It can be automatically engaged when the engine is turned off and disengaged with engine running, driver seatbelt latched and driver door closed, while pressing the brake pedal and operating the shift lever. Furthermore, EPB can be automatically engaged above a slope threshold with transmission in parking to avoid damage to the vehicle. EPB can be disengaged before to turn off the vehicle. When the parking brake is applied, the warning light lights up on the tachometer display and the related message is displayed on the instrument cluster for 5 seconds (see “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). During engagement and disengagement procedures, the warning light flashes until the parking brake has reached its maximum activation force and is respectively fully released. In the above-mentioned conditions, the automatic engagement function can be deactivated/activated by selecting the menu item “Vehicle settings” on the main menu (refer to paragraph “Deactivating Automatic Operation” in this chapter). Manual Engagement/ Disengagement The parking brake can also be manually engaged or disengaged when the engine is running or the ignition switch is in the RUN position, by pressing the brake pedal and raising the lever located behind the shift lever. When the parking brake is applied, the warning light lights up on the tachometer and the related message will be displayed for 5 seconds on the instrument cluster. If you attempt to engage/disengage the parking brake without having pressed the brake pedal, a message will be displayed, warning you to press the brake pedal. If the engine was turned off when the automatic engagement device was deactivated (see “Deactivating Automatic Operation” in this chapter) it is possible to shift the parking brake simply by pulling the lever upward within 3 minutes after turning off. Driving CAUTION! The main function of the EPB is to allow safe parking of the vehicle, therefore it must only be applied when the vehicle is already stationary. If the EPB is used while the vehicle is moving and decelerating until a speed lower of 5 km/h (3 mph) and, in particular, until complete stop (typically in a sudden brake), it is necessary to have the EPB system checked by the Service Network. Deactivating Automatic Operation The automatic engagement function can be deactivated/reactivated by selecting the menu item “Vehicle settings” through the switch on the right-side of the steering wheel (refer to “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”.) Press and release the switch toward the arrow ( ) to select “Electric Park Brake”. WARNING! It is advisable to keep the “Auto Apply” function always active (On) so that the vehicle is properly secured with electric parking brake. WARNING! 5 • Always hold the brake pedal pressed during engagement or disengagement of the parking brake. • The EPB command activation while running generates a deceleration of the vehicle with strong deceleration (Dynamic Braking). It is therefore recommended to use this feature only in case of emergency. The stability of the car is guaranteed by the action of the activated ESC system. • It is advisable to keep the “Auto Apply” function always active (On) so that the vehicle is properly secured with electric parking brake. Press and release the switch once again toward the arrow ( ) to visualize the options connected to this function. • Auto Apply On (recommended setting); • Auto Apply Off. Scroll with the switch toward the arrow or through the programmable options. Press and release the switch toward the arrow ( ) to set the selected option. A check mark will remain next to the previously-selected item until a new selection is made. 265 Driving CAUTION! • Under certain conditions when the “Setting Saved” Selection notification appears as a popup for 2 seconds then the display will show again the modified function. 5 battery voltage is low, the electric automatic parking brake system may temporarily be deactivated for safety reasons. Therefore, typically upon starting the engine, when the battery voltage drops, a message may temporarily be displayed, indicating that automatic operation is temporarily disabled. • In case of repetitive requests to reset the EPB through the messages shown on the TFT display, please contact the Service Network . Failure Indication In the event of electric parking brake system failure, the warning light on the display will light up and the related message will show for 5 seconds. In order to disable the automatic operation follow the same procedures and select the other option. WARNING! In the event of an EPB failure, take your vehicle to the nearest Service Network Center as soon as possible. Initialize the EPB System after Reconnecting the Vehicle Battery After the detachment and the subsequent connection of the battery, on the instrument cluster display the warning light will be illuminated. To initialize the EPB system, lift, release and lift again the lever located behind the shift lever. Emergency Disengagement In case of brake lock with complete electrical system failure, it is necessary to force the electric actuator on the rear calipers (see “Emergency Release of the Parking Brake” chapter in section “In an Emergency”). EPB Operation with Overheated Brakes Driving on mountain roads with steep slopes or a sports use of the vehicle could overheat the brake system 266 Driving components. In these conditions, parking brake must not be used since the push of the power actuator might not be sufficient to ensure vehicle braking, especially on a slope. Drive normally without braking to allow the brakes to cool down a few minutes before stopping. In this way, the automatic or manual activation of the parking brake will ensure vehicle braking. Parking Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied in automatic or manual and place the transmission lever in the P (Park) position by pressing the “P” button. WARNING! • Always check that the vehicle is locked before leaving it. • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. • Do not park the vehicle on paper, grass, dry leaves or other flammable materials. They could catch fire if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. • Do not leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. CAUTION! activate the Entry/Exit ride height to avoid any contact of the bottom of the car with the protrusions of the ground. When parking on hill roads, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in P (Park), otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of P (Park). In certain conditions, it is however advisable to disengage the parking brake manually and slightly apply the service brake for starting off. This is advisable when there are obstacles very close to the vehicle in the direction in which you intend to move. 5 • When you need to park the vehicle on a steep slope, both with the engine on and off, it is recommended not only to engage the parking brake, but also to shift the transmission lever to P (Park) before leaving the vehicle. • When parking on uneven surfaces (rocks, sidewalks, etc..) do not 267 Driving “Drive Away Inhibit” strategy In order to avoid a dangerous condition resulting from leaving the vehicle “not braked” with running engine and without driver on board, “Drive Away Inhibit” strategy alerts the driver with messages on the instrument cluster display and sounding chimes, then puts the transmission in P (Park). The table shows the vehicle condition and the action that the system runs to exit the dangerous condition. 5 268 Vehicle condition Action of the driver • Engine running and speed lower than 3 km/h (1.8 mph). • Transmission in any position other P (Park). • Driver safety belt unlocked. • Driver door opened. • Brake pedal pressed. The driver releases the brake pedal to get out of the vehicle. Warnings Warnings • Slow continuous chime. • The condition of the vehicle not in P (Park) position will be signalled by a message on the display. • Fast chime. • A message which invites to engage the parking brake to prevent vehicle movement will be displayed on the display. The system puts the transmission in P (Park) position. Driving Brake and Stability Control System The vehicle is endowed with an Electronic Stability Control System (ESC), which helps to maintain directional control in the event of loss of grip of the tires. The system is able to detect potentially dangerous situations for the stability of the vehicle and automatically sets the brakes on all four wheels in a differentiated manner, in order to provide a torque settlement of the vehicle. ESC includes the following subsystems: • ABS (Anti-lock Braking System); • EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution); • TCS (Traction Control System); • BAS (Brake Assist System); • BTO (Brake Throttle Override); • HSA (Hill Start Assist). • ROM (Roll-Over Mitigation); • TSM (Trailer Sway Mitigation); • HDC (Hill Descent Control). WARNING! • These systems cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from affecting the vehicle, nor can they increase traction, braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires. • These systems cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or aquaplaning. • The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with these systems must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardise the driver’s and the passenger’s safety or the safety of others. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects over steering and under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake to the appropriate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the conditions of instability and maintain the right direction. The system is also able to reduce the engine power. Through sensors fitted on the vehicle, the ESC system detects the driver’s chosen direction comparing it to the one maintained while running. In case of discrepancy between the required trajectory and the current one, the ESC system brakes the appropriate wheel to counteract over or under steering. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. The ESC system has two available operating modes: 5 ESC on This is the normal ESC operating mode. At each start-up of the vehicle, the ESC system is set in this mode and should be used for most driving conditions. The ESC should only be turned off for specific reasons as pointed out in the following paragraphs. ESC off The “ESC off” mode is aimed for a more spirited driving experience but also purposeful for driving in sand, or gravel. The current mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the 269 Driving threshold for ESC activation, allowing higher wheel spin than normally granted by the ESC system. The (ESC OFF) button is fitted beside the gear shift lever: to deactivate the system see “Drive Mode” in this section. 5 WARNING! In SPORT mode the ESC control thresholds are higher for maximum performance on dry road surface. To ensure maximum security of the ESC is recommended not to activate SPORT mode on surfaces with medium- and low-grip (e.g., wet, snow, dirt, etc..) with ESC system active (button (ESC Off) not pressed). NOTE: • When in “ESC off” mode, the TCS functionality of ESC is deactivated (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS paragraph of this chapter). All other stability features of ESC function regularly. • To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “ESC off” mode by pressing the (ESC OFF) button and 270 remain in this operational mode no longer than needed. Once the situation requiring “ESC off” mode is overcome, turn the ESC on again by pressing the (ESC OFF) button. This may also be performed while in motion. Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) and Electronic Brake-force Distribution (EBD) The Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking to prevent wheel lock-up. The Electronic Brake-force Distribution (EBD) prevents the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle. WARNING! The ABS helps prevent the wheels from locking, but it does not increase the physical grip limits between the tires and the road. Therefore, always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front of yours and reduce your speed when entering a curve. NOTE: • When the vehicle's speed is higher than 11 km/h (7 mph), you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as other motor noises. The system is performing a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly. • This self-check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 11 km/h (7 mph). ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris. You may also experience the following when the brake system goes into AntiLock: • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the vehicle stops). • The clicking sound of solenoid valves. • Brake pedal pulsations. • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop. These are all normal characteristics of ABS functioning. Driving Traction Control System (TCS) WARNING! • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly-installed or high-output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified Maserati personnel. • Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping brakes makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop • The ABS installed to this vehicle does not control trailer braking system. Pay utmost attention when driving on slippery ground since the trailer traction might get poorer and driver might lose control of the vehicle. • Do not modify the vehicle braking system to control the trailer brakes. The hydraulic system controlling vehicle braking must remain independent from trailer braking system. The current device is an integral part of the ESC system. It operates automatically by reducing the power transmitted by the engine in case of slipping, loss of grip on wet floor (aquaplaning), acceleration on slippery snow-covered or frozen surfaces, etc. Activating under slip conditions different control systems: • if slippage affects both drive wheels, it reduces the power transmitted by the engine; • if slippage only affects one drive wheel, it brakes the slipping wheel automatically. Brake Assist System (BAS) This system completes the ABS system by optimising the vehicle braking capacity during emergency brake manoeuvres. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes in order to help reduce braking distances. The quick brake coupling is optimal for BAS performances. In order to fully exploit the system, apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the entire vehicle stop sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure earlier than required. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. Brake Throttle Override (BTO) To complete the range of systems that assist braking, the vehicle is equipped with BTO, which is designed to stop the vehicle even when it is being accelerated. If the brake pedal is depressed together with the accelerator, the system does not consider as “conflict” the sequence “brake-first-then-accelerator” of pedal application and it will not engage the BTO. When the system recognizes that the accelerator pedal is stuck pressed and the sequence “accelerator-first then- brake-pressed” (this sequence is recognized as a “conflict”), the engine power will be automatically reduced and, if the driver continues to depress the accelerator, the system can make the vehicle to come to a complete stop. Additionally, if the brake pedal is released when the accelerator is still stuck pressed, the corresponding engine torque increase gradually to a safe value. The system exits from this strategy when the accelerator pedal is completely unstuck. 5 271 Driving Hill Start Assist (HSA) 5 The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle uphill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure applied for a short period of time also after releasing the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will start sloping down. The system will release brake pressure proportionally to the amount of throttle/torque applied as the vehicle starts to move in the chosen direction. By scrolling MTC+ user settings and selecting “Safety & Driving Assistant”, the driver can disable the HSA system. HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate: • vehicle is stationary. • gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in reverse gear). HSA will work in R (Reverse) and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met. 272 The system will not activate if the transmission is placed in N (Neutral) or P (Park). Roll-Over Mitigation (ROM) This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ROM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ROM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers. ROM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road and off-road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles. WARNING! Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road and off-road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ROM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll-overs, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of a ROM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Trailer Sway Mitigation (TSM) TSM uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSM will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. TSM cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further information. When TSM is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash (see “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”), the engine power may be reduced and you may Driving feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSM is disabled when the ESC system is partially deactivated (button (ESC OFF) pressed, LED on). WARNING! If TSM activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway. Standard Configuration Hill Descent Control (HDC) HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various driving situations, by actively controlling the brakes. HDC is part of the ESC system and has three possible states: • Off: feature is not enabled and will not activate. • Enabled: feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application. • Active: feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed. Enabling and Activating the HDC HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch on LH side of steering wheel. Optional Configuration NOTE: The figures only show the Standard Configuration. The following conditions must also be met to enable HDC: • Maximum activation speed: 30 km/h (18 mph). • Parking brake is released. • Driver door is closed. HDC enabling is indicated by the white light with below 3 dashes on instrument panel display coming steady on. The light remains white while the driver operates the pedal unit to change the speed, or when driving on a flat stretch of road between two descents, or when the descent is over. Failed enabling is indicated by a message on display. Once enabled, when driving the system automatically activates HDC. When the vehicle is within a defined threshold of slope (12%), the light turns green and the current speed appears below it until the default speed value set to 8 km/h (5 mph). When the vehicle exceeds a defined threshold of slope (12%), the light turns green and the current speed appears below it until the default speed value set to 3-4 km/h (1.8-2.5 mph). Therefore, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased until it reaches the default value. 5 273 Driving 5 274 The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the pedal unit or the multifunction control on steering wheel, which is the same used to set the Cruise Control (see “Electronic Cruise Control” or “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC” in this section). • If the driver brakes, the speed goes below the default value: when s/he releases the brake pedal, the speed goes back to 4 km/h (3 mph). • If the driver accelerates without exceeding the maximum limit value of 30 km/h (18 mph), when s/he releases the accelerator pedal HDC will set to the speed reached by vehicle in that moment. The set value appears under the green light on the display. Or: • Push down (SET -) multifunction switch to decrease the speed up to 3 km/h (1.8 mph) : pressing the brake pedal up to default speed of 8 km/h (5 mph). The set value appears under the green light on the display. brake pedal, the light turns white to indicate that HDC feature is temporarily cancelled. • Push up (RES +) multifunction switch to increase speed until the required value is displayed below the green light on display. Driver Override If the driver pushes the accelerator and the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed, the green light will stay on and a pop-up message on display will warn driver. HDC Cancelled If the driver press down (CANC) multifunction switch or presses the • HDC will be deactivated but remain available when driver pushes the Driving accelerator steadily, without exceeding 30 km/h (18 mph). A pop-up message and the green light will stay on. • When the vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h (18 mph) but is lower than 50 km/h (31 mph) this function turns to stand-by mode, the light with below the set speed turns white. In this case, to reset the function it is necessary to push up (RES +) multifunction switch. • While, if speed exceeds 50 km/h (31 mph), or when driving beyond 30 km/h (18 mph) for over 70 seconds, system will immediately disable the feature and the light will turn off. Brake Overheating with HDC The icon on instrument cluster display and the LED on steering wheel button will flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently. WARNING! HDC is only intended to assist the • driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed. • Prolonged use of the system might overheat the brakes. In case of brake overheating, the HDC, if active, will be progressively deactivated after warning the driver (switch-off of LED on button); feature can be reactivated only after brake temperature has decreased sufficiently. Distance that can be traveled depends on brake temperature, load and vehicle speed. • The performance of a vehicle equipped with HDC must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardise the driver’s safety or the safety of others. Using the Brakes CAUTION! To obtain a good performance by brake pads and discs, avoid sudden braking during the first 300 km (190 mi). The pad wear limit is indicated by the illumination of the warning light , on the instrument cluster. In this event, please contact the Service Network . 5 WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, 275 Driving excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. In an emergency full braking capacity may be impaired. Note for Diesel Engine (Diesel only) During driving, if the brake pedal and accelerator are pressed at the same time, the latter no longer responds to the driver’s command and the engine system limits the performance of the car until the normal driving conditions is restored. Brake Pads and Brake Discs 5 276 Wear on the brake pads and brake discs depends to a great extent on the driving style and the conditions of use and therefore cannot be expressed in actual kilometres/miles driven on the road. The brake system is designed for optimal braking effect at all speeds and temperatures. Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, humidity and long outdoor stopping periods) can therefore cause the brakes to "squeal". This is normal and will cease after a few brakings. New Brake Pads and/or Brake Discs New brake pads have to be “bed in”, and therefore only attain optimal friction to the brake disc when the vehicle has covered several hundred km/miles. During this first period, the slightly reduced braking ability must be compensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder. This applies whenever the brake pads and/or brake discs are replaced. Brake Overheating Driving on mountain roads with steep slopes or a sports use of the vehicle could overheat the brake system components. In these conditions, parking brake must not be used since the push of the power actuator might not be sufficient to ensure vehicle braking, especially on a slope. Drive normally without braking to allow the brakes to cool down a few minutes before stopping. In this way, the automatic or manual activation of the parking brake will ensure vehicle braking. Brake overheating could also cause “squeals” and “vibrations”. Use of the Engine Breaking-In Today's most modern production methods are designed to provide extremely precise construction and assembly of components. However, moving parts do undergo a settling process, basically in the first hours of vehicle operation. Do not drive keeping at a constant high speed rate for a prolonged time. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, see “Refillings” in section “Features and Specifications”. A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand kilometers/miles of operation. This should be considered as a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of malfunction. Driving Specific Requirements for Gasoline Engines Avoid exceeding 5000 rpm for the first 1000 trip km (620 mi). After starting the vehicle, do not exceed 4000 rpm until the engine has warmed up sufficiently (coolant temperature: 65-70°C /149-158°F). Specific Requirements for Diesel Engine During the first 1500 km (900 mi) avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle. Do not exceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine speed for each gear. In M +/- (Manual) shifting mode, change gear in good time. Do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. Trailer Towing During the first 1000 km (620 mi) of a new vehicle it is advisable not to tow a trailer. This allows to limit the load on the engine and on the other parts of the vehicle. While Driving Never travel with the tachometer indicator approaching the peak rpm, not even downhill. When the tachometer indicator is approaching the peak rpm (red colored zone), take precautions to avoid exceeding that limit. CAUTION! • Under normal conditions, all red Gasoline warning lights on the instrument cluster display should be off. When they come on, they indicate a malfunction. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”. • Continuing to drive when a red warning light is on could cause serious damage to the vehicle and affect its performance. WARNING! Do not travel downhill with the engine off, as the servo brake will no longer function due to the vacuum decrease and thus after a few braking attempts, the system becomes totally inefficient. The Electric Power Steering will not provide assistance. Diesel Ensure proper operation of different devices checking their respective control telltales. 5 Note for Diesel Engine (Diesel only) During driving, if the brake pedal and accelerator are pressed at the same time, the latter no longer responds to the driver’s command and the engine system limits the performance of the car until the normal driving conditions is restored. 277 Driving On-Board Diagnostic System 5 Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current local regulations of various countries. If any of these systems require service, the system will turn on the malfunction indicator light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist which your Service Center will use to service your vehicle. Although the vehicle will still be driveable and not need towing, contact the Service Network for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause further damage to the emissions control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required at the Service Network. • After the problem has been solved, the Service Network personnel will perform specific tests on the test bench for a complete check of the system and, if necessary, also road tests, even on long distances. Regenerate the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Under conditions of exclusive short duration and low speed driving cycles, the engine and exhaust aftertreatment system may never reach the conditions required to remove the trapped Particulate Matter (PM). This conditions is reported by the messages on TFT display. To restore the exhaust aftertreatment system to normal 278 operating condition it is necessary to regenerate the DPF by following the indications reported in the paragraph "TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions" of the chapter "Instrument Cluster" in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on inhibits the regeneration process with possible DPF clogged. • Maserati is not responsible for defects occurring due to not performed DPF regeneration process. Gasoline Particulate Filter (GPF) (for versions/markets where provided) To reduce the emissions of particulate matter, the exhaust system is equipped with a particulate filter optimized for the back pressure and with a high filtration efficiency. This filter is maintenance-free and self-regulating and therefore does not require a regeneration procedure when using the car. This performance made possible by the improvement of the filtering support between engine and silencer. Driving Electronic Cruise Control The electronic Cruise Control (CC) enables the driver to maintain the desired vehicle speed without pressing the accelerator pedal, reducing driving fatigue on highways, especially long trips, as the set speed is automatically maintained. A firm press on the accelerator pedal or the braking pedal will temporarily deactivate the cruise control function. CAUTION! The device can only be switched on at speeds exceeding 30 km/h (18 mph) and it switches off automatically when the brake pedal or the accelerator pedal is pressed. WARNING! The Cruise Control function must only be activated when traffic and the route permit a constant speed to be maintained safely for a sufficiently long distance. Control configuration depends on which driver assist systems are installed to the vehicle. In the standard configuration there is a specific button to enable and disable the CC. Control buttons have the following functions: Standard Configuration ON/OFF button to engage/disengage CC system. Optional Configuration Press ACC Gap button and hold it down for 2 seconds to enable the CC system. Press ACC button to disable the CC system. Shared by All Configurations Standard Configuration In the optional configuration, there is no specific button to enable and disable the CC, since driver uses the ACC control buttons. Controls The electronic Cruise Control controls are located on the left side of the steering wheel. Multifunction switch: • Press up (indication RES +): increase speed, set current speed or resume previously set speed when system is in “cancelled” status; • Pushed (indication CANC): deletes the set speed; • Press down (indication SET -): set speed/decrease speed. 5 NOTE: • The figures only show the Standard Configuration. Optional Configuration (Continued) 279 Driving (Continued) • In order to ensure proper operation, the CC system has been designed to shut down if multiple systems are operated at the same time (example: ACC and FCW). When conditions so allow, the CC system can be reactivated by pushing the CC “ON/OFF” button or the ACC Gap button (in the Optional Configuration) and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. inactivity, the display goes back to last screen. Activation To turn the system on, push the ON/OFF button or the ACC Gap button for 2 seconds (in the Optional Configuration). The white light with below 3 dashes on the instrument cluster display will illuminate. Displayed Information 5 280 CC conditions are displayed on instrument cluster after selecting “Driver Assist” menu (see paragraph “TFT Display: Menus and Settings" under “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). Displayed information depends on system status: ready, set, temporarily cancelled or override. Apart from the pop-up messages at the centre of the display, CC system status is represented by icons at the top left. These icons remain displayed even when you exit the "Driver Assist" screen. The CC screen can be displayed any time driver changes system status or settings. After 5 seconds of CC WARNING! Never leave the electronic Cruise Control system on when not in use. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 30 (18) Engaged/activated 30 (18) Maximum 210 (130) Setting Desired Speed To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time or the ACC button (in the Optional Configuration). The white light will turn off. NOTE: The CC system must be turned off when not in use. Turn on the CC function. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed (in the example: 100 km/h), push downward the multifunction switch (SET -) and release. The green light with below the desired speed will illuminate on the instrument cluster display. Driving Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the switch downward. Pressing the “ON/OFF” button or the ACC Gap button for 2 seconds (in the Optional Configuration) or moving the ignition switch in OFF position erases the set speed memory. Changing Speed Setting Pushing the multifunction switch upward (RES +) or downward (SET -) once, or by holding it down, will enable to increase or decrease the set speed by one unit (1 km/h or 1 mph). If the car is equipped with ADAS Systems, the single press of the multifunction switch will increase or decrease the set speed of 1 km/h or 1 mph; a continuous pressure of the same will increase or decrease the set speed of 10 km/h or 5 mph. Release the switch when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed will be visualized below the green light. Each subsequent tap of the multifunction switch will increase or decrease the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph. Driver Override If the driver presses the accelerator pedal while the CC is on, such as to overtake another vehicle, and exceeds the set speed limit, the system will temporarily deactivate the CC. During the event, the speed indication below the green light will be blinking. Temporary Deactivation A soft tap on the brake pedal, pressing the multifunction switch (CANC), or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will temporarily deactivate the CC without erasing the set speed memory. The white light with below the set speed will appear on the display. 5 When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed and the green light with below the set speed with steady light will be displayed. Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push upward the multifunction switch (RES +) and release. The green light with below the set speed will illuminate on the instrument cluster. Resume can be used at any speed above 30 km/h (18 mph). 281 Driving Using Electronic Cruise Control on Hill The transmission may be downshifted on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. The CC system maintains set speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. On steep slopes it is recommend to drive without CC. 5 WARNING! Electronic Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use electronic Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on winding, icy, snowcovered or slippery roads. Adaptive Cruise Control ACC (optional) ADAS Equipments The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is part of ADAS equipments together with: • Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) • Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) • Highway Assist (HAS) (for versions/markets, where provided) • Traffic Sign Assist (TSA). FCW, HAS and TSA are separate functions that may not be present in the ADAS equipment. For more details see “Forward Collision Warning - FCW”, “Highway Assist - HAS" and "Traffic Sign Assist - TSA" in this section. NOTE: LKA and ABSA are described in the relevant chapters of this section. ACC Preview The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) further increases the drive comfort ensured by the Cruise Control when driving on highways and freeways. Always consider that ACC is not a safety system and is not designed to prevent accidents. 282 The ACC allows driver to keep Cruise Control active in limited or moderate traffic conditions with no need to constantly restore the Cruise Control. The ACC uses a radar sensor, located on the front grille behind the trident, and the camera behind the internal rear-view mirror to detect the presence of a vehicle ahead at a close distance and moving in the same direction. This vehicle, in this chapter, will be indicated as "target vehicle" or "vehicle ahead". NOTE: • If the sensor detects no vehicle ahead, the ACC system will maintain set steady speed. • If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the ACC system automatically kicks in by slightly accelerating or Driving braking (to avoid exceeding the initially set speed) so that the vehicle keeps present distance, trying to adapt to the speed of the detected vehicle ahead. WARNING! • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is designed to increase vehicle driving comfort. It must not be considered as a means replacing the required attention of the driver. The driver is always required to drive carefully. The driver is always required to pay utmost attention to driving conditions (road, traffic, weather) and style (speed, distance from sensed vehicle ahead, brake use). Driver has the full responsibility of the vehicle therefore his attention is crucial to keeping vehicle control in particular when approaching curves, rounds and situations with heavy traffic. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. • In some driving scenarios, the ACC could have detection problems. In such cases, the ACC could kick in late or unexpectedly. The driver must be careful since his/her intervention could be necessary. • It is always driver responsibility to obey to speed limits and to keep minimum legal distance to the preceding vehicle foreseen for the specific country. • ACC system can decelerate only with limited braking, it cannot execute emergency braking. The ACC system: • Does not activate/react in the presence of pedestrians, bicycle and not licensable vehicle in general, incoming traffic from opposite direction and steady objects such as a vehicle stuck in a traffic jam or for a fault. • Is meant for the use on highways and well-build roads, not for city traffic or mountain roads. • May not have enough time to react and/or decelerate sufficienlty on vehicles when lane is changed too fast or the relative speed is too high. In such cases the driver has to react appropriately also without any acoustic/visual warning. • Cannot consider road, traffic and weather conditions and might prove limited when visibility is poor. • Does not always fully recognise complex driving conditions and this could cause wrong assessment of the required safety distance. It is recommended to disable the ACC system in the following instances: • When driving in the fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, slush, heavy traffic and similar complex situations such as for instance highway sections where there are men at work. • When entering a junction lane or a slip road to leave the highway; when driving on narrow, icy, snowy, slippery roads, or on steep up and downhill roads. • The system is designed and calibrate for car with no trailer. • When circumstances do not allow to drive safely at constant speed. 5 Displayed Information Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) condition, as well as the LKA and HAS status, is displayed on instrument cluster after selecting “Driver Assist” menu (see paragraph “TFT Display: Menus and Settings" under “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). 283 Driving 5 Displayed information depends on system status: ready, set, temporarily cancelled or override. Apart from the image at the centre of the display, CC, ACC, HDC, LKA and HAS systems status is represented by icons at the top left and right. These icons remain displayed even when you exiting the "Driver Assist" screen. The vehicle(s) and horizontal bars represent the ACC status as ready (white) or with sensed vehicle ahead (green); the white, grey or yellow lines represent the LKA and HAS systems. The ACC screen can be displayed any time driver changes system status or settings. After 5 seconds of ACC inactivity, the display goes back to last screen. 3. 4. 1. ACC Controls and Activation Conditions The buttons on steering wheel L/H side control ACC operation and the other functions/driver assist systems installed to this vehicle. 284 2. Multifunction control shared by all driver assist functions/systems: - Press up (indication “RES +”): increase speed, set current speed or resume previously set speed when system is in “cancelled” status. - Pushed (indication “CANC”): cancel the function if it was in “set” status, going in a ready condition but remembering the previous set speed. - Press down (indication “SET -”): set speed/decrease speed. Two functions button with ACC activated: - ACC Gap: pressed and released; set the distance to sensed vehicle ahead as horizontal bars (setting cycle starts to 3 bars). - CC On: pressed for 2 seconds activates the CC system. - Press it to switch from CC to ACC. ACC ON/OFF button. If enabled, pressing this button will disable CC. HAS ON/OFF button with ACC set only . See "Highway Assist - HAS" in this section for further details. NOTE: Any change made to tire dimensions affects performance of Adaptive Cruise Control and Front Collision Warning (FCW), if equipped. The ACC is not activated in the following conditions: • When braking. • When parking brake is activated. • When automatic transmission is in P (Park), R (Reverse) or N (Neutral). • When vehicle speed is out of preset speed range. • When brakes are too hot. • When driver door is open. • When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled. • When the road is particularly steep (both uphill and downhill) at low speed. • When ride height is "Off Road 1" or “Off Road 2”, or drive mode is "OFF ROAD". • When drive mode (ESC OFF) is selected. Driving • When the door is opened at low speed. • When there has been an ESC event in the last 5 seconds, or is still active. • When there is an object too close in front of the vehicle. It is possible that more than one system is active at the same time such as ACC and ABSA just to mention some. While activation of ACC and CC at the same time is impossible. When in Driver Assist Page Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 0 (0) Engaged/activated 30 (18) Maximum 210 (130) Activation/Deactivation NOTE: Pictures show status of ACC and LKA systems. Press and release ON/OFF button to activate the ACC. The display will show the white symbol with below 3 dashes will illuminate indicating that system is ready to be set. Push the ON/OFF button a second time and release to turn the system off. A pop-up message is displayed for 2 seconds to indicate that ACC was disabled. 5 Out of Driver Assist Page If a vehicle is detected as being too close, the display will show a message for 5 seconds and trigger a buzzer to warn the driver that current conditions do not allow enabling of the ACC. At any rate, system will remain in the ready status. 285 Driving Driver Override WARNING! Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally activate the system or cause it to go faster than you want. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. Setting the Speed 5 When vehicle reaches required speed, press down and release the multifunction control (SET -). The display will show set speed corresponding to vehicle current one. Speed value will be indicated below the green symbol and above the distance bars, in the center of the display. Remove foot from accelerator pedal and vehicle will continue at set speed. 286 If driver accelerates beyond the set speed or faster than the car would do autonomously, the set speed below the green light will be blinking and the time gap bars will vanish to remember that in this condition the system cannot control the distance between vehicle and sensed vehicle ahead. Vehicle speed will be determined only by the accelerator pedal position. Changing Speed Setting Once speed is set, driver can increase or decrease it by respectively pressing multifunction control up (RES +) or down (SET -). Speed can be increased or decreased in two ways: • Pressing control once, set speed will increase or decrease by one unit corresponding to 1 km/h (1 mph). • Hold the control to increase or decrease set speed by 10 km/h (5 mph) at a time. NOTE: • When pressing the multifunction control up (RES +) or down (SET -), the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle. • When using (SET -) control to decelerate, if the engine braking power does not slow down the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow down the vehicle. • The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two-three seconds the system will not be able to resume driving the car autonomously. As this point it is necessary the intervention of the driver on the multifunction control (press SET- or RES+) or press the accelerator pedal (see “ACC Operation Before and During Stop” in this chapter). • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range. Driving Temporary Deactivation A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the multifunction control (CANC), or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will temporarily deactivate the ACC without erasing the set speed memory. The white light will appear on the display with below the set speed. Conditions for Disabling and Deactivation Besides the cases specified in the previous paragraph, the following conditions will disable the system: • Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) kicks in. • Transmission lever is not in D (Drive). • “CORSA” drive mode (TROFEO version only) is set. • Ride height is set to “Off Road 1” or “Off Road 2”. • The Electronic Stability Control and the Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activate. • Vehicle parking brake is operated. • The driver safety belt is unbuckled at low speed. • The driver door is ajar at low speed. • The driver disabled the ESC using the (ESC Off) button on central console. • The road is too steep both uphill and downhill at low speed. The system is deactivated and set speed is deleted from system memory, if the ACC ON/OFF button is pressed or if ignition device is turned to OFF . Resuming Speed If a speed setting is stored in system memory, press the multifunction control (RES +) up and take foot off the accelerator pedal. The last set speed will be displayed. WARNING! The resume function should be used only when road and traffic conditions allow it. Resuming too a high or too a low speed for current traffic and road conditions could cause a harsh vehicle acceleration or deceleration which could jeopardise driving safety and risk to cause severe accidents. Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the gap to the vehicle ahead. If system does not detect the presence of any vehicles ahead, only the bars referred to set distance will be displayed. When system detects the presence of a vehicle ahead, it is displayed in front of the bars (see example in the figure). 5 When in Driver Assist Page Setting the ACC Gap The specified ACC gap can be set by varying the distance setting among the four possible options identified by the number of horizontal bars: • Maximum (longest) distance: 4 bars. • Long distance: 3 bars (default distance). • Medium distance: 2 bars. • Short distance: 1 bar. Out of Driver Assist Page 287 Driving To increase or decrease the number of bars, corresponding to the gap from vehicle ahead, press and release the distance setting button. 5 288 Each press and release of the button changes the gap starting from 3 bars (default distance) and moving in a sequential way towards the minimum distance: 3→2→1→4→3→2→1→4 and so on. If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the system displays the target vehicle icon before the bars. From that moment, the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed. The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until: • The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed. • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor. • The distance setting is changed. • The driver disables the system. The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary. Any time the ACC system automatically operates the brakes, the stop lights will turn on as if the driver was braking. A Proximity Warning on display will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert will flash on the display and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity. NOTE: The displayed warning is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system is applying the brakes autonomously. Overtake Aid When driving with ACC engaged and following a target vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilises the left turn signal to start overtaking. In locations with left hand drive traffic, overtake aid is active only when passing on the left hand side of the target vehicle. When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this condition, overtake aid is active only when passing on the right side of the target vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilises the right turn signal to start overtaking. In this condition the ACC system will no longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it Driving determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location with left hand drive. ACC Operation Before and During Stop If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two-three seconds the system will not be able to resume driving the car autonomously. In this condition, TFT displays an instruction message pop up for 5 seconds. When the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following a target vehicle, the brakes are released after two or three seconds after the stop and at the same time the system inserts the parking brake. When parking brake engages the ACC deactivates going to ready state. At this point the driver must act on the multifunction control (RES + or SET ) or alternatively on the accelerator pedal. While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver unbuckles the seatbelt or opens the door, the ESC system will activate the EPB. During standstill, ACC system monitors the occupant detection signals: if the driver's seatbelt becomes unbuckled, the ACC system shall be cancelled when the EPB is applied. WARNING! • When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. • During the automatic stopping behind a vehicle in some rare cases it may happen that the system does not recognize the rearmost point of the vehicle ahead but a target under the vehicle ahead (e.g. the back axis of a truck with a high loading edge or a bumper of a vehicle although overhanging load is hanging over the vehicle’s rear). In these cases the system cannot guarantee the appropriate stopping distance leading to collision in the worst case. For this reason the driver has to be attentive and ready to brake during automatic stops. Display Warnings and Maintenance of ACC and FCW Systems Wipe Front Radar Sensor Warning This warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance due to sensor poor or failed signal reception. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC and FCW systems may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice on the radar sensor. In these cases, the system will be disabled. This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC and FCW systems will recover operation after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the front grille, behind the Maserati trident. To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items: • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage it. 5 289 Driving 5 • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment. • If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see your authorised dealer for service. • Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction. When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by simply reactivating it. NOTE: If the radar sensor wipe warning message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at the Service Network. Clean Front Windshield Warning This warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance due to camera poor or failed signal reception. This most often occurs 290 at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC and FCW systems may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass or when driving in bad weather. In these cases, the system will have degraded performance. The ACC and FCW systems will recover operation after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the ACC and FCW systems will return to full functionality. NOTE: If the windshield wiper warning message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forwardfacing camera inspected at the Service Network. Service ACC/FCW Warning If the ACC and FCW systems turn off, and the system displays a service warning, there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits functionality. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, ACC and FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC and FCW again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, contact the Service Network. Driving Precautions while Driving with ACC Towing a Trailer WARNING! Towing a trailer when using ACC can lead to serious system failures which can cause severe accidents. vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality. Moreover, the radar sensor might detect a vehicle on a nearby lane or no longer detect the target vehicle. Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. Using ACC on Hills When driving on steep hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane when vehicle reaches the crest. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited. Lane Changing ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lane and it may not detect the vehicle until it is too late for the driver to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. 5 Turns and Bends When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the 291 Driving situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. 5 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles (like motorcycles) travelling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. Stationary Objects and Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in 292 Radar Device - Regulatory Information The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. Forward Collision Warning - FCW (for versions/ markets where provided) The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with braking action uses the same parts already described for Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for sensing vehicle ahead (hereinafter “target vehicle”) as well as part of the warnings/messages on system condition and activation status. Full performance can be reached only when both the sensing parts have detected a vehicle or, if the car is equipped with Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) system, also a pedestrian. Driving The difference between full and reduced performance is not visible for the driver. Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) System (if equipped) The Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is a sub-system of FCW and it provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings on the instrument cluster display, and may apply automatic braking when it detect a potential frontal collision with a pedestrian. NOTE: The PEB function is only active up to 60 km/h (37 mph). WARNING! Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect every type of potential collision with pedestrian. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death. System Limitations PEB may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: • If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow or fog. • If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections from other vehicles. • If the windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or covered. • During air suspension transitions. FCW Operation The FCW provides audible and visual warnings when a potential collision is detected. Brake jerk and limited braking may also be applied depending on the specific scenario. NOTE: FCW system is not intended for towing: this could lead the system to malfunctions and/or to late reaction. FCW monitors the information from the forward looking radar sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a warning brake jerk. If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow down the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required. When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning messages will be deactivated. 5 (Continued) 293 Driving 5 294 NOTE: • Bad weather conditions, like strong rain, snow, etc., can lead to reduced system performance. Under these conditions relevant objects will not be detected or detected late by the system. • FCW is designed to react in specific situations in typical traffic scenarios with objects in the same lane driving in the same direction, but under certain conditions it can also react on stationary objects in the same lane. It is not designed to react to oncoming traffic or crossing traffic. • The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality. • It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle. The limit of four events applies to the brake jerk too. • The FCW system is intended for onroad use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings. If the vehicle ride height is set to “Off Road 1” or “Off Road 2”, the FCW system will be automatically deactivated. • FCW will automatically deactivated when (ESC OFF) button is pressed (LED light up) and when HDC is active. WARNING! • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death. The driver is always in charge to safely drive and to avoid critical situations not relying on the support of the system. Driver has to keep in mind that the system and therefore its intervention is always subject to the prevailing physical limits. • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended either to warn or to apply any brake aid/brake intervention in case of collisions with pedestrians (if not equipped with PEB sub-system), bicycles and not licensable vehicles in general. Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 0 (0) Engaged/activated 1.8 (1.12) Maximum 250 (155) When the speed is outside the specified limits, the system automatically disables without turning on the corresponding warning light on the instrument cluster. FCW Status The driver can adjust FCW sensitivity or enable/disable the brake jerk with the other emergency brakings by touching "Controls" soft-key on the (Apps) page of MTC+ display. The current setting is indicated beside to the "Forward Collision Warning" soft-key. If you want to change the setting, touch the soft-key on the side to enter FCW page. Driving NOTE: The FCW system setting chosen by the User is kept in memory only for the current ignition cycle. Changing FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking Setting options are described in the following paragraph. When FCW status for some reason changes in off, the corresponding amber warning light on instrument cluster will light on. This warning light informs the driver that FCW is disabled. This warning light will light even when the activation of another driver assistance feature or drive mode (example: (ESC Off)) disables the FCW. The default status of FCW Sensitivity is the “Medium” setting. When also the active braking function (“Forward Collision Warning Active Braking”) setting is on, the system warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away and it applies limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision. Changing the sensitivity status to the “Near” setting, allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” sensitivity setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. “Medium” is the intermediate status between the two described above. NOTE: • The default values shall appear at every new ignition cycle: Sensitivity = “Medium” and Active Braking = on. • FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as objects not in the path of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, on cross traffic vehicles, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed. • The active braking (autonomous braking/braking aid) will not engage in case of potential collision with static object such as guard rails, walls, etc.. • FCW will be disabled like ACC (refer to chapter “Adaptive Cruise Control ACC (optional)” in this section. 5 Changing the active braking status to “Off” prevents the system from providing limited autonomous braking 295 Driving or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision. In this state the system disables the brake jerk. • When in “CORSA” mode (TROFEO version only), the FCW feature is deactivated. Lane Keeping Assist - LKA (optional, with ACC only) Limited Operation and Service Warning Radar Device - Regulatory Information The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. This system was designed especially for highway or freeway driving, to reduce the risk that the vehicle, under particular circumstances, accidentally departs from the lane in use. When this happens, graphic instructions on instrument cluster display together with steering torque application and steering wheel vibration (depending on the distance to the line) warn the driver that the vehicle is going out of the lane initiates a steering manoeuvre to try to prevent the lane exit. To detect lane lines, the system uses the forward-facing camera behind of the rear-view mirror, which is the same one used also by the lighting system to manage automatic high beam. The logic core is in the front radar. LKA system remembers the condition it was in before turning off the vehicle. Refer to “MTC+ "Controls" Screen” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. The messages indicating on display the limited functionality or service at Service Network required are the same as for the ACC system. For further details, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC” in this section. 5 296 NOTE: • The adjustment of the sensor could be affected by strong shocks or light collisions. This could affect the system by reducing the systems performance or could increase the false positive rate. The adjustment of the radar system has to be proved or a new adjustment has to be performed by a Service Network. • The radar system requires specific feature to detect objects. The detection could be disturbed/ reduced by environment influrnces, for example by electrical field or the object itself. Object with small radar reflection properties could not be detected or detected late. NOTE: In case of wet road or raining conditions the function could be Driving disabled by the system in order to minimize the risks. Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 60 (37) Engaged/activated 60 (37) Maximum 180 (112) Customised Settings LKA is configurable by the customer in order to maximize its efficiency based on the driver driving style and his expectation of the system, reducing at the same time the possible invasiveness. Entering "Controls" page on MTC+ display the driver can see the current setting beside the "Lane Keeping Assist" soft-key. Touching “Lane Keeping Assist” softkey can disable or enable the system. Touching the soft-key on the side the driver can change the setting. Driver warnings can be only "Visual" or "Visual & Haptic" (default mode). System response can be set to "Early", "Medium" (default mode) or "Late". System reaction force can be set to "Low", "Medium" (default mode) or "High". Meanings of Settings • "Visual" only: the system will not request any steering torque/vibration to correct the car trajectory. The system will only show on the TFT display when the vehicle is passing the lane. • "Visual & Haptic": the system will apply steering torque when lane departure is detected showing at the same time the proper cluster indication, adding to this steering vibration when the departure is very imminent. When "Visual & Haptic" is selected and of course LKA is enabled then two following menu will be used by the system. • "LKA Sensitivity": it tunes the distance to the lane boundary interested where the system will start to apply steering torque. • "LKA Strength": it tunes the steering torque value increasing or decreasing it to have a stronger or weaker trajectory correction/deviation. 5 297 Driving WARNING! In rare cases, Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) may make an inappropriate steering torque application. LKA may be interrupted at any time counter steering. Lack of attention may lead to serious injury or death. System Availability 5 298 The ADAS systems (LKA, CC, ACC, FCW and HAS) help the driver while driving. These systems can be set and monitored simultaneously on the display, after opening “Driver Assist” menu (see paragraph “TFT Display: Menus and Settings” under “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). LKA is designed for an attentive driver therefore the system is available only when his/her hands are on the steering wheel or with hands off for a very limited amount of time. When the system is enabled it will trigger cluster warning in case at least one hand is not detected on the steering wheel. The torque application as well as the vibration are suppressed/inhibited in case of: high driver torque in the steering wheel, high lateral acceleration, trailer connected to the proper control module, hands not on the steering wheel detected for more than a certain time. High dynamic behaviours, driving on the lane boundary, off course will prevent the function from working. FCW braking and stability system interventions (ESC, ABS) will also prevent the system from operating. Changing lane results in system inhibition for a certain time. In addition, the road must respect some characteristics such as minimummaximum width, lane clearly defined by two lane boundaries and only in limited cases for a limited time at least one. NOTE: • In case of wet road or raining conditions the function could be disabled by the system in order to minimize the risks. • With lane boundaries it is mainly referred to painted lines delimiters, nevertheless the system in good conditions might properly recognise as valid lane boundaries also other types (for example road edges, curbs, etc..). Being this function used to prevent unintentional lane change/lane drift, it will be temporary suppressed/ inhibited by a turn indicator activation, therefore, graphic warning, steering torque application and vibration will be terminated. In this condition in case of a vehicle detected by the Blind Spot Assist (BSA) system in the covered area on the proper side, there can be the transition from LKA to Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) (if this latter is on and properly configured). Function Description and Operating Mode The function intent is to prevent the lane departure by warning the driver through indication on the cluster and if set applying steering torque and vibration. Whenever the system is enable there will be graphic on the dedicated screen in the driver assist page and for the others it will be available in the left top corner of the cluster screen. The graphic which intent is to represent at the glance the system knowledge of the lane in front of the car, the system suppression status and warning. For this a simple colour code has been adopted for each line (of the two presented): • Both grey lines means system enable, not able to operate (suppression Driving condition present or lane detection system not able to estimate properly the lane); • Left/right grey line: the lane detection system is not able to detect that specific lane boundary; • Yellow line: there is a steering torque intervention in progress that tries to prevent a departure on that side, in this situation the warning should increase the driver attention requiring him to properly handle the situation; • Yellow flashing line: the graphic is shown whenever the system detects a very imminent lane departure, at this can be added torque and steering vibration if configured by the customer. The white lines (one or both) indicates that the corresponding lane boundary is detected and the system is capable to intervene on it. An example of this screen, with only LKA system activated and with LKA and ACC systems activated, can be found in the following figures: A: with only LKA system activated, steering torque in progress to correct the trajectory towards the lane center; B: with LKA and ACC systems activated, car is crossing the lane boundary, steering torque and vibration if configured are in progress when this graphic is shown. 5 Out of Driver Assist Page When in Driver Assist Page The icons that represent the status of the ADAS systems remain displayed even when you exit the “Driver Assist” screen. System Limitations Because of physical limits the system to properly operate needs good visibility (it might not work or not properly operate in case of heavy rain, snow, 299 Driving wet roads, fog, direct sun on the camera, etc.). NOTE: The sensors are not able to detect the presence of the hands on the steering wheel areas covered in wood, plastic bezels or carbon inserts (where present). 5 Sharp turns, slopes and change in slopes, poor lane boundaries, as well as construction areas and all the scenario described in this paragraph may challenge the system, therefore be always ready to prevent any unexpected behaviour of the car. Damaged front bumper, windshield replaced without proper technical intervention may also lead to system malfunction or system unavailability. Other conditions such as fault, but not explicitly indicated here may also prevent/interrupt the system intervention. WARNING! If the driver fail to adapt his/her driving style, Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. 300 Active LKA is only an aid. Driver is always responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. System in Fault When the LKA cannot properly operate due to a fault of its components or because the windshield in front of the forward facing camera is dirty, the amber light and/or the corresponding message will be displayed. If message suggestion does not allow fixing the fault, avoid using the system and have the vehicle inspected at the Service Network. Radar Device - Regulatory Information The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. Driving Blind Spot Assist - BSA (optional, without ACC) and enters standby mode when the transmission is in (P) Park. BSA System Operation The Blind Spot Assist (BSA) system uses two radar-based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (cars, lorries, motorbikes, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. The example shown in the figure highlights the blind spots on either side of the vehicle when oncoming traffic is approaching from behind. When the vehicle is started, the BSA warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational and on. The BSA system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 10 km/h (6 mph) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. WARNING! • The BSA system does NOT alert the The BSA detection zone shown in figure covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle (approximately 3.3 m or 11 ft). The blind spot area extends from immediately behind the exterior rear-view mirrors up to about 7 m (23 ft) behind the rear bumper. The BSA system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones. • The BSA might alert the driver too late especially in case of rapidly approaching vehicles. WARNING! Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist (BSA). BSA does not detect/react to the following: • Overtaking vehicles close on the side, placing them in the blind spot area. As a result, BSA may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. • Always pay attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. 5 NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not (Continued) 301 Driving (Continued) damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle at the Service Network to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSA not operating to specification. 5 302 The area on the rear bumper fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSA system can function properly. Do not cover or block the area of the rear bumper fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, spoilers, bicycle racks, etc.). The BSA system notifies the driver of vehicles or objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSA warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume (if the radio is on). Refer to “BSA and RCP Setting” in this chapter for further information. The BSA system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, overtaking traffic) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSA system will issue an alert whenever a vehicle enters any one detection zone as outlined below. Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 10 (6) Engaged/activated 10 (6) Maximum – (–) Entering from the Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle. Entering from the Rear The alert will turn on when the vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of more than 43 km/h (27 mph). Overtaking Traffic The figures show the vehicle approaching (A) and passing (O) another vehicle in the overtaking lane. If you pass another vehicle slowly, the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 2 seconds, the BSA warning light in the outside mirror will illuminate after 1.5 seconds. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater, the warning light will not illuminate. Driving opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes. Other Cases The BSA system is not designed to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage heaps, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service. • • • • WARNING! The BSA system is only an aid to help detect vehicles in the blind spot zones. The BSA system is not designed to detect pedestrians, cyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSA system, always check your vehicle’s outside and rear-view mirrors for any vehicles approaching from behind or overtaking. Use your turn signal before changing lanes. RCP - Rear Cross Path (optional) The BSA system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the drivers when gear in reverse of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. The RCP system monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle. Using sensors located on either side of the rear bumper, it detects any vehicles or objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 km/h to 3 km/h (1 to 2 mph) to a maximum of approximately 16 km/h (10 mph), such as in parking lot situations. NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. 5 Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is moderately exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic. If an oncoming vehicle is detected, the RCP system will alert the driver using both the visual and audible alarms. If the radio is on, it will also reduce the radio volume. 303 Driving BSA in Visual and Acoustic Mode When operating in “Visual & Acoustic” mode, the BSA system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected vehicle or object. 5 WARNING! RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. More specifically, it is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. BSA and RCP Setting Setting modes can be selected from the MTC+ System. Touch “Controls” soft-key and then “Blind Spot Assist” soft-key to enter the setting page. 304 Refer to chapter “MTC+ “Controls” Screen” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. BSA in Visual Mode When operating in “Visual” mode, the BSA system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror when it detects a vehicle or an object in the detection areas monitored by its sensors: depending on the status of the relative turn indicator, the warning light can be fixed or flashing. However, when the system is operating in RCP mode, it will respond with both visual and audible alerts when an oncoming vehicle or an object approaching the rear end side of the vehicle is detected. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted (if the radio is on). If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded: in the same moment the warning light will start flashing. Whenever a turn signal and detected vehicle or object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert, the radio volume will be reduced (if the radio is on). Driving NOTE: If the hazard flashers are on, the BSA system will issue the appropriate visual alert only. When the system is in RCP mode, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected vehicle or object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio (if on) is also muted. Right/left turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP status always requests the chime. Blind Spot Assist Off When this function is turned off from the MTC+, there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSA or RCP subsystems. vehicle enters a radio quite zone (example the areas around radio telescopes). The warning light on the outside rearview mirrors will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone. System in Faulty The BSA system cannot properly operate due to a fault of its components, or because the area on the rear bumper fascia where the radar sensors are located is dirty. In these cases the amber warning light and the related message will be displayed on the instrument cluster. Radar Device - Regulatory Information The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. 5 NOTE: The BSA system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started, the previously-stored mode will be recalled and used. System Temporarily Unavailable The blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the instrument cluster display will show the message “Blind Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable” when the In these cases avoid using the system and have the vehicle inspected at the Service Network. 305 Driving Active Blind Spot Assist ABSA (optional, with ACC only) 5 306 ABSA system is only available on vehicles equipped with ACC system and represents an addition to the BSA previously described (see chapter "Blind Spot Assist - BSA" of this section). ABSA adds to the BSA the possibility in certain circumstances to avoid and or mitigate side collisions with vehicles proceeding in the adjacent lanes by changing the car trajectory in order to try to keep it inside the detected/ estimated lane. A steering wheel vibration is used as further feedback to warn the driver that the lane change is not safe. The main logic core is the front radar, whereas the sense inputs are the radars on the rear bumper fascia used for sensing the presence of vehicle in the blind spot areas and the forward facing camera placed behind the internal rear-view mirror that instead is used for lane detection and estimation. ABSA is designed to help the driver to avoid mitigate a collision. Torque and vibration application is however available in the 60 - 180 km/h (37 112 mph) speed interval. All the speed thresholds related to the BSA remain still valid, since ABSA as mentioned is BSA extension. ABSA is intended as a “hands-on” function meaning that the driver is required to stay engaged in the driving all the time with his/her hands on the steering wheel, in case hands are not on the steering wheel for a certain time there cannot be any steering torque application vibration included. Highly dynamic behaviours, driving on the lane boundary, off course will prevent the function from working. FCW braking and stability system interventions (ESC, ABS) will also prevent the system from operating. Changing lane results in system inhibition for a certain time. In addition the road must respect some characteristics such as minimummaximum width, lane clearly defined by two lane boundaries and only in limited case for a limited time at least one. System Availability NOTE: • In case of wet road or raining conditions the function could be disabled by the system in order to minimize the risks. • With lane boundaries it is mainly referred to painted lines delimiters, nevertheless the system in good conditions might properly recognise as valid lane boundaries also other types (for example road edges, curbs, etc..). ABSA is designed for an attentive driver therefore the system is available only when his/her hands are on the steering wheel or with hands off for a very limited amount of time. When the system is enabled, it will trigger cluster warning in case at least one hand is not detected on the steering wheel. The torque application as well as the vibration are suppressed/inhibited in case of: high driver torque in the steering wheel, high lateral acceleration, trailer connected to the proper control module, hands not on the steering wheel detected for more than a certain time. Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 60 (37) Driving Speed km/h (mph) Engaged/activated 60 (37) Maximum 180 (112) System Limitation Because of physical limits the system to properly operate needs good visibility (it might not work or not properly operate in case of heavy rain, snow, wet roads, fog, direct sun on the camera, dirty windshield, low illumination etc.) Sharp turns, slopes and change in slopes, poor lane boundaries, as well as construction areas and all the scenarios described in this paragraph may challenge the system, therefore be always ready to prevent any unexpected behaviour of the car. Damaged front bumper, windshield replaced without proper technical intervention may also lead to system malfunction or system unavailability. Other conditions such as faults, but not explicitly indicated here may also prevent/interrupt the system intervention. ABSA Setting ABSA is configurable by the customer in order to maximize its efficiency based on the driver driving style and his/her expectation of the system, reducing at the same time the possible invasiveness. Setting modes can be selected from the MTC+ System (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls" for further information). Touch "Controls" soft-key on (Apps) page to display the current status of the ABSA system, if it was in the on state. System strength can be set to "Low", "Medium" (default mode) or "High". NOTE: The ABSA system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started, the previously-stored mode will be recalled and used. To change status, touch the "Active Blind Spot Assist" soft-key. To change the system setting, touch the soft-key on the side. Driver warnings can be only "Visual", "Visual & Acoustic" (default mode) or "Visual & Haptic". System sensitivity can be set to “Early”, “Medium” (default mode) or “Late”. 5 Meanings of Settings When "Visual & Haptic" is selected and of course ABSA is enabled, then two following menus will be used by the system. • ABSA “Sensitivity": it tunes the distance to the lane boundary concerned where the system will start to apply steering torque. • ABSA “Strength": it tunes the steering torque value increasing or decreasing it to have a stronger or weaker trajectory correction/ deviation. 307 Driving 5 Active Blind Spot Assist in "Visual & Haptic" Mode When the system is on and configured “Visual & Haptic” then the real ABSA is enabled because to the conventional visual warnings is added the steering torque and vibration. When operating in this mode, the system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate outside rear-view mirror when it detects a vehicle or an object in the detection areas monitored by its sensors. In case of turn indicator activation on the appropriate side, the system will react with a torque on the steering wheel to try to prevent the lane change and therefore to avoid/mitigate the collision. The torque on the steering is applied when the car is very close to the lane boundary as a further feedback to warn the driver of the unsafe manoeuvre. NOTE: The steering torque is not supplied if the system is not able to estimate a lane and if the turn indicator from the appropriate side is not inserted. 308 WARNING! • Risk of accident despite steering • • • • • torque application of Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA). A course-correcting steering torque application cannot always prevent a collision. The driver is always required to steer, brake or accelerate himself, especially if ABSA warns or makes a course correcting steer intervention. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate steering torque application. This application may be interrupted at any time by counter steering. Lack of attention may lead to serious injury or death. RCP - Rear Cross Path Operation RCP operation (if equipped) is the same as described in chapter "Blind Spot Assist - BSA". When ABSA is turned off from MTC+ "Controls" page, there will be no visual or audible alerts from RCP subsystem. When ABSA is turned on with any setting, RCP subsystem shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected vehicle or object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio (if on) is also muted. Right/left turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP status always requests the chime. System Temporarily Unavailable The blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the instrument cluster display will show the message “Blind Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable” when the vehicle enters a radio quite zone (example the areas around radio telescopes). The warning light on the outside rearview mirrors will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone. System in Faulty The ABSA system cannot properly operate due to a fault of its components, or because the area on windshield where the forward-facing camera is located or on the rear bumper fascia where the radar sensors are located is dirty. In these cases the Driving amber warning light and the related message will be displayed on the instrument cluster. In these cases avoid using the system and have the vehicle inspected at the Service Network. Radar Device - Regulatory Information Highway Assist – HAS (for versions/markets where provided, with ACC only) The Highway Assist (HAS) is a level 2 Autonomy system (in reference to NHTSA standards) that is designed to aid the driver in the steering, acceleration, and braking functions of the vehicle. HAS is designed to only function on highways or limited access freeways. HAS centres the vehicle by controlling the EPS system based off of lane line information from the forward-facing camera and data from the front radar sensor. The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. HAS combines ACC and LKA to manage the steering and speed of the vehicle under specific conditions. The conditions to engage HAS are listed in the next paragraph. If a lane line cross is imminent, the steering wheel will vibrate and a graphic will display on the instrument cluster. WARNING! • In case the vehicle approaches a curve that is too tight in relation to the current speed the system will disengage, therefore the driver must be prepared to take over control of the vehicle immediately at any time. To avoid this situation it is important that the vehicle speed is not set higher than the current speed limit of the road. • Highway Assist (HAS) is a hands-on feature! You must keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times. The HAS system will disengage and ACC will cancel if your hands are removed from the steering wheels for a set amount of time. • HAS is intended for use only on highways or limited access freeways with a fully attentive driver. When using HAS, hold the steering wheel and be aware of surrounding traffic and road conditions. Always be prepared to immediately take over control of the vehicle from the HAS system. Failure to follow these 5 309 Driving 5 310 instructions could result in serious injury or death. • The following list does not fully represent all situations in which HAS may not function as intended. Do NOT solely rely on the HAS system to control the vehicle. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert and safely control the vehicle at all times. • If the windshield is replaced, you must have the forward-facing camera remounted and aligned by a Centre of the Service Network. HAS Operation Many factors can impact the performance of HAS causing the system to be unable to function as intended. These include (but are not limited to): • Narrow, winding or curvy roads. • Poor visibility (due to heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.). • Bright light (oncoming headlights or direct sunlight) or shadows. • Damage or obstruction caused by mud, ice, snow, etc. • A damaged or misaligned bumper. • Interference from other equipment that generates electromagnetic waves. • Wet roads, roads covered or partially covered by snow. • Construction zones. The conditions for HAS to engage are as follows: • HAS must be turned on or enabled. With ACC set (see “Adaptive Cruise Crontrol – ACC” in this section), HAS system activates by simply pressing the button on the steering wheel. Once the conditions are met, HAS will engage. CAUTION! The Highway Assist (HAS) system may take up to 5 seconds to engage once all conditions are met. NOTE: In case of wet road or raining conditions the function could be disabled by the system in order to minimize the risks. • The vehicle must be on the highway or limited access freeway. • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be engaged. • Left and right visible lane lines. • Vehicle speed must be between 0 and 145 km/h (0 to 90 mph). • No faults in the forward facing camera, radar, EPS, or MTC+. • Lane width between 2.8 and 4.2 m (3 to 4.6 yd). • Turn signal not activated. • No faults related to this system. Speed Range of Use Speed km/h (mph) Minimum 0 (0) Engaged/activated (with ACC engaged) 0 (0) Engaged/activated (with ACC not engaged) 30 (18) Maximum 145 (90) • If set above the maximum speed , HAS will not function after the vehicle speed will reach the maximum speed. • If set below the maximum speed and the ACC target speed is increased, HAS will function up to the maximum speed and then the system will turn off automatically. • When the ACC target speed is reduce and speed is lower than the maximum speed , the system will start automatically. • If the ACC target speed is set under the maximum speed , HAS is active and vehicle speed increases above the maximum speed due to slope, HAS will continue to function. Driving HAS Monitoring on Instrument Cluster HAS and the other ADAS systems conditions can be monitored on instrument cluster display by accessing the “Driver Assist” page with the buttons on the steering wheel (see “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). The symbol in grey indicates that the HAS system is active, but not engaged and is shown at the centre of the TFT display when the “Driver Assist” page is displayed. When exiting the "Driver Assist" page, on TFT display top left corner, the grey symbol will appear in the multiple light of active ADAS systems. disabled by pressing the button on the steering wheel. Out of Driver Assist Page In addition to these symbols, on the TFT top and bottom edge a coloured glow may appear (further referred to as "attention level colour"). Attention level colour together with the outline of the symbol represent a further indication of the system status. When in Driver Assist Page When in Driver Assist Page When exiting the “Driver Assist” page, the attention level colour will always be displayed until the system is Out of Driver Assist Page The HAS system uses sensors in the steering wheel outer crown to detect if the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel. If the driver’s hands are not detected on the steering wheel, the instrument cluster will display a series of warnings to alert the driver to return their hands to the steering wheel. There will also be audible chimes. After a set amount of time, HAS will cancel if the driver’s hands are not returned to the steering wheel. When the system does not sense the hands on the steering wheel for a few seconds (3 – 5 seconds) or more (up to 10 seconds), it tries to draw the attention of the driver by showing, even when the display is not in the 5 311 Driving "Driver Assist" page, the symbol with the figure of the hands in the centre of the display. According to such time frames, the system will change the attention level colour, silence the audio in the vehicle (if it is active) and emit audible chimes to invite the driver to take the control of the vehicle again. This is the only way to reengage the system. Hands Detection on Steering Wheel 5 The sensors in the steering wheel outer crown are able to detect the presence of the hands on the steering wheel. In order to be able to use the HAS system, place your hands around the steering wheel outer crown. driver releases his/her grip from the steering wheel up to 3 seconds. Out of Driver Assist Page The yellow attention level colour appears when the driver removes his/her hands from the steering wheel for 3 to 5 seconds and the symbol with the figure of the hands will occupy the whole central area of the display. The red attention level colour appears when the driver releases his/her grip from the steering wheel for 5 and up to 10 seconds: in this case a single audible chime is repeated until he/she will take the control of the vehicle again. NOTE: The sensors are not able to detect the presence of the hands on the steering wheel areas covered in wood, plastic bezels or carbon inserts (where present). HAS is deactivated if the steering wheel is no longer being touched. System Statuses The active status of the HAS system is indicated by the green attention level colour which is maintained even if the 312 When in Driver Assist Page When in Driver Assist Page Driving • Enter an Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) event (See chapter "Forward Collision Warning - FCW" in this section). • Turn signal activated. System Cancellation Out of Driver Assist Page The red attention level colour remains even when the steering wheel is released for more than 8 to 10 seconds. In this case, if you are traveling at a speed above 40 km/h (25 mph) a sequences of 3 audible chimes will be emitted after 8 seconds and a message will inform the driver that the HAS system has been disengaged, inviting him/her to grip the steering wheel again. The same will happen after 10 seconds if you travel at a speed below 40 km/h (25 mph). Then the symbol on TFT display will become grey. If the driver keeps his/her hands away from the steering wheel (for more than 8 to 10 seconds), also the ACC system is deactivated ( white ACC symbol on the display) and will have to be reset. The aid of LKA system will be disabled as well. In these cases the display will not show the attention level colour anymore and the vehicle will be controlled by the driver only. HAS Disengage To disengage HAS you can do any of the following actions: • Press the HAS enable button on the steering wheel. • Begin steering manually. • Press brake pedal. • Turn off ACC. • Unbuckle the driver’s seat belt. • Press ACC Gap button for two seconds to enable CC system. • Shift out of the (D) Drive gear. The HAS system will cancel (without driver intervention) if either of the following actions occur: • Curve that is too tight. • When leaving the grip of the hands on the steering wheel. • Vehicle exits the highway or limited access freeway. • Lane line markers aren’t detected by the forward facing camera. • Any ADAS system faults. • ACC cancellation. • Vehicle speed exceeds the maximum limit. • Lateral accelerations exceeds the limits. NOTE: When HAS cancels, the will turn red then grey. 5 symbol System Limitations HAS is unable to guide the vehicle when the following conditions occur. • Lane markings are not clear or visibility is poor (i.e. heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.). 313 Driving • Obstructed, covered or damaged forward-facing camera or sensor. • When driving on hills or sharp curves. • When approaching toll booths. • When the highway entrance or exit is wider than 6 meters (20 ft). • Bright light (ex. direct sunlight or glare) facing the forward camera. 5 WARNING! Many unforeseen conditions can occur that can affect the performance of Highway Assist (HAS). Always keep this in mind and drive attentively. Be prepared to take over control of the vehicle immediately at any time. Radar Device - Regulatory Information The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. Traffic Sign Assist – TSA (for versions/markets where provided) TSA detects traffic signs through the use of a forward-facing digital camera mounted on windshield, behind the rear-view mirror and assists the driver by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the instrument cluster. The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in snow conditions). TSA also uses the data of the navigation system, in order to provide information to the driver in all cases in which the camera is not able to detect the traffic signs that are present on the road where the car is travelling. Some examples of these are: due to low visibility, light reflection, damaged traffic signs, traffic signs in wrong position like rotated or fallen poles. NOTE: • Overtaking restriction sign will be displayed only in markets where this is allowed. • TSA provides a visual warning to the driver when he/she unintentionally reaches the maximum speed limit 314 allowed or when it exceeds the set “Sensitivity” value. • The performance of TSA depends on the update degree of navigation system’s maps. Customised Settings TSA is configurable by the customer regarding the display mode on the instrument cluster and the warning sensitivity. Entering "Controls" page on MTC+ display the driver can see the current setting beside the "Traffic Sign Assist" soft-key. Touching “Traffic Sign Assist” soft-key can disable or enable the system. Touching the soft-key on the side the driver can change the setting. The display of the traffic signs can be blinking or static. Driving The system can be set to display the traffic signs when the speed of the vehicle is equal to the speed limit allowed, or when it is higher than 5 or 10 km/h (5 or 10 mph). Signs Monitoring on Instrument Cluster If TSA feature is set and a sign or a speed limit is detected, the related icons are displayed in the upper area of the instrument cluster beside of the main menu number and scroll arrows. The display area is divided in three different sectors: 1 Conditioned speed limit area. 2 Unconditioned speed limit area. 3 Overtaking restriction area. NOTE: Overtaking restriction sign will be displayed only in markets where this is allowed. If “Blinking On” warning mode is set, when the visual warning is provided only the unconditioned speed limit (in sector 2 ) will start blinking when the vehicle speed exceeds to the detected unconditioned speed limit (“+0 km/h” or “+0 mph” option) or when it exceeds the set sensitivity value (“+5 km/h” - “+5 mph” or “+10 km/h” “+10 mph” options). If the vehicle speed stays above the unconditioned speed limit for several seconds the unconditioned speed limit sign will stop blinking because the manoeuvre is evaluated as intentional. If the TSA is not able to determine any kind of valid speed limit neither from camera nor from digital maps the following image will be shown in sector 2 . Since TSA also uses the data provided by the navigation system, it can update the sector 2 of the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs: • When the vehicle changes road. • Highway enter/exit. • Urban area stored in the digital map enter/exit. 5 System Limitations TSA may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: • If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow or fog. • If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections from other vehicles. • If the windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or covered. • If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt or snow, or because 315 Driving they are covered or because of insufficient lighting. • If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. • If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes. • When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. 5 Tires - General Information Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for safety and best performance of your vehicle. The tire pressure monitoring system “TPMS” setup on the vehicle (see “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in this section) may alert the driver about insufficient tire pressure even though the driver is responsible for checking regularly the tire pressure. Radial tires fitted on the vehicle may look properly inflated even when they actually are under inflated. Do not make a visual judgment when determining proper inflation. Three primary driving aspects are affected by improper tire pressure: Safety WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire overheating and failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the 316 • • • • road and potholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Economy Improper inflation pressures may cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Ride comfort and vehicle stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Driving Tire Pressure Checkup The proper cold tire inflation pressure is indicated on the table “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section “Features and Specifications”. Inflation pressure specified on the table always refers to “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1.6 km (1 mi) after a three hour period. Check tire pressures more often in case of significant outside temperature changes, as tire pressure varies according to temperature changes. The pressure should be checked and if necessary adjusted; tire wear and overall conditions should also be checked monthly. Tire pressures change by approximately 0.07 bar per 7°C of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in winter. Example: If garage temperature = 20°C and the outside temperature = 0°C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 0.21 bar for every 7°C for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 0.13 to 0.4 bar during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build-up or your tire pressure will be too low. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem and the TPMS sensor connected to it. Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you determine when your tires should be replaced. These indicators are moulded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1,6 mm (0.06 in) or 4 mm (0.16 in) for winter or all-season tires. When the tread is worn to one of the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. WARNING! The wet performance (aquaplaning resistance) will decrease proportionally to the thickness of the tread. Tires Durability The service life of a tire depends on various factors including, but not limited to: • driving style; • tire pressure; • distance driven. WARNING! Tires and the spare tire (if equipped) should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. 5 Replacement Tires NOTE: In order to maintain high performance and safety level under all driving conditions, Maserati strongly recommends to use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. For the size designation of your tire see table “Wheels” in section “Features and Specifications”. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. 317 Driving NOTE: Maserati recommends Maserati Genuine Tires marked with “MGT” logo specifically designed for its models. 5 It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel assembly, make sure that the wheel’s specifications (valve, TPMS sensor and tire) match those of the original wheels. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. The Service Network is available to provide suggestions as to the types of tires most suited to the use foreseen by the Customer. • • • • WARNING! • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in altered steering, handling, and braking operations of the vehicle. 318 This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings appointed for your vehicle. Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. Always check the maximum speed rating on the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tires. Risk of accident and serious personal injury due to excessive speed. Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in tire failure and loss of vehicle control. CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and tachometer readings. Tire Types Before mounting any type of tire, contact the Service Network to receive the technical information necessary to advise you on wheel and tire compatibility. As to the type of tires to use, inflation pressures and tires specifications, carefully follow the indications as reported in the "Technical Data" and "Tire Inflation Pressure" chapters in section "Features and Specifications". Summer Tires Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 5 °C (40 °F) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact the Service Network. Driving Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/ snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. WARNING! The summer tires profile and rubber mixture are optimised for wet and dry driving conditions. Summer tires may not prove favourable for snow conditions: install snow tires before driving in such conditions to avoid risk of loss of control and damage to the vehicle as well as serious personal injury. All Season Tires (if equipped) All season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, summer, fall, and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S (Mud + Snow), M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow Tires (if equipped) Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 120 km/h (75 mph). For speeds above 120 km/h (75 mph) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. traction on compacted snow in heavy snow conditions. They should not be used in offroad conditions where there is no compacted snow. Maserati tested and recommends to use traction devices with air suspension system in “Off Road 1” or “Off Road 2” ride height in order to increase wheel clearance. In any case do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph). Maserati tested, approved and recommends traction devices “Thule XG-12 tg 265” (for rear 265/50 ZR19 tires) and “Thule K-SUMMIT XXL tg K67” (for rear 295/45 ZR 19 tires). Please, contact your Service for further information. The snow chains may be fitted only on rear wheel tires. Check the snow chain tension after driving for a distance of about 50 m (55 yd) with the chains fitted. With the snow chains fitted, it is advisable to deactivate the ESC system (see chapter “Drive Mode” in this section). 5 Snow Chains Maserati approved traction devices (or snow chains) may be used to improve 319 Driving CAUTION! • The use of non-recommended snow chains may damage the vehicle. • Broken snow chains can cause 5 serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate snow chain breakage. Replace the damaged parts of the snow chain before further use. • Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph). • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. • Avoid holes in the road, do not drive over steps or sidewalks and do not drive on long stretches without snow. This will prevent damage to the vehicle and the roadbed. NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with all information about the Maserati Snow Chains, available in the "Genuine Accessories" range. Pneumatic Suspension Mode for Wheel Change The pneumatic suspension system is equipped with a specific mode to be used when vehicle must be lifted to change one or several wheels/tires. 320 This mode temporarily disables pneumatic suspension automatic levelling. To activate this mode, scroll user settings on MTC+ and select “Wheel Replacement Mode” in submenu “Suspension”. The tick next to selected item will indicate that this mode is active and system is disabled (for further details, refer to chapter “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). After servicing, restore original conditions and eliminate the tick next to selected mode: in this way the pneumatic suspension system will go back to normal operation. Compact Spare Tire (if provided) The limited-use spare tire, or compact spare tire, is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label indicating the driving speed limitations to comply with when using the spare tire. Inflate the spare tire to the cold inflation pressure listed on the table “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section “Features and Specifications”. Mounting the spare tire affects vehicle handling. Replace (or repair) as soon as possible the original equipment tire and reinstall it on the vehicle. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at a time. WARNING! With these compact spare tires, do not drive at more than 80 km/h (50 mph). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. Driving Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure according to the vehicle recommended cold pressure indicated on the table “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section “Features and Specifications” and on the label applied on the driver's side rear door pillar (for versions/markets, where provided). Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure moulded into the tire sidewall. Check “Tires – General Information” in section “Driving” for information on how to properly inflate the tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there is no adjustment required when this occurs. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss of the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition persists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is equal or above the recommended cold inflation pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold inflation pressure in order for the TPMS light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the TPMS light will turn off once the system acquires the correct tire pressure. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 24 km/h (15 mph) in order for the TPMS to acquire and process the updated setting. WARNING! The TPMS warns the driver that the tire pressure has decreased. This warning does not exempt the driver from periodically checking the tires and from complying with the prescribed tire pressure levels. 5 CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimised for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may occur when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use 321 Driving aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. • The system can temporarily experience radio-electric interference emitted by devices using similar frequencies. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem and damage the TPMS internal sensor. 5 322 NOTE: • Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and may lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS light . • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire. Premium System The TPMS system uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. The TPMS consists of the following components: • receiver module; • four TPMS sensors; • various TPMS messages, which display on the instrument cluster; • warning light . Tire Pressure Low Warning The TPMS light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an acoustic signal will notify that tire pressure is low in one or more of the four tires. The instrument cluster will also display a screenshot reporting the pressure values of each tire with flashing low pressure value. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tire/s with the low pressure (the one/s flashing in the instrument cluster graphic) to the recommended cold pressure inflation value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressure value, the system will Driving automatically update, the graphic display in the instrument cluster will stop flashing, and the TPMS light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes at a speed between 24 km/h (15 mph) and 130 km/h (80 mph) in order for the TPMS to acquire and process the updated information. In case of replacement of wheel rims and/or the relative valve with TPMS sensor, or if the wheel arrangement is changed, when reusing the vehicle it may be necessary to wait 20 minutes for the TPMS to acquire and process the new components and/or the new configuration. Tire Pressure System Fault If a system fault is detected, the TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds and then remain lit followed by a beeping sound. Therewith, the instrument cluster will display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is ineffective. If the ignition switch is cycled, the sequence will repeat, in case the system fault still persists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS light will no longer flash, and the "Service Tire Pressure System" message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: • Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors. • Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals. • Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. • Using tire chains on the vehicle. • Using wheels/tires not endowed with TPMS sensors. The instrument cluster will also display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the "Service Tire Pressure System" message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPMS sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as the "Service Tire Pressure System" message is displayed. 5 Vehicles with Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure of the compact spare tire. If you replace a pneumatic having pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, with the compact spare tire, on the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS light will illuminate 323 Driving followed by a beeping sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a flashing pressure value corresponding to the compact tire position. 5 324 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 24 km/h (15 mph), the TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds and then remain lit. The instrument cluster will then display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. Each subsequent ignition switch cycle will be followed by a beeping sound, the TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds and then remain lit. The instrument cluster will then display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum of five seconds and subsequently displays dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. Once you repair, replace or reinstall a tire with the compact spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically. The TPMS light will turn OFF and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 24 km/h (15 mph) in order for the TPMS to acquire and process the updated information. TPMS Deactivation The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four tire rims with wheel and tire assemblies not using of TPMS sensors, such as winter wheel and tire assemblies. After replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not endowed with Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 24 km/h (15 mph). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire Pressure System” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the “Service Tire Pressure System” message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values. To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires endowed with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 24 km/h (15 mph). The Driving TPMS will chime, the TPMS light will flash for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will then display the “Service Tire Pressure System” message. The instrument cluster will also display pressure values in place of the dashes (--). On the next ignition switch cycle the “Service Tire Pressure System” message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists. Radio Frequency Transmitter Regulatory Information The “Regulatory Information” for all the radio frequency and radar devices can be consulted by accessing the section “Services” on the website www.maserati.com. Fuel Requirements Requirements of Gasoline The engines are designed to meet all environmental regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 95. For vehicle top performance, use unleaded gasoline with no less than 98 minimum octane rating. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage, and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle at the Service Network. Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. Maserati recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available. Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasoline that contain detergents, anti-corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasoline that have these additives may help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. CAUTION! Maserati strongly recommends the • use of Premium unleaded fuel ONLY. Use of lesser grade fuel (other than Premium) will lead to reduced engine performance, and poor fuel economy and can lead to the Malfunction Indicator Light illuminating on the instrument cluster. Continued use of lesser grade fuel (other than Premium fuel) can lead to engine misfire problems and possible catalytic converter damage. • The anti-pollution devices of the vehicle require unleaded fuel to be used at all times. Under no circumstance, not even in an emergency, should leaded fuel be supplied to the fuel tank, not even 5 325 Driving a minimum quantity. This would irreparably damage the catalytic converters. An inefficient catalytic converter results in noxious exhaust emissions which damage the environment. 5 Gasoline Containing Alcohol & Ethers (Oxygenated Fuels) Some fuels in some geographical areas, contain “oxygenates” which are usually alcohols or ethers. The fuel station service pumps with oxygenated fuels must be clearly marked indicating use of alcohols or ethers. Please be aware that in some geographic areas fuel stations may have fuelling pumps that are unmarked. If you are not sure if the fuel you will be dispensing into your vehicle contains alcohol or ethers, ask the fuel service station operator or change station. CAUTION! The use of detergent gasoline is effective in minimising fuel injector and intake valve deposits. The use of external fuel injector cleaning systems/fluids is NOT recommended. 326 Some geographic areas, require the use of “oxygenated” fuels to meet seasonal air quality standards. • Alcohol - Ethanol: Fuels containing ONLY up to 10% ethanol by volume may be used (ethanol may also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or “Gasohol”. • Ethers - MTBE: Fuel containing ONLY up to 15% MTBE may be used. Do not use any gasoline that contains lead as a knock inhibitor, and DO NOT use lead additives. MMT in Gasoline MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl) is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Maserati recommends that gasoline without MMT to be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask the gasoline station operator whether or not the gasoline contains MMT. Requirements of Diesel Fuel Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below –7°C/20°F), or is required to operate at colder than normal conditions for prolonged periods, use climatised No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters. This vehicle must only use “Premium Diesel” fuel that meets the requirements of EN 590 (as reported on the label applied inside the fuel filler door). Biodiesel blends that meet EN 590 may also be used. CAUTION! • Maserati strongly recommends the use of Premium diesel fuel ONLY. Use of lesser grade fuel (other than Premium) will lead to reduced engine performance, and poor fuel economy and can lead to the Malfunction Indicator Light illuminating on the instrument cluster. Continued use of lesser grade fuel (other than Premium diesel fuel) can lead to fuel Driving injection system damages and engine operating problems. • The manufacturer requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulphur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulphur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulphur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system. WARNING! Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel. Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water from the fuel/water separator using the fuel/water separator drain provided. If you buy good quality fuel and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel conditioners should not be required in your vehicle. If available in your area, a high cetane “Premium Diesel” fuel may offer improved cold-starting and warm-up performance. Refuelling Fuel Filler Neck Access To access the fuel filler neck, the filler door must be unlocked. From outside the vehicle, this can only be done by pressing the unlock or the lock button on the key fob RKE transmitter, in the same way as if opening or closing the doors. If any of the door lock controls is pressed from inside the vehicle, the filler door will still remain open to allow refueling. • Press the indicated area on the filler door, which is located on the rear left side of the vehicle: the filler door will open completely. filler door is present a label show in the picture. The label includes two graphic symbols that identifies the type of fuel to be used compliant to EN16942 and reported in the following table. 5 Unleaded fuel containing up to 2,7% (m/m) oxygen and a maximum ethanol content of 5,0% (V/V) EN228 compliant fuel Fuel Compatible Labels - Gasoline Engines To help to user in the choice of fuel compatible for the car, inside the fuel Unleaded fuel containing up to 3,7% (m/m) oxygen and a maximum ethanol content of 10,0% (V/V) EN228 compliant fuel Fuel Compatible Label - Diesel Engines To help to user in the choice of fuel compatible for the car, inside the fuel 327 Driving filler door is present a label show in the picture. strap, to prevent it from being lost while refuelling. WARNING! • To avoid the risk of fire, do not 5 The label includes a graphic symbol that identifies the type of fuel to be used compliant to EN16942 and reported in the following table. • When refuelling, place the cap in the proper seat on the filler door hinge. Diesel fuel containing up to 7% (V/V) Fatty Acid Methyl Esters (FAME) EN590 compliant fuel Refill the Tank (Gasoline Only) The fuel filler neck is provided with external cap. • Rotate counterclockwise and remove the fuel filler cap. The cap hermetic seal may result in a slight pressure increase inside the tank. Any hissing noise while the cap is being opened is therefore completely normal. The cap is linked to the filler neck with a 328 • Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler. approach the filler with open flames or cigarettes! • To avoid the risk of inhaling noxious fumes, do not breathe close to the fuel filler door, when opened. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel filler door is open or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This violates most fireprevention regulations and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on (see “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). • Fill the vehicle with fuel. Fuel tank capacity is indicated in the “Refillings” table in section “Features and Specifications”. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is basically full: it is possible to further ensure refueling by enabling the fuel nozzle additional fuel supply until twofold clicks. After the two additional clicks, the amount of fuel allowed by the system is very low, we recommend therefore not to persist further. Driving • Wait approximately 10 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle in order to ensure completed supply of residual fuel and restrict the risk of fouling the fuel filler door area. • Remove the fuel nozzle. • Insert the cap on the fuel filler neck. • Tighten the cap, turning it clockwise until it stops. • Close the fuel filler door. fuel nozzle of the service station when refueling. Only a nozzle of the suitable size can open the closing tab. • Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler. NOTE: Only with a correct size nozzle you can refuel. Spare Wheel Configuration WARNING! CAUTION! To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. • To avoid the risk of fire, do not Emergency Refuelling Funnel A funnel is provided in the tool box container for emergency refueling with a gas can (see chapter “Tool kit” in section “In an Emergency”). WARNING! A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers outside the vehicle while filling. Refill the Tank (Diesel Only) Tire Kit Configuration The fuel filler is sealed by an internal closing tab, which is opened by the approach the filler with open flames or cigarettes! • To avoid the risk of inhaling noxious fumes, do not breathe close to the fuel filler door, when opened. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel filler door is open or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This violates most fireprevention regulations and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on (see “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). 5 • Fill the vehicle with fuel. Fuel tank capacity is indicated in the “Refillings” table in section “Features 329 Driving 5 and Specifications”. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is basically full: it is possible to further ensure refueling by enabling the fuel nozzle additional fuel supply until twofold clicks. After the two additional clicks, the amount of fuel allowed by the system is very low, we recommend therefore not to persist further. • Wait approximately 10 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle in order to ensure completed supply of residual fuel and restrict the risk of fouling the fuel filler door area. • Remove the fuel nozzle. • Close the fuel filler door. water has entered the fuel tank: in this case, turn off the engine immediately and contact the Service Network . Emergency Refueling Funnel A funnel is provided in the tool box container for emergency refueling with a gas can (see chapter “Tool kit” in section “In an Emergency”). WARNING! A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers outside the vehicle while filling. CAUTION! • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. • The presence of water inside the fuel system can damage the injection system and cause engine’s malfunction. If the warning light turns on, you shall contact the Service Network as soon as possible to have the fuel filter cleaned. If, after a refueling, the warning light turns on, it may be that some 330 Tire Kit Configuration Spare Wheel Configuration Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to unlock the fuel filler door using the key fob RKE transmitter, use the fuel filler door emergency release located in the boot. • Open the liftgate (see “Open and Close the Power Liftgate” in section “Before Starting”). • Lift the access cover on the left side of the boot compartment. Driving Driving Conditions Before the Trip • Pull the release cable moderately to avoid its possible break. It's not possible to feel or hear the unlocking of the fuel filler door actuator. Check the following at regular intervals and always before long trips: • tire pressure and condition; • levels of fluids and lubricants; • conditions of the windshield wiper blades; • clean the glass on the external light and all other glass surfaces; • proper operation of the warning lights and of the external lights. CAUTION! It is however advisable to perform these checks at least every 1000 km (600 mi) and always following the maintenance schedule reported in section “Maintenance and Care”. • Then open normally the fuel filler door. Before you drive: • adjust seat position, steering wheel, adjustable pedals (if equipped with) and rear-view mirrors in order to have the best driving position; • ensure that nothing (mat covers, etc.) is obstructing the pedals movement; • carefully arrange and secure any objects in the boot, to prevent them from moving forward in case of sudden stops; • avoid heavy meals before a trip. A light snack helps keep your reflexes sharp. In particular, avoid drinking alcohol. WARNING! Beyond being prohibited by law, it is extremely dangerous to ride inside the boot or on the hood. In the event of an accident, passengers sitting here are more exposed to the risk of serious injury. Passengers must only travel seated in the vehicle seats, with the seat belts fastened. Always check that the driver and all passengers have the seat belts correctly fastened. Safe Driving 5 Although the vehicle is equipped with active and passive safety devices, the driver's conduct is always a decisive factor for road safety. Some simple rules for travelling safely in different conditions are listed below. Some of them will probably already sound familiar but, in any case, it would be useful to read them carefully. Driving at Night The main guidelines to follow when driving at night are set out below. 331 Driving 5 • Drive drive carefully. Night conditions demand more focus and attention. • Reduce your speed, especially on roads with no streetlights. • Stop at early signs of drowsiness. Continuing to drive would be a risk for yourself and for others. Have a rest before continuing your trip. • Keep the vehicle at a greater distance from vehicles in front of you than you would during the day: it is difficult to assess the speed of other vehicles when you only see the lights. • Use the high beams only outside of densely-populated areas and when you are sure that they will not disturb other drivers. • When another vehicle is approaching, switch from high beams (if on) to low beams. • Keep lights and headlights clean. • Outside of densely-populated areas, beware of animals crossing the road. Driving in the Rain Rain and wet roads are dangerous. On a wet road all manoeuvres are more difficult since wheel grip on the road is significantly reduced. This means that the braking distances increase considerably and the road grip decreases. 332 Some advices for driving in the rain are listed below. • Reduce your speed and keep a greater safety distance from the vehicles in front of you. High speed may result in a loss of vehicle control. • When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as aquaplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility: slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. • Heavy rain substantially reduces visibility. In these circumstances, even during the day, turn on the low beams, to be more visible to other drivers. • Set the air conditioning and heating system controls on the demisting function, in order to avoid any visibility problem. • Periodically check the conditions of the windshield wiper blades. • In low grip conditions use “I.C.E.” driving mode (see chapters “Drive Mode” and “Off-road Drive” in this section). • Avoid driving with ESC OFF as this will likely cause a loss of control of the vehicle. Driving in Fog If the fog is dense, avoid travelling if possible. When driving in mist, blanket fog or when there is the possibility of banks of fog, please consider some advices listed below. • Keep a moderate speed. • Even in daytime, turn on the low beams and front and rear fog lights. Do not use the high beams. • Remember that fog creates dampness on the asphalt and thus any type of manoeuvre is more difficult and braking distances are extended. • Keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. • Avoid sudden changes in speed as much as possible. • Whenever possible, avoid overtaking. • If you are forced to stop the vehicle (breakdowns, impossibility of proceeding due to poor visibility, etc.), first of all, try to stop off of the travel lane. Then turn on the hazard warning lights and, if possible, the low beams. • Sound the horn rhythmically if you hear another vehicle approaching. Driving CAUTION! Be aware that rear fog lights can bother the drivers following your vehicle: when visibility is back to normal, turn off these lights. Driving in the Mountains Mountain roads usually have many narrow turns and curves, tunnels and steep uphill or downhill slopes: please consider some advices listed below. • Drive at a moderate speed, avoid “cutting” corners. • When driving inside a tunnel in daylight turn on the low beams in advance; avoid high beams and be aware of the rapid brightness change. Avoid abrupt manoeuvres that could be dangerous for the following vehicle. • Never coast downhill with the engine off or in neutral. • Remember that passing other vehicles when driving uphill is slower and thus requires more free distance on the road. If you are being overtaken on a hill, slow down and allow the other vehicle to pass. Driving on Snow or Ice Please consider some general advice for driving in these conditions, listed below. • Maintain a very moderate speed. • Fit snow chains or specific tires if the road is covered with snow: see the paragraphs “Tires – General Information” in this section. • We recommend you to activate the “I.C.E.” mode (see chapters “Drive Mode” and “Off-road Drive” in this section). • During the winter season, even apparently dry roads can have icy sections. Be careful when crossing bridges, viaducts and roads that have little exposure to the sun and are bordered by trees and rocks. They may be icy. • Keep an ample safe distance from the vehicles in front of you. • Avoid sharp braking, sharp changes in direction and rapid acceleration. Rapid acceleration on snow covered or icy surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) wheels. WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear driving wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.). Driving through Flooded Sections Driving through water sections will requires extra caution to ensure passenger safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. For more details, see “Off-road Drive” in this section. 5 333 Driving Adding Reducing Agent AdBlue® (Diesel only) Specifications of Reducing Agent AdBlue® AdBlue® is a registered trademark of VDA (Verband der Automobilindustrie), the German vehicle manufacturers' association. Reducing agent AdBlue® must meet the quality requirements of ISO 222411. CAUTION! 5 • AdBlue® is a non-toxic, colourless solution of pure synthetic urea and de-mineralised water. In the event AdBlue® becomes contaminated due to improper handling or storage, it may lead to the exhaust gas aftertreatment system malfunctioning. • In its sealed container, AdBlue® has a shelf life of at least a year if stored at temperatures between 30°C ° (86°F) ° and -10°C ° (14°F) ° away from direct sunlight. Have the AdBlue® tank filled or topped up by the Service Network. They have the necessary equipment and skills to perform this operation 334 safely, and avoiding damage to the vehicle or the environment. Suitable messages on the TFT display indicate when the AdBlue® tank needs filling (see chapter “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). You can check any time the filling status of the reservoir containing AdBlue® by entering the submenu “Vehicle Info” with the buttons on the right side of the steering wheel (see chapter "Instrument Cluster" in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). Under severe operating conditions, sporty use or at temperatures below 5°C (23°F), it may be necessary to top up AdBlue® between two consecutive scheduled maintenance services. Before travelling in countries where it might be difficult to find AdBlue®, check that the reductant level in the tank is sufficient to cover the distance to be travelled. If this is not the case, top up with AdBlue® by yourself or have it done by the Service Network. CAUTION! • AdBlue® freezes at outer temperatures of approximately -10°C (14°F) but the vehicle can be used also at lower temperatures since it is equipped with an AdBlue® pre-heating system. • At temperatures below -10°C (14°F), the AdBlue® level sensor may no longer ensure an accurate indication for the instrument cluster. A message on the instrument cluster will invite to refuel Adblue® above -10°C (14°F). Allow the vehicle to reach regular operating conditions before checking level by means of the “AdBlue Level” function in the VEHICLE INFO menu (see chapter “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). • If the vehicle remains several hours at low temperature (below -10°C/14°F), Adblue® in the reservoir could freeze completely. Under these conditions, it could be impossible to top up AdBlue®. Should it be necessary to top up, it is necessary to top up only after using the vehicle for a few hours, or after leaving it parked at a higher temperature. Driving • If you expect to travel through regions where you could find temperatures below -10°C (14°F), we suggest that you check Adblue® level and, if necessary, top up before leaving. WARNING! • Keep AdBlue® away from skin or Owners may top up reducing agent AdBlue® to proper level at service stations. Important Warnings if You Top Up AdBlue® Level Yourself If a wrong fluid is filled into the AdBlue® tank (for instance Diesel fuel, coolant, etc...), the Malfunction Indicator Light comes on and the message shown in the figure appears on the instrument cluster first time when driving for 10 seconds, accompanied by a single acoustic signal. If so, have the vehicle serviced by the Service Network as soon as possible. A top-up using the nozzle or with canisters or single-use bottles is not a difficult operation provided that you follow the instructions given in the following paragraph and standard safety precautions to avoid direct contact with AdBlue® fluid or prevent possible spills from being released into the environment or damaging vehicle bodywork or covers. Wear protective gloves and goggles and carry out this operation outdoors or in well-ventilated area, as unpleasant smelling vapour may develop. eyes: in the event of accidental contact, wash the affected area with water and flush eyes with running water, keeping eyelids wide open. In the event product is swallowed, rinse mouth and drink abundant water. • Keep AdBlue® containers out of the reach of children. CAUTION! If AdBlue® is spilled on interior linings or on paint-finished vehicle body parts, wash the affected area with abundant soapy water, if possible before the fluid begins to crystallise. 5 How To Top Up AdBlue® Level Yourself When the low level indication is displayed, the quantity of AdBlue® left in the tank gives a range of about 2000 km (1200 mi) under normal driving conditions. Maserati recommends refilling at any AdBlue® distributor, through the appropriate nozzle and, in case of emergency, to refill using canisters or single-use bottles to top up 335 Driving AdBlue® level. These bottles contain 2 litres of product approximately, which is enough to extend range by another 2000 km (1200 mi) at least. These bottles are generally available at service stations that sell these products. The AdBlue® filler neck with cap is located next to the fuel filler neck. To access the AdBlue® cap, open the filler door as indicated in the chapter "Refuelling" in this section. • Turn the AdBlue® cap counter clockwise until releasing it. 5 • Housing the cap into the relief of the filler door hinge. 336 CAUTION! • Do not place the cap removed on paint-finished vehicle body parts or on the luggage compartment lining to avoid damage. • Take the necessary precautions to avoid introducing AdBlue® into the fuel filler neck. Refilling with Nozzles You can fill up at any AdBlue® distributor. Proceed as follows: • Insert the AdBlue® nozzle in the filler neck and start refilling. Fill the AdBlue® tank with a maximum reducing agent amount of 19.6 liters (4.30 UK gallons). • Stop refilling at the first shut-off (the shut-off indicates that the AdBlue® tank is full). Do not proceed with the refilling, to prevent spillage of AdBlue®. • Extract the nozzle from the filler neck. Refilling with Containers Proceed as follows: • Check the expiration date and read the advice for use on the label before pouring the content of the canister or of the bottle into the AdBlue® tank. • Refilling by Canister If containers which cannot be screwed into the filler neck are used for refilling, in order to avoid possible overfilling of the AdBlue® tank (it could cause the switching on of the Malfunction Indicator Light to alert the driver) it is necessary to refer to the AdBlue® level information into the section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” and not exceed the maximum AdBlue® tank capacity. In any case, stop the refilling at the first leak of AdBlue® from filler neck. In case the indication of refilling appears on the instrument cluster display (see "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"), fill the AdBlue® tank with at least 5 litres (1.1 UK gallons). • Refilling by Single-use Bottles Driving The refilling by containers which can be screwed into the filler neck is not recommended by Maserati. If bottles are used for refilling, it is necessary to pay attention to not overfill the AdBlue® tank (it could cause the switching on of the Malfunction Indicator Light to alert the driver). It is necessary to refer to the AdBlue® level information into the section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” and not exceed the maximum AdBlue® tank capacity. In case the indication of refilling appears on the instrument cluster display (see "Instrument Cluster" in section "Dashboard Instruments and Controls"), fill the AdBlue® tank with at least 2.5 bottles (5 liters , 1.1 UK gallons) and the maximum quantity of 6 bottles (13 liters, 2.8 UK gallons). CAUTION! To avoid contamination, use AdBlue® from sealed containers or canisters and always clean the extension spout before insert it to the filler neck. NOTE: If the AdBlue® comes out during filling, it is advisable to clean the filler area before reinstalling and close the cap. Once the refilling is finished, insert the AdBlue® cap into the filler neck and turn it clockwise until locking it in place: close the fuel filler door. ENVIRONMENTAL! Empty bottles or containers may be disposed of at the Service Network or into household waste bins where this is allowed by local environmental protection regulations. When the engine is started next after a top-up, the low level message on the display should disappear after a few seconds. If less than 2 litres of AdBlue® have been added upon topup, the message may appear again with a longer range before engine start inhibition. Trailer Towing In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. NOTE: • On the TROFEO version you can not install the trailer tongue. • Using original Maserati equipment offers an advantage, compared to aftermarket one, in terms of driving safety and utilizing the vehicle potential under all conditions, especially considering that ESC and AWD systems feature specific settings for trailer towing. Further to this, if vehicle use conditions so allow, the original trailer tongue allows use of the driver assist systems present on-board. • To maintain the new vehicle limited warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this chapter. 5 Trailer Tongue Weight Maximum load of tow vehicle is reduced by the trailer tongue weight and the load on the same due to the trailer. Trailer tongue weight increases vehicle weight. 337 Driving Do not exceed the maximum GVWR of the tow vehicle, the one for each axle (GAWR) and the mass that the vehicle is rated to tow (GTW) specified on the nameplate located on the rear driver door’s ledge. WARNING! It is important that you do not exceed the maximum allowed overall GVWR and GTW. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. 5 338 Arranging Load on Trailer Arrange load at the bottom and as close as possible to trailer wheel axle. In this way the trailer center of gravity will be lower, thereby increasing the driving safety of the vehicle-trailer assembly. Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front of the trailer. Loads bearing more on wheel axle, or heavier in the rear of the trailer, can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side which could cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. WARNING! Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch. Tire Pressure Adjustment Proper tire inflation pressures of your vehicle and trailer are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle while driving and in manoeuvres. Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage on trailer and vehicle before towing a trailer. For more information on vehicle tires, see “Tires – General Information” in this section. When a trailer must be towed, inflate vehicle tires to full load recommended pressure (FLC) indicated in chapter “Tire pressure” in section “Features and Specifications”. For pressure of trailer tires, follow the instructions given by the trailer manufacturer. After adjusting vehicle tire pressure and connecting and disconnecting the trailer, initialise the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) following the instructions under chapter “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in this section. Field of Vision of External Rear View Mirrors Law provisions require the field of vision of external rear-view mirrors to include the rear trailer corners. If vehicle external rear-view mirrors cannot cover the required field of vision, it is possible to install additional rear-view mirrors sticking further out at the sides. The Service Network can provide you with information about towing a trailer and about the approved components available in the “Genuine Accessories” range. Trailer Lights Law provisions require trailers to be equipped with an electrical lighting system that must include the following lights: • Turn signals; • Position lights; • Stop lights; • Rear fog lights; • Reverse lights; • Number plate lights; • Side marker lights (for trailer width over 2.1 m/6.8 ft). Driving The power input of the trailer lights must not exceed the values in the following list. • Position lights, side marker lights and number plate lights: 6 x 5W per side. • Rear fog lights: 2 x 21W • Turn indicators: 2 x 21W • Stop lights: 4 x 21W • Reverse lights: 2 x 21W Trailer Wiring Harness Vehicle trailer tongue includes a 13-pin or 4-pin (for Australia - AUS marked only) sealed connector powered at 12VDC (CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN standards) for connection of the corresponding trailer wiring connector. In addition to the electrical branches, the vehicle electrical system can only be connected to the supply cable for an electric brake and to the cable for an internal light for the trailer, not exceeding 15W. CAUTION! Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle wiring harness. Do not change cable connections on connectors. Under certain conditions some lights may not operate and trailer may be not sufficiently visible. The table below indicates the function and color of cable corresponding to every connector pin as shown in the figure. 13-pin Connector 5 7-pin Connector (AUS) 339 Driving 13-pin Connector 5 Pin N. Function Wire Color 1 Left turn signal Black-White 2 Rear fog light White 3 Lights ground (Lights GND) Brown 4 Right turn signal Black-Green 5 Left unit, including position light, side marker lights, and number plate light (*) Green-Red 6 Stop lights Black-Red 7 Right unit, including position light, side marker lights, and number plate light (*) Green-Black 8 Reverse light Blue-Red 9 Permanent power supply (+Batt) Red 10 Power supply controlled by ignition switch (+Key) Yellow 11 +Ignition Switch (+Key GND) Yellow-Brown 12 Reserved (trailer connected) ‒ 13 +Battery (+Batt GND) Red-Brown (*) The assembly including position light, side marker and number plate light shall be connected such that no light of the assembly has a common connection with both pins 5 and 7. 340 Driving 7-pin Connector (AUS) Pin N. Function Wire Color 1 Left turn lights Yellow 2 Reversing signal Black 3 Earth return White 4 Right turn lights Green 5 Service brakes Blue 6 Stop lights Red 7 Rear lights Brown 5 341 Driving If the hooking and/or the electrical connection between vehicle and trailer is faulty, the warning light and the relevant message are displayed on instrument cluster display (see example in the figure). • Slide cover downward to disengage the two projecting elements indicated in the figure from bumper. 5 In these cases please contact the Service Network and avoid using the vehicle with a trailer. Installing the Trailer Tongue Removing the Access Cover Before fitting the trailer tongue, the access cover on the bottom part of the rear bumper must be removed. The cover is engaged in the bumper. • Release cover inner side from bumper, using the tip of a tool or screwdriver at the points indicated by the arrows. 342 • Store cover in the luggage compartment. Install the Trailer Tongue • Remove the protective plug from the trailer tongue seat on the cross member of the car. On cars equipped with tire kit: • lift the rear side of boot floor panel and hold it up in one of the available positions (see “Tool Kit” in section “In an Emergency”); • remove the storage box: the trailer tongue is installed in the preformed tool box. On cars equipped with spare wheel, the trailer tongue is housed in a bag positioned on the right side of the boot compartment. The trailer tongue is usually in the released position when taken out from the luggage compartment. This can be observed by the knob spaced of approximately 5 mm (0.2 in) from the bar of trailer tongue (shown in the side view of figure) and by the red mark on the knob directed to the green mark on the bar. The trailer Driving tongue can be installed only when in these conditions. If the locking mechanism of the trailer tongue is NOT preloaded before the installation, or in the locked position, it must be preloaded. The locked position can be identified by the green mark of the knob coinciding with the green mark on the bar of the trailer tongue and by the knob resting on the bar. Should it be necessary to preload the locking mechanism, proceed as follows: • remove the cap from the lock and insert the supplied key; • turn key clockwise until it stops, until it stops; • extract the knob following the direction of arrow 1; • turn the knob clockwise 2, until it stops. The locking mechanism remains preloaded even when the knob is released. • Push the trailer tongue upwards: the preloaded mechanism locks it automatically in place. WARNING! To prevent injury to limbs, keep hands away from the knob when inserting the trailer tongue in the seat on the cross member of the car. At this point the trailer tongue with locking mechanism preloaded is ready to be inserted in the seat on the cross member of the car. • Aim trailer tongue so that deltashaped inserts on tongue parallel side are aligned with the corresponding slots on seat bottom edge, on cross member. 5 Using the supplied key, lock the mechanism . • Turn key counter clockwise until it stops and remove it. • Fit the protection cap on the lock. 343 Driving Connect the Electrical System of the Trailer (7-pin Connector – AUS) • After lowering protection cover, engage the trailer male connector into the car female connector. • Push trailer connector fully home and engage the safety lock, if any. NOTE: • The key can be removed only when the locking mechanism is locked. • To avoid losing the key while towing, do NOT leave it in the lock. 5 Remove ball protection from trailer tongue and hook the vehicle to be trailed. Connect the Electrical System of the Trailer (13-pin Connector) • For connection, turn down the mounting bracket of connector, which is found on the left-hand side of trailer tongue seat. 13-pin Connector • After lowering protection cover, engage the trailer male connector into the car female connector. To ensure that connectors properly match, make sure that protruding tab on trailer side connector is aligned with the recess on car side connector. • Push trailer connector fully home and engage the safety lock, if any. 13-pin Connector 344 7-pin Connector (AUS) Remove the Trailer Tongue When trailer tongue is no longer necessary, disconnect electrical connector. Remove the trailer tongue from its seat as described below. • Remove the protection cap and insert the key in the lock. • Open the lock by turning the key clockwise until it stops. Driving • Grip the trailer tongue firmly and pull out the knob following the direction of the arrow (1). • Rotate knob clockwise (2) until it stops, in order to release it in unlocked position . • Then remove the trailer tongue from its seat. • Install the protective cap in the trailer tongue seat on the cross member of the car. • Clean the trailer tongue and remove all residues, especially on the ends. • Install the ball protection and cap on the key. • Set trailer tongue in its seat inside the luggage compartment. • Turn connector mounting bracket upwards (only in case of 13-pin Connector). • Refit the access cover making sure to engage the two projecting elements indicated by the arrow fully home into the bumper. • Push cover lower end toward bumper until the two retainers click in place. 5 Towing Tips • Before setting out on a trip, check operation of trailer rear lights and stop lights to ensure you do not jeopardise other road users' safety. • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for 345 Driving 5 346 the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, damage to brakes, driveline, steering, suspension or tires. • Safety metal wire must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the wire to the hook retainers of the trailer and vehicle hitch. Cross the wire under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. • Comply with local applicable speed limits. • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. • For towing use ride height “Normal”. • Adjust speed when towing a trailer. Depending on towed load and weather conditions, trailer might sway at a speed above 80 km/h (50 mph). • If trailer sways, driver can restore vehicle-trailer stability by immediately braking in a firm manner. • When towing a trailer, never exceed 100 km/h (62 mph). The high axial load developed under these conditions might damage tires. • Do not exceed maximum specified pressure for vehicle and trailer tires. • Considering the large dimensions of the vehicle-trailer assembly, any indispensable correction of trajectory must be performed with great care to avoid any damage to other road users. • To ensure other vehicles' safety and avoid hindering smooth traffic flow, towing a trailer is allowed on roads with a maximum grade of 12%. • In case of hill start, the Hill Start Assist system (HSA, see “Brake and Stability Control Systems” in this section) can manage brake system intervention at best. • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a steep grade. When parking, put the tow vehicle transmission in P (Park) and apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels. • On steep downhill roads, the vehicletrailer assembly will tend to sway more easily. Before driving downhill, manually engage lower gear and drive slowly. • Do not use electronic Cruise Control (CC and/or ACC) when driving on slopes or when carrying heavy loads. • The D (Drive) gear must be selected when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in D (Drive), if foreseen, you can use the paddle shift switches to manually select a lower gear. • Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also provide better engine braking. Trailer Tongue Maintenance To ensure correct operation of the system, periodically remove all deposits of dirt which may have accumulated on the ball head bar and from the mounting pipe. The possible key locking must only be treated with graphite. Periodically lubricate the joints, the sliding surfaces and the ball with grease without resin or oil. Lubrication is also a further corrosion protection. Driving If the vehicle is washed with high pressure jets, the ball head bar must be removed and the dedicated plug fitted. The ball head bar must never be treated with high-pressure jets. The Maserati Service Network can provide you with any information about the Maserati approved Towing Items, available in the “Genuine Accessories” range. 5 347 Driving 348 6 - In an Emergency Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 In the Event of an Accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 In case of a Punctured Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Emergency Release of the Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Freeing the Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Towing a Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 349 In an Emergency Tool Kit The tools and other first-aid equipment are located in the boot inside a preformed container. To access the tools, lift the rear part of the boot ground coverage, by acting on the handle. 6 It is possible to maintain the ground coverage in the lifted position when boot cover is not hooked to liftgate (figure 1 ), is hooked to liftgate (figure 2 ) or is removed (figure 3 ). The straps for fastening the ground coverage can be found at the ends and along the strap fastened by means of Velcro inserts on the floor back side. Once ground coverage is lifted, release the strap and fasten it at the positions shown in the figures below. Remove the storage box. 350 In an Emergency The tools layout in the container depends on the boot configuration of the vehicle, depending on the destination markets and customer requirements. A Tire Kit Configuration. B Spare Wheel Configuration. The tools inserted in the boot container are the following: Ref. Description Layout 1 Double torx + cross-head screwdriver A, B 2 Emergency tow hook A, B 3 Funnel for emergency supply A, B 4 Tire repair kit A 5 Extended spanner with rubber-coated handle for unscrewing/tightening the wheel nuts B 6 Adapter for wheel extended spanner B 7 Jack set B 8 Electric compressor complete with pressure gauge for inflating the compact spare wheel B 9 Trailer tongue (optional, not available for TROFEO version) A, B (*) (*) In configuration with spare wheel the trailer tongue is housed in a bag positioned on the right side of the boot compartment. 6 351 In an Emergency Hazard Warning Flashers The hazard warning flasher switch is located in the center of the central console, behind the multimedia navigation controls. Tire Kit Configuration Spare Wheel Configuration Once these operations are completed, stretch band and fasten it at the back of ground coverage, making sure to match the Velcro inserts. Lower the ground coverage. 6 Spare Wheel Configuration 352 Press the switch to turn on the hazard warning flashers to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. When these lights illuminate, the direction indicators, the related indicator lights on the instrument cluster and the button start flashing. Press the switch a second time to turn off the hazard warning flashers. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the hazard warning In an Emergency flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. CAUTION! • When the hazard warning flashers are activated, the direction indicators control is disabled. • The extended use of the hazard warning flashers may wear down your battery. In the Event of an Accident It is important always to keep calm. • If not directly involved, stop at a safe distance of at least ten meters away from the accident area. • Turn off the engine and switch on the hazard warning flashers. • At night, illuminate the accident area with the headlights. • Always act with caution to avoid the risk of being crashed into by other drivers. • Indicate that an accident has occurred by placing the emergency triangle (if equipped) in a well visible position and at the prescribed distance. • Call the emergency services, providing as much information as possible. On the motor way, use the special call boxes. • Remove the ignition key (if present) from the vehicles involved. • If fuel or other chemical products can be smelled, do not smoke and ask people around you to put their cigarettes out. • To extinguish fires, even small ones, use a fire extinguisher, blankets, sand or earth. Never use water. • In multiple accidents occurred on motorways, particularly where visibility is poor, there is a high risk of being involved in other collisions. Leave the vehicle immediately and move away from the area. In case of Injured Persons • Never leave the injured person alone. Persons not directly involved in the accident are also required to give assistance. • Do not crowd around injured persons. • Reassure the injured person that help is on the way and stay close to them to assist them to avoid possible panic attacks. • Release or cut the seat belts restraining the injured persons. • Do not give the injured persons anything to drink. • Never move an injured person. • Remove the injured person from the vehicle only in emergency situation, e.g. if there is a risk of fire, sinking in water or falling down into a pit. • When removing an injured person, do not pull his/her limbs, never bend his/her head and, as far as possible, keep his/her body in a horizontal position. 6 353 In an Emergency Emergency Kit (for versions/markets where provided) The Emergency Kit provides first aid in case of a car breakdown or any other situation. The kit comes in a case on the left side of the boot compartment. The kit includes the following elements: • emergency triangle; • reflective emergency vest; • luminescent pipes providing chemical lights; • dynamo torch; • first-aid kit; • gloves; • ice scraper. 6 NOTE: The items inside the kit could change according to different countries' regulations. First-Aid Kit (for versions/ markets where provided) The First-Aid Kit is available in the boot compartment inside the Emergency Kit case (if foreseen) or in the following positions: • on the vehicles with tire repair kit configuration (see “Tool Kit” in this section) this kit is placed in the tools container; 354 • on the vehicles with compact spare wheel this kit is placed in the right side of the boot compartment. This kit contains following: • sterile gauze to cover and clean the wounds; • bandages of various sizes; • treated adhesive bandages of various sizes; • an adhesive bandage strip; • a pair of rounded-end scissors; • gloves; • rescue blanket. Engine Overheating To reduce potential overheating of the engine in city traffic, while stationary, place the transmission in N (Neutral), but do not increase the engine idle speed. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition: • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage the engine. If the temperature gauge is positioned on the red zone “H” (refer to “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”), pull over In an Emergency and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the temperature gauge drops back into the normal range. If the temperature gauge remains on the red zone “H,” turn the engine off immediately and contact the Service Network. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open it until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a coolant bottle pressure cap (refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in section “Maintenance and Care”) when the radiator is overheated. In case of a Punctured Tire The vehicle can be equipped with a tire repair kit or with a compact spare wheel, depending on the destination markets and on customer requirements. Using Tire Repair Kit Small punctures up to 6 mm (1⁄4”) in the tire tread can be sealed using the tire repair kit, fitted beneath the ground coverage of the boot compartment (see chapter “Tool Kit” in this section). The kit consists of two parts: • an electric compressor with pressure gauge and power cable; • a bottle containing sealant with hose to be connected to the punctured tire. NOTE: For the tire repair procedures with tire repair kit see instructions included in the kit. This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 10 km (6 miles) with a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). CAUTION! • Intruding objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire, which could compromise the repair with the tire repair kit. • Do not use the tire repair kit if the tire shows lateral damages and/or the rim is damaged by driving with flat tire. • Tire repair kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -20°C (-4°F). • Replace the tire repair kit sealant bottle prior to the expiration date (printed on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. 6 NOTE: • The compressor power plug can be inserted either in the 12 V power outlet housed in the boot or inside the passenger compartment (see (Continued) 355 In an Emergency (Continued) “Interior Features” in section “ Understanding the Vehicle”). • When having the tire serviced to the Service Network or to a tires service centre, advise who performs the operation that the tire has been sealed using the tire repair kit. original conditions and eliminate the tick next to selected mode: in this way the pneumatic suspension system will go back to normal operation. Using the Compact Spare Wheel The compact spare wheel is stored in the boot and is supplied deflated in order to limit the amount of space occupied. An electric compressor is also provided for inflating. In the event of a tire puncture, proceed as follows. • Stop the vehicle in a place that does not constitute a danger to traffic and where the wheel can be changed safely. The vehicle must be level and on firm ground. • Select the P (Park) mode and then engage manually the electric parking brake and move the ignition switch to OFF position. • If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle (if equipped) at the required distance. The automatic levelling of pneumatic suspensions might create problems when it is necessary to lift the vehicle to replace the wheel featuring punctured tire with the emergency wheel supplied or with another wheel. 6 356 CAUTION! Before mounting the compact spare wheel it is necessary to disable the suspension system by scrolling the user settings on MTC+ and selecting “Wheel Replacement Mode” in “Suspensions” submenu. The tick next to selected item will indicate that this mode is active and pneumatic suspension system is disabled (for further details, refer to “MTC+ Settings” chapter in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). After servicing, restore NOTE: The compact spare wheel is supplied in aluminium or steel: the pictures show the one in aluminium. WARNING! • The jack should be used on level firm ground wherever possible. • It is recommended that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and that no person should remain in a vehicle that is being jacked. • If the vehicle has been stopped on a slope or an uneven surface, place chocks or other suitable items in front of or behind the wheels to stop the vehicle from moving. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle that is supported by a jack. • Lift the ground coverage of the boot compartment and remove the storage box (see chapter “Tool Kit” in this section). • Take the tools (indicated in picture) for changing the wheel from the container. In an Emergency using the specific fitting spanner insert provided with the “Wheel Security Stud Bolt Kit”, available in the “Genuine Accessories” range. In this case, the insert must be installed on the kit spanner. • Unscrew and pull out the spare wheel locking knob. • Take the tool box container, the compressor and the compact spare wheel out of the boot. WARNING! • Never position yourself under a jacked vehicle. • Jack wrong positioning can • Place the jack near the wheel to be changed as illustrated. Make sure that the head of the jack is correctly inserted in one of the slots 1 or 2 under the longitudinal member. • Fit the adapter on the spanner. Extend the spanner as shown, then loosen anticlockwise by approximately one turn the five bolts on the wheel to be changed. In case a wheel security stud bolt is installed, it can only be removed by cause vehicle accidental fall, with consequent severe risk for operator’s safety and damages to vehicle body. • Never use the jack to carry out maintenance or repairs under the vehicle. 6 • Insert the extension levers in the jack. • Turn clockwise the extension lever of the jack until the wheel is raised a few centimeters off the ground. 357 In an Emergency • Stop the compressor pressing switch again, when the pressure indicated by the gauge reaches the recommended level (see "Tire Inflation Pressure" in section "Features and Specifications") and screw the cap on the compact spare wheel valve. 6 358 • Completely unscrew the five bolts and remove the wheel. • Make sure that the contact surfaces between spare wheel and hub are clean and free of impurities. • Fit the compact spare wheel with the valve stem side out and secure it with the five bolts previously removed, without tightening them. • Remove from the compressor case the inflation hose and the cable with a plug for the power outlet. • Unscrew the valve cap of the compact spare wheel and screw the fitting of the inflation hose onto the valve. • Insert the plug inside one of the available power outlets fitted in the boot or passenger compartment. • Set the ignition device on ACC or RUN position. • Turn the compressor on by pressing the switch. • The compressor has been designed exclusively to inflate compact spare wheels; do not use it to inflate air mattresses, dinghies etc. • Turn anticlockwise the extension lever of the jack to lower the vehicle and remove the jack. • Fully tighten clockwise the bolts, alternately tightening diametrically opposite. WARNING! • FOR ALUMINIUM SPARE WHEEL CAUTION! • In order to obtain a more accurate reading, the compressor should be switched off when checking the tire pressure of the compact spare wheel on the pressure gauge. • Do not run the compressor for more than 20 minutes: there is a risk it could overheat. Also, prolonged power absorption may discharge the battery, subsequently preventing the engine from starting. Observe the tightening torque for the bolts securing the compact spare wheel (98 ± 10 Nm/ 72 ± 7 lbf·ft). • FOR STEEL SPARE WHEEL Observe the tightening torque for the bolts securing the compact spare wheel (86 ± 10 Nm/ 63 ± 7 lbf·ft). • Bolts must be tightened only after vehicle is back to ground, so as to prevent it from falling down due to the force exerted for bolt tightening. Failure to comply with this recommendation can cause operator injuries. In an Emergency • For safety reasons, it is absolutely forbidden to drive with more than one compact spare wheel fitted on the vehicle. • Snow chains cannot be fitted on the compact spare wheel. • The compact spare wheel can travel a maximum of 3000 km (1800 mi). WARNING! • The compact spare wheel is narrower than standard wheels and must only be used to travel the distance required to reach a service station, where the punctured tire can be repaired or replaced. • Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) when using the compact spare wheel; when this limit is exceeded, the stability, road holding and braking of the vehicle will be compromised. Avoid accelerating to full speed, heavy braking and fast cornering. • The compact spare wheel must be inflated to the recommended tire pressure (see “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section “Features and Specifications”). To Refit the Standard Wheel with Repaired or Replaced Tire • Following the procedure and the caution described above, raise the vehicle and remove the compact spare wheel reusing the supplied spanner with adapter, suitably extended. • Fit the standard wheel with repaired or replaced tire. • Tighten the original bolts on the wheel. • Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. • Fully tighten the bolts, alternately tightening diametrically opposite. WARNING! Observe the tightening torque for the bolts securing the wheels (98 ± 10 Nm / 72 ± 7 lbf·ft). Once finished: • completely deflate the compact spare wheel by pressing on the valve with the overhang of the valve cap; • wrap the power cable and the inflation hose inside the compressor case and place it in the boot seat; • place the compact spare wheel and tool container in the boot; • fix everything in place with the locking knob; 6 359 In an Emergency Emergency Release of the Parking Brake • place the extension levers, the jack, the spanner and the adapter in the container inside the compact spare wheel; 6 • reposition the other tools and the accessories storage box; • lower the ground coverage at the bottom of the boot compartment. 360 In the event the electric parking brake locks due to a system failure (see “Parking Brake” in section “Driving”), it is not possible to move the vehicle, since the thrust action of the power actuator that operates on the brake pad inside each rear caliper will lock the rear wheels. After verifying that the battery is sufficiently charged (otherwise use an external power source connected to the vehicle electric system to operate the EPB control lever and try to unlock the parking brake), for moving the vehicle it is necessary to act on the power actuator or caliper in order to release the pressure on the pads of the rear brake calipers. Contact the Service Network to carry out this operation. CAUTION! If the parking brake has been activated in manual or automatic mode and it is not possible to release it by operating on the lever of the central console, do not move the vehicle since rear brake calipers might be damaged. To move the vehicle, load it on a rescue vehicle, avoiding to move it if only the rear axle is lifted, since the torque converter of AWD system might be seriously damaged. For more information on vehicle towing, see "Towing a Disabled Vehicle" chapter in this section. In an Emergency Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position • Slip the cover from its seat. Freeing the Stuck Vehicle • Take strap out of its seat. • With the tip of a screwdriver press the clip shown in the picture box and lift the strap up to release the transmission from the P (Park) position. The new position will allow vehicle moving and towing. • Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle. If your vehicle is stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can probably be moved backward and forward by a simple rocking motion. Steer the wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Shift then between D (Drive) or M +/(Manual) and R (Reverse) (see chapter “Automatic Transmission” in section “Driving”). Shifting to M +/- (Manual), try to free the car starting in second gear. At low speed motion of the vehicle, you can switch quickly from D (Drive) to R (Reverse), and vice versa, just by pressing the release button on the shift lever. For more effectiveness press lightly on the accelerator pedal in order to avoid wheel slippage. If unable to release the vehicle in one of the previously described ways, enter the low-grip driving mode, by pressing the “I.C.E.” button, and completely exclude the yaw and slip control system, by pressing the button for at least 3 seconds. Moving the shift lever between D (Drive) and R (Reverse) to start. The manual disengagement of the shift from P (Park) has the purpose to allow towing the vehicle if not normally possible using the shift lever (such as in the event of a battery failure with inability to start the engine). NOTE: This procedure is exclusively intended for emergency situations only! WARNING! Before performing the manual release of P (Park) position if possible, always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake. Performing this operation will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake. Performing the manual release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle. The cover that allows the emergency manual park release is located on the left part of the driver’s foot well. • Lift the mat on the driver side to access the cover. 6 361 In an Emergency CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the drive wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in N (Neutral) for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimise overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. 6 WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive drive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the drivetrain and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery of another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster. It is necessary to have proper jumper cables in order to connect the booster battery to the remote posts of the discharged battery. Booster cables have positive and negative terminal clamps and are identified by the sheath color (red = positive, black = negative). Maserati provides on request jumper cables created for its models in a pratical case. NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with information about the “Maserati Jumper Cables Kit”, available in the “Genuine Accessories” range. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the battery manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions. 362 CAUTION! • To jump start a vehicle do not use a portable battery, a booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 14 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system of the vehicle with the discharged battery may occur. • Do not use a battery charger for emergency starting under any circumstances. You could damage the electronic systems, particularly the control units managing the ignition and fuel supply functions. • If the battery is completely discharged when the windows are fully raised, open the door with the utmost care; do not close the door again until it is possible to lower the window. WARNING! • Using booster packs that have not been checked, which could therefore release a too high charging voltage (higher than 14 V), in extreme environmental conditions (for example: closed areas or without proper ventilation and temperatures In an Emergency higher than 50°C/122°F or lower than -20°C/-4°F) create the right conditions for ignition which could then cause the battery to explode. Therefore you shall always perform jump-starting operations using the adequate tools and in the best environmental conditions, taking all necessary precautions. • Do not attempt jump-starting if the discharged battery is frozen. It could break or explode during jump start and cause personal injury. • Do not carry out this procedure if you have not done it before: incorrect manoeuvres can originate high electrical discharges and even cause the battery to explode. • To avoid the risk of explosion or fire, do not approach the battery with open flames or cigarettes that could generate sparks. the engine compartment while the battery is stored in the boot. After lifting the hood (see “Open and Close the Hood” in section “Before Starting”) the positive remote post (+) and the negative remote post (–) are shown in the picture and are easily recognizable by the icons labeled on the integrated power module. Battery Remote Posts Position Diesel Engine For easier operation, remote battery posts for jump starting are located in the engine compartment while the battery is stored in the boot. After lifting the hood (see “Open and Close the Hood” in section “Before Starting”) the positive remote post (+) and the negative remote post (–) are shown in the picture and are easily recognizable by the icons labeled on the integrated power module. 3.8 V8 - Gasoline NOTE: If you need to disconnect the battery from the vehicle electrical system, see “Maintenance - Free Battery” in section “Maintenance and Care”). 6 Diesel Battery Remote Posts Position Gasoline Engines For easier operation, remote battery posts for jump starting are located in 3.0 V6 - Gasoline 363 In an Emergency Jump-Start Procedure Gasoline Engines WARNING! • Stay clear of the radiator cooling fan 6 364 whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on. You could be injured by the moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Do not allow the vehicles involved in the jumpstarting operation to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and cause personal injury. • Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. • Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into P (Park) and turn the ignition to OFF . • If using another vehicle to jumpstart the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach and set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is off. • Connect one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive (+) remote post of the vehicle with the discharged battery after lifting the protection cap of the cable indicated on the external side of the integrated power module. • Connect the opposite terminal clamp of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. • Connect one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative (–) post of the booster battery. • Connect the opposite terminal clamp of the negative (–) jumper cable to the remote negative (–) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery as rendered. 3.8 V8 - Gasoline 3.0 V6 - Gasoline • Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. If using a portable battery booster, wait a few seconds after connecting the cables, before starting the booster vehicle. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence. • Disconnect the terminal clamp of the negative (–) jumper cable from the remote negative (–) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. • Disconnect the opposite terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable from the negative (–) post of the booster battery. • Disconnect the terminal clamp of the positive (+) jumper cable from In an Emergency the positive (+) post of the booster battery. • Disconnect the opposite terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. NOTE: If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at a Service Network center. Jump-Start Procedure - Diesel Engine WARNING! • Stay clear of the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on. You could be injured by the moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Do not allow the vehicles involved in the jumpstarting operation to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and cause personal injury. • Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. • Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into P (Park) and turn the ignition to OFF. • If using another vehicle to jumpstart the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach and set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. • Connect one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive (+) remote post of the discharged vehicle after lifting the protection cap of the cable indicated on the external side of the integrated power module. • Connect the opposite terminal clamp of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. • Connect one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative (–) post of the booster battery. • Connect the opposite terminal clamp of the negative (–) jumper cable to the remote negative (–) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery as rendered. Diesel • Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. If using a portable battery booster, wait a few seconds after connecting the cables, before starting the booster vehicle. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence. • Disconnect one terminal clamp of the negative (–) jumper cable from the remote negative (–) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. • Disconnect the opposite terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable from the negative (–) post of the booster battery. • Disconnect one terminal clamp of the positive (+) jumper cable from 6 365 In an Emergency the positive (+) post of the booster battery. • Disconnect the opposite terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. NOTE: If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at a Service Network center. 6 Towing a Disabled Vehicle Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only towing bars and other equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Safety chains are mandatory. Except for the front and rear threaded seat to fix the supplied hook (see “Tool Kit”chapter in this section), the vehicle is not equipped with other connection points for towing operations with tow truck. CAUTION! Any improper manoeuvre and use of unsuitable equipment for recovering vehicle in an emergency from off road location could seriously damage the vehicle. Contact the Service Network or anyone having suitable equipment and the required expertise to safely and properly carry out any required operations. Make sure you comply with local towing regulations. • If the vehicle's battery is discharged , refer to the following paragraph on how to shift the automatic transmission out of the P (Park) 366 position and release the parking brake. • If the vehicle battery is still charged , turn off the engine and disengage the parking brake manually (if automatically engaged) by using the command behind the shift lever (see “Parking Brake” chapter in section “Driving”). Shift then manually the transmission out of P (Park) as described in “Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position” chapter of this section. If you need to use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in RUN position, do not use the ACC position. Manual Release of Transmission with Low Battery In order to push or tow the vehicle if unable to shift the transmission out of P (Park) (such as a discharged battery), a manual park release is available. In this case it is necessary to manually release the shift lever and release the parking brake if inserted (see “Emergency Release of the Parking Brake” in this section). Follow the steps as indicated in “Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position” in this section to manually disengage the transmission. In an Emergency Vehicle Towing Conditions Maserati only allows vehicle towing with all four wheels off the ground. WARNING! • Single axle towing or use of a tow dolly is not allowed since it will severely damage vehicle components. • Use of a tow dolly on front wheels is strictly forbidden since front wheels may still receive a residual amount of torque and disengage the vehicle from the tow dolly and affect safety of both rescuers and other road users. Use the Tow Hook Included in the Tool Kit CAUTION! The tow hook should only be used for towing the car on flat roads. Do not use the tow hook to remove the car that is stuck on off-road stretches. The tow hook is also used to tow the vehicle on the platform of a tow truck. Before carrying out this operation, if the battery of the vehicle still works, set "Transport Mode" on MTC+ in "Suspensions" submenu (see "MTC+ Settings" chapter in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). With this mode activated, the ride height will be lowered to the minimum value and the pneumatic suspension system will be disabled to help vehicle loading on the tow truck. It is necessary to inform the operators of the rescue vehicle about the vehicle minimum height to avoid, during its loading, any contact of the lower ends of the front or rear bumper with the tow truck loading ramp. The tow hook is contained in the tool kit (see “Tool Kit” chapter in this section) and must be screwed in the seat located on the front and rear bumper. • To access the front tow hook seat on the front bumper, remove the cover on the right side of the bumper lower grid. 6 367 In an Emergency GranSport, GTS and TROFEO Versions • To access the rear tow hook seat, remove the external cap on the right side of the rear bumper (not present on TROFEO version). 6 368 GranSport and GTS Versions • Carefully clean the threaded seat before screwing the hook. • Screw the tow hook into its seat for at least 11 turns. NOTE: Maximum work angle of towing cable or bar: 15°. 7 - Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Scheduled Service Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 A/C System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Wheels Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Bodywork Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Interior Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Vehicle Stored for Long Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Restarting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Battery Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 369 Maintenance and Care Scheduled Maintenance Service Correct maintenance is clearly the best way to guarantee vehicle performance and safety features, ensure respect for the environment and low operating costs. NOTE: Also remember that the observance of the maintenance procedures is essential for keeping your vehicle operating properly. Not adhering to the “Scheduled Service Plan” can impact your vehicle’s warranty. CAUTION! The Scheduled Maintenance services are prescribed by the Manufacturer. Failure to have the services carried out can affect your warranty. The Scheduled Maintenance service is provided by the whole Service Network. In the event that, when a service is performed, further replacements or repairs are found to be necessary in addition to the scheduled operations, these can be carried out only with the specific consent of the Customer. Interval Running Coupons 7 370 Maserati has therefore provided for a series of checks and maintenance operations involving the 1st service and subsequent when the vehicle reaches mileage/years reported on the “Scheduled Service Plan” in this section. After the last service, maintenance must be restarted with the operations scheduled for the 1st, 2nd and 3rd service. CAUTION! You are advised to notify the Service Network of any minor operating problem, without waiting for the next scheduled service. NOTE: • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time or short trips without reaching operating temperature. Even the use of the vehicle with extremely hot or cold ambient temperature and with trailer tow may make necessary change engine oil more often. • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed mileage/years reported on the “Scheduled Service Plan” in this section. CAUTION! Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle. Scheduled Maintenance (Service) Indicator The service indicator system will remind you the deadline for the maintenance program. The indicator light on the instrument cluster flashes for approx. 5 seconds displaying the message backed by a beeping sound, indicating that the next scheduled maintenance is due or has already overdue. Maintenance and Care NOTE: The service indicator will not monitor the time elapsed from the last scheduled maintenance. When the scheduled maintenance has overdue, the indicator light and message will be displayed on the instrument cluster. The service indicator and message will illuminate approximately from 1000 km (620 mi) or 30 days to the next scheduled maintenance. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. To check the km/mi and the days that remain at the inspiration of the next scheduled maintenance, consult the “Maintenance” submenu of “VEHICLE INFO” main menu (see paragraph ”TFT Dispaly : Warning/Indicator Lights of the Set Modes/ Functions” in chapter “Instrument Cluster” of section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for more details). The Service Network will reset the service indicator message after completing the scheduled maintenance operations. Scheduled Service Plan The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done within the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in operating conditions, such as dusty areas, extremely hot or cold ambient temperature and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected. Maserati recommends that these maintenance intervals be performed at the Service Network. The technicians at your dealership know your vehicle best, and have access to factoryapproved information, genuine Maserati parts, and specially designed electronic and mechanical tools that can help prevent future costly repairs. 7 371 Maintenance and Care Main Operations/Service Coupons - Gasoline Engines Service coupons Main operations 1° 2° I 5° 6° I I Check with Maserati Diagnosi I I I I I I Engine oil and filter R R R R R R Engine coolant level I I I I I I Engine check for leaks I I I I I I Cooling system connections and lines (check for leaks) I Air filter Belt for alternator, water pump and air conditioning compressor (3.8 V8 Engine) Belt for alternator (1) and belt for water pump and air conditioning compressor (3.0 V6 Engine) I Intercooler check for leaks Brake fluid I R I I I R I R R I I Replace every time the part is removed I I R I I Replace every time the part is removed Spark plugs R R I I I I I I I I I I I I Replace every 2 years Brake system (lines, calipers, connections) - Instrument cluster warning light efficiency - Parking brake operation I I I I I I Tire wear, tire and spare tire (if equipped) pressure check I I I I I I Joints, rods for front and rear suspensions, front and rear under-chassis Correct operation and reliability of the seats and seat belts 372 4° Interval running coupons: every 20000 km (12500 mi) or 2 years (*) Vehicle road test 7 3° I I I I I I I I I Maintenance and Care Service coupons Main operations 1° 2° 3° 4° 5° 6° Interval running coupons: every 20000 km (12500 mi) or 2 years (*) Pollen filter R R R R R R Windshield fluid level - Windshield washer and headlight cleaner I I I I I I Headlight leveling I I I I I I Controls and adjustment systems in general, hinges, doors, engine compartment lid and luggage compartment I I I Condition of the leather interiors I I I (*) Interval running coupons for India, Australia, Morocco, Lebanon and Jordania markets are every 20000 km (12500 mi) or 1 year, and for Chile, Argentina and Brazil markets are every 10000 km (6200 mi) or 1 year. (1) In case of heavy-duty use of the vehicle, highlighted by the presence of mud and dust in the engine compartment, proceed to the preventive replacement of the alternator belt. I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation R = Replace 7 373 Maintenance and Care Main Operations/Service Coupons - Diesel Engine Service coupons Main operations 1° I 4° 5° 6° I I Check with Maserati Diagnosi I I I I I I Emission control I I I I I I Engine oil and filter R R R R R R AdBlue® level I I I I I I Engine coolant level I I I I I I Engine check for leaks I I I I I I Cooling system connections and lines (check for leaks) I I I Air filter R R R R R R Belt for alternator, water pump and air conditioning compressor I I I I R I Replace every time the part is removed Fuel filter Brake fluid R I I R I I R I I Replace every 2 years Brake system (lines, calipers, connections) - Instrument cluster warning light efficiency - Parking brake operation I I I I I I Tire wear, tire and spare tire (if equipped) pressure check I I I I I I Joints, rods for front and rear suspensions, front and rear under-chassis Correct operation and reliability of the seats and seat belts Pollen filter 374 3° Interval running coupons: every 20000 km (12500 mi) or 1 year (*) Vehicle road test 7 2° I I I R I I I R I I I R Maintenance and Care Service coupons Main operations 1° 2° 3° 4° 5° 6° Interval running coupons: every 20000 km (12500 mi) or 1 year (*) Windshield fluid level - Windshield washer and headlight cleaner I I I I I I Headlight leveling I I I I I I Controls and adjustment systems in general, hinges, doors, engine compartment lid and luggage compartment I I I Condition of the leather interiors I I I (*) Interval running coupons for India, Chile, Brazil and Argentina market vehicles are every 10000 km (6200 mi) or 1 year. I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation R = Replace 7 375 Maintenance and Care Periodic Maintenance Every 1000 km (600 mi) or before long journeys Check: • engine coolant; • brake fluid; • windshield washer fluid level; • tire inflation pressure and condition; • operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.); • operation of windshield washer/wiper system and wear of windshield wiper blades. Every 3000 km (1900 mi) Check and top up, if required, the engine oil level. Heavy-Duty Vehicle Use 7 376 If the car is mainly used under one of the following conditions: • towing a trailer; • off-road; • short, repeated journeys (less than 7-8 km /4-5 mi) at sub-zero outside temperatures; • engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of idleness; you should perform the following inspections more frequently than recommended on the “Scheduled Service Plan”: • check front disc brake pad conditions and wear; • check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage; • visually inspect conditions of: engine, transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and rubber elements (boots - sleeves bushes - etc.); • check battery charge; • visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belts; • check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter; • check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter of the A/C system; • check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner filter. equivalent) and the prescribed fluids. Shall this not be the case, do not carry out any operation on your own and contact a Service Center. CAUTION! All maintenance operations for the vehicle must be carried out by the Service Network. For routine and minor maintenance operations which you can carry out yourself, make sure that you have the necessary experience and always use suitable equipment, original Maserati spare parts (or This vehicle is equipped with a state of-the-art engine and exhaust system containing a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) and an SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) catalytic converter integrated into a system which injects a harmless urea solution (reducing agent AdBlue®) into the exhaust gases. When vaporised, it converts smog forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into On Board Diagnostic System Your vehicle is equipped with an on board diagnostic system that monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. See “Use of the Engine” in section “Driving” for further details. If any of these systems require service, the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light on the instrument cluster display (refer to “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). Exhaust Gas After-treatment System Strategies (Diesel only) Maintenance and Care harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapour (H2O), two natural components of the air we breathe. This system consists of the following components: • AdBlue® tank with pump; • injector with electronically-heated lines; • NOx sensors; • temperature sensors; • SCR catalyst. The engine and exhaust aftertreatment system work together to meet the Emission standards. The system manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalytic converter to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants. The AdBlue® injection system reduces nitrogen oxide (NOx) emissions to a minimum so as to meet Euro VI requirements. The injection of AdBlue® and SCR catalyst as well as help to reduce pollution, do not have effect on consumption, performance and driveability. NOTE: • The AdBlue® injection system may sometimes produce a ticking sound, audible when the vehicle stops. This is normal operation. • The pump will run for a period of time after engine shutdown to purge the AdBlue® injection system. This is normal operation and may be audible from the rear of the vehicle. The control system visualizes messages on the TFT display to alert the driver when regeneration treatment and /or AdBlue® refilling is necessary or when the vehicle shall be taken to the Service Network. Refer to chapter “Instrument Cluster” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls” for further information. Spare Parts Use of genuine Maserati parts for normal or scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure excellent performance. Damage or failures caused by non-genuine spare parts used for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty. Maintenance Procedures The following pages contain the “required” maintenance standards determined by Maserati engineers. Besides those maintenance items specified in the “Scheduled Service Plan”, there are other components which may require service or replacement in the future. To perform most of the services, it is necessary to open the hood (see “Open and Close the Hood” in section “Before Starting”). The following images show the position of the components involved in the maintenance service. CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions checked by the Service Network: please be advised that Maserati recommends to address to the Official Service Network. 7 377 Maintenance and Care • Your vehicle has been equipped with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes for washing as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, electric power steering or air conditioning. Such damages are not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only a specific product for the flushing procedure. 7 378 Maintenance and Care Maintenance Service Components - Gasoline Engines 3.8 V8 Engine - TROFEO Version 1. Engine oil dipstick. 2. Engine oil filler neck. 3. Air cleaner filters. 4. Engine coolant expansion reservoir cap. 5. Coolant reservoir cap for transmission cooling system. 6. Windshield/headlight washer fluid reservoir cap. 7. Brake fluid reservoir access cover. 8. A/C pollen filter access cover. 9. Integrated power module (fuses). 7 3.8 V8 Engine - TROFEO Version 379 Maintenance and Care 3.8 V8 Engine - GTS version 1. Inspection cover to access the engine oil level dipstick. 2. Engine oil filler neck. 3. Air cleaner filters. 4. Engine coolant expansion reservoir cap. 5. Coolant reservoir cap for transmission cooling system. 6. Windshield/headlight washer fluid reservoir cap. 7. Brake fluid reservoir access cover. 8. A/C pollen filter access cover. 9. Integrated power module (fuses). 7 3.8 V8 Engine - GTS version 380 Maintenance and Care 3.0 V6 Engines 1. Engine oil dipstick. 2. Engine oil filler neck. 3. Air cleaner filters. 4. Engine coolant expansion reservoir cap. 5. Coolant reservoir cap for transmission cooling system. 6. Windshield/headlight washer fluid reservoir cap. 7. Brake fluid reservoir access cover. 8. A/C pollen filter access cover. 9. Integrated power module (fuses). 7 3.0 V6 Engines 381 Maintenance and Care Maintenance Service Components - Diesel Engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Engine oil dipstick. Engine oil filler neck inspection door. Fuel filter. Engine coolant expansion reservoir cap. Windshield/headlight washer fluid reservoir cap. Brake fluid reservoir access cover. A/C pollen filter access cover. Integrated power module (fuses). Air cleaner filter. 7 Diesel 382 Maintenance and Care Level Checks ENVIRONMENTAL! • The engine oils and fluids used contain substances that are dangerous for the environment. For replacement you are advised to contact the Service Network, where all the necessary equipment is available to dispose of the used oil and fluids in compliance with the regulations in force and in an environmentally-friendly manner. • All equipment used for fluids replacement (gloves, cloths, containers, etc) must be disposed of in compliance with the regulations in force. Engine Coolant Level Check - Gasoline Engines Your vehicle has been equipped with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that offers high protection against corrosion, freezing and allows extended maintenance intervals. To prevent reducing extended maintenance periods, it is important to use original engine coolant (antifreeze) when adding coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze) use pure water only, such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of impure water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. • Mix a minimum solution of 50% engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (do not exceed 70%) if temperatures below −37°C (−35°F) are forecasted. Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the circulation area of the vehicle. The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method to determine that the coolant level is adequate. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs to be checked once a month. With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle on the left side of the engine compartment should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle and inside the filler neck. Gasoline Gasoline • When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle after removing the cap. Do not overfill. • Once the desired level is reached, reassemble and firmly close cap of the bottle. • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or 7 383 Maintenance and Care if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be tested by a Service Network centre. • Keep the front of the radiator and the condenser clean. WARNING! • Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is hot. Do not loosen or remove the cap of the engine coolant bottle to cool a hot engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • When adding coolant do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. 7 384 Engine Coolant Level Check - Diesel Engine Your vehicle has been equipped with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that offers high protection against corrosion, freezing and allows extended maintenance intervals. To prevent reducing extended maintenance periods, it is important to use original engine coolant (antifreeze) when adding coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze) use pure water only, such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of impure water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. • Mix a minimum solution of 50% engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (do not exceed 70%) if temperatures below −37°C (−35°F) are forecasted. Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the circulation area of the vehicle. The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method to determine that the coolant level is adequate. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs to be checked once a month. With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle on the right side of the engine comportment should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle and inside the filler neck. Diesel Diesel • When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle after removing the cap. Do not overfill. • Once the desired level is reached, reassemble and firmly close cap of the bottle. Maintenance and Care • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure-tested for leaks by a Service Centre. • Keep the front of the radiator and the condenser clean. WARNING! • Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is hot. Do not loosen or remove the cap of the engine coolant bottle to cool a hot engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • When adding coolant do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level immediately if the brake system warning light and the related message turn on indicating a low level of brake fluid. • Remove the brakes fluid reservoir access cover. fluid level may be caused by a leak too, and requires accurate checkup of the braking system. • Clean the top of the master cylinder reservoir before removing the cap. • Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid (see “Refillings” in section “Features and Specifications”). • Once the correct level is reached, firmly close the cap. Normal brake pad wear could cause the fluid level to fall. However, low CAUTION! The symbol on the tank cap identifies the synthetic type of brake fluid, distinguishing it from the mineral type. Using mineral fluids damages the special rubber linings of the brake system irreparably. WARNING! • To avoid contamination from foreign materials or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in an accident. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl 7 385 Maintenance and Care To prevent freeze-up of your windshield/headlight washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers. surfaces, make sure it does not spill over these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in an accident. 7 386 Adding Windshield/Headlight Washer Fluid The reservoir on the left side of the engine compartment contains the fluid to wash the windshield, the window liftgate and headlights (if foreseen). During scheduled services or when the message of low level of the washer fluid appears together with the related telltale add more fluid as soon as possible. Depending on the system installed in the vehicle, the fluid reservoir may contain nearly 5 litres (1.1 UK gal) of windshield/headlight washer fluid or nearly 3,5 litres (0.77 UK gal) of washer fluid. • Remove the reservoir cap in the engine compartment and lift the filler neck. NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with information about the Maserati recommended “Windshield Washer Fluid” with antifreeze, available in the “Genuine Accessories” catalog. WARNING! • Commercially available windshield • Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (refer to “Refillings” in section “Features and Specifications”) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. • When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance. washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or when working around the windshield/headlight washer system. • Do not drive with the windshield/ headlight washer reservoir empty: the action of the washer is essential for improving visibility when driving. Engine Oil Level Check - Gasoline Engines To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Maintenance and Care If the warning light illuminates and the related message of low oil level displays, or during scheduled services (see “Scheduled Maintenance Service” in this section) it is necessary to check the engine oil level. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. In both cases the vehicle should be parked on level ground to improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. CAUTION! • Do not top up with oil with different characteristics than the engine one (refer to “Refillings” in section “Features and Specifications”). • Overfilling or underfilling the sump will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. • Do not add any supplemental materials to the engine oil, other than leak detection dyes. Engine oil is an engineered product, and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. • Remove the inspection cover on the right engine bank (3.8 V8 GTS version only). 3.0 V6 Engines 3.8 V8 Engine - GTS Version • Remove the dipstick and clean it with a dry and clean cloth. • Re-insert the dipstick completely and remove: the oil level should maintain between the “MIN” and “MAX” reference ranges (SAFE range). 7 3.8 V8 Engine - GTS Version • If a refilling is necessary: unscrew the filler neck cap. 387 Maintenance and Care 3.8 V8 Engine - GTS Version Engine Oil Level Check - Diesel Engine To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Every 3000 km (1900 mi), or more often in case of heavy-duty use of the car, and during scheduled services (see “Scheduled Maintenance Service” in this section) it is necessary to check the engine oil level. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. In both cases the vehicle should be parked on level ground to improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. CAUTION! 3.0 V6 Engines 7 388 • Adding 1.4 litres/0.30 UK gal (3.8 V8 Engines) or 1 litre/0.22 UK gal (3.0 V6 Engines) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the Safe range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range. • Return the cap and dipstick to their position and wait for a few minutes to allow the oil to reach the sump. • Check the level again. • Do not top up with oil with different characteristics than the engine one (refer to “Refillings” in section “Features and Specifications”). • Overfilling or underfilling the sump will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. • Do not add any supplemental materials to the engine oil, other than leak detection dyes. Engine oil is an engineered product, and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. • Remove the dipstick and clean it with a dry and clean cloth. Diesel • Re-insert the dipstick completely and remove: the oil level should maintain between the “MIN” and “MAX” reference ranges (SAFE range). Diesel Maintenance and Care • If a refilling is necessary: open the inspection door and unscrew the filler neck cap. Fuel Filter Service (Diesel only) Contact the Service Network to perform this service. Engine Air Filters Replacement DPF Filter Replacement (Diesel only) Contact the Service Network to perform this service. A/C Air Filter Replacement Automatic Transmission Oil Check Contact the Service Network for the oil level check. Diesel • Adding 1 litre (0.22 UK gal) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range. • Return the cap and dipstick to their position and wait for a few minutes to allow the oil to reach the sump. • Check the level again. • Close the inspection door. Fluid Level Check for Transmission Cooling System (Gasoline only) The coolant contained in the bottle of this system is the same as the one used for the cooling system of the engine. For the preparation of the mixture of water and antifreeze and for the control of the level, proceed as shown in the “Engine Coolant Level Check” of this chapter. Contact the Service Network to have the air filters replaced. This filter performs mechanic/ electrostatic air filtering, provided that windows and doors are closed. The filter is located under the hood in the external A/C system air inlet, on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. To replace the filter during the scheduled maintenance services or after the vehicle has been heavily used on dusty roads, proceed as follows: • Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips indicated. 7 Engine Oil Filter Replacement The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every oil change. Contact the Service Network to perform this service. Gasoline • Unsnap both ends and lift the filter retaining cover. 389 Maintenance and Care to lift the arms for cleaning or replacing the wiper blades. • Remove the used filter slipping it off from within the air intake. • Close the filter retaining cover and reinstall the access door. CAUTION! Failure to replace the filter may considerably reduce the air conditioning and heating system efficiency. Wiper Maintenance and Blades Replacement 7 390 • Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this). Windshield Wiper Arms Lifting When the windshield wiper arms are in rest position it is not possible to check or replace the blades as they remain under the engine hood. To service the blades it is necessary to move the wiper arms in “Service” position (see chapter “Wipers and Washers” in section “Understanding the Vehicle”). In this way it is possible WARNING! It is dangerous to operate or service the wiper blades with the windshield wipers in an active position (any position different from “OFF”) and with the ignition switch in the RUN position. The rain sensors may suddenly activate the wipers. Always use the “Service” position for any intervention on the windshield wiper blades. Windshield Wiper Maintenance Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on the geographical area’s weather conditions where the car is used and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks on the glass, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace if necessary. Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield/rear window glasses periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Maintenance and Care Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. Spray nozzles If the jet does not work, first check that there is fluid in the tank (see paragraph “Level checks” in this section) then check that the nozzles are not clogged. Windshield Wiper Blades Replacement • Move the wiper arms into “Service” position, (see chapter “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in section “Understanding the Vehicle”) and lift them. • Press the indicated button, slip off the blade support from the arm and replace it. • Return the blade to its original position on the windshield. • Turn the multifunction lever to one of the automatic settings (see chapter “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in section “Understanding the Vehicle”) and move the ignition switch to the RUN position: the wiper arms will return to the resting position. • Turn the blade to the position indicated in the figure. • Hold the arm steady and pull the blade, by holding it from the central support, until it is removed. NOTE: Due to the difficulty of this operation, we recommend that you contact the Service Network for replacement of the blades. Rear Window Blade Replacement • To replace the rear window wiper blade on the liftgate, lift the wiper arm with blade up to the stop position. 7 • Replace the blade. • Insert the pivot, present inside the blade central support, in the forkshaped end of the arm until hearing the click indicating that it is engaged. 391 Maintenance and Care Body Lubrication • Stretch the arm and put the blade back in contact with the liftgate window. Front Fog Lights Adjustment The height position of the fog light beam can be adjusted manually by turning the toothed gear to the base of the fog light assembly. 7 CAUTION! Performing this operation without the necessary equipment and attention may damage the vehicle. It is advisable to contact the Service Network to perform this operation. • To make the adjustment it is necessary to remove the frame of the fog lamp, making force in the points indicated in picture corresponding to the four appendices with the retaining tooth at the end. 392 • Insert the end of a cross-head screwdriver into the bumper hole in the lower part of the fog lamp housing. • Turn the screwdriver handle clockwise to lower the beam (DOWN), counterclockwise to lift it (UP). • Once the adjustment is finished, remount the fog lamp frame, centering it in the seat with the longer upper and lower appendices. Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, sliding parts of power sunroof (if foreseen) and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease. This action is essential to preserve the original operation of these components and to protect them against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing maintenance in the engine compartment, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The coupling pin of the lock on the rear driver door pillar must be lubricated at least twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of high quality lubricant directly on the bolt. Maintenance and Care Maintenance-Free Battery This vehicle is equipped with a sealed type maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or damage the eyes. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean with the face over a battery. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling the battery. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a component of the same type (vented). NOTE: Remote battery terminals for start are located in the engine compartment for jump starting to be used with an auxiliary battery or a battery from another vehicle (see “Auxiliary JumpStart Procedure” chapter in section “In an Emergency”). To Disconnect the Battery The battery is located on the inner right side of the boot compartment. To access the battery it is necessary to lift the ground coverage of the boot compartment (see chapter “Tool Kit” in section “In an Emergency”) and remove the storage box. CAUTION! • Before disconnecting the battery, open the liftgate and lower the windows a few centimetres, to avoid damaging the seal when opening and closing the door. When the battery is connected, the lowering of the window is performed automatically when the door is opened and closed. The liftgate must remain open and the windows lowered until the charged battery is reconnected. • Never disconnect the battery from the electrical system when the engine is running. • To temporarily disconnect the vehicle electrical system from the battery, simply remove the cable end with quick coupling from the negative post (–) of the battery. • If the battery needs to be removed from its compartment, you must first detach the terminal clamp to the negative post (–) and then the other terminal clamp to the positive post (+), after removing the protective cover. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (–) and are identified on the battery case. 7 393 Maintenance and Care • Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. To Reconnect the Battery 7 CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is precisely attached to the positive post (+) and the negative cable is attached to the negative post (–). 394 After the battery has been disconnected and re-connected and before starting the engine it is necessary to proceed as follows: • Unlock and lock the doors using the Key fob RKE Transmitter. • Close manually the liftgate, unlock it with the key fob RKE transmitter and then lock it manually on more time. If the vehicle is equipped with power liftgate, manually perform the complete closure. Then move the liftgate automatically, using the buttons on the outer edge of the left boot compartment, performing a complete cycle of opening and closing. If the limit of maximum power liftgate opening has been set, it is necessary to reset it (see “Open and Close the Liftgate” in section “Before Starting”). • Initialise the climate control system by activating the system and pressing the “AUTO” control as described in chapter "Air Conditioning Controls" in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”. • Turn on the MTC+ and set the date and time (see “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”). • Lift, release and lift again the lever on the central console to initialise the electric parking brake. Following this operation the warning light on the instrument cluster will turn off. • For correct activation of the approach lights on the external mirrors, press at least once the tilt button on the driver's door panel so that the door mode recognizes the mirrors position. • If the car is equipped with power sunshades on rear door windows, carry out the teach-in cycle described on chapter “Power Sunshades on Rear Door Windows” in section “Before Starting”. • Start the engine and perform the end-stop learning of EPS, steering fully to the left and then to the right. The EPS failure warning light and message should disappear on the TFT display. CAUTION! Every time the battery is • reconnected, wait at least 30 seconds with the ignition switch turned to RUN before starting the engine, in order to allow the electronic system Maintenance and Care that manages the motor-driven throttles to run a self-learning cycle. At the same time, you can run the date and time set up procedure for the MTC+. • Every time the battery is reconnected the warning lights and flash for about 10 seconds and then go off. Useful Advice to Extend Battery Life When parking the vehicle, make sure that the doors, hood, liftgate and flaps are properly closed. All interior lights should be off. When the engine is turned off, do not keep the connected devices switched on for a long time (such as radio, hazard warning lights, fan, etc.). CAUTION! If the battery charge remains below 50% for a long period of time, it will be damaged due to sulphation; its performance and starting power will be reduced and it will be more subject to freezing (this can happen even at 10°C/14°F). We recommend you to have the battery charge condition checked, preferably at the beginning of the cold season, to prevent the electrolyte from freezing. This check should be carried out more frequently if the vehicle is used mainly for short trips or if it is equipped with power-absorbing devices that remain permanently on even when the ignition switch is off. This applies above all if these devices have been retrofitted ("Aftermarket" services). If the vehicle is not used for long periods of time, please see “Vehicle Stored for Long Periods” in this section. Battery Recharge WARNING! The process of charging or recharging the battery produces hydrogen, a flammable gas that can explode and cause serious injuries. When charging or recharging the battery, follow the recommended precautions at all times. • Before using a charger device always check that this tool is suitable for the installed battery, with constant voltage (lower than 14.0 V) and low amperage (maximum limit 15 A). • Recharge the battery in a wellventilated environment. • Never charge or recharge a frozen battery: it can explode due to hydrogen trapped inside the ice crystals. • Ensure that any sparks or open flames are kept well away from the battery while it is charging. • Before using a charger to charge or maintain the battery charge status, carefully follow the instructions provided to ensure the charger is connected to the battery safely and correctly. Is possible to recharge the battery without disconnecting the cables of the vehicle electrical system. • To access the battery lift the ground coverage of the boot compartment (see chapter “Tool Kit” section “In an Emergency”) and remove the storage box. • Remove the protection cover and connect the terminal clamp of the charger positive cable (typically in red) to the positive post (+) of the battery. • Connect the terminal clamp of the charger negative cable (typically in black) to the nut located by the negative post (–) on the battery, indicated in the picture. 7 395 Maintenance and Care The vehicle is equipped with a IBS (Intelligent Battery Sensor) sensor able to measure charging and discharging currents and to calculate the state of charge and state of health of the battery. This sensor is located in at the negative post (–) of the battery. For a successful charge/recharge operation, the charging current must flow through the IBS sensor as shown in the picture. 7 396 • Turn the charger on and follow the instructions on its user manual to completely recharge the battery. • When the battery is recharged, turn off the battery charger before disconnecting it from the battery. • Disconnect first the terminal clamp of the charger black cable from the battery and then the terminal clamp of the red cable. • Reassemble the protection cover on the battery positive post and the other parts removed for this operation. Fuse Replacement Used Fuses Characteristics When an electrical device is not functioning, check that the corresponding fuse is in proper working order (intact). A Fuse intact B Fuse blown On the vehicle are mainly used with mini-and maxi-fuses with blade engagement. Besides these there are other types of the fuse provided with holes for fixing to the cable connection terminals. For the replacement of these fuses contact the Service Network. Replace the faulty fuse with a new one featuring the same rating, by using appropriate forceps added in the integrated power module and Maintenance and Care inside the cover of the rear power distribution center. CAUTION! • Never replace a blown fuse with anything other than a new and suitable fuse (same rating). • After replacing a fuse, if the fault recurs, contact the Service Network. Position of Fuses The color identifies the value of the fuses in amperes which is also reported on them. The table shows the match between color and amperage of mini and maxi fuses. The fuses are located in three parts of the vehicle, namely: • inside the integrated power module, on the right hand side of the engine compartment (figures show a gasoline engine); Type Mini Fuse Maxi Fuse Beige - 5 Yellow - 20 Brown - 7,5 Green - 30 Red - 10 Orange - 40 Blue - 15 Red - 50 Yellow - 20 Blue - 60 White - 25 • on the fuse and relay box located in a covered area, under the dashboard left side. Integrated Power Module • To access the module it is necessary to lift the hood (see “Open and Close the Hood” in section “Before Starting”). • To access the fuses remove the module cover unhooking the lateral locks as shown in the picture. To recognize the reference number of the fuses in the table below, see the diagram inside the cover just removed. 7 • inside the rear power distribution center, behind the battery, on the right hand side of the boot compartment; Green - 30 397 Maintenance and Care The table points out the position as featured in the cover, the type and function of the fuses included in the integrated power module. CAUTION! • After replacement, refit the protective cover of the module. • If you need to wash the engine compartment, do not direct the water for too long directly on the module. Ref. Maxi – 50A 3 Maxi – 40A PTC heater 1 relay input (Diesel only) 4 Maxi – 30A Starter motor relay input 5 Maxi – 40A ABS-ESP pump feed 6 Maxi – 30A AWD module Maxi – 40A PTC heater 2 relay input (Diesel only) 7 398 Type 8 Maxi – 40A ABS-ESP valve feed 9 Mini – 25A Urea (AdBlue) system (Diesel only) 10 – 11 Mini – 20A Horn relay input 12 Mini – 10A AC compressor feed relay input 13 – 14 Mini – 7,5A Function Secondary air pump relay input (V8 engines only) 2 7 Type Ref. 15 16 Mini – 5A Mini – 10A Function – – Alarm siren Washer heated nozzles relay input Enable cooling fan relay input and enable cooling oil pump relay input (Gasoline only) Enable cooling fan relay input (Diesel only) Maintenance and Care Ref. Type 18 Maxi – 40A PTC heater 3 relay input (Diesel only) Maxi – 30A Headlamp washer relay input 19 Function Maxi – 30A Wiper motor relay output 21 Maxi – 20A LH low beam relay input 22 Maxi – 20A RH low beam relay input 20 23 Maxi – 40A Maxi – 50A Mini – 7,5A Drive Assist System Module (DASM) 29 Mini – 10A PCM module - Starter solenoid relay coil 30 Mini – 5A ORC- Air bag module 28 Type Function Ref. Type 31 Mini – 5A ABS-ESP module 37 Mini – 15A 32 Mini – 5A AWD module, EPS and AQS Engine secondary load (Gasoline only) Lambda sensor (Gasoline only) 33 Mini – 10A HDLP Headlights AFLS Mini – 15A Mini – 7,5A Mini – 15A Primary load to engine harness LH side (Gasoline only) Urea (AdBlue) pump (Diesel only) Mini – 30A Primary load to engine harness (Diesel only) Mini – 15A Primary load to engine harness RH side (Gasoline only) 34 Fuel heater supply (Diesel only) Glow plug heater unit (Diesel only) 24 Ref. 35 38 39 Mini – 7,5A Mini – 30A PCM module primary load, glow plug control unit (Diesel only) Flow meters, tank lackage, canister, exhaust by-pass valve relay coil and air shutter (Gasoline only) Relay coil, urea (AdBlue) tank harness and heater control unit - Air shutter (Diesel only) PCM module primary load (Gasoline only) 36 Function 48 Mini – 7,5A Lambda Sensors - ICR (Diesel only) 49 Mini – 10A Pedal brake switch - TCM module 7 399 Maintenance and Care Ref. Type 50 Mini – 15A 51 52 53 Mini – 30A Mini – 5A Mini – 10A Function +30 PCM module (Gasoline only) Fuel pump relay input (Gasoline only) Fuel pump supply (Diesel only) The table points out the position as featured in the cover, the type and function of the fuses on the rear area distribution control unit. Starter solenoid signal for PCM and voltage stabilizer AWD module Rear Power Distribution Center 7 400 • To access the center it is necessary to lift the ground coverage of the boot compartment (see chapter “Tool Kit” in section “In an Emergency”) and remove the storage box. • To access the fuses, release the cover latch shown in picture. • Press the release latch and lift the lid from this side. • Push the lid toward the right side to release the indicated latches on the unit. To recognize the reference number of the fuses in the table below, see the diagram inside the cover just removed. Ref. Type Function 2 Maxi – 40A BCM module 3 Maxi – 40A BCM module 4 Maxi – 30A BCM module 5 Maxi – 30A BCM module 6 Maxi – 20A Trailer harness (not for TROFEO version) 7 Maxi – 30A Driver door module 8 Maxi – 30A Passenger door module Maintenance and Care Ref. Type Function Maxi – 40A Start&Stop: voltage stabilizer, dashboard Maxi – 40A Start&Stop: voltage stabilizer, body Maxi – 40A “High Premium” stereo amplifier unit Maxi – 20A “Premium” stereo amplifier unit (1) Maxi – 40A HVAC front blower relay coil 16 Maxi – 40A Rear window defrost relay coil (HVAC module) 17 Maxi – 30A Rear LH door module 18 Maxi – 30A Rear RH door module Maxi – 25A Power liftgate module 9 10 11 15 19 Ref. 20 Type Maxi – 20A Function “Premium” stereo amplifier unit (2) ELDOR coil (V8 - Gasoline only) 21 22 23 24 Maxi – 40A Urea (AdBlue) heater control unit (Diesel only) Mini – 7,5A Rear HVAC module Mini – 10A Fuel door relay and RF Hub module Mini – 10A ITM module, ceiling light unit (front and rear), rain/lights sensor Mini – 25A Sunroof module 26 Mini – 20A Motor sound system (Diesel only) 27 – 25 Ref. Type 31 Mini – 30A LH front seat movement Mini – 15A Trailer module LH side (not for TROFEO version) 33 Mini – 15A Trailer module RH side (not for TROFEO version) 34 Mini – 20A Soft Door Close latch 35 Mini – 20A Rear doors sunshade Mini – 10A Transmission lever, TPMS module, Navtrak, USB/AUX and charger, ASBM control suspension and Hands Free access module 32 36 Function 37 Mini – 25A ASCM module 38 Mini – 30A RH front seat movement 7 – 401 Maintenance and Care 7 402 Ref. Type 41 Maxi – 40A 42 – Function ASCM motor supply – Seat passenger heater module 43 Mini – 20A 44 – – 45 – – 46 Mini – 5A Rear camera 47 Mini – 5A Navtrak 48 Mini – 5A Surround view 49 Mini – 10A Internal temperature sensor, umidity sensor, internal mirror and HALF 50 – 51 Mini – 25A Rear seat and steering wheel heater module 52 Mini – 20A Boot power outlet 53 – 54 Mini – 7,5A 55 – – – Blind Spot module – Ref. Type 56 Mini – 10A Blower front HVAC coil relay Mini – 10A Blower rear HVAC coil relay Mini – 10A Trailer harness (not for TROFEO version) 57 58 Function Ref. Type Function 67 Mini – 10A Sunroof Mini – 20A Power outlet on central console rear side Mini – 25A Rear console power outlet and cigar lighter 68 69 USB charger, transmission lever, ASBM, rear tunnel stack switch 59 Mini – 10A 60 – 61 Mini – 15A Rear window wiper relay 62 Mini – 7,5A Front HVAC module 63 Mini – 20A Blower rear HVAC 64 Mini – 7,5A Rear HVAC module 65 Mini – 10A Intelligent battery sensor 66 Mini – 10A Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) Front HVAC module, Parking Aid Module (PAM), ASCM – 70 Mini – 10A Front HVAC module, Parking Aid Module (PAM), ASCM and ELDOR coil (V8 engines only) Fuse Box under the Dashboard This box is located in an internal area under the dashboard left side. Considering the complexity of this operation, we recommend having the fuses replaced by the Service Network. The table points out the position as featured in the figure, the type and Maintenance and Care function of the fuses in the box under the dashboard. Function Bulb Replacement Mini – 15A Cluster module, clock 3 Mini – 10A DSRC and DTV system (Japan version only) 4 Mini – 5A E-call 5 Mini – 7,5A Security Gateway The signal failure of an external light (turn signal, low beam and high beam, number plate light, reverse light and brake light) is communicated to the instrument cluster that displays on the TFT screen in a graphical form and with a text message which light is faulty (see example in the figure). 6 Mini – 15A Radio 7 Mini – 10A Column software module, CSS Mini – 10A Start & Stop switch, diagnostic outlet Ref. Type 2 8 Lights Cluster The lights of the front clusters are arranged as follows: Ref. 1 Type Mini – 7,5A Function 7 Cluster module, USB charger, CSS, SGW and DSRC (Japan version only) 403 Maintenance and Care Bi-Xenon Version Full-LED Version (optional) Bi-Xenon Version 1 7 404 Full-LED Version 1 Position light guide LED. 1 Low-beam light LED. 2 Stop light LED. 2 Direction indicator LED. 3 Position, DRL and direction indicator light LED. Matrix high-beam light LED. 3 2 Bi-Xenon low-beam/high-beam bulb (25W-No AFS, 35W-With AFS). Position and DRL light LED. 4 Reverse light LED. 3 Direction indicator LED. 4 Side-marker LED. 5 Rear fog light LED. 4 Side-marker light LED. 5 Side reflex-reflector. 6 Side reflex-reflector. 5 Side reflex-reflector. 6 Bending light LED. 6 Front fog light LED. 7 Front fog LED light. The lights of the rear clusters are arranged as follows: CAUTION! It is not possible replace a single LED of the headlight cluster, we recommend that you contact the Service Network for the replacement of the entire cluster. Maintenance and Care WARNING! The Bi-Xenon bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch and the ignition switch off. Because of this, you should not attempt to replace a Bi-Xenon bulb yourself, but take the vehicle to a center of the Service Network for service. Besides the light clusters, a third LED stop light is present on the rear side of the liftgate. Light Clusters Bulbs Replacement Most of the lights of front and rear clusters, those integrated in the exterior mirrors and those of the stop light on the liftgate are LED powered and cannot be replaced individually. Contact the Service Network to locate the correct parts and replace them. Front Light Bulb Replacement Contact the Service Network to replace them. Number Plate Lights Number plate light are LED powered: contact the Service Network to replace them. Passenger Compartment Interior Lights Lamps inside the glove box compartment of the dashboard, lamps under the sun visors and those located next to the passenger handholds for the external rear seats are LED powered and cannot be replaced by the owner. Contact the Service Network to replace them. Boot Compartment Light The lights inside the boot compartment and on the liftgate are LED powered: contact the Service Network to replace them. A/C System Maintenance For best performances, the air conditioning system should be checked and serviced by the Service Network at the beginning of the warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser check of the drive belt tension and a performance test. During the winter, the air conditioning system should be operated at least once a month for about 10 minutes. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some refrigerants are flammable and can explode, causing injuries. Other unapproved refrigerants or 7 405 Maintenance and Care lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. Periodically remove any leaves and insects that may build up and obstruct the inlet of external air in the air conditioning system through the grille present underneath the rear part of the hood. To access the grille, lift the hood as described in “Open and Close the Hood” in section “Before Starting”. 7 406 Wheels Maintenance Tires Maintenance CAUTION! To obtain the best performances and the longest mileage from the tires, take following precautions during the first 500 km (310 mi): • do not drive at the vehicle’s maximum speed; • drive at low speed on curves; • avoid sudden steering; • avoid sudden braking; • avoid sudden acceleration; • do not drive at high speeds for too long. The tires inflation pressure must correspond to the prescribed values (see the chapter “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section “Features and Specifications”) and should be checked only when the tires have cooled down. In fact, the pressure increases as the tire temperature progressively increases. Never reduce the pressure if tires are hot (see “Tires – General Information” chapter in section “Driving”). Insufficient tire inflating pressure can cause tire overheating and possible internal damage, which may even lead to the tire destruction. CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage it. Impacts with curbs, holes, and obstacles in the road, and prolonged trips on rough roads or off-road trails can cause tire damage which may not be visible to the naked eye. Check your tires regularly for any signs of damage (e.g. scratches, cuts, cracks, bulges, etc.). If sharp objects penetrate the tires, they can cause structural damage which is only visible when the tire is removed. In any case, any possible damage must be inspected by an experienced technician, as it may seriously reduce the tire life. Remember that tires deteriorate with time, even if used little or not at all. Cracks in the tire tread and sides, alongside possible bulging, are a sign of deterioration. Maintenance and Care WARNING! • Check the inflating pressure of the • • • • • tires when cold, at least every two weeks and before long trips. Have the old tires inspected by an experienced technician, to make sure they can still be used safely. If the same tire has been on your vehicle for 4 or 5 years, have it inspected anyway by an experienced technician. Never fit tires of uncertain origin. “Directional” tires have an arrow on their side showing the rolling direction. To keep the best performance when replacing a tire, make sure that the rolling direction corresponds to the one shown by the arrow. During the tire life, the rolling direction used for the first fitting shall always be observed, also in case of “nondirectional” tires. Check the depth of the tire tread at regular intervals. The minimum allowed value is 1.6 mm (0.06 in) at that point the wear indicators on the tire will be visible (see “Tires - General Information” in section “Driving”). The thinner is the tread, the greater is the risk of skidding. • Drive carefully on wet roads to decrease the risk of aquaplaning. Winter Tires These tires are specially designed for driving on snow and ice and are fitted to replace the ones supplied with the vehicle. The winter features of these tires are significantly reduced when tread depth is less than 4 mm (0.16 in). In this case, they should be replaced. The specific features of the winter tires lead to lower performance under normal environmental conditions or on long highway trips, compared to the standard tires. Therefore, their use should be limited to the situations and performance for which they have been type-approved. The Service Network can provide all necessary information about fitting winter tires on the vehicle. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner that may involve and damage the brake calipers. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel rim protective finish. 7 Wheel Rims Maintenance All wheel rims should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water. To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use a nonabrasive, nonacidic cleaner. 407 Maintenance and Care Bodywork Maintenance and Care Protection from Atmospheric Agents 7 408 The main causes of corrosion are: • atmospheric pollution; • salinity and humidity in the atmosphere (marine areas or a damp climate); • seasonal environmental conditions; • salt scattered on the roadbed to melt ice and snow. The abrasive action of wind-carried atmospheric dust and sand, mud and stones should not be underestimated. On this vehicle, Maserati has adopted the best technological solutions to protect the bodywork from corrosion. The main measures are: • paint products and systems that give the vehicle particular resistance to corrosion and abrasion; • use of galvanized (or pre-treated) metal sheets which are highly resistant to corrosion in the most exposed parts; • spraying of the underbody, engine compartment, insides of wheel housings, and other structures with wax products having high protective power; • spraying of plastic materials, with a protective function, in the most exposed points: underneath the doors, inside part of the mud guards, edges, etc.; • use of ventilated box sections, coated with protective wax products, to avoid condensation and trapped water which could encourage the formation of internal rust. Useful Advice to Keep the Bodywork in Good Condition Paint The paintwork does not only have an aesthetic function but also protects the underlying metal sheets. In the event of abrasions or deep scratches, we recommend to have the necessary touch-ups made immediately, to avoid any rust formation. Touch-ups do not feature particular difficulties, even on metallic and matte finishes. For all paint touch-ups, use only original products indicated on the plate applied on the lower left side of the hood. Normal paint maintenance consists in washing, the frequency of which depends on the conditions of use and of the environment. For example, if driving the vehicle in areas where there is high atmospheric pollution or the roads are spread with anti-freeze salt, it is advisable to wash the vehicle more frequently. ENVIRONMENTAL! Detergents pollute water. Therefore the vehicle should be washed in areas equipped for the collection and purification of the fluids used for washing. NOTE: The use of alcohol-based products for cleaning the metal surfaces in the engine compartment and/or the boot may deteriorate the protective paint. Maintenance and Care It is recommended to use water-based products and neutral surfactants. Car Wash For correct washing: • wet the bodywork with a low pressure water jet; • pass a sponge with a light detergent solution over the bodywork, frequently rinsing the sponge; • rinse well with water and dry with an air jet or chamois leather. When drying, take particular care with the parts that are less visible, such as the door, liftgate and lid bays, headlight edges, in which water can be trapped more easily. You are recommended not to take the vehicle immediately into an enclosed environment, but leave it in the open air so as to allow the water to evaporate. Do not wash the vehicle after it has been left in the sun or when the hood is hot: the paint gloss could be affected. External plastic parts must be cleaned with the same procedure followed for the normal washing of the bodywork. Avoid, as far as possible, parking the vehicle under trees; the resinous substances that very often drop from the trees give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility of originating corrosive processes. It is important that the drain holes in the lower sides of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk bottom be kept clear and open. CAUTION! • Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and thoroughly, since their acidity is particularly corrosive. • To provide better protection for the paint, polish the vehicle at intervals with a suitable product leaving a protective film on the paint. • If the vehicle is washed using highpressure water jets or cleaners, it is important that the nozzle of the jet be kept at a distance of at least 40 cm (16 in) from the bodywork to avoid damaging it. Washing Vehicles with Matte Finish Paint • It is recommended to hand wash vehicles with matte-finish paint. • Before washing, first remove from the bodywork dust and other particles that could damage the paint. Preferably use an air pressure jet. • When grease spots and fingerprints are present, it is recommended using a special cleaner for matte finish paint. Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To avoid damaging the paint surface, do not use too much pressure. • Wet the bodywork with plenty of water and clean it using a soft sponge and a neutral wax-free shampoo, starting from the top and working down. Dry the bodywork using an air pressure jet. • Rinse all the parts of the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of water. Keep the sponge or the washing mitt in use always wet and clean. • At last, using a different sponge or washing mitt, clean the wheels, the door sill plates and the other parts that are less visible. CAUTION! • It is recommended not to wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. The little drops of water, acting as small focal lenses, could damage the paint. • Always and only wash the vehicle by hand. Avoid using abrasive sponges or mitts that could damage the matte finish paint. 7 409 Maintenance and Care • Never polish and never use polishing agents on the vehicle with matte finish paint or on parts of it. • Hard water (over 30 °f) could leave limestone residues. 7 Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window on the liftgate equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. When cleaning is performed, keep all metal objects at a safe distance from the window. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch-resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. 410 To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. Condensation and Fogging on the Light Clusters With cold or humid climate, after a driving rain or after cleaning the car, the surface of the front and rear light clusters could fog and/or form condensate drops on the inside. This is a natural phenomenon due to the temperature and humidity difference between the lens internal and external surface, which nevertheless does not indicate a fault and does not compromise the regular operation of the lights. The fogging/condensate disappear when switching on the lights, starting from the centre of the diffuser and going gradually to the edges. Mouldings and Aluminium Trims • For cleaning mouldings and aluminium trims, avoid the use of acidic or alkanline cleaning agents that can destroy the protecting surface treatment. • After washing aluminium trim with warm water, apply the cleaning agent with a clean tissue or a soft sponge on the surface. Do not use any other equipment such as brushes, steel wool, abrasives or any other equipment for cleaning. • After cleaning, please rinse the aluminium trim with a lot of clear water. • While cleaning in the car wash please make sure that the mouldings and aluminium trims only gets contact with soft brushes or textiles. Engine Compartment At the end of each winter season, carefully wash the engine compartment, remembering to avoid directing the jet of water for too long on the electric parts. To perform this operation, you must contact the Service Network . “Car Wash” Mode (if foreseen) To move the vehicle in tunnel washers, or generally move with engine off, you can use the following mode. • Vehicle must be on level ground, stationary or moving up to 1 km/h (0.6 mph). Maintenance and Care • If enabled, disable the automatic engagement function of electric parking brake (see “Parking Brake” in section “Driving”). • Shift the gearshift lever to N (Neutral). • The brake pedal can be pressed or not pressed. • Turn the engine off by pressing the START/STOP button for 5 seconds. Through these steps, the driver's door must be closed. This condition will persists for about 25 minutes, the shift lever will switch to P (Park) once time has expired. In case of low-battery voltage the shift lever can be placed in P (Park) before this time has expired. NOTE: It is also appropriate to disable the “Passive Entry” function from the MTC+ system so that the “Pre-Short Drop” function will not be activated. This can prevent water from entering in the passenger compartment during car washing. WARNING! • Performed this procedure the vehicle will stay in N (Neutral), rather without any brake. To avoid accidental movement, always check that the movement of the vehicle take place only on a flat surface. • DO NOT USE this mode to haul the vehicle because after a period of time the shift lever will be placed automatically in P (Park) position. If this occurs when the vehicle is moving the transmission can be damaged. To haul the vehicle use the emergency manual park release (see “Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position” in section “In an Emergency”). upper edge of the glass window and the door outline on the bodywork, while the car is being washed, it is advisable to disable the “Passive Entry” from the MTC+ System, for further information refer to chapter “MTC+ Settings” in section “Dashboard Instruments and controls”. When deactivating the “Passive Entry”, also the “Pre-Short Drop” function will be disabled. Pre-Short Drop Function When in a car washing, if the driver keeps the RKE Transmitter in his/her pocket, or in any place outside the vehicle within 1 m (3.3 ft) distance, the front windows will perform a pre-short drop. This is a shorter drop compared to the normal short drop performed by the “Passive Entry” function when you grab the door handle to enter the vehicle. In order to prevent water from entering the vehicle between the 7 411 Maintenance and Care Interior Maintenance and Care 7 Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth. Do not use harsh cleaners. The leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils stains can be removed easily with a soft cloth and appropriate products. Avoid soaking the leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. Check at regular intervals that there is no water trapped under the mats (due to drips off shoes, umbrellas etc.) which may cause the metal parts to oxidize. CAUTION! Do not use alcohol, petrol or solvents to clean the instrument cluster's transparent dome, the MTC+ display, the analogue clock and the leather upholstery. We recommended the use of “Car Care” products approved by Maserati for the maintenance and care of the interior. Leather Upholstery Treatment Have the leather upholstery only treated, as provided in the Scheduled Service Plan, by the Service Network which has the required specific products. Parts in Premium Quality Wood Remove any dirt with a buckskin leather or damp cloth. NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with any information about the Maserati approved “Car Care” products, available in the “Genuine Accessories” range. MTC+ Touch Screen • Do NOT attach any object to the touch screen, doing so can result in damage to the touch screen. 412 • Do not touch the screen with any hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.) which could scratch the touch screen surface. • Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry micro fiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the touch screen. If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol, or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer’s precautions and directions. Maintenance and Care Vehicle Stored for Long Periods If the vehicle is going to be stored for long periods of time, follow the below precautions: • Wash and dry the vehicle thoroughly. • Store the vehicle on a level surface in a covered, dry and, if possible, ventilated area. • Select P (Park) and turn off the engine. • Disconnect the battery (refer “Maintenance-Free Battery” in this section) or connect a battery charger (refer to paragraph “Maintaining Battery Charge” of chapter “Battery Statement” in this section). • Check the battery charge status. During parking, this check must be carried out every three weeks. Recharge the battery if the open circuit voltage is lower than 12.2 V. • Check that the parking brake is NOT engaged. • Do not empty the engine cooling system. • Clean and protect the painted parts applying protective wax. • Clean and protect polished metal parts with special products available on the market. • Talc the wiper blades and raise them from the windshield and rear windows. • Cover the vehicle with a long cloth in breathable fabric (available from the Maserati Service Network). Do not use thick plastic sheets, which do not allow the humidity on the vehicle surface to evaporate. • Inflate the tires up to a pressure which must be 1 bar (14.5 psi) higher than the normally prescribed one, and check it at regular intervals. NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with any information about the available “Indoor and Outdoor Car Covers”, available in the “Genuine Accessories” range. WARNING! The tire pressure must be brought back to the prescribed value before reusing the vehicle (see “Tire Inflation Pressure” in section “Features and Specifications”). Restarting the Vehicle Before restarting the vehicle after a long period of inactivity, we recommend that you carry out the following operations. • Check the tires for pressure and for any damages, cuts or cracks. If this is the case, have them replaced. • Do not dry-rub the external surface of the vehicle: use a damp cloth. • Visually inspect if there are any fluid leaks (oil, brake and clutch fluid, engine coolant etc.). • Have the engine oil and filter replaced. • Have the presence of water in fuel filter checked (Diesel only). • Check the fluid levels in the brake system, as well as the engine coolant level. • Check the air filters and have them replaced if necessary. • Reconnect the battery after checking the charge status (refer to “Maintenance-Free Battery” in this section) and perform the initialising procedure if applicable. • With the gearshift in N (Neutral), let the engine idle for several minutes. In this way, the pneumatic suspension system will be able to reach the operating pressure and lift the car 7 413 Maintenance and Care to the Entry/Exit height (for further details, see “Drive Modes” in section “Driving”). Battery Statement WARNING! The engine idle must be performed outdoors. Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide which is strongly toxic and potentially lethal. To avoid problems with ignition and/or the electrical system in general when you are driving, the battery charge status is constantly maintained and guaranteed by the vehicle's recharge circuit; the main component of which is the alternator. This circuit is only able to supply voltage to the battery when the vehicle is travelling. The warning light on the instrument cluster, will indicate any malfunctions in the recharge circuit or an insufficient battery charge status (example in figure). Battery Statement Status of Charge 7 The vehicle contains advanced electronic systems, such as, for example, the alarm system and various electronic control modules, which 414 consume power even when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the vehicle is not being used. Therefore, it is fundamental that the battery is properly charged to ensure that the engine starts properly and that all the electrical/electronic systems in the vehicle work efficiently. Maintaining Battery Charge If you perform short daily trips (approximately 16 km/10 miles), which correspond to an annual total of 6000 km/4000 miles, or when the vehicle is not going to be used for one week or more, Maserati recommends connecting the vehicle to a battery charger, to save you the trouble of having to recharge the battery. The battery charger will keep the battery charged properly and at the correct voltage levels required by the systems and devices in the vehicle. Before using the battery charger, carefully follow the instructions provided. If you do not use a battery charger to prevent the battery from going flat when you are not going to use the vehicle for long periods of time, you need to check and recharge the battery at least once every three weeks. Make this check if you perform Maintenance and Care short daily trips (approximately 16 km/10 mi) which correspond to an annual total of 6000 km/4000 miles. Please note that allowing the battery to go flat repeatedly can cause premature wear on the internal cells and greatly reduce their life, leading to problems with the ignition system and other electrical/electronic systems. The Service Network is available to advise you on how to recharge your battery correctly and give you useful information on battery care and maintenance. • never charge or recharge a battery that has frozen: it can explode due to hydrogen trapped inside the ice crystals; • ensure that any sparks or open flames are nowhere near the battery while it is charging; • before using a charger to charge or maintain the battery charge status, carefully follow the instructions provided to ensure the charger is connected to the battery safely and correctly. NOTE: The Maserati Service Network can provide you with any information about the Maserati approved “Battery Charger and Conditioner”, available in the “Genuine Accessories” range. WARNING! The process of charging or recharging the battery produces hydrogen, a dangerous gas that can explode and cause serious injuries. When charging or recharging the battery, follow the recommended precautions at all times: • always charge or recharge the battery in a well-ventilated environment; 7 415 Maintenance and Care 416 8 - Features and Specifications Refillings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Fuel Consumption and Exhaust Emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Tire Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 417 Features and Specifications Refillings NOTE: Maserati reserves the right to change or revise specifications without prior notification. CAUTION! To guarantee vehicle’s integrity and maintain performance level Maserati recommends to use Maserati genuine products. Refillings and Recommended Products – Gasoline Engines Parts to be refilled Fuel tank 418 Product specifications 80 litres/17.5 UK gal (including 16 litres/3.5 UK gal of reserve) Premium unleaded fuel with no less than 95 RON/85 MON (91 CLC or AKI). Engine (3.8 V8): oil capacity including filter cartridge 8,3 litres/1.82 UK gal (max) (MIN – MAX difference: 1,4 litres/0.31 UK gal) Synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 5W-40 that meet API SL/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4 specifications. Recommended oil: SHELL Helix Ultra Maserati 5W-40 (1). Engine (3.0 V6): oil capacity including filter cartridge 8,3 litres/1.82 UK gal (max) (MIN – MAX difference: 1 litre/0.22 UK gal) Synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 10W-60 that meet API SN/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4 specifications. Recommended oil: SHELL Helix Ultra Maserati 10W-60 (2). 5 litres/1.1 UK gal Mix of water and detergent fluid, in the proportions indicated on the product package. If the temperature is below –20°C (–4°F), use pure detergent fluid. Detergent fluid: Mix of CUNA NC 956-II surfactants and alcohols. Recommended fluid: WUERTH Windshield Washer Fluid with antifreeze or AREXONS DP1. Windshield and headlight washer fluid tank 8 Quantity Windshield washer fluid tank 3,5 litres/0.77 UK gal Features and Specifications Parts to be refilled Quantity Engine cooling circuit (3.8 V8) 14,3 litres/3.14 UK gal (for dual-zone air conditioning system) 15,7 litres/3.45 UK gal (for four-zone air conditioning system) Engine cooling circuit (3.0 V6) 10,4 litres/2.28 UK gal (for dual-zone air conditioning system) 11,5 litres/2.52 UK gal (for four-zone air conditioning system) Product specifications Mixture of water and coolant, proportionally 50/50%. Coolant: protective, antifreeze action and ethylene glycol-based with organic inhibitors compatible with regulations: • ASTM D 3306, ASTM D 2570 • ASTM D 4340, ASTM D 2809 • SAE J 1034 • CUNA NC 956/16. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Paraflu UP or SHELL Long Life OAT. Automatic transmission cooling circuit 2,5 litres/0.55 UK gal (3) Automatic transmission 7,6 litres/1.67 UK gal First equipment oil: SHELL ATF L- 12108 or ZF Lifeguard 8. (3) Differential 0,9 litres/0.19 UK gal Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 – FE Hypoid Gear Lubricant. (3) Front differential 0,45 litres/0.10 UK gal First equipment oil: SHELL TF 0951B. (3) Transfer case 0,62 litres/0.14 UK gal First equipment oil: SHELL TF 0870. Braking system 0,88 litres/0.19 UK gal +/-4% Synthetic fluid: FMVSS 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925 Class 4, ENSAYOS INTA-UNE 26-109-88, SAE J1703, SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Tutela TOP 4/S. 8 CAUTION! For each oil refilling and/or replacement, please contact the Service Network. 419 Features and Specifications Parts to be refilled Air conditioning system Quantity dual-zone: 620 g +/-20 g 1.367 lb +/-0.044 lb (r1234yf); 700 g +/-20 g 1.543 lb +/-0.044 lb (r134a); four-zone: 760 g +/-20 g 1.675 lb +/-0.044 lb (r1234yf); 850 g +/-20 g 1.873 lb +/-0.044 lb (r134a). Product specifications Coolant: r1234yf (for the European market); r134a (for the other markets). (1) In countries where it is not available, recommended oil “SHELL Helix Ultra 5W-40”. (2) In countries where it is not available, recommended oil “SHELL Helix Ultra 10W-60”. (3) No change and/or topping up expected in scheduled maintenance. Refillings and Recommended Products – Diesel Engine Parts to be refilled Fuel tank 8 420 Quantity 80 litres/17.5 UK gal (including 16 litres/3.5 UK gal of reserve) Tank of reducing agent AdBlue® 19,6 litres/4.30 UK gal Engine: oil capacity including filter cartridge 8,8 litres/1.93 UK gal (max) (MIN – MAX difference: 1 litre/0.22 UK gal) Product specifications Premium diesel fuel that meets the requirements of EN590. Biodiesel blends that meet EN590 may also be used. Solution of pure urea (32.5%) in de-mineralised water (67.5%) meeting DIN 70070 and ISO 22241 specifications, obtained by synthesis. Recommended fluid: AdBlue®. Synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 5W-40 that meet API SL/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4 specifications. Recommended oil: SHELL Helix Ultra Maserati 5W-40 (1). Features and Specifications Parts to be refilled Windshield and headlight washer fluid tank Windshield washer fluid tank Engine cooling circuit Quantity 5 litres/1.1 UK gal 3,5 litres/0.77 UK gal 13 litres/2.86 UK gal (for dual-zone air conditioning system) 13,8 litres/3.03 UK gal (for four-zone air conditioning system) Product specifications Mix of water and detergent fluid, in the proportions indicated on the product package. If the temperature is below –20°C (–4°F), use pure detergent fluid. Detergent fluid: Mix of CUNA NC 956-II surfactants and alcohols. Recommended fluid: WUERTH Windshield Washer Fluid with antifreeze or AREXONS DP1. Mixture of water and coolant, proportionally 50/50%. Coolant: protective, antifreeze action and ethylene glycol-based with organic inhibitors compatible with regulations: • ASTM D 3306, ASTM D 2570 • ASTM D 4340, ASTM D 2809 • SAE J 1034 • CUNA NC 956/16. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Paraflu UP or SHELL Long Life OAT. (2) Automatic transmission 7,7 litres/1.69 UK gal First equipment oil: SHELL ATF L- 12108 or ZF Lifeguard 8. (2) Differential 0,9 litres/0.19 UK gal Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 – FE Hypoid Gear Lubricant. (2) Front differential 0,45 litres/0.10 UK gal First equipment oil: SHELL TF 0951B. (2) Transfer case 0,62 litres/0.14 UK gal First equipment oil: SHELL TF 0870. 8 421 Features and Specifications Parts to be refilled Braking system Quantity 0,88 litres/0.19 UK gal +/-4% Product specifications Synthetic fluid: FMVSS 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925 Class 4, ENSAYOS INTA-UNE 26-109-88, SAE J1703, SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01. Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Tutela TOP 4/S. CAUTION! For each oil refilling and/or replacement, please contact the Service Network. Air conditioning system dual-zone: 620 g +/-20 g 1.367 lb +/-0.044 lb (r1234yf); 700 g +/-20 g 1.543 lb +/-0.044 lb (r134a). four-zone: 760 g +/-20 g 1.675 lb +/-0.044 lb (r1234yf); 850 g +/-20 g 1.873 lb +/-0.044 lb (r134a). Coolant: r1234yf (for the European market); r134a (for the other markets). (1) In countries where it is not available, recommended oil “SHELL Helix Ultra 5W-40”. (2) No change and/or topping up expected in scheduled maintenance. 8 422 Features and Specifications Fuel Consumption and Exhaust Emission The fuel consumption and CO2 exhaust emission values specified by the manufacturer were established based on homologation tests prescribed by the applicable Directives of the destination market ( EU: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain and Sweden - EFTA: Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland). The type of route, traffic and weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the vehicle, equipment/accessories in the vehicle, use of the air conditioning system, vehicle load, presence of roof-racks, other items or situations which may negatively affect the vehicle aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to consumption values differing from the indicated ones. After covering the first 3000 km (1900 mi) it will be possible to obtain a more consistent fuel consumption. NOTE: To read the fuel consumption and CO2 exhaust emission values specific for this car, please refer to the data given in the Certificate Of Conformity and to the related documentation provided at the time of delivery of the vehicle. Fuel Consumption (for other Countries) NOTE: The technical data, values and specifications in this Owner’s Manual are provided as guidance only. The vehicle specific data can deviate from the information provided, for example, as a result of optional or special equipment ordered with the vehicle, vehicle loads, and country specific measurement methods. The test procedures adopted for fuel consumption measuring are the following. • Urban cycle : this test begins with a cold start, followed by a simulation of an urban route. • Extra-urban cycle: this test involves frequent accelerations in all gears, simulating use of the vehicle on routes outside urban areas; the speed varies between 0 and 120 km/h (75 mph). • Combined cycle: this is calculated by considering a route consisting of about 37% urban cycle and 63% extra-urban cycle. 8 423 Features and Specifications CAUTION! The type of route, traffic and weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the vehicle, equipment/accessories in the vehicle, use of the air conditioning system, vehicle load and other items or situations which may negatively affect the vehicle aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to consumption ratios differing from the indicated ones. Fuel Consumption Data - Gasoline Models The fuel consumption values shown (litres per 100 km) were established based on homologation tests prescribed by following European Directives: Directives EC 715/2007 and EC 692/2008. Levante TROFEO Levante GTS Levante S Levante Urban cycle 18.8 l/100 km 18.8 l/100 km 15 l/100 km 14.8 l/100 km Extra urban cycle 10.5 l/100 km 10.5 l/100 km 8.5 l/100 km 8.3 l/100 km Combined cycle 13.5 l/100 km 13.5 l/100 km 10.9 l/100 km 10.7 l/100 km Fuel Consumption Data - Diesel Model The fuel consumption values shown (litres per 100 km) were established based on homologation tests prescribed by following European Directives: Directives EC 715/2007 and EC 692/2008. Urban cycle 8.2 l/100 km Extra urban cycle 6.6 l/100 km Combined cycle 7.2 l/100 km Exhaust Emissions (for other Countries) 8 NOTE: The technical data, values and specifications in this Owner’s Manual are provided as guidance only. The vehicle specific data can deviate from the information provided, for example, as a result of optional or special equipment ordered with the vehicle, vehicle loads, and country specific measurement methods. Exhaust Emission Data - Gasoline Models The CO2 exhaust emission ratings shown (grams per km) were established based on homologation tests prescribed by following European Directives: Directives EC 715/2007 and EC 692/2008. 424 Features and Specifications Levante TROFEO Levante GTS Levante S Levante Urban cycle 435 g/km 435 g/km 348 g/km 343 g/km Extra urban cycle 243 g/km 243 g/km 199 g/km 194 g/km Combined cycle 313 g/km 313 g/km 253 g/km 249 g/km Exhaust Emission Data - Diesel Model The CO2 exhaust emission ratings shown (grams per km) were established based on homologation tests prescribed by following European Directives: Directives EC 715/2007 and EC 692/2008. Urban cycle 216 g/km Extra urban cycle 174 g/km Combined cycle 189 g/km 8 425 Features and Specifications Technical Data NOTE: The technical data, values and specifications in this Owner’s Manual are provided as guidance only. The vehicle specific data can vary from the information provided, for example, as a result of optional or special equipment ordered with the vehicle, vehicle loads, and country specific measurement methods. Engine Data - Gasoline Models Data Levante TROFEO Levante GTS Levante S Levante Cylinder number and position 8 - 90° V 8 - 90° V 6 - 60° V 6 - 60° V Number of valves per cylinder 4 4 4 4 Bore x stroke 86.5 x 80.8 mm 86.5 x 80.8 mm 86.5 x 84.5 mm 86.5 x 84.5 mm Total displacement 3799 cu.cm 3799 cu.cm 2979 cu.cm 2979 cu.cm Compression ratio 9.44 : 1 9.44 : 1 9.7 : 1 9.7 : 1 (*) 441 kW – 591 CV 6250 rpm (*) 404 kW – 550 CV 6000 rpm 427 kW – 580 CV 6750 rpm 390 kW – 530 CV 6000 rpm 316 kW – 430 CV 5750 rpm 257 kW – 350 CV 5750 rpm 730 Nm – 74 kgm 2250 – 5500 rpm 730 Nm – 74 kgm 2250 – 5500 rpm 580 Nm – 59 kgm 2000 – 4750 rpm 500 Nm – 51 kgm 1750 – 4750 rpm Maximum power output (EC) - corresponding RPM Peak and overboost torque (EC) - corresponding RPM Values obtained with 98 RON unleaded gasoline. (*) These values refer to cars equipped with exhaust system without GPF. Engine Properties 8 426 Timing The timing system uses two overhead camshafts with timing variator. Timing system control Timing chain. Supply Turbocharged with turbocompressor and related intercooler for each bank. Features and Specifications Injection – Ignition High-pressure (200 bar) direct fuel injection system. Static ignition with digital electronic control system included and controlled by a single microprocessor ECU. Engine Data - Diesel Model Data Levante Diesel Cylinder number and position 6 - 60° V Number of valves per cylinder 4 Bore x stroke 83 x 92 mm Total displacement 2987 cu.cm Compression ratio 16.5 : 1 Maximum power output (EC) - corresponding RPM 202 kW – 275 CV (**) 4000 rpm 600 Nm – 61.2 kgm 2000 – 2600 rpm Peak torque (EC) - corresponding RPM (**) 184 kW – 250 CV for Italian market only. Engine Properties Timing The timing system uses two overhead camshafts. Timing system control Timing chain. Supply Turbocharged with turbocompressor and related intercooler for each bank. Injection – Ignition Common-Rail direct-injection with reduced dwell time-injectors. It features sequential multiple injections with pilot and post injection to deliver highly responsive performance as well as clean raw emissions, assisted by a sophisticated exhaust gas recirculation system. The max injection pressure of the common rail system is 2000 bar. 8 Brakes Self-ventilating disc brakes on the four wheels. The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) acts on the rear wheels. 427 Features and Specifications Braking System Performance Dual Cast (optional only on Levante GTS and TROFEO) Dual Cast Base Front disc diameter Drilled disc: 380 mm (15 in) Drilled disc: 380 mm (15 in) 345 mm (13.6 in) Rear disc diameter Drilled disc: 345 mm (13.6 in) Drilled disc: 330 mm (13 in) 330 mm (13 in) Transmission Automatic transmission with 8 gears, torque converter, lock-up clutch and anti-slip function. Sequential and traditional control type. AWD type transmission with central torque transfer case electronically controlled. Traction system equipped with rear self-locking differential. Suspension Front suspensions with double wishbone independent wheels. Multilink system rear suspensions on independent wheels. The air suspension system features air spring units at both axles and a closed air supply unit. Steering Electric Power Steering (EPS) system, axis parallel type. Steering diameter = 12.55 m (13.72 yd). No. of steering wheel turns = 1.41 (to the left and right). Wheels 8 428 NOTE: • Maserati recommends Maserati Genuine Tires marked with “MGT” logo specifically designed for its models. • In order to maintain high performance and safety level, Maserati recommends to use tires equivalent to the original size. • In case of staggered tires, front and rear rims cannot be swapped. • Only 19” rear tires can be equipped with special chain with front anchorage. Snow chains cannot be used (all tires). Features and Specifications WARNING! • The maximum speed reachable with the tires is indicated by the tire manufacturer. Always comply with the regulations in force in the Country you are driving in. • Never exceed the maximum speed indicated for the tires: failure to respect the max. speed may damage these tires. Danger: risk of accident! • When using all season tires at speeds above 120 km/h (75 mph), refer to chapter "Tire Inflation Pressure" in this section, or to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds. • When using all season tires at speed higher than 120 km/h (75 mph), increase the tire inflation pressure (refer to “FLC/High Speed" data in "Tire Inflation Pressure" chapter of this section). Do not exceed speed higher than the tire speed rating. Standard Wheel Dimension - Gasoline Models Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version) Levante (GranLusso) Levante (GranSport) Light alloy rims 18” x 8J (front and rear) 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) 20” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 255/60 R18 108W 265/50 R19 110Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y - Rear tires 255/60 R18 108W 265/50 R19 110Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y Spare rim 18” x 6JB - Spare tire 195/75 18 106P Allowed tires size Levante S (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante S (GranSport) Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10,5J (rear) 20” x 9J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/50 R19 110Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y - Rear tires 295/45 R19 113Y Spare rim - Spare tire 295/40 ZR20 106Y 8 18” x 6JB 195/75 18 106P 429 Features and Specifications Allowed tires size Levante TROFEO Levante GTS Light alloy rims 21” x 9J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) 20” x 9J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y - Rear tires 295/35 ZR21 103Y 295/40 ZR20 106Y Spare rim 18” x 6JB - Spare tire 195/75 18 106P Optional Wheel Dimension - Gasoline Models 8 430 Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version) Levante (GranLusso) Levante (GranSport) Light alloy rims 18” x 8J (front and rear) 18” x 8J (front and rear) - Front tires (Standard tire) 255/60 R18 108W - Rear tires (Standard tire) 255/60 R18 108W - Front tires - All season 255/60 R18 108W M+S 255/60 R18 108W M+S - Rear tires - All season 255/60 R18 108W M+S 255/60 R18 108W M+S Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/50 R19 110Y (Standard tire) 265/50 R19 110Y - Rear tires 265/50 R19 110Y (Standard tire) 265/50 R19 110Y - Front tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S - Rear tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S Light alloy rims 19" x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10,5J (rear) 19" x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10,5J (rear) 19" x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/50 R19 110Y 265/50 R19 110Y 265/50 R19 110Y - Rear tires 295/45 R19 113Y 295/45 R19 113Y 295/45 R19 113Y - Front tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S Features and Specifications Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version) Levante (GranLusso) Levante (GranSport) - Rear tires - All season 295/45 R19 113W M+S 295/45 R19 113W M+S 295/45 R19 113W M+S Light alloy rims 20” x 9J (front and rear) 20” x 9J (front and rear) 20” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/45 ZR20 104Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y (Standard tire) - Rear tires 265/45 ZR20 104Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y (Standard tire) - Front tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S - Rear tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S Light alloy rims 20” x 9J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) 20” x 9J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) 20” x 9J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/45 ZR20 104Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y - Rear tires 295/40 ZR20 106Y 295/40 ZR20 106Y 295/40 ZR20 106Y - Front tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S - Rear tires - All season 295/40 R20 106W M+S 295/40 R20 106W M+S 295/40 R20 106W M+S Light alloy rims 21” x 9J (front and rear) 21” x 9J (front and rear) 21” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y - Rear tires 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y - Front tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S - Rear tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S Light alloy rims 21” x 9J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) 21” x 9J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) 21” x 9J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y - Rear tires 295/35 ZR21 103Y 295/35 ZR21 103Y 295/35 ZR21 103Y - Front tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S - Rear tires - All season 295/35 R21 107W M+S 295/35 R21 107W M+S 295/35 R21 107W M+S 8 431 Features and Specifications 8 432 Allowed tires size Levante S (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante S (GranSport) Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10,5J (rear) 19” x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires (Standard tire) 265/50 R19 110Y - Rear tires (Standard tire) 295/45 R19 113Y - Front tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S - Rear tires - All season 295/45 R19 113W M+S 295/45 R19 113W M+S Light alloy rims 20” x 9J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) 20” x 9J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/45 ZR20 104Y (Standard tire) - Rear tires 295/40 ZR20 106Y (Standard tire) - Front tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S - Rear tires - All season 295/40 R20 106W M+S 295/40 R20 106W M+S Light alloy rims 21” x 9J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) 21” x 9J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y - Rear tires 295/35 ZR21 103Y 295/35 ZR21 103Y - Front tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S - Rear tires - All season 295/35 R21 107W M+S 295/35 R21 107W M+S Allowed tires size Levante TROFEO Levante GTS Light alloy rims 20" x 9J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires (Standard tire) - Rear tires (Standard tire) Features and Specifications Allowed tires size Levante TROFEO Levante GTS Light alloy rims 21” x 9J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) 21” x 9J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires (Standard tire) 265/40 ZR21 101Y - Rear tires (Standard tire) 295/35 ZR21 103Y Light alloy rims 22” x 9J (front) 22” x 10,5J (rear) 22” x 9J (front) 22” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/35 ZR22 102Y 265/35 ZR22 102Y - Rear tires 295/30 ZR22 103Y 295/30 ZR22 103Y Standard Wheel Dimension - Gasoline Models (Australia market) Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante (GranSport) Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) 20” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/50 R19 110Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y - Rear tires 265/50 R19 110Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y Spare rim 18” x 6JB - Spare tire 195/75 18 106P Allowed tires size Levante S (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante S (GranSport) Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10,5J (rear) 20” x 9J (front) 20” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/50 R19 110Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y - Rear tires 295/45 R19 113Y 295/40 ZR20 106Y Spare rim - Spare tire 8 18” x 6JB 195/75 18 106P 433 Features and Specifications Optional Wheel Dimension - Gasoline Models (Australia market) 8 434 Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante (GranSport) Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) - Front tires (Standard tire) 265/50 R19 110Y - Rear tires (Standard tire) 265/50 R19 110Y - Front tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S - Rear tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S Light alloy rims 20” x 9J (front and rear) 20” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/45 ZR20 104Y (Standard tire) - Rear tires 265/45 ZR20 104Y (Standard tire) - Front tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S - Rear tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S Light alloy rims 21” x 9J (front and rear) 21” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y - Rear tires 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y - Front tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S - Rear tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S Allowed tires size Levante S (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante S (GranSport) Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10,5J (rear) 19” x 8,5J (front) 19” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires (Standard tire) 265/50 R19 110Y - Rear tires (Standard tire) 295/45 R19 113Y - Front tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S - Rear tires - All season 295/45 R19 113W M+S 295/45 R19 113W M+S Features and Specifications Allowed tires size Levante S (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante S (GranSport) Light alloy rims 20” x 9J (front) 20” x 10,5J (Rear) 20” x 9J (front) 20” x 10,5J (Rear) - Front tires 265/45 ZR20 104Y (Standard tire) - Rear tires 295/40 ZR20 106Y (Standard tire) - Front tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S - Rear tires - All season 295/40 R20 106W M+S 295/40 R20 106W M+S Light alloy rims 21” x 9J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) 21” x 9J (front) 21” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y - Rear tires 295/35 ZR21 103Y 295/35 ZR21 103Y - Front tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S - Rear tires - All season 295/35 R21 107W M+S 295/35 R21 107W M+S Standard Wheel Dimension - Diesel Model Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version) Levante (GranLusso) Levante (GranSport) Light alloy rims 18” x 8J (front and rear) 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) 20” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 255/60 R18 108W 265/50 R19 110Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y - Rear tires 255/60 R18 108W 265/50 R19 110Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y Spare rim 18” x 6JB - Spare tire 195/75 18 106P 8 Optional Wheel Dimension - Diesel Model Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version) Levante (GranLusso) Light alloy rims 18” x 8J (front and rear) 18” x 8J (front and rear) - Front tires (Standard tire) 255/60 R18 108W Levante (GranSport) 435 Features and Specifications 8 436 Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version) Levante (GranLusso) Levante (GranSport) - Rear tires (Standard tire) 255/60 R18 108W - Front tires - All season 255/60 R18 108W M+S 255/60 R18 108W M+S - Rear tires - All season 255/60 R18 108W M+S 255/60 R18 108W M+S Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/50 R19 110Y (Standard tire) 265/50 R19 110Y - Rear tires 265/50 R19 110Y (Standard tire) 265/50 R19 110Y - Front tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S - Rear tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S Light alloy rims (*) 19” x 8,5J (front) (*) 19” x 10,5J (rear) (*) 19” x 8,5J (front) (*) 19” x 10,5J (rear) (*) 19” x 8,5J (front) (*) 19” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/50 R19 110Y 265/50 R19 110Y 265/50 R19 110Y - Rear tires 295/45 R19 113Y 295/45 R19 113Y 295/45 R19 113Y - Front tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S - Rear tires - All season 295/45 R19 113W M+S 295/45 R19 113W M+S 295/45 R19 113W M+S Light alloy rims 20” x 9J (front and rear) 20” x 9J (front and rear) 20” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/45 ZR20 104Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y (Standard tire) - Rear tires 265/45 ZR20 104Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y (Standard tire) - Front tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S - Rear tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S Light alloy rims (*) 20” x 9J (front) (*) 20” x 10,5J (rear) (*) 20” x 9J (front) (*) 20” x 10,5J (rear) (*) 20” x 9J (front) (*) 20” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/45 ZR20 104Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y - Rear tires 295/40 ZR20 106Y 295/40 ZR20 106Y 295/40 ZR20 106Y Features and Specifications Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version) Levante (GranLusso) Levante (GranSport) - Front tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S - Rear tires - All season 295/40 R20 106W M+S 295/40 R20 106W M+S 295/40 R20 106W M+S Light alloy rims 21” x 9J (front and rear) 21” x 9J (front and rear) 21” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y - Rear tires 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y - Front tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S - Rear tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S Light alloy rims (*) 21” x 9J (front) (*) 21” x 10,5J (rear) (*) 21” x 9J (front) (*) 21” x 10,5J (rear) (*) 21” x 9J (front) (*) 21” x 10,5J (rear) - Front tires 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y - Rear tires 295/35 ZR21 103Y 295/35 ZR21 103Y 295/35 ZR21 103Y - Front tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S - Rear tires - All season 295/35 R21 107W M+S 295/35 R21 107W M+S 295/35 R21 107W M+S (*) Not available for the India market. Standard Wheel Dimension - Diesel Model (Australia market) Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante (GranSport) Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) 20” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/50 R19 110Y 265/45 ZR20 104Y - Rear tires 265/50 R19 110Y Spare rim - Spare tire 265/45 ZR20 104Y 18” x 6JB 8 195/75 18 106P 437 Features and Specifications Optional Wheel Dimension - Diesel Model (Australia market) Allowed tires size Levante (Basic version - GranLusso) Levante (GranSport) Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) 19” x 8,5J (front and rear) - Front tires (Standard tire) 265/50 R19 110Y - Rear tires (Standard tire) 265/50 R19 110Y - Front tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S - Rear tires - All season 265/50 R19 110W M+S 265/50 R19 110W M+S Light alloy rims 20” x 9J (front and rear) 20” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/45 ZR20 104Y (Standard tire) - Rear tires 265/45 ZR20 104Y (Standard tire) - Front tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S - Rear tires - All season 265/45 R20 104W M+S 265/45 R20 104W M+S Light alloy rims 21” x 9J (front and rear) 21” x 9J (front and rear) - Front tires 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y - Rear tires 265/40 ZR21 101Y 265/40 ZR21 101Y - Front tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S - Rear tires - All season 265/40 R21 105W M+S 265/40 R21 105W M+S Performance Performance Data - Gasoline Models 8 NOTE: The specifications described can change without prior notification. Maximum speed 438 Levante TROFEO Levante GTS Levante S Levante 304 km/h (189 mph) 292 km/h (181 mph) 264 km/h (164 mph) 251 km/h (156 mph) Features and Specifications Accelerations from 0 to 100 km/h Levante TROFEO Levante GTS Levante S Levante 3.9 seconds 4.0 seconds 5.2 seconds 6.0 seconds Values obtained with 98 RON unleaded gasoline. Performance Data - Diesel Model NOTE: The specifications described can change without prior notification. Maximum speed 230 km/h (143 mph) (*) 225 km/h (140 mph) Accelerations from 0 to 100 km/h 6.9 seconds (*) 7.3 seconds (*) For 184 kW – 250 CV version only. 8 439 Features and Specifications Weights Weight Data - Gasoline Models NOTE: The specifications described can change without prior notification. Levante TROFEO - GTS Levante S - Levante 2170 kg / 4784 lb (*) 2109 kg / 4650 lb (*) 2825 kg / 6228 lb (1330 kg / 2932 lb front axle - 1495 kg / 3296 lb rear axle) 2780 kg / 6129 lb (1285 kg / 2833 lb front axle - 1495 kg / 3296 lb rear axle) Unladen vehicle weight (with tanks filled, tools and accessories) Approved Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Maximum load on the roof rails 80 kg / 176 lb (*) Base configuration without optionals. Weight Data - Diesel Models NOTE: The specifications described can change without prior notification. Unladen vehicle weight (with tanks filled, tools and accessories) Approved Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 2205 kg / 4861 lb (*) 2900 kg / 6393 lb (1350 kg / 2976 lb front axle – 1550 kg / 3417 lb rear axle) Maximum load on the roof rails (*) Base configuration without optionals. 8 Trailer Towing Weights NOTE: • On the TROFEO version you can not install the trailer tongue. • The specifications described can change without prior notification. 440 80 kg (176 lb) Features and Specifications • Follow trailer manufacturer recommendations, never exceed trailer tow weights provided. • On vehicles of Australia market the trailer towing weights are also indicated inside the driver’s door on the rear lower corner. Towable loads: trailer with brakes 2700 kg (5952 lb) (GTS: 1500 kg / 3306 lb) Towable loads: trailer without brakes 750 kg (1653 lb) Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes) 108 kg (238 lb) 8 441 Features and Specifications Dimensions Wheel base Overall length Overall width without mirrors Overall width with mirrors 1981 mm (77.9 in) 2158 mm (85 in) 1637 mm (64.4 in) Rear track 1699 mm (66.8 in) Front overhang 967 mm (38 in) - GTS/TROFEO version: 975 mm (38.3 in) Rear overhang 1034 mm (40.7 in) - GTS/TROFEO version: 1041 mm (40.9 in) Overall height (*) 1696 mm (66.7 in) - GTS/TROFEO version: 1698 mm (66.8 in) 205 mm (8 in) Boot compartment volume 422 l (93 UK gal) Cargo area length 1040 mm (41 in) Cargo area length with rear seatbacks folded down Cargo area width (*) In “Normal” ride height and with standard rims and tires. 442 5005 mm (197 in) - GTS/TROFEO version: 5020 mm (197.6 in) Front track Ground clearance (*) 8 3004 mm (118.2 in) 2027-1803 mm (79.8-71 in) 1186-1002 mm (46.7-39.5 in) Features and Specifications Tire Inflation Pressure NOTE: • For more information about the pressure check methods, see “Tires – General Information” in section “Driving”. • On vehicles of some markets the tire inflation pressure values are also indicated on the driver's side rear door pillar. WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire overheating and failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and potholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. • Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 120 km/h (75 mph). Cold tire inflation pressure value under the following loading conditions listed in the table below: • PLC (Partial Loading Condition): considering 2 passengers + luggage. The recommended tire inflation pressure for all motorization models are: - front tire is 230 kPa (2,3 bar - 33 psi); - rear tire is 250 kPa (2,5 bar - 36 psi). • CC (Comfort Condition): not more than 130 km/h (80 mph). The recommended tire inflation pressure for all motorization models are: - front tire is 200 kPa (2,0 bar - 29 psi); - rear tire is 220 kPa (2,2 bar - 32 psi). • FLC (Full Loading Condition): considering 4 or 5 passengers + luggage. See table below: 8 443 Features and Specifications Wheel size: All V6 Engines/Versions FLC /High Speed Summer Tires All Season Tires 20" (All-round Fitment) 18" and 19" Front Wheel Rear Wheel 20" (Staggered Tires) 21" (Staggered Tires) 250 kPa (2,5 bar - 36 psi) 270 kPa (2,7 bar - 39 psi) 270 kPa (2,7 bar - 39 psi) 310 kPa (3,1 bar - 45 psi) Front Wheel 250 kPa (2,5 bar - 36 psi) Rear Wheel 290 kPa (2,9 bar - 42 psi) 270 kPa (2,7 bar - 39 psi) 310 kPa (3,1 bar - 45 psi) 290 kPa (2,9 bar - 42 psi) Wheel size: V8 Engine GTS Version FLC /High Speed 21" (All-round Fitment) 290 kPa (2,9 bar - 42 psi) 340 kPa (3,4 bar - 49 psi) 320 kPa (3,2 bar - 46 psi) Wheel size: V8 Engine TROFEO Version 20" 21" 22" 21" 22" Front Wheel 250 kPa (2,5 bar - 36 psi) 270 kPa (2,7 bar - 39 psi) 320 kPa (3,2 bar - 46 psi) 320 kPa (3,2 bar - 46 psi) 320 kPa (3,2 bar - 46 psi) Rear Wheel 270 kPa (2,7 bar - 39 psi) 310 kPa (3,1 bar - 45 psi) 340 kPa (3,4 bar - 49 psi) 340 kPa (3,4 bar - 49 psi) 340 kPa (3,4 bar - 49 psi) Summer Tires • For the compact spare wheel, please consider a tire inflation pressure of 350 kPa (3,5 bar - 51 psi). Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph). 8 444 Index Index Abbreviations .............. Active Blind Spot Assist - ABSA . . ABSA Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radar Device - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCP - Rear Cross Path Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Range of Use . . . . . . . . System Availability . . . . . . . . . System in Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . System Limitation . . . . . . . . . System Temporarily Unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC . . ACC Controls and Activation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC Operation Before and During Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activation/Deactivation . . . . . ADAS Equipments . . . . . . . . . Changing Speed Setting . . . . . Conditions for Disabling and Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Warnings and Maintenance of ACC and FCW Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displayed Information . . . . . . Driver Override . . . . . . . . . . . Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7 306 307 309 308 306 306 308 307 308 282 284 289 282 285 282 286 287 289 283 286 288 Precautions while Driving with ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radar Device - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resuming Speed . . . . . . . . . . Setting the ACC Gap . . . . . . . Setting the Speed . . . . . . . . . Speed Range of Use . . . . . . . . Temporary Deactivation . . . . . Adding Reducing Agent AdBlue® (Diesel only) How To Top Up AdBlue® Level Yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important Warnings if You Top Up AdBlue® Level Yourself . . . Specifications of Reducing Agent AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reducing Agent AdBlue®(Diesel only) . . . . . . . Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . Air bag Air bag Deployment Result . . . . Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . A/C Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual Zone Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-zone Climate Controls . . Four-Zone Climate Controls . . Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning Distribution . . . Adjustable Air Vents . . . . . . . 291 292 287 287 286 285 287 335 335 334 334 103 61 211 221 217 216 212 218 220 147 149 Fixed Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Controls on Central Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Controls. Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Premium System . . . . . . Premium System . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Start&Stop System . . . Automatic Restarting of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Occupant Safety Function . . . . Start&Stop Deactivated . . . . . Start&Stop Function Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start&Stop Not Active . . . . . . Start&Stop System Failure . . . . Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . Automatic Transmission Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transmission Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . Transmission Malfunction and Overheating Conditions . . . . . 149 405 211 190 190 190 191 191 192 191 228 230 230 229 230 229 232 232 233 236 235 240 9 445 Index Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure . . Battery Remote Posts Position Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Remote Posts Position Gasoline Engines . . . . . . . . . . Jump-Start Procedure - Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump-Start Procedure Gasoline Engines . . . . . . . . . . AWD, All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . 364 241 Battery Statement . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Battery Statement Status of Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintaining Battery Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blind Spot Assist - BSA . . . . . . . . BSA and RCP Setting . . . . . . . BSA System Operation . . . . . . Radar Device - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCP - Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . Bodywork Maintenance and Care Pre-Short Drop Function . . . . . Protection from Atmospheric Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Useful Advice to Keep the Bodywork in Good Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 446 362 305 303 408 411 Brake and Stability Control System . . . . . . 269, 271, 273 Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) and Electronic Brake-force Distribution (EBD) . . . . . . . . . 270 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 272 Roll-Over Mitigation (ROM) . . 272 Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Trailer Sway Mitigation (TSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Brake Pads and Brake Discs New Brake Pads and/or Brake Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Boot Compartment Light . . . . 405 Light Clusters Bulbs Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Lights Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Number Plate Lights . . . . . . . . 405 Passenger Compartment Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 408 Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 135 136 136 . 137 . 134 363 363 365 414 414 301 304 301 408 Accessories Compartment . . . Boot Compartment Cover . . . Cargo Area Extension . . . . . . Installing the Cargo Net for Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading with Rear Seatbacks Folded Down . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage Fasteners and Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Ski and Snowboard Bag Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . 64 Group 0 and 0+ Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Group 1 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Group 2 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Group 3 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Installing an Isofix Universal Child Restraint System . . . . . . . 69 Installing Child Restraint Systems using the Vehicle Seat Belt equipped with ALR . . . . . . . . . 68 Isofix Child Restraint System Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Maserati Recommended Child Restraint Systems for this Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Some Tips on getting the most out of your Child Restraint . . . . 66 Suitability of Passenger Seats for Isofix Child Restraint System Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Suitability of Passenger Seats for Universal Child Restraint System Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Index Console Power Outlet Inside the Central Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Consulting the manual . . . . . . . . . . 6 Cup Holders for Rear Passengers AUX, USB and SD Memory Card Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Dashboard Compartment ... Privacy Lock Features . . . . . Doors Automatic Locking Doors . . Doors Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . . . . . Doors Manual Lock . . . . . . Power Doors Locking/Unlocking . . . . . . . Soft Door Close System . . . . Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Launch Control" Mode (TROFEO version only) . . . . Controls Preview . . . . . . . . Setting Ride Height . . . . . . Setting the Drive Mode . . . Driver Memory Seat . . . . . . . . Easy Entry/Exit Seats . . . . . . Memory Position Recall . . . Memory Profiles Setting . . . Pairing Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Seats Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 208 208 . . . 30 . . . 29 . . . 30 . . . 29 . . . 30 . . . 31 . . 242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 242 255 243 96 98 97 97 . . . 97 Driving Conditions . . . . . . . Before the Trip . . . . . . . Driving at Night . . . . . . . Driving in Fog . . . . . . . . Driving in the Mountains Driving in the Rain . . . . . Driving on Snow or Ice . . Driving through Flooded Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safe Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 331 331 332 333 332 333 .... .... 333 331 Electronic Cruise Control ...... Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Speed Setting . . . . . Displayed Information . . . . . . Driver Override . . . . . . . . . . . Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Desired Speed . . . . . . Speed Range of Use . . . . . . . . Temporary Deactivation . . . . . Using Electronic Cruise Control on Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Release of the Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 279 280 281 280 281 281 280 280 281 Forward Collision Warning - FCW 292 Changing FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . FCW Operation . . . . . . . . . . . FCW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limited Operation and Service Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 360 354 295 293 294 296 Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radar Device - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Range of Use . . . . . . . . Freeing the Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . Front Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . Front Power/Manual Seats . . . . Front Ventilated Seats . . . . . . . Front to Back Roof Rails . . . . . . . Fuel Consumption and Exhaust Emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Emissions . . . . . . . . . Fuel Consumption . . . . . . . . . Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements of Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements of Gasoline . . . . Fuse Replacement Fuse Box under the Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated Power Module . . . Position of Fuses . . . . . . . . . . Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used Fuses Characteristics . . . . Fuses Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . Hazard Warning Flashers 293 296 294 361 91 94 91 92 95 140 423 424 423 325 326 325 402 397 397 400 396 396 . . . . . . 352 9 447 Index Highway Assist – HAS . . . . . . . . . Hands Detection on Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAS Disengage . . . . . . . . . . . HAS Monitoring on Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAS Operation . . . . . . . . . . . Radar Device - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Range of Use . . . . . . . . System Cancellation . . . . . . . . System Limitations . . . . . . . . . System Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Start Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System with Devices Provided with Rolling Codes . . . . . . . . . System with Devices Without Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Entry/Exit 9 448 309 312 313 311 310 314 310 313 313 312 143 144 146 146 144 145 146 146 . . . . . . . . . 22 Use of Light Switch for Vehicle Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Vehicle Lighting with Open/Closed Doors . . . . . . . . . 23 In case of a Punctured Tire . . . . . Using the Compact Spare Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Tire Repair Kit . . . . . . . In the Event of an Accident . . . . Emergency Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . First-Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In case of Injured Persons . . . . Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . Customising the Main Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Menu Bar on MTC+ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Controls and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use the MTC+ Display as Projection Device . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Display: Example to modify the “Speed Warning” status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Display: Main and Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Display: Main Menu & Submenu Content Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Display: Menus and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Display: Messages on Main Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Display: Warning/Indicator Lights of Set Modes/Functions . . . . . . . . . . 355 356 355 353 354 354 353 182 185 184 183 186 152 166 158 159 157 159 171 Warning and Indicator Light on Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning and Indicator Lights on Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . Central Console Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dashboard Components . . . . . . Front Dome Console Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Doors Components . . . . . Rear Doors Components . . . . . . Interior Maintenance and Care . . Leather Upholstery Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MTC+ Touch Screen . . . . . . . . Parts in Premium Quality Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interiors Features . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Power Outlets . . . . . . Handholds and Cloth Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iPad Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . iPod® Connection . . . . . . . . . . Mesh Pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smoking Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isofix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing an Isofix Universal Child Restraint System. . . . . . . . Isofix Universal Child Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 153 88 89 88 89 90 90 412 412 412 412 126 127 126 131 132 129 131 130 130 68 69 68 Index Vehicle Isofix Positions Chart on Passenger Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Keyless Ignition Device . . . . . . . 16 Shift Ignition Device to OFF Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Lane Keeping Assist - LKA .. Customised Settings . . . . . Function Description and Operating Mode . . . . . . . Radar Device - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Range of Use . . . . . System Availability . . . . . . System in Fault . . . . . . . . System Limitations . . . . . . Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Full-LED” Headlight with AFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Headlights . . . Automatic Headlights Levelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic High Beam . . . Bi-Xenon Headlight . . . . . Cargo Lights . . . . . . . . . . Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dome Lights . . . . . . . . . . Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . Hazard Warning Lights . . . ... ... 296 297 ... 298 . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 297 298 300 299 107 ... ... 112 109 . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 113 110 121 . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 120 116 121 . . . . . . Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . Headlight with AFS . . . . . . . . Headlights On with Wipers . . . High Beam with “Glare Free” Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated External Rear View Mirror Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . SmartBeam™ System . . . . . . . Maintenance Air bag System Maintenance . . Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . A/C Air Filter Replacement . . . Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . Engine Air Filters Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Fog Lights Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Service Components - Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Service Components - Gasoline Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiper Maintenance and Blades Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . Battery Recharge . . . . . . . . . . To Disconnect the Battery . . . . 109 111 109 115 122 119 107 117 110 61 377 389 392 389 392 383 382 379 390 393 395 393 To Reconnect the Battery . . . Useful Advice to Extend Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . MTC+ “Controls” Screen . . . . . . Features Common to All Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . Features Specific for Vehicle without ADAS . . . . . . . . . . . Features Specific for Vehicles with ADAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MTC+ Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Personal Data . . . . . . . Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doors & Locks . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Off Options . . . . . . . Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phone/Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . Radio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore Settings . . . . . . . . . . Safety & Driving Assistant . . . Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . 394 . . 395 193 . 193 . 194 . . . 194 196 204 . . . 203 207 199 . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 198 202 203 201 205 206 207 200 204 199 199 Normal Starting of the Engine . . 226 228 227 “Panic Stop” Strategy . . . . . . . Engine Start Failure . . . . . . . . 9 449 Index Engine Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . Occupants Restraint Systems 228 . . . . 47 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (SBR) . . . . . . . 52 Passengers Seat Belts . . . . . . . . 50 Seat Belts and Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Seat Belts Pretensioners . . . . . . 52 Three-Point Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Three-Point Seat Belts . . . . . . . 48 Using Seat Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Off-road Drive . . . . . . . . . . 260, 262 After Driving Off-road . . . . . . 263 Driving in Mud and Sand . . . . 262 Driving in Snow and Wet Grass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Driving Through Water . . . . . 261 Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . 262 Warnings and Tips for Off-road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Open and Close the Hood . . . . . . . 46 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Open and Close the Liftgate . . . . . 41 Liftgate Emergency Release . . . 46 Power Liftgate/Hands free . . . . 42 9 450 Park Assist ................. Cleaning the Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling and Disabling Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation with a Trailer . . . . . . Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist Volume . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist Warning Messages Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service the Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Away Inhibit strategy . . Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deactivating Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPB Operation with Overheated Brakes . . . . . . . . . Failure Indication . . . . . . . . . . Manual Engagement/ Disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . Passive Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Door Lock from Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preventing Inadvertent Locking of key fob RKE Transmitter Inside the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 79 78 80 75 79 79 76 78 267 268 264 265 266 266 264 32 34 33 35 Release the Liftgate and Enter the Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Unlock Door from the Driver Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Unlock Door from the Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Phone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Siri Smart Personal Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . 223 Power Sunroof with Sunshade Closing and Opening the Power Sunroof with RKE Transmitter and Ignition Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . 143 Inizialization Procedure . . . . . 142 Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . 142 Slide Opening Sunroof . . . . . . 142 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . 143 Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Venting Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . 142 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Power Sunroof with Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Power Sunshades on Rear Door Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . 36 Index Auto-Up Feature with AntiPinch Protection . . . . . . . . . Open and Close the Windows and Sunroof with RKE Transmitter and Ignition Off . Rear Window and Sunshade Lockout Button . . . . . . . . . . Reset Auto-Up/Down . . . . . . Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . Rear Parking Camera . . 36 . . 37 . . 37 . . 36 . . 37 . . . . . . . . . . 80 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Rear Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Rear Head Restraints . . . . . . . . 99 Rear Seat Folding Seatback . . . . 98 Rear Side Heated Seats . . . . . . 100 Rear-View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 104 External Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Internal Rear-View Mirror . . . . 106 Refillings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Refillings and Recommended Products – Diesel Engine . . . . . 420 Refillings and Recommended Products – Gasoline Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Fuel Filler Neck Access . . . . . . 327 Refill the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Refill the Tank (Diesel Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Remote Start System . . . . . . . . . . Auto-On Comfort with Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Remote Start Abort Message on Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to use Remote Start . . . . . Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To enter Remote Start Mode . . To exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . To exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle . . . Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restarting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . Safety Tips ............... Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transporting Passengers . . . . Vehicle Safety Checks . . . . . . Scheduled Maintenance Service Interval Running Coupons . . Scheduled Maintenance (Service) Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 28 27 27 29 28 28 28 25 25 27 413 84 84 84 84 370 370 370 Scheduled Service Plan . . . . . . . . 371 Exhaust Gas After-treatment System Strategies (Diesel only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Heavy-Duty Vehicle Use . . . . . 376 Main Operations/Service Coupons - Diesel Engine . . . . . 374 Main Operations/Service Coupons - Gasoline Engines . . 372 On Board Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . 376 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Sentry Key® Immobilizer System . . 18 Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter - Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Replacement Key fobs . . . . . . . 19 Service and Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Spare Parts Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Genuine Accessories . . . . . . . . . . 9 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 101 Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . 102 Manual Adjustment . . . . . . . . 101 Power Adjustment . . . . . . . . . 101 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Advanced Front Air bag Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Air bag Deployment Sensors and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Air bag System Components . . . 54 9 451 Index Passenger’s Air bag Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . Supplemental Air bags . . . . Transport of persons with disability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surround View Camera System System components . . . . . . Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Danger Symbols . . . . . . . . . Symbols of Prohibitions and Compulsory Measures . . . . Warning Symbols . . . . . . . . Technical Data 9 452 . . . 62 . . . 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 81 81 . 9 . 9 .... 9 . . . 10 ............. Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Data - Diesel Model . . Engine Data - Gasoline Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Premium System . . . . . . . . . . Radio Frequency Transmitter Regulatory Information . . . . . TPMS Deactivation . . . . . . . . . 426 427 442 427 426 438 428 428 428 440 428 443 321 322 325 324 Tires - General Information . . . . . Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . Pneumatic Suspension Mode for Wheel Change . . . . . . . . . Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Checkup . . . . . . Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires Durability . . . . . . . . . . . Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing a Disabled Vehicle . . . . . Manual Release of Transmission with Low Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use the Tow Hook Included in the Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Towing Conditions . . . Traffic Sign Assist – TSA . . . . . . . Customised Settings . . . . . . . . Signs Monitoring on Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . System Limitations . . . . . . . . . Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arranging Load on Trailer . . . Field of Vision of External Rear View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the Trailer Tongue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Adjustment . . . . Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 320 320 317 319 316 317 318 317 317 350 366 366 367 367 314 314 315 315 337 338 338 342 338 345 338 Trailer Tongue Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer Tongue Weight . . . . . . Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position . . . . . . . . . . . . Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 337 361 . 74 Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob . 24 Unlatch the Liftgate . . . . . . . . . 25 Unlock the Doors, Fuel Filler Door and Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . 25 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Use of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Breaking-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Gasoline Particulate Filter (GPF) (for versions/markets where provided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 On-Board Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Regenerate the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) . . . . . . 278 While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Using the Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Brake Overheating . . . . . . . . . 276 Brake Pads and Brake Discs . . . 276 Vehicle Identification Data .. Warning and Identification Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Identification Number Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . Arming the System . . . . . . . Rearming the System . . . . . . . . 12 ... ... ... ... ... 12 12 19 20 20 Index To disarm the System . . . . . . . . 21 Vehicle Stored for Long Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Warnings when Driving ...... Wheels Maintenance . . . . . . . . . Tires Maintenance . . . . . . . . . Wheel Rims Maintenance . . . . Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . Headlights On with Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rain Sensing Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Washer and Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . Wipers Blades Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 406 406 407 122 124 123 125 125 123 124 9 453 Because of the evolutions of the MASERATI products, which are continually developed and perfected, MASERATI S.p.A. reserves the right to make modifications to this manual as well as to the technical contents, functions and equipment of the vehicles delivered. Therefore, the user is not entitled to any claims based on the contents (texts, data, illustrations, explanations and regulations) in this manual, which are based on the data known at the time of going to print. Publication no. 910042711 - 1st Edition - 05/2019 This document may not be reproduced, printed or translated, even partially, without the written consent of MASERATI S.p.A. *1750873* *1750873*